Owner Guide

No.
B-E 07 467
Page 1 from 9
Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Type:
G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
Special:
--
Drawing No.:
G-3839-00
Ident No.:
10019878
Hartmann & Knig

S t ro m zuf h ru n gs A G
Leitungstrommeln - Schlauch - Seil - Sondertrommeln - Schleifringkrper
Postfach 1260
Siemensstrae 6
76677 Graben-Neudorf
www.hukag.com
E - Mail: info@ hukag.com
Telefon: 07255 / 7120-0

Telefax: 07255 / 5038

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
No.:
B-E 07 467
Page 2 from 9
List of Contents
1.0
Assembly of the Drum.......................................................................................................3
2.0
Drum Body Dimensions ....................................................................................................3
3.0
Observance at Spiral Type Drum Body ............................................................................3
4.0
Connection of the Main Power Cable ...............................................................................4
5.0
Connection of the Payout Cable.......................................................................................4
6.0
Checks before Commissioning ........................................................................................4
7.0
Maintenance.......................................................................................................................5
a.)
Wear Part............................................................................................................................5
b.) Hydraulic Motor .................................................................................................................5

c.)
Bevel Gearbox....................................................................................................................5
8.0
Liability for Faults..............................................................................................................6
9.0
Enclosure ...........................................................................................................................6
10.0
Spare Parts List .................................................................................................................6
11.0
Spare Parts Drawing..........................................................................................................9
Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf
Date: 25.02.2004
Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
B-E 07 467
Page 3 from 9
ATTENTION: Technical operations should only be carried out by qualified technical personnel!
1.0
Assembly of the Drum

The cable reeling drum is constructed for heavy duty. Its construction consists of the following main parts which is apparent from the attached spare parts drawing SK-5237-00-2.
The drum body (1) is fixed to the gearbox (16) on the hallow shaft (15) with the drum
flange (2). Safety device for the drum flange to the hallow shaft (3) and (4). On the opposite side of the drum body (1) the slip ring body (30) and brush holder unit (33) is installed.
The driving of the drum body (1) is a hydraulic motor (19) with a hydraulic air multiple disc
brake spring brake (17) which is controlled through a motor controller. The function of the
control device is to adjust the tension of the cable reeling drum. Through that control device, it is guaranteed that the cable is treated gentle. The heating (28) prevent the accumulation of the condensation water inside the slip ring housing (heating must run in continuous operation). The installed limit switch (58) is for stop positions.
2.0
Drum Body Dimensions

Diameter: 1470 x 2600 x 33 mm width.
3.0
Observance at Spiral Type Drum Body

Before presenting the cable the drum body on accuracy to size is related to drum body
width (pipe diameter + approx. 5%) and plan parallelism to examine possibly align.
Note that there is enough seal between the round plate and
the bottom of the terminal box. Optionally this must be accomplished by the customer side locally. Control the sealing
in regular intervals and renew it every 3-5 years.
You receive this necessary sealant H&K-Sikaflex 221 over
our spare part sales.
Date: 18.12.2006
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
B-E 07 467
Page 4 from 9
Note! Please considered the operating manual and handling instructions of the cable manufacture!!!
4.0
Connection of the Main Power Cable

Remove the slip ring cover (63), (62) and (61) connect your fixed cable to the terminal
block (42) through the gland (29) at the slip ring housing (25). The terminal block (42) is already connected to the brushes. Then the cores of the cable goes through the hallow shaft
(13) of the gear box (16) and have to be connected at both sides.
Note: The 1st, slip ring () nearest the axle is always earth .
5.0
Connection of the Payout Cable

Go with the cable through the gland (7) at the housing (6) to the terminal strip (10) and
connect it to the terminal strip. Fix the cable with the strain relief clamps at the drum body
(1). Coil on the payout cable adding 2 safety windings for strain-relief on the drum body.
6.0
Checks before Commissioning

We recommend the following check.
a.)
b.)
c.)
d.)
check cable glands for proper sealing

check slip ring unit for dampness, no moisture must be present
check brush holders for proper contacts to the slip rings a rotation must be smooth
grease slip rings lightly with contact grease.
Date: 18.12.2006
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
7.0
B-E 07 467
Page 5 from 9
Maintenance
a.) Wear Part
The brush holders/collector and slip rings/plane slip rings are subject to a natural wear and
are depending upon need to be replaced. The brush bearing surfaces are to be cleaned
and the mobility of the pendulum brush holders are to examine (with wire brush holding the
pressure * is to the slip rings to examine), if necessarily should take place a cleaning or an
exchange (during 2/3 wear of the brush coals). After cleaning of the slip rings these should
be injected with contact spray. You receive the for this necessary special spray over our
spare part sales. It is to be made certain that the slip rings are always clean and no brush
coal dust at the slip rings set (flash over). After running in (after commissioning for the first
time after 3 months) of the brush coals the brush coal dust in the slip ring area is to be removed. You have to made weekly maintenance in the running-in period (approx. 4-8
weeks) after commissioning. Thats important to ensure correct function further on. Afterwards in regular intervals (every 6 months and / or depending upon turnings of the slip
rings) repeat this procedure. If you fall into no pattern, please you request a maintenance
plan from us (with description of your data e.g. turnings, layer duration, travel speed). The
inserted grooved ball bearings are by the factory plentifully provided with camp fat, so that
a greasing is necessary only in larger time intervals. It is to be made certain by the customer that the steel flange is closely screwed on and the cable entry is well after IP54
(IP65) sealed.
Pressure* = when easy one-sided taking from 3-4 mm off should set itself the hook again
well on the slip ring course. If this effected can take place re-bent and/or must an exchange.
The electrical connection must be done according to VDE 0100 - 0113 resp. IEC-Nr.: 2041:1992 or CENELEC.
According the EC recommendation 89/382/EEC, we point out that rotating parts have to be
secured against danger of accident.
b.) Hydraulic Motor

Sizes:
Series:
Nominal Pressure:
Peak Pressure:
12
6
400 bar
450 bar
See maintenance instruction B+E 00 051.
c.) Bevel Gearbox

Type:
Ratio:
Model:
Type of oil:
Oil quantity:
size 5
i= 85.98
H-032-A
PAO 220
124.4 liter
See maintenance instruction B+E 00 060.
Date: 18.12.2006
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
8.0
B-E 07 467
Page 6 from 9
Liability for Faults

If any alterations or repairs to the cable reeling drum are done by anyone else within the
time of warranty, we do not take any further liability for faults.
Notice
According the EC recommendation 89/392/EEC, we point out that rotating parts have to be
secured against danger of accident.
9.0
Enclosure
General security advices for motor driven cable reeling drums
Screws / tightening torque
Maintenances instruction for hydraulic motor
Maintenances instruction for hydraulic air multiple disc brake
B+E 00 049
B+E 00 069
B+E 00 060
B+E 00 06
10.0 Spare Parts List

Item Drawing-/Article no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
G-3232-20a-00-1-4
G-3232-21a-00-3-2
X5053-0003
X5115-0002
X5200-0043
G-3839-30-00-3-5
X6027-1004
X06-05-015-0-00-4-3
X06-07-024-0-00-3-5
X6501-0015
X6501-0016
X6503-0002
X6502-0001
X6505-0001
SK-4789-02-00-4
X6505-0001
X6501-0002
X6502-0001
X5009-0147
X5750-5006-A
G-3839-32-00-3-1
X5498-0002
G-3839-02-00-4-1
Description
Piece
drum body 1470 x 2600 x 33

drum flange
shaft nut KM 20 M100 x 2
safety plate
feather key
housing for terminal strip
gland M50 x 1.5
cover
clamp ring
terminal block EK 4 mm
terminal block SAK 4 mm
endplate AP 4-10
endplate EWK 1
mounting rail
owner terminal block
mounting rail
terminal block SAK 2.5 mm CAN BUS
endplatte EWK 1
hexagon nut M20 x 80
gearbox size 5; i=85.98
gearbox foot
hydraulic air multiple disc brake
motor flange
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
36
1
2
1
1
1
3
2
6
1
1
1
1
Date: 18.12.2006
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
Item Drawing-/Article-no.
19
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
X5490-0008
G-3232-22a-00-3-2
X5210-0055
G-3839-31-00-3-5
G-3232-23-00-3-1
X06-03-063-0-00-4-1
X6000-0001
X6027-1003
X6027-1010
X6027-1001
X5441-0001
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
G-1662-16-00-4-0
G-1662-15-00-4-0
X41-12-106-0-00-3-0
X41-12-107-0-00-3-0
G-3697-04-00-4-0
Y-2028-01-00-4-7
G-3232-11-00-4-0
G-3232-24a-00-3-1
G-3232-09-00-4-1
G-3232-10-00-4-1
X6505-0001
X6501-0015
X6501-0016
X6503-0002
X6502-0001
X41-13-026-1-00-4-0
SK-4789-10-00-3-1
X5270-0016
SK-4789-11-00-3-0
X01-10-008-0-00-4-1
X41-12-045-0-00-4-10
SK-4789-12a00-3-0
SK-4789-03-00-4-1
M-504-16-00-4-0
X41-12-107-1-00-3-0
G-3697-07-00-4-0
G-3232-09-00-4-1
G-3232-10-00-4-1
B-E 07 467
Page 7 from 9
Description
Piece
hydraulic motor
intermediate flange
shaft sealing
slip ring housing
slip ring carrier
angle for heating
heating 33 W, 230 V
gland at the slip ring housing
gland M40 x 1.5
gland M25 x 1.5
gland M20 x 1.5
vent connection
slip ring body 36 poles + earth 36 A
slip ring earth 36 A
slip ring phase 36 A
brush holder unit 36 poles + earth 36 A
brush holder earth 36 A
brush holder phase 36 A
supporting ring
intermediate ring
slip ring
supporting plate
fixing device for terminal strip
fixing for terminal strip
mounting rail
terminal block EK 4 mm
terminal block SAK 4 mm
end plate AP 4-10
end plate EWK 1
insulation disc
bearing flange
ball-bearing
follower slip ring
slip ring boss
slip ring phase R32 A CAN BUS
follower for limit switch
follower
bush
brush holder phase S 32 A CAN BUS
Spacer rod
fixing device for terminal strip
fixing for terminal strip
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Date: 18.12.2006
1
2
1
1
1
1
36
1
1
36
1
1
1
1
4
4
2
1
36
1
4
41
2
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
6
1
2
2
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
B-E 07 467
Page 8 from 9
Item Drawing-/article-no. Description

55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
X6505-0001
X6501-0002
X6502-0001
G-3232-15-00-4-6
X5400-0034
G-3232-31a-00-3-1
G-3697-06-00-4-0
G-3697-20-00-3-5
G-3697-20-00-3-5
G-3697-23-00-3-5
G-3839-33-00-3-1
X7100-0027
X6874-0021
G-3232-34-00-4-0
X6874-0020
X6451-0002
X6874-0009
X6874-0022
X6874-0011
X6874-0012
X6874-0008
X5440-0037
X6874-0023
Piece
mounting rail
terminal block SAK 2.5 mm CAN BUS
endplate EWK 1
plate for limit switch
limit switch
takener
spacer rod
between cover
between cover
cover
fixing device for vent
oil level glass
fitting glands
vent threaded pipe 100 mm length
vent threaded pipe 280 mm length
vent threaded pipe - 60 mm length
1/3 gland
strew plug
angle
curve piece 90 with inner and outer thread 1/2
T-piece 1/2 with inner thread
muff 1/2
vent 1/2
reduction piece
1
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
When ordering spare parts, please state our order- and our serial number, to avoid wrong
deliveries. The order- and our serial number are on the type plate on the drum.
Date: 18.12.2006
No:

Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D
B-E 07 467
Page 9 from 9
11.0 Spare Parts Drawing

Drawing-no.: SK-5237-00-2
Date: 18.12.2006
Nr.:
General Security Advices

for Motor Driven Cable Reeling Drums
B 00 049
Seite 1 von 1
Safety References
The cable reeling drum is built and is reliable in service delivered after the newest
state design. Arbitrary changes, which impair the working reliability, are not permissible. That concerns also protection device, which is appropriate as contact protection.
The cable reeling drum may be used and operated only in the context of the conditions specified in the achievement and supply contract.
The operator has to ensure that with the assembly, the commissioning , servicing and
maintenance as well as the repair assigned persons consider the manual. Make sure
that they read and understood it in all points to prevent:
dangers for life and health of the user and other persons.
To guarantee the working reliability of the device.
loss of use and environmental pollutions by wrong handling.
for transport, assembling and disassembly, the operation as well as servicing and
maintenance, the relevant regulations are to be considered to the industrial safety
and to environmental protection.
the cable reeling drum may only maintained or repaired by authorized, trained and instructed personnel.
all work is to be accomplished carefully and under the aspect of "security".
work on the cable reeling drum may be accomplished only in the switched off condition.
The changed oil has to be filled into suitable container. Possibly developed oil on the
floor are to be eliminated immediately with an oil bonding agent. Strongly oil-soaked
cloths has to be kept in suitable containers. The waste oil is just like the oil bonding
agent and the cleaning cloths to be thrown according to the relevant environmentalprotection regulations.
rotary drive components, like clutches, gear wheels or belt drives must be secured
against danger of accidents.
at the cable reeling drum appropriate references, e.g. identification plate, rotation arrow etc. are to be considered. They must be free by colour and dirt. Missing ones describe have to be replaced.
No.:
B 00 069
page 1 from 2
Maintenance instruction
Screws/tightening torque
Hartmann & Knig

Stromzufhrungs AG
Cable reeling drum Hose Special drums Slip ring bodies
p.o.box 0100
Siemensstrae 6
www.hukag.com
E - Mail: info@hukag.com
phone:
fax:
+0049-7255 / 7120-0
+0049-7255 / 5038
No.:
Maintenance instruction
1.0
B 00 069
page 2 from 2
Caution:
To avoid overloading the individual screws, the maximum tightening torque (see
table 6.1) must not be exceeded, what is more important is that the faces are flush. If
this flushness cannot be reached during clamping, consolations of us is necessary
Clamping screw
thread
maximum tightening torque per screw (with =0.1)

Property class
8.8 Nm
Property class
10.9 Nm
Property class
12.9 Nm
M6
10
12
14.5
M8
25
29
35
M 10
50
58
70
M 12
90
100
121
M 14
--
160
193
M 16
210
240
295
M 20
450
470
570
M 24
750
820
980
M 27
--
1210
1450
M 30
1500
1640
1970
M 33
--
2210
2650
M 36
2500
2850
3420
Table 6.1: Maximum tightening torque of the clamping screws

Note: Unserviceable screws should be replaced by new ones of the same property class
and type.
Date: 04.03.2005
No.:
B 00 090
page 1 from 8
Maintenance Instruction
and Spare Parts List
for
Replacement of the Springs Type LT
Hartmann & Knig

Stromzufhrungs AG
Cable Reeling Drum Hose Special Drums Slip Ring Bodies
p.o.box 0100
Siemensstrae 6
www.hukag.com
EMail: info@hukag.com
phone:
fax:
+0049-7255 / 7120-0
+0049-7255 / 5038
No.:

Type: LT parallel or in serial
B-00 090
page 2 from 8
List of Contents
1.0
Cable Reeling Drum parallel ............................................................................................. 3
1.1
Replacement of the broken Springs ................................................................................ 3
1.2
Installation of the new Springs......................................................................................... 4
1.3
Spare Parts List ................................................................................................................. 4
1.4
Spare Part Drawing ........................................................................................................... 5
2.0
Cable Reeling Drum in serial ............................................................................................ 6
2.1
Replacement of the broken Springs ................................................................................ 6
2.2
Installation of the new Springs......................................................................................... 7
2.3
Spare Parts List ................................................................................................................. 7
2.4
Spare Part Drawing ........................................................................................................... 8
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
No.:

1.0
B-00 090
page 3 from 8
Cable Reeling Drum parallel
1.1 Replacement of the broken Springs

The Replacement of the springs are only accomplish by qualified technical personnel.
Attention: The springs are made of rolled flat steel. The consequences of this
properties are, that they want to go back to its primitive state. So you have to look
and be carefully about the danger of accidents by using this kind of springs.
Disconnect the main power cable from the slip rings and pull the cable out of the hollow
shaft. The winding cable can remains on the drum body if it is secured against automatic
unwinding. Otherwise it must be uncoil completely from the drum body.
Remove the reeling drum from the fixing flange by loosen the screws (customer side).
Now remove the cable gland (1), the circlip ring (2) and the fixing flange from the hollow
shaft and the feather key. Remove the shield (7) with the spring housing (10), the ball
bearing (8) and the bearing cover (9) by unscrewing of the fixing nuts (5 and 6). The ball
bearing (8) should not be removed from the shield (7).
Attention! If the shield (7) is lifting up itself from the spring housing (16) by loosening one of the last nut you have to tighten it immediately. After that please contact
us for specify the next procedure.
The springs (12) were now visible and can be replaced out of the spring housing (10),
with the spacer plate and with their bandage.
Handle with care!
If you have a cable reeling drum with more springs you have to repeat the procedure until
all springs are took out of the spring housing.
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
No.:

B-00 090
page 4 from 8
1.2 Installation of the new Springs

Before you attach the new spring make sure that the hollow shaft with the takener (14) is
clean and all broken spring parts are removed from the compartment (16).
Attention! The new springs should be handle with care. Never remove the spring
bandage because this could cause very serious accidents.
The new springs must be placed into position with the bandage on. It is also important to
ensure that the inner eyelet of the spring engages properly in the groove of the takener
(14) which is fixed on the hollow shaft. After that you have to grease the new spring well.
Further take into consideration that all springs have the same direction of rotating. Consider the type designation for example LT300/ on the type plate. After that you have to
grease the springs well. Now you can assemble the cable reeling drum in reverse order.
Attention! The hollow shaft (15) has to be proper cleaned and the shield (7) with the ball
bearing (8) must be slide easier on it.
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Description
Piece
cable gland
circlip ring
fixing flange
nut M6
nut M6
nut M8
shield
ball bearing
bearing cover
spring housing
spacer plate
spring
spacer plate
takener (hollow shaft)
spring bolt
spring housing
1
1
1
4
8
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
No.:

B-00 090
page 5 from 8
1.4 Spare Part Drawing

Drawing no.: SK-5579-00
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
No.:

2.0
B-00 090
page 6 from 8
Cable Reeling Drum in serial
2.1 Replacement of the broken Springs

The Replacement of the springs are only accomplish by qualified technical personnel.
Attention: The springs are made of rolled flat steel. The consequences of this
properties are, that they want to go back to its primitive state. So you have to look
and be carefully about the danger of accidents by using this kind of springs.
Disconnect the main power cable from the slip rings and pull out the cable of the hollow
shaft. The winding cable can remains on the drum body if it is secured against automatic
unwinding. Otherwise it must be uncoil completely from the drum body.
Remove the reeling drum from the fixing flange by loosen the screws (customer side).
Now remove the cable gland (1), the circlip ring (2) and the fixing flange from the hollow
shaft and the feather key. Remove the shield (7) the spring housing (10), the ball bearing
(8) and the bearing cover (9) by unscrewing of the fixing nuts (5 and 6). The ball bearing
(8) should not be removed from the shield (7).
Attention! If the shield (7) is lifting up itself from the spring housing (16) by loosening one of the last nut you have to tighten it immediately. After that please contact
us for specify the next procedure.
The springs were now visible and can be replaced out of the spring housing (16) with the
spring housing (10), the spacer plate and with their bandage.
Handle with care!
Attention! This applies only for cable reeling drum types LT220 and LT530.
During the replacement of the spring you have to press down the takener (14) by
using an screwdriver for example. Otherwise the inner eyelet of the lower spring
can jump out of the spring housing (10).
A circlip ring is constructional handled that by the other cable reeling drum types.
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
No.:

B-00 090
page 7 from 8
2.2 Installation of the new Springs

Before you attach the new spring make sure that the axle is clean and all broken spring
parts are removed from the compartment (11).
Attention! The new springs should be handle with care. Never remove the spring
bandage because this could cause very serious accidents.
The new springs must be placed into position with the bandage on. It is also important to
ensure that the inner eyelet of the spring engages properly in the groove of the Takener
(14) which is fixed on the hollow shaft. Pay
attention by the last spring, because you
dont see it correctly, that the spring bolt
engages properly in the outer eyelet of the
spring. Otherwise you have a malfunction
of the spring (see pic.).
Further take into consideration that one
spring should be placed with inverted
direction to the other to cause a serial
effect. Consider the type designation on the
type plate LT300 /H (H = in serial) for
example. After that you have to grease the
spring well. Now you can assemble the cable
reeling drum in reverse order. Attention!
The shield (7) with the ball bearing (8) must
be slide easier on it.

Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Description
Piece
cable gland
circlip ring
fixing flange
nut M6
nut M6
nut M8
shield
ball bearing
bearing cover
spring housing
spacer plate
spring
spacer plate
takener
spring bolt
spring housing
hollow shaft
1
1
1
4
8
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
No.:

B-00 090
page 8 from 8
2.4 Spare Part Drawing

Drawing no.: SK-5578-00
date: 22.08.2006
Draw.: C. Fricke
no.:
B-E 00 061
page 1 from 7
for
Hydraulically Released
Spring-applied Multi-plate Brakes
Hartmann & Knig

S t ro m zuf h ru n gs A G
Cable Reeling Drum - Hose - Rope - Special Drums - Slip Ring Bodies
p.o.box 0100
Siemens Street 6
www.hukag.com
E - Mail: info@hukag
phone:
fax:
+49-7255 / 7120-0
+49-7255 / 5038
Nr.:
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9
Date: 25.03.2008
B-E 00 061
Seite 2 von 7
Drawn by Lippmann
date: 25.03.2008
No.:
B-E 00 061
Page 3 from 7
draw.: Lippmann
date: 25.03.2008
No.:
B-E 00 061
Page 4 from 7
draw.: Lippmann
date: 25.03.2008
No.:
B-E 00 061
Page 5 from 7
draw.: Lippmann
date: 25.03.2008
No.:
B-E 00 061
Page 6 from 7
draw.: Lippmann
date: 25.03.2008
No.:
B-E 00 061
Page 7 from 7
draw.: Lippmann
Tighten the strap ...
www.draeger.com
ST-9725-2007
ST-9724-2007
... until the inner mask lies firmly over your mouth
and nose.
ST-9727-2007
90 46 332 | POe | 097 | UUU-PR-ED | Marketing Communications | Printed in Germany | chlorine free - ecological | subject to modification!
Pull the hood over your head. Make sure that your
nose and chin sit comfortably in the inner mask
and that all your hair is tucked into the hood.
First insert your chin into the hood resting it

inside the inner mask.
ST-9717-2007
Open the elastic neck seal using both hands.
ST-9712-2007
... using both thumbs.
Push out the filter ...
ST-9713-2007
Take the hood into both hands.
ST-9721-2007
ST-9709-2007
ST-1587-2003
Drger Parat C
Smoke hood
ST-1596-2003
Drger Parat C
Smoke hood
Hold the red pull cords in one hand

and use your other hand to pull the
hood until both filter seals are
opened.
Pull firm on the cover of the wall box

to detach the security seal. Remove
the hood.
Wall box containing two hoods.
ST-9706-2007
ST-9701-2007
ST-9700-2007
ST-9689-2007
TWIN PACK
The filter openings must be free to

ensure unrestricted breathing.
Open the zipper of the Soft Pack

and remove the hood.
Handy travel case.

opened.
ST-9735-2007
ST-9734-2007
ST-9731-2007
ST-9730-27
SOFT PACK


opened.
ST-9745-2007

Robust plastic casing for rough

environments.
www.draeger.com
Remove the metal clamp to open the

box and remove the hood.

opened.

ST-9759-2007
ST-9755-2007
ST-9749-2007
ST-9747-2007
TRAVELLER PACK
90 46 332 | POe | 097 | UUU-PR-ED | Marketing Communications | Printed in Germany | chlorine free - ecological | subject to modification!
Open the box and pull out the inner

carton. Remove the hood from the
inner carton.
Environmentally-friendly cardboard
box.
ST-9743-2007
ST-9736-2007
ST-278-2002
CARTON
DOCUMENTATION
Schwenkwerk-Typ / Slewing Unit Type:
SW 100 DISK
Bestell-Nr. / Order-no.:
2308.0295
Version / Version:
11452
Ident-Nummer / Identification-no.:
691658114-009
gltig ab Seriennummer:
valid from serial number:
1110
Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter / Germany
Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 3 024 36
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 3 024 24
(bis zur Festlegung des Gltigkeitsbereichs)

(until the application range is specified)
E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender),
Jrgen Bialek
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker
Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgitter Bad

Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389
21.07.2010
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0136-1 E
1-1
C o n t e n t s
Page-no.
Class-no.
Data Sheet / Technical Data

1.0
Safety
1.1
1.2
1.3
About this Document

Audience
Intended Use
2-1
2-1
2-1
A 16.0200-1 E
A 16.0200-1 E
A 16.0200-1 E
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
Fundamental Safety Notes

Warning Notes
Safety Symbols
Organizational Measures
Personnel Selection and Qualification
Measures to be Performed by the Operating
Company
Measures to be Performed by the Operator
Measures for the Maintenance, Servicing and Repair
Safety Notes for the Electrical System
Safety Notes for the Hydraulic System
Handling of Oil, Grease and Other Chemical
Substances
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-4
A 16.0200-2 E
A 16.0200-2 E
A 16.0200-2 E
A 16.0200-3 E
A 16.0200-4 E
A 16.0200-4 E
2-5
2/5-6
2/6-7
2-7
2-7
A 16.0200-5 E
A 16.0200/5-6 E
A 16.0200/6-7 E
A 16.0200-7 E
A 16.0200-7 E
3-1
4-1
4/2-3
A 16.0322 E
A 16.0424/1-2 E
A 16.0403/1-2 E
5-1
A 16.0832 E
7-1
A 16.1036 E
8/1-2
A 16.0619/1-2 E
8/3-4
8-5
A 16.0619/3-4E
A 16.0619-5 E
9-1
A 16.1218 E
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
2.0
Description and Survey of Features
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
Base unit: Constructional and Functional Description

Constructional Description
Functional Description
2.2
Hydraulic diagram
2.4
Parts list
3.0
Operating instructions
3.1
Details for safe use
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
Putting into operation

Initial start-up
Daily start-up
Operation
Information for operation
3.4
Shut-down
9-1
A 16.1218 E
3.5
Reoperation
9-1
A 16.1218 E
2308. 4631 ( 2308. 4718 )
Original operating instructions

Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Board of management:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Chairman),
Jrgen Bialek
Chairman of the Supervisory Board:
Ulrich Decker
Domicile of company: Salzgitter Bad

Registration court:
Registration number:
HRB 201 389
21.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0136-2 E
1-2
C o n t e n t s
Page-no.
Class-no.
3.6
Transportation
9-1
A 16.1218 E
4.0
Maintenance and repair
10-1
A 16.1220-1 E
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
A 16.1220-2 E
A 16.1220-3 E
A 16.1220-4 E
A 16.1220-4 E
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
Maintenance
Maintenance Overview
Maintenance interval after the first 50 operating hours
Maintenance interval after the first 500 operating
hours
Maintenance interval weekly
Maintenance interval every 1000 operating hours
Oil change
Oil filter
Lubricating instructions
Lubrication points
Motor
Slip-ring transmitter
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
A 16.1220-5 E
A 16.1220-6 E
A 16.1220-7 E
A 16.1220/8-9 E
A 16.1220-9 E
A 16.1220-9 E
A 16.1220-10 E
A 16.1220-11 E
A 16.1220-12 E
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Required checks
Check oil level
Check and adjust pressure
Wear
Miscellaneous checks
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
A 16.1220-13 E
A 16.1220/13-14 E
A 16.1220-15 E
A 16.1220/15-17 E
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
Repair
General
Replacement of hydraulic motor
Replacement of hydraulic pump
Replacement of axle bearing
Replacement of pinion
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-3
A 16.0718/1-2 E
A 16.0718/3-4 E
A 16.0718-5 E
A 16.0718-6 E
A 16.0718/7-8 E
4.4
4.5
Table: Oil recommendation - Hydraulic fluids

Lubricant recommendation
11/1-3
11/3-5
A 16.0719/1-2 E
A 16.0719/3-5 E
5.0
Failure - Symptoms - Sources of failures
5.1
Slewing unit not functioning
12-1
A 16.0757 E
5.2
Slewing unit malfunctioning
12-1
A 16.0757 E
6.0
Spare parts list and electric equipment
Original operating instructions

Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker

Registration court:
HRB 201 389
Product:
SW 100 DISK
Material-Nr.:
2308.0295
Serial no.:
from 1110 (until the application range is specified)
Deadweight:
Operating instructions: A 16.0136
3.840 kg
Lifting capacity SWL:
100.000 kg
Required crane lifting capacity:
103.840 kg
Mechanical Data
-1
Rotational speed / axle:

Torque / axle:
5 / 6 min adjusted
3400 Nm
Electric Data
Mode of operation:
Motor type:
Intermittent service:
Motor power:
2,2 / 2,6
Voltage:
400
Frequency:
50 / 60
Current:
Rated current (full load):
5,5
Current consumption:
S3
100L-4
40 % ED
kW
V
Hz
threephase
A 10 %
System of protection:
Insulation class:
max. duty classification:
Circuit diagram no.:
Plug-in connector:
Control voltage:
No. of slip rings:
1)
IP 56
F
120/h
2307.9288
ODU-UW
230 V AC
31pol.x36A+PE+2 CAN
BUS
Hydraulic Data
max. service pressure
Rotational sense right [ 10 bar]
Measuring point MA
Measuring point MB
Pump type / output:
Control block:
Hydromotor:
Filled oil quality:
Oil quantity:
Filter type:
Filter mesh:
Admissible service temperature:
used grease:
used grease for electric motor:
used grease for toothed wheel works:
2)
200
200
P3DB2004L10 / 6 litre/min
NG 8
MR 300
HLP 46
25 l
Argo
16(c) = 200 Exapor
- 15 C up to + 85 C
Renolit size 2 FUCHS EUROPE SCHMIERSTOFFE GMBH
PETAMO GY 193 KLBER LUBRICATION
Zhlit VZ Mllenberg & Sonntag OHG
Accessories
1)
2)
Crosspiece with double hook no. 25

System of protection ensured only with mounted and closed hood
top view onto hood / slip ring transmitter
Author :
28.07.2010 / GK - Skiba
Rotational sense left [ 10 bar]
2)
Dimensions
Author :
28.07.2010 / GK - Skiba
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
1.0
Safety
1.1
About this Document
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-1 E
2-1
This operating manual is part of the machine and describes the safe and correct use in
all operational phases.
We reserve the right to make changes to our products in the interest of further
development.
1.2
Adhere to the operating instructions when using this machine.
Always keep the service manual close to the machine.
Retain this service manual for further use.
Hand over the service manual to any further proprietor or user of the machine.
Audience
The audience of this operating manual is the technical personnel.
The machine must only be used, maintained and/or repaired by technically skilled
personnel that is used to carry out such work.
1.3
Intended use
The slewing unit has been designed for industrial applications.
It must only be used to lift free-standing loads and to turn and handle freely suspended
charges.
Intended use includes adherence to the operating instructions of this slewing unit and to
the inspection and maintenance instructions.
The manufacturer does not accept any responsibility for any resulting damage caused
by improper use. The operating company alone carries the risk here.
An improper use is, for example:
- Breaking loose of non-freestanding loads

- Horizontal movement of non-freely hanging loads
- Adding to the load once it has already been raised
- Causing the load to oscillate
- Any loading that exceeds the permitted capacity (see SWL indicated on the slewing
unit)
- Lifting or dragging loads diagonally from the location

- Riding on the load or on the slewing unit
- Operation of the slewing unit at a higher working pressure than allowed..
- Use of the slewing unit in explosive atmosphere
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
1.4
Fundamental Safety Notes
1.4.1
Warning Notes
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-2 E
2-2
Warning notes in this operating manual indicate particular dangers and mention
measures for the avoidance of the danger.
There are four levels of warning notes:
Signal word
Meaning
DANGER
Immediate potential danger

Death or severe injury occurs
Possible potential danger
WARNING
Death or severe injury can occur

CAUTION
(personal injury)
CAUTION
(damage to property)
Minor injury can occur

Damage to property can occur
Warning notes have the following form:

Type and source of the danger
Possible consequences, explanation of the danger.
DANGER
1.4.2
Do not do ...
Perform these measures.
Safety Symbols
Warning of electrical dangers
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
1.4.3
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-3 E
2-3
Organizational Measures
Always keep the service manual at the place of operation of the slewing unit!
In addition to the operating manual, observe generally valid legal and other binding
regulations for accident prevention and for environmental protection! Such obligations
can also concern, for example, the handling of dangerous materials or the
provision/wearing of personal protective equipment or traffic safety regulations.
The slewing unit has been built in accordance with the state of the art and is reliable if
used as specified. However, dangers might emanate from this machine if it is operated
improperly by uninstructed or disregardful personal or used for any other purpose than it
is intended for. (see 1.3 Intended use, page no. 1-1). The manufacturer will not be liable
for any other use in excess of the intended use nor for any damages resulting
therefrom. The user alone will bear such risk.
The slewing unit must only be operated in perfect technical condition.
During operation of the slewing unit keep sufficient safe distance to the load and to the
slewing unit! Dont stay under the slewing unit!
The personnel who is assigned to work on the slewing unit must have read the operating
instructions, in particular the chapter Safety before starting to work. This applies
particularly to personnel who only works on the slewing unit occasionally, e. g. for setup
or maintenance.
Adhere to all warnings and safety instructions applied to the slewing unit and make sure
they are always completely legible!
For safety-relevant malfunctions or changes to the operational state, stop the slewing
unit immediately and report the fault to the responsible office/person!
Augment the operating manual with instructions, including supervisory and reporting
obligations, to cater for special operational situations, for example, with regard to the
work organization, work procedures and the delegated personnel.
Only sling any slinging gear (slinging ropes or chains) to the devices provided fort his
purpose (e. g. at the double hook).
Check that the carrying capacity of the lifting tackle is adequate for the task before
starting hoisting!
Do not make any changes, additions or modifications to the machine that could impair
the safety without approval of the vendor! This is also the case for the installation and
the calibration of safety equipment and valves. The machine must not be subjected to
welding work without prior consent and specifications of the manufacturer.
Spare parts must conform to the technical specifications stipulated by the manufacturer.
This always the case when genuine spare parts are used.
Genuine spare parts are specially designed for the particular machine. Parts and special
equipment not supplied by the manufacturer have not been approved. The installation
and/or the use of such products can impair the safety. The manufacturer does not
accept any liability for damage caused by the use of non-genuine parts or any special
equipment.
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
1.4.4
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-4 E
2-4
Personnel Selection and Qualification

Any person who is responsible for assembly/disassembly, putting into operation,
operation, maintenance and repair of the slewing unit must have read, understood and
adhere to the complete service manual, in particular the chapter Safety.
Only authorised, trained and instructed personnel is allowed to run, to maintain and to
repair the slewing unit. Such personnel must have been given special instruction in the
possible dangers. The personnel must be allowed to reject any safety-endangering
instructions from third-parties.
The responsibilities of the personnel for the installation/dismantling, commissioning,
operation, maintenance, servicing and repair must be clearly defined and observed!
Make sure that only personnel assigned to run the slewing unit will do so!
Only specialist electricians or instructed personnel under direction and supervision of a
specialist electrician are allowed to work on the electric systems of the slewing unit and
they must do this in compliance with the electrotechnical regulations.
Work on the hydraulic equipment may be performed only by personnel with special
hydraulics knowledge and experience!
The personnel being trained, instructed or participating in a general training may work
on the slewing unit only under the continuous supervision of an experienced person!
1.4.5
Measures to be Performed by the Operating Company

The owner must take appropriate maintenance and inspection measures to make sure
the slewing unit is always run in a perfect technical condition.
The owner must evidently manage and define the responsibilities for assembly /
installation, operation, maintenance and repair.
The owner shall be obliged to make sure that any work on the slewing unit is carried out
by well-trained and instructed personnel only who
- is aware of the basic instructions about working safety and prevention of accidents
and has been instructed to run the slewing unit;
- has read and understood the safety instructions and warnings in this service
manual.
The owner shall be obliged to verify regularly if the personnel works safety-consciously.
The owner shall be obliged to make sure that this service manual is always easily
accessible.
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
1.4.6
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-5 E
2-5
Measures to be Performed by the Operator

The regulations applicable to the place of operation must be adhered to. The operation
of the slewing unit is in any case subject to the local safety regulations and instructions
for the prevention of accidents.
Before putting the slewing unit into operation make sure that nobody might be
endangered by operation of the slewing unit! Slewing unit components might
automatically restart when the slewing unit is restarted!
The crane operator must at all times be able to see the working area and the load!
Ensure adequate lighting in conditions of poor sight and darkness.
Do nor stand or work under suspended loads!
Avoid any safety-compromising working!
Examine the slewing unit at least once per shift to make sure it is exempt from damages
or defects! Notify the responsible post/person of any occurred abnormality (including
abnormal operating behaviour)! Immediately shut down and secure the slewing unit if
necessary! Remedy any failure immediately!
1.4.7
Measures for the Maintenance, Servicing and Repair

Observe the adjustment, maintenance and inspection tasks and schedules, including
details concerning the replacement of parts and equipment prescribed in the operating
manual! These tasks may only be performed by specialized personnel.
Inform the operations personnel before commencing maintenance and servicing work!
Designate a supervisory person.
The shutdown instructions according to the operating instructions must be adhered to
during any work referring to assembly/disassembly, putting into operation, operation,
maintenance and repair.
Carry out repair work on the hydraulic and electric system in a clean and dust-free
environment.
If necessary, secure the work area!
Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work completely shut down the slewing
unit and protect it against any unauthorized restart:
- Unplug electric plug-in connector.
Remove protective equipment only after the machine has been shut down!
Carefully fasten and secure spare parts and modules being replaced to the lifting gear
so that they do not endanger anyone. Use only suitable and technically perfect lifting
gear and load carrying equipment with adequate carrying capacity!
Do not stand or work under suspended loads!
If necessary, use security-conform ladders and work platforms for installation and
servicing work! Do not use machine parts as steps! Wear fall-prevention gear for work
performed at height.
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-6 E
2-6
Because contact with hot parts and the discharge of oil during maintenance and
servicing work cannot be excluded, always wear protective glasses and protective
gloves.
Clean electric components in voltage-free state only. Unplug electric plug-in connector
for this purpose. This regulation also applies to non-touch cleaning (air-blasting).
Do not bypass pressure-operated switches, pressure-operated valves, safety valves and
other sensors.
The pressure-operated switches, pressure-operated valves, safety valves and other
sensors may only be adjusted with the written approval of the manufacturer.
Safety valves may only be replaced with the same valves.
Replace immediately any damaged hydraulic hoses, pipes, cables and valves.
Replace hydraulic hoses at indicated or reasonable intervals, even if no safety-relevant
defects can be detected (see check of hydraulic hose lines, page 10-2).
Observe the prescribed tightening torques and check regularly.
For maintenance and repair work, always tighten loosened screwed joints as specified in
the guidelines.
Before cleaning the slewing unit with water or by means of a vapour stream (highpressure cleaner) or with other detergents cover or obturate all openings in which no
water/vapour/detergent may penetrate for safety or functional reasons. Electromotors,
switch cabinets, stop switches, ball bearings, gears and chains are especially
vulnerable.
Regularly check all electrical cables and hydraulic oil lines for damage and abrasion.
Also inspect hydraulic oil lines for leaks.
Before resuming operation after completing maintenance or repair work, check whether
all safety equipment has been reattached to the machine and is operational! Check all
functions of the slewing unit and the working pressure!
1.4.8
Safety Notes for the Electrical System

In accordance with the electro-technical regulations, work on electrical systems may
only be performed by an electrician or by instructed persons under the guidance and
supervision of an electrician.
Only use original fuses with specified amperage (see spare parts list)! Shutdown the
slewing unit immediately should any malfunctions occur in the electrical power supply!
When prescribed, machine and system components for which inspection, maintenance
or repair work is to be performed, must be disconnected from the power supply. First
check that the disconnected parts are in fact free of power, then ground and shortcircuit, and insulate any neighboring parts still under power!
Check the electric equipment of the slewing unit regularly. Any defect, such as loose
connections or damaged cables, must be eliminated immediately.
If work needs to be performed on live parts, a second person must be present who must
always has visual or wireless contact and, in the case of an emergency, can active the
emergency-off switch or disconnect the master switch from the power supply. Secure
27.05.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0200-7 E
2-7
the work area with a red-white safety chain and a warning notice. Use only insulated
tools!
After the associated electrical installation or repair, test the installed protective measures
(e.g., earthing resistance).
1.4.9
Safety Notes for the Hydraulic System

Work on the hydraulic system may be performed only by persons with special
knowledge and experience in hydraulics. The personnel must be able to read and
completely understand the hydraulic diagram, in particular the correlations of the
integrated safety systems.
Wear your personal protective equipment, e. g. gloves, protective clothes, protective
goggles or helmet with visor when working on the hydraulic system.
Avoid any oil leakages when working on the hydraulic units. Leaking oil must be
collected in appropriate receptacles and disposed of in compliance with the
corresponding regulations.
The hydraulic system is under high pressure! Do not detach or tighten any screw fittings
of the hydraulic lines (hydraulic couplings) as long as the system is under pressure!
Immediately eliminate any leakages.
Prevent the components (such as the double hook) from moving accidentally!
Utmost cleanliness must be observed for all work performed on the hydraulics! The
external vicinity must be cleaned before removing the connections. Close all openings
with protective caps so that no dirt can enter.
Regularly inspect all lines, hoses and connections for leaks and externally visible
damage! Repair any damage without delay! Tighten untight screw fittings in pressurefree state only. Escaping oil can cause injuries, fire and environmental contamination.
Before starting the repair work on system sections and pressure lines of the hydraulics
system to be opened, remove pressure in accordance with the construction and function
description! When present: remove pressure from system sections using the manometer
connections (MA1, etc., in the hydraulics diagram).
Route and install the hydraulic lines correctly! Do not interchange the connections! The
fittings, length and quality of the hose lines must be appropriate for the requirements.
Unapproved modifications and changes to the hydraulic system are prohibited.
1.4.10 Handling of Oil, Grease and Other Chemical Substances

Observe the appropriate product safety and environmental regulations for the handling
of oil, grease and other chemical substances!
Take care with the handling of hot fuels and agents (such as hydraulic oil), there is
danger of burning and scalding!
15.10.2008
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0322 E
3-1
2.0
2.1
2.1.1
Constructional Description (see parts list, page no. 7-1)

The PEINER Motor Slewing Unit is designed as follows:
The slewing unit consists of a traverse (1), which incorporates the hydraulic unit (22), the
hydraulic motor (3) and the hub (4). The hub holds the axle (5). Via a nut (6) that is
mounted on the axle, the loads are absorbed by an axial deep groove thrust ball bearing
(7) that is screwed into the hub. Depending on the requirement, a multi-pole slipring body
(8) may be fixed on the hollow axle. Through this axle, a cable (9) with a corresponding
number of leads, is led from the slipring body to the suspended load-lifting member.
The hydraulic unit (22) has been mounted vertically into the traverse, as a complete unit.
It consists of motor (2) and pump (20).
By loosening the fastening screws, the complete hydraulic unit can be taken out of the
slewing unit. The hydraulic control block (17) is mounted on the side wall of the traverse.
The solenoid valve (18) sits on a block and is connected directly to the hydraulic motor
(3).
By means of the assembly opening in the hood, all important maintenance jobs can be
carried out on the hydraulic unit (e. g. re-fill the hydraulic oil).
The components hydraulic unit, hydraulic motor and slipring body are protected against
mechanical damages by means of a hood.
The cross piece with the double hook that is fixed to the hollow axle guarantees that most
of the forces are led centrically into the hollow axle and thus protects it against excessive
bending stress. A cable tension relief prevents mechanical stressing of the electric plugin connector.
14.04.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
2.1.2
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0424-1 E
4-1
Functional description
(see hydraulic diagram, page no. 5-1)
The hydraulic pump is driven by an electric motor. The motor may drive the pump in an
either clockwise or anti-clockwise sense of rotation.
Upon starting the electric motor (M), the solenoid valve (Y1) must be switched on
simultaneously.
To turn slewing unit to the right:

As soon as the drive motor (M) is turned on and the solenoid valve (Y1) is activated, the
hydraulic pump (P) sucks hydraulic oil from the tank via the nonreturn valve (RV2) and
pumps it into pressure line (P1). The oil flows via the nonreturn valve (RV3) and through
line (A) into the hydraulic motor (H). The oil flows from the motor through line (B) via the
stop valve (SP1) that has been opened by the control pressure, through return line (T)
and the filter (F) back into the tank.
The maximum pressure in line (P1) is determined by the pressure relief valve (DV1).
The pressure setting can be checked at manometer connection (MA) with the ball valve
(KH2) being closed; for pressure setting refer to page-no. 10-2.
To turn slewing unit to the left:

As soon as the drive motor (M) is turned on and the solenoid valve (Y1) is activated, the
hydraulic pump (P) sucks hydraulic oil from the tank via the nonreturn valve (RV1) and
pumps it into pressure line (P2). The oil flows via the nonreturn valve (RV4) and line (B)
into the hydraulic motor (H). The oil flows from the motor through line (A) via the stop
valve (SP2) that has been opened by the control pressure, through return line (T) and
the filter (F) back into the tank.
The maximum pressure in line (P2) is determined by the pressure relief valve (DV2).
The pressure setting can be checked at manometer connection (MB) with the ball valve
(KH3) being closed; for pressure setting refer to page-no. 10-2.
Note:
When the axle turns without load, vibrations might cause a chattering noise.
This problem can be remedied by adjusting the stop valves (SP1) and (SP2).
(Please refer to paragraph 4.2.2 Pressure adjustment, page no. 10-2).
Free rotation of the load hook:

In case the solenoid valve (Y1) is not switched on, the axle (load hook) may rotate
freely.
14.04.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0424-2 E
4-1
Design version:
Continuous speed control:
With slewing unit that are equipped with a flow regulator (24) (see page no. 7-1
Legend), the rotational speed of the axle can be continuously regulated within the range
-1
from 0 to 5 min by means of this valve. Part of the oil stream is in this case deviated
via the filter to the tank directly.
30.05.2008
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0403-1 E
4-2
Slewing load
Danger of life, due to moving loads
f Ensure that no person is within the slewing range of the load or
underneath the load.
DANGER
ATTENTION!
f Ensure that no hazard arises through the movement of the load or the
slewing gear.
If rotation of the slewing gear axle is engaged in the opposite direction of
rotation of the load, it can lead to damage to the slewing gear.
Prerequisite: The load must hang freely, so that it can be slewed without bumping against
anything.
1. Switch on the slewing gear in the direction Slew load.
When switching on the slewing gear, for instance with the direction of rotation to the right,
the cable plane is tensioned in the opposite direction (see Figure 4-1) (The cable plane is
formed by the cables on which the slewing gear hangs.)
Required direction of rotation
Load
Figure 4-1 Slewing gear with twisted cable plane

ATTENTION!
The cable plane may not be twisted by more than 45 (see Figure 4-1).
Otherwise the risk arises of the electrical connection cable to the slewing
gear being damaged by the cables, and the slewing gear could move in an
uncontrolled fashion.
f Switch off the rotational movement of the slewing before this happens!
The cable plane is twisted (see Figure 4-1) and the slewing gear has rotated by
approximately 45 or the load starts to rotate.
2. Switch off rotation of the slewing gear axle now.
Switching off the slewing gear results in the twisted cable plane rotating the slewing gear
together with the load in the required direction.
30.05.2008
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0403-2 E
4-3
Figure 4-2 Load in the required position, slanting cables

The load has reached the required position (see Figure 4-2) or the load does not rotate in the
required direction any more.
3. Now switch on the freewheel mode of the slewing gear.
Freewheel mode allows the slewing gear to be rotated back into its starting position by the
twisted cables, without the load being rotated.
If the load has not yet reached the required position and the slewing gear does not turn any
further:
fRepeat the entire procedure.
Slowing down the slewing motion of the load

f Switch off the freewheel mode of the slewing gear.
The load and the slewing gear are slowed down by the twisting of the cable plane.
When the cable plane has been twisted by 45 (see Figure 4-1), or when the motion has
stopped:
f Switch on the freewheel mode of the slewing gear.
ATTENTION! Only engage the rotation of the slewing gear in the opposite direction of
rotation of the load in case of an emergency, because this can lead to damage
to the slewing gear.
14.04.2009
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
2.2
Hydraulic diagram
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0832 E
5-1
2308.4631 ( 2308. 4718 )
max. working pressure: 200 bar

Legend:
A
= pipe (turn right)
= pipe (turn left)
DV1, DV2
= pressure relief valve
DV3
= pressure relief valve

(safety valve)
= filter
= hydraulic motor
KH2, KH3
= ball cock
= pipe for leakage oi
= motor
MB, MA
= pressure gauge
connection
= pump
P1, P2
= pump connection
RV1, RV2
= nonreturn valve
SB
= control block
SP1, SP2
= stop valve
TA
= tank
Y1
= solenoid valve
Design version:
Speed control
S
= flow regulator
WE
= shuttle valve
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
2.4
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1036 E
7-1
Parts list
Legend:
1 traverse
2 motor
3 hydraulic motor
5 axle
7 ball bearing slewing gear
8 slipring transmitter
9 cable
12 gimbal suspension
17 control block
18
20
21
22
23
27
29
32
33
solenoid valve
pump
pinion
hydraulic unit
oil filter
double hook
screw plug (ventilation screw)
plug-in connector
power supply cable
27.01.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
3.0
3.1
Details for safe use
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0619-1 E
8-1
Follow the regulations in the relevant accident prevention specifications for "Load
suspension devices".
Always adhere to the service manual.
Only instructed personnel is authorized to operate the slewing unit.
It is not permitted to move the load over people.
When necessary, the crane operator must give warning signs. If the crane operator
becomes aware of the presence of people who could be endangered by the crane, the
operator must immediately shut down the crane and not start moving the crane again
until the people are no longer found in the area of danger.
It is forbidden to transport people on the load or the slewing unit!
Only operate the slewing unit in its original condition or in a condition released by the
manufacturer.
Make sure that during operation of the grab all hoses, lines, pipes and fittings are in
good order and tight.

Dont exceed the lifting capacity of the crane!
It is forbidden to tear off stuck loads.
It is not permitted to ever load the slewing unit, the double hook, and the sling gear
more than their load-bearing capacity!

It is not permitted to load the tip of the double hook.
Grommets, becket, gimbals, and other suspended elements must be positioned in the
base of the hook and be able to move freely on the double hook.
The double hooks safety hood must be fully functioning to prevent accidental
unhinging.
Avoid hitting the slewing unit against objects to prevent damage.
It is not permitted to hang the double hook directly in the load. The exception here is
hanging the double hook in suspension equipment especially designed for this
purpose.
The double hook is to be used so that accidental unhinging of the load-carrying
equipment, the sling gear, or the load is prevented.

Never use a damaged sling gear or a sling gear where the identification mark is no
longer present!
27.01.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0619-2 E
8-2
Chains are not allowed to be twisted or knotted.

The crane operator must particularly observe the load or the empty run of the load-
carrying equipment during all crane movements. If this is not possible, the crane
operator is only allowed to operate the crane when following a signalpersons signals.
Avoid any jerky starting, lifting, stopping or lowering of the slewing unit.
Immediately inform the responsible supervising person of any slewing unit failure or
any lifting accessory failure as well as of any watched circumstance that might give rise
to expectations of a failure (e. g. noises, elevated temperatures, unusual behaviour of
the slewing unit, etc.).
Only operate the slewing unit, the hydraulic fluid and the lubricants within the
admissible temperature range (see Technical Data or Recommended Oil).

In case of any failures stop the slewing unit operation immediately and prevent it from
being restarted. Failures must immediately be remedied!

Dismantle protective equipment when and only when the slewing unit is at standstill.
27.01.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
3.2
Putting into operation
3.2.1
Assembly instructions - Initial start-up
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0619-3 E
8-3
The assembly and initial start-up may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Personal protective equipment must be worn during all work. It includes:
Protective clothes
Protective helmet
Safety shoes with toe caps and puncture-resistant base
Protective goggles
Protective gloves
Risk of injury due to improper work and improper start-up!

Work at the slewing unit may be carried out only in accordance with all safety
instructions, safety regulations and accident prevention regulations.
WARNUNG
Tools and other parts must be stored in such a way as to prevent them from
falling down.
The movable parts of the slewing unit, such as the double hook, must be
secured against unintentional displacement.
Danger of life due to electric shock!

Make sure that the power is switched off and secured against switching on
again.
DANGER
Make sure that voltage and frequency correspond to the data indicated on the
nameplate.
Make sure that the power supply cable is not damaged.
27.01.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0619-4 E
8-4
Requirements for the assembly:

Voltage and frequency of the power supply must correspond to the data indicated
on the nameplate.
The power supply cable must be equipped with a tension relief.
The parts with which the slewing unit is fastened to the carrying device, such as the
crane rope, must fit in size and lifting capacity to the slewing unit and the crane.
Smooth communication with the crane operator must be ensured.
Assembly:
1. Check hosepipes, connecting elements and gaskets of the hydraulic system for
leaks.
2. Connect the suspension of the slewing unit with the carrying device and observe the
SWL of the lifting appliance.
3. Connect the slewing unit with the plug-in connector of the power supply cable.
4. Fit the cable tension relief. Take care that the rubber-sheathed power supply cable
does not stress the plug-in connector (for fastening points, see Fig. 4.1.5
Schmierstellen). Attach the tension relief in such a way as to avoid any chafing of
the power supply cable.
5. Make sure that nobody remains in the danger area of the slewing unit. Lift the
slewing unit until the double hook hangs freely.
6. Check the oil level and refill as needed (see chapter 4.2.1)
For oil recommendations, see sheet no. 11-1
7. Check the sense of rotation of the slewing unit. If the sense of rotation is wrong,
swap the two external cables. If the plug-in connector is not assembled, connect
them according to the wiring diagram.
8. Check that the locking devices on all pins and shackles are present and secured.
9. Before the initial commissioning, the proper assembly and the correct working of the
slewing unit must be inspected by a person qualified to do so.
If the temperature of the hydraulic fluid is below the start-up temperature (see page
no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil temperature), then the hydraulic fluid must be preheated by
means of a heating up to the temperature that is necessary to put the system into
operation (Please refer to chapter 2.4 Nomenclature and Hydraulic Diagram in the
Spare parts list to see if the slewing unit is equipped with a heating). If no heating is
available, change hydraulic fluid and use preheated hydraulic fluid if necessary.
If the temperature is between the start up temperature and the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation, (see page no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil
temperature), use a heating to preheat the hydraulic fluid up to the temperature that
is necessary to put the system into operation or
Close the ball cocks KH2 and KH3 (see page no. 10-1), if any,
or move the slewing unit until the stop, if any, is reached (see number 36 chapter
2.4 Legend)
Turn on the slewing unit and keep it turned on for one minute to ensure the pump
pumps oil via the pressure relief valve into the tank.
Then pause for two minutes.
Repeat this procedure until the oil is warmed-up to the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation.
Open ball cocks KH2 and KH3, if any (see page no. 10-1).
27.01.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0619-5 E
8-5
Table: 3.2.1 Oil temperature

Max. upper
working
temperature
Hydraulic fluid
Start up
temperature
Temperature that is
necessary to put the
system into operation
Shell Tellus Arctic 32

NATO-code: H 540
-30 C
-20 C
+70 C
-25 C
-15 C
+85 C
HVLP 32
acc. to DIN 51524/3 HV
-15 C
-5 C
+70 C
HLP 46
acc. to DIN51524/2
-5 C
+5 C
+80 C
HLP 68
acc. to DIN51524/2
+5 C
+12 C
+85 C
After about 50 operating hours, change the oil filter set (see sheet no. 10-1) and
check that screws and nuts are tightly secured; for tightening torques, see the spare
parts list..
3.2.2
Daily start-up
Check the oil level (see point 4.2.1)
If the temperature of the hydraulic fluid is below the start-up temperature (see page
no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil temperature), then the hydraulic fluid must be preheated by
means of a heating up to the temperature that is necessary to put the system into
operation (Please refer to chapter 2.4 Nomenclature and Hydraulic Diagram in the
Spare parts list to see if the slewing unit is equipped with a heating). If no heating is
available, change hydraulic fluid and use preheated hydraulic fluid if necessary.
If the temperature is between the start up temperature and the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation, (see page no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil
temperature), use a heating to preheat the hydraulic fluid up to the temperature that
is necessary to put the system into operation or
Close the ball cocks KH2 and KH3 (see page no. 10-1), if any,
or move the slewing unit until the stop, if any, is reached (see number 36 chapter
2.4 Legend)
Turn on the rotator and keep it turned on for one minute to ensure the pump
pumps oil via the pressure relief valve into the tank.
Then pause for two minutes.
Repeat this procedure until the oil is warmed-up to the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation.
Open ball cocks KH2 and KH3, if any (see page no. 10-1).
Check hosepipes, connecting elements and gaskets of the hydraulic system for leaks
Check the coupler for firmness. The strain relief must be located in such a manner
that the power supply cable does not exert any kind of traction on the coupler.
Supply the lubricating points with grease in accordance with 4.1.9 Lubricating
instructions (for lubricating points, see 4.1.10, For greases used by the manufacturer
please refer to data sheet).
21.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
3.3
Operation
3.3.1
Information for operation

ATTENTION!
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1218 E
9-1
Collisions of the slewing unit with other objects are to be avoided in

order to prevent damages.
Instructions for safe operation, see 3.1 page no.. 8-1

Function description, see page no. 4-1 to 4-3
Please note that the possible load weight of the crane is reduced by the weight of the
slewing unit.
The double hook must always be positioned above the centre of gravity.
The specific operating instructions for each sling gear must be followed.
The suspension links of the sling gear must be of such size that they can move freely
in the double hook.
Lifting straps or round slings must never be allowed to run loosely over the double
hook. The load could topple!
Lopsided loads must be lowered and fastened again.
The function of the hook safety catch of the double hook must be checked regularly.
3.4
Shut-down
The slewing unit must be put down on a suitable support (wooden beam) since
otherwise the turner can be damaged.
During putting down it is to be seen to it that the hanging cable is neither broken nor
pinched.
The plug-in connector is to be provided with protective caps.
In addition, for longer periods out of service, the slewing unit should be exercised
every 3 month to prevent corrosion and gumming of the hydraulic oil in the control
elements.
In case the slewing unit is intended to be put out of operation for a longer period of
time, grease must be applied to all lubricating points.
3.5
Reoperation
Observe all the specifications of point 3.2 and 3.3
Check the device for possible damages
Supply the lubricating points with grease in accordance with 4.4 Oil
Recommendation (for lubricating instructions, see 4.1.4, for lubricating points, see
4.1.5; for the greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet).
3.6
Transportation
The slewing unit must be transported on a suitable support since otherwise
damages can occur.
The slewing unit is to be secured against overturning.
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.0
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-1 E
10-1
Figure 4.0
Legend:
1 ball cock (KH1)
2 measuring point (MT)
3 pressure relief valve (DV3)
4 measuring point (MB)
5 measuring point (MA)
6 ball cock (KH2)
7 ball cock (KH3)
8 ventilation screw
9
10
11
15
17
18
oil level glass

hosepipes
oil filter
tank cap mounting
control block (SB)
solenoid valve
Design version:
24 flow regulator (flow control valve)
(speed control)
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.1
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-2 E
10-2
Maintenance
Insufficient and improper maintenance might result in operating troubles and thus high
repair costs and downtimes. This is why regular maintenance is imperative.
Risk of injury due to maintenance work that has been carried out
improperly!
Improper working might cause considerable personal and material damages.
WARNING
Maintenance and repair of the slewing unit must only be carried out by
authorized, well-trained and instructed specialized personnel. This personnel
must be specifically instructed in the imminent dangers. the personnel must be
allowed to reject any instructions of third parties that might breach the safety
instructions.
The operating staff must be informed about any maintenance work carried out
before starting the maintenance work.
Responsibilities of the staff for assembly/disassembly, putting into operation,
operation, maintenance and repair must be clearly defined and adhered to!
Make sure that only such personnel works on the slewing unit who is assigned
to do so!
Before starting the maintenance work disconnect the power supply of the
slewing unit and protect it against accidental restart. To do this, it is also
possible to unplug the electric plug-in connector.
The product-specific safety instructions must be complied with when handling
oils and greases.
Only qualified technical personnel may carry out any work on the hydraulic system
and the electrical system in accordance with the valid circuit diagrams.
Personnel must be instructed regarding the possible hazards and the protective
measures that need to be taken.
DANGER
DANGER
Danger to life from hydraulic oil discharge at high pressure

Ensure that parts of the hydraulic system on which you are working have been
relieved of pressure. Tighten untight hydraulic couplings in unpressurized
condition only.
Rectify any leakage immediately.
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Maintenance Overview
Page-no.
A 16.1220-3 E
10-2
Table: 4.1.1 Maintenance Overview
Item. Maintenance work
Maintenance interval
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Change the filter element of the return filter

Check the hydraulic hoses for proper assembly and
operational safety
Check all screw connections for firm seating
Check the double hook for wear and cracks
Check the slewing unit for cracks and signs of
breakage in the material and at welding joints
Check the parts and fittings for damage, wear or
other changes
Check the integrity and function of safety devices
(e.g. pin locking devices)
Maintenance work on the slip-ring transmitter
12
13
14
15
16
17
a)
b)
c)
d)
weekly b)
after 500 h
every 2000 h
Grease lubricating points G (pin) (and M)

Grease lubricating points H (toothing)
Grease lubricating points K (axle)
Grease lubricating points L (bearing) and S
(shackles and chains)
Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets of
the hydraulics for tightness
Check the plug-in connector and the tension relief
for firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)
Check the hydraulic oil level
Change the hydraulic oil
Check the filter element for clogging
after 50 h
a)
daily
c)
*)
every 1000 h
4.1.1
Class-no.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Xd)
Xd)
X
X
X
X
X
Xc)
for container handling: grease weekly, after 100 operating hours at the latest; for
other loads: grease monthly, after 300 operating hours at the latest
after every 100 operating hours at the latest
after one year at the latest; see maintenance instructions in the spare parts list
An extension of the useful life of the hydraulic oil is possible if a laboratory testing of
the hydraulic oil will allow it.
*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the sections with the individual
maintenance intervals.
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.1.2
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-4 E
10-2

Carry out the following maintenance work after the first 50 operating hours:
Table: 4.1.2
Item
*)
Maintenance work after the first 50 operating hours
Maintenance work
Maintenance work
performed
Date
Grease lubricating points G (and M)
Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets

of the hydraulics for tightness
Check the plug-in connector and the tension

relief for firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)
11
13
Signature
*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the maintenance overview (see
4.1.1 Maintenance Overview).
4.1.3

Carry out the following maintenance work after the first 500 operating hours:
Table: 4.1.3
Item
*)
Maintenance work after the first 500 operating hours
Maintenance work
Maintenance work
performed
Date
Grease lubricating points G (and M)


Signature
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.1.4
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-5 E
10-2
Maintenance interval weekly

Maintenance interval weekly; after each 100 operating hours at the latest:
Table: 4.1.4
Item
*)
Maintenance work weekly
Maintenance work
Maintenance work
performed
Date
a)
Grease lubricating points G (pin)
Grease lubricating points K (axle) and S (rope

pulley)
Signature
(and M)
a)
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.1.5
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-6 E
10-2

Maintenance interval every 1000 operating hours; after one year at the latest:
Table: 4.1.5
Item
*)
Maintenance work every 1000 operating hours
Maintenance work
Maintenance work
performed
Date
a)
Grease lubricating points L (bearing) and S



Signature
(and M)
10
Check the hydraulic hoses for proper assembly

and operational safety
12
13
14

15
Check the parts and fittings for damage, wear or

other changes
16
Check the integrity and function of safety

devices (e.g. pin locking devices)
a)
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.1.6
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-7 E
10-2

Maintenance interval every 2000 operating hours:
Table: 4.1.6
Item
*)
Maintenance work every 2000 operating hours
Maintenance work
Maintenance work
performed
Date
a)
Grease lubricating points L (drive end bearing) and S

Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets of the

hydraulics for tightness
Check the plug-in connector and the tension relief for

firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)
Signature
(and M)
d)
d)
10
11
12
Check the hydraulic hoses for proper assembly and

operational safety
13
14

15
Check the parts and fittings for damage, wear or other

changes
16
Check the integrity and function of safety devices (e.g.

pin locking devices)
17
Maintenance work on the slip-ring transmitter
c)
a)
d)
An extension of the useful life of the hydraulic oil is possible if a laboratory testing of
the hydraulic oil will allow it.
c)
after one year at the latest; see maintenance instructions in the spare parts list
Clean and grease the bearings of the electric motor every 15000 operating hours (see
4.1.11 )
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.1.7
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-8 E
10-2
Oil change
The first oil change is to be carried out after about 500 service hours. Further oil
changes every 2000 service hours - after one year at the latest. An extension of the
useful life of the hydraulic oil is possible if a laboratory testing of the hydraulic oil will
allow it.
Extraordinary service conditions may cause excessive pollution or an ageing of the oil.
In such cases, we recommend to have an oil analysis carried out in the laboratories of
the oil supplier.
Oil brands, see table oil recommendation, page no. 11-1 Filled oil grade see data
sheet.
In order to protect the hydraulic components, the oil must be in accordance with purity
level 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406 at least (approximately corresponding to class 9
according to NAS 1638).
Since the purity level of new oil is generally lower, the new oil must be filtered. To do this
either refill oil via the filter or use special filling devices that filter the oil to reach the
required purity class.
N O T I C E ! Pay attention to utmost cleanliness during the oil change. Any pollution
might cause malfunctions and damages of the hydraulic system. Make
sure that parts of the hydraulic system such as tank, pump, hoses, etc.
never are open longer than necessary.
Proceeding: (Components see figure 4.0 and figure 4.1.10)
1. Set down the slewing unit
2. Put a suitable collection basin under the oil drain plug (5)
3. Unscrew and clean drain plug (5) (figure 4.1.10)
4. Unscrew ventilation screw (8) (figure 4.0) to ventilate the tank
5. Drain oil out of tank (the unit should have its operational temperature)
6. Clean tank:
Clean the area around the tank cap.
Depressurize the hoses (10) (see figure 4.0). For this purpose connect a
MINIMESS hose to the test point (MA) in such a way to ensure the oil flows
into a basin at the other end of the MINIMESS hose. Repeat this procedure at
test point (MB) and (MT).
Unscrew hoses (10) (see figure 4.0) from the tank cap.
Unscrew the tank cap from the traverse (15) and take the hydraulic unit
including tank cap out of the traverse.
Clean the tank by means of a plain plastic scraper. Dont use cleaning wool,
cloths or cleaning paper since they might leave fibers. Clean the tank by
rinsing it by means of a suitable detergent, e. g. benzene.
If metal particles are found in the tank, this might be a sign of pump
wear.
Check the threaded holes of the tank cap mounting (15). Clean and/or recut
thread if necessary.
Pay attention to utmost cleanliness during assembly of the hydraulic unit and
hoses.
Note:
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
4.1.8
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-9 E
10-2
Replace oil filter insert (11)

Rescrew oil drain plug
Fill tank (via filter (11))
Check oil level (see chapter 4.2.1)
Make a test run of the slewing unit.
Check tightness of hydraulic system.
Dispose of the waste oil in accordance with local regulations.
Oil filter
In case of new units, the filter insert is to be replaced after about 50 service hours, in
any other case after every oil change. Furthermore, the oil filter must be checked after
repairs of the hydraulic system and, if necessary, the filter insert must be replaced.
4.1.9
Lubricating instructions
Regular lubrication is required in order to ensure trouble free operation of the slewing
unit (see lubrication points figure 4.1.10).
Grease lubricating points G weekly, after 100 service hours at the latest, if
containers are handled.
Grease lubricating points G monthly, after 300 service hours at the latest, if other
loads are handled.
Grease lubricating point H, K and S every three months, after 1000 service hours at
the latest.
Grease lubricating point M weekly, after 100 service hours at the latest.
For greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet!

(Grease recommendation see chapter 4.4)
If you mix different greases, please ensure compatibility of grease grades. If you have
any questions regarding grease compatibility, please ask the corresponding grease
manufacturer.
In general, we recommend the following:
At temperatures up to -20C:
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point G and K:
lithium-saponified grease, DIN 51825- KP 2 K
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point H:
M2E-20; DIN 51502, e. g. Zhlit VZ
(Zhlit VZ is a calcium-saponified grease on a mineral oil base from the MLLENBERG &
SONNTAG company, with a penetration of 265-295 mm/s )
At temperatures up to -50C:
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point G and K:
KE1N-50; DIN 51502, z. B. URETHYN LT 60
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point H:
KE1N-50; DIN 51502, z. B. URETHYN LT 60
(URETHYN LT 60 is a synthetic low-temperature grease from the company FUCHS
LUBRITECH GMBH)
Note: Do not mix synthetic lubricants with each other, neither with mineral lubricants!
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-10 E
10-2
4.1.10 Lubrication points
Legend:
lubrication point H (toothing)
lubrication point K (axle)
lubrication point L (drive end
bearing)
lubrication point G (pin)
lubrication point S (shackles and
chains)
Design version:
suspension with pin
lubrication point M (pin)
1 fastening point for tension relief
Figure 4.1.10
Note:
Regular lubrication of the chain, suspension links and shackles can ensure a
significantly longer permissible service life compared to unlubricated parts. It
is recommended to lubricate all chain links and shackles before the initial
start-up. During lubrication, make sure that you lubricate the contact surfaces
to prevent premature wear. Suitable lubricants are those used for lubrication
of wire ropes or toothing (see Chapter 4.4)
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-11 E
10-2
4.1.11 Electric motor

Beware! Danger of burning!
High temperatures of over 80C can occur on the surface of the electric motor.
The motor must be allowed to cool before the start of the maintenance work.
WARNING
Maintenance intervals: every 15,000 operating hours, after 3 years at the latest
Before the start of the maintenance work, the power supply of the slewing unit must
be disconnected and secured against restart.
Clean the bearings and fill them to the half with grease, according to Chapter 4.5
Lubricant recommendation.
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-12 E
10-2
4.1.12 Slip-ring transmitter

Installation, maintenance or repair may only be carried out by qualified and
authorized electrician!
DANGER
Maintenance rate: 1x yearly

Before the start of the maintenance work, disconnect the power supply of the slewing
unit and secure it against restart.
C a u t i o n ! All work on the slip-ring transmitter may only be carried out after
disconnecting the power supply!
Open and remove the hood of the slewing unit.
Remove the accumulated dust by vacuum cleaning.
B e w a r e ! The bow contacts can be slightly bent during this process.
If vacuum cleaning is not possible: Remove the dust by dry, clean and oil-free
compressed air.
Protect the carbon brush holder and its slip ring against moisture with contact oil.
The contact points of the slip ring and wire bow contact must be sprayed very lightly
with the prescribed contact oil: CRAMOLIN Protection (ITW Chemische Produkte
GmbH)
B e w a r e ! Do n o t spray the carbon brush holder and its slip ring!
Check the wear of the bow contacts.
Check the wear of the carbon brushes. The parts of the carbon brush holder must not
touch any insulating rings or slip rings.
Mount the hood again after the cleaning.
Do not damage or squeeze any cable insulations!
Legend:
1 carbon-brush
2 carbon-brush holder
3 slip-ring way
4 insulating ring
Figure 4.1.12
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.2
Required checks
4.2.1
Check oil level
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-13 E
10-2
The slewing unit must be levelled horizontally.

The maximum or minimum oil level can be read on the oil dipstick or on the oil level
glass.
Too much oil causes inadmissible overpessure in the tank.
Too little oil causes an overheating of the hydraulic system and might lead to pump
damages.
To replenish oil, please see table of recommended fluids, page no. 11-1.
4.2.2
Check and adjust pressure (see figure 4.0)

N O T I C E ! It is not allowed to change the settings of the pressure relief valves DV3,
without SMAGs prior explicit approval. The warranty will be void if the
settings of the valves are changed without prior approval.
N O T I C E ! Pressures to be set when the unit is at operating state temperature!
Safety valve DV3:
The entire hydraulic system ist protected by means of a safety valve (DV3). The
standard pressure has been set to about 200 bar in the factory and should never be
changed.
Check and adjustment of DV3:
N O T I C E ! Please adjust the pressure as quickly as possible in order to avoid any
excessive overlaod of the system.
Connect the manometer to measuring points (MA) and (MB)
Close ball cocks (KH2) and (KH3)
Increase pressure of safety valve (DV3) by means of the setting screw (completely
screw in the setting screw)
Set pressure relief valve (DV3) to 200 bar
Open the ball cocks (KH2) and (KH3)
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Note:
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-14 E
10-2
When the axle turns without load, vibrations might cause a chattering noise.
This problem can be remedied by adjusting the stop valves (SP1) and (SP2).
To adjust the stop valves proceed as described below:

The system must be at operating state temperature
Completely unscrew the adjustment screws (SP1) and (SP2) (see figure 4.2.2.:
control block (SB) )
To turn to the right, screw the adjustment screws (SP1) until the chattering noise
stops.
To turn to the left, screw the adjustment screws (SP2) until the chattering noise
stops.
Pressure check:
The banking pressure (right-hand rotation measured at (MB), left-hand rotation
measured at (MA)) should not exceed 35 bar, unless the hydraulic oil is unnecessarily
heated or troublefree operation of the slewing unit cannot be guaranteed.
Only adjust the adjustment screws (SP1) and (SP2) if the slewing unit chatters when
rotating.
adjusting screw for

stop valve (SP1)
adjusting screw for

stop valve (SP2)
Figure 4.2.2 control block (SB)
DV3
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.2.3
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-15 E
10-2
Wear
Depending on the conditions of use and the circumstances of operation, the double
hook must be assessed by a competent person as required. This must occur at least
once a year. A competent person is someone who has sufficient knowledge of loadcarrying equipment due to their specialist training and experience. They must be familiar
with the corresponding state work safety rules, accident prevention rules, and general
recognised rules of engineering to an extent that they can evaluate the work safety
conditions for slewing units and crane hooks.
The permissible wearing is listed in Table 4-1. Calliper gauge (sliding calliper) precision
is sufficient when measuring.
Grooves of wear may be reground to remove grooves within the amount of wearing
permissible. Parts that are impermissibly worn or damaged must be replaced.
Welding on double hooks and bolts, e.g., to repair signs of wear, is not permitted.
4.2.4
Check of hydraulic hose lines
The hydraulic hose lines must be checked as required, but at least once a year, in case
of multishift operation every six months. After any maintenance and repair work the
hydraulic hose lines must be checked to make sure they are assembled properly and in
an operational safety state.
The hose lines must be replaced if one of the following criteria has been detected:
- Damages of the external layer event to the wire braid reenforcement (e. g. chafe
marks, cuts, cracks)
- Brittleness of the external layer (formation of cracks in the hose material)
- Deformations that do not correspond to the natural form of the hose or of the hose
line, in unpressurized as well as in pressurized condition or when bended, e. g.
separation of layers, bubbling
- Leakages
- Damage or deformation of the hose fitting (prejudiced sealing function)
- Detaching of the hose out of the fitting
- Corrosion of hose fitting impairing the function and rigidity
- Specified period of storage and/or use of the hose or of the hose line is exceeded.
Hydraulic hoses must not be stored longer than 2 years.
Hydraulic hoses must not be used longer than 6 years (including
maximum storage period of 2 years).
Any defect must be eliminated immediately.
Only use hose lines according to the spare parts list to replace defective hose lines.
Make sure that the replacement lines are clean; close them with dust covers until
they are fitted.
Make sure thate the hydraulic hoses are admitted for the required pressures.
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-16 E
10-2
A marking on the hydraulic hoses indicates the date of their manufacture (quarter
and year). For example, the mark 2 Q 09 means that the hose was manufactured in
the second quarter of 2009.
Inspection of chains and individual chain links
The chains and individual chain links or suspension links (see Fig. Data Sheet Dimensions) must be inspected by a specialist at intervals of not more than 12
months. Shorter intervals are required under unfavourable conditions of use such as
increased wear or intensified corrosion. In addition to visual inspections, a magnetic
testing for absence of cracks must be performed at intervals of maximum three years.
The inspections have to be documented in accordance with the regulations of the
country where the chain is used.
Prior to the inspection, the chain links must be thoroughly cleaned to ensure that they
are free from oil, dirt and rust. The cleaning method may not corrode the base material
and may not cover cracks or surface defects.
The chains or suspension links must be replaced:
a) If a chain link is deformed or broken and if it has deposits that cannot be removed.
b) If chain links were straightened, welded, bent, burned or otherwise changed.
c) If a chain link has dents, cracks, grooves, cuts, corrosion pits or deformations.
Minor dents can be repaired by a specialist , provided that the remaining material
thickness in that place is more than 90% of the original diameter and no abrupt
change in cross section is noticeable.
d) If, as a result of plastic deformation, the outside length of a chain link has increased
by more than 3% of the outside nominal dimension.
e) If wear or excessive corrosion is present anywhere on a chain link. The wear of up
to 90 % of the original diameter (dn) is permissible, calculated as the average value
of two measurements of the diameters d1 und d2 performed at 90 to each other
(see Fig. 4.2.4).
f) If, as a result of wear, the inside length has increased by at least L=8%
( L = L1 Lo ) for suspension links
by at least L=5% for a chain link
by at least L=2% for a chain with 11 pitches (links)
g) In the event of discolouration caused by heat or damage due to chemical influences
Chains to be replaced if:
d1+d2
> 0,9 dn
2
Figure 4.2.4
19.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.1220-17 E
10-2
The repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer or, for minor dents (see Point
c) ), by a specialist .
Specialists are persons who, by virtue of their professional training and

experience, have sufficient knowledge in the field of lifting equipment for loading
of bulk materials and who are acquainted with relevant national work safety
regulations, accident prevention regulations, rules for safety and health at work,
guidelines and generally recognised technical standards (e.g. ISO sheets) as
well as the present operating instructions to the extent that they are able to judge
the safe working condition of lifting equipment, shackles and chains.
Note: Regular lubrication of the chain, suspension links and shackles can ensure a
significantly longer permissible service life compared to unlubricated parts. It is
recommended to lubricate all chain links and shackles before the initial start-up.
During lubrication, make sure that you lubricate the contact surfaces to prevent
premature wear. Suitable lubricants are those used for lubrication of wire ropes
or toothing (see Chapter 4.4)
Check the hydraulic couplings to tightness.
Check the screw connections.
Check the bearing wear.
Check the plug-in connector and tension relief.
Monitor the oil temperature.
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.3
Repairs
4.3.1
General
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-1 E
10-3
For major repairs please consult the after-sales service of Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG.
Risk of injury in case of insufficient qualification!
Improper working might cause considerable personal and material damages.
WARNING
Maintenance and repair of the slewing unit must only be carried out by
authorized, well-trained and instructed specialized personnel. This personnel
must be specifically instructed in the imminent dangers. the personnel must be
allowed to reject any instructions of third parties that might breach the safety
instructions.
Only specialist electricians or instructed personnel under direction and
supervision of a specialist electrician are allowed to work on the electric systems
of the slewing unit in compliance with the electrotechnical regulations.
Only personnel who has special knowledge of and experience in hydraulic
systems is allowed to work on hydraulic systems!
Responsibilities of the staff for assembly/disassembly, putting into operation,
operation, maintenance and repair must be clearly defined and adhered to!
Make sure that only such personnel works on the slewing unit who is assigned to
do so!
Secure the parts against unintentional movement.
Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and protect it against accidental
restart before starting repair work. If available, remove the electric plug-in
connector (32) (see 2.4 Parts list).
Wear the following personal when carrying out any maintenance or repair work:
- Protective helmet
- Protective goggles
- Protective clothes
- Protective gloves
- Safety shoes with toe caps and puncture-resistant base
The following must be observed for any repair:
Shift the slewing unit in such a way that the double hook and the movable parts do not
move accidentally.
After each disassembly or repair the maximum pressure indicated on the nameplate
must be checked. Use appropriate test manometers for this purpose.
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-2 E
10-3
As a basic principle, supply all the lubricating points with grease in accordance with 4.4
Oil Recommendation before any restart (for lubricating instructions see 4.1.4, for
lubricating points see 4.1.5).
Only start the slewing unit after repairs or modifications if
- the reliable operating state is restored,
- the work is definitely declared completed by authorized qualified personnel
- nobody is within the area of danger.
Before restarting the slewing unit adhere to the instructions specified in chapter
3.2 Putting into operation.
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.3.2
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-3 E
10-3
Replacement of hydraulic motor
Legend:
1
2
3,4
5
7
8
measuring point MA
pressure relief valve
hosepipes
hosepipe (drain connection)
hydraulic motor
pinion screw (tightening torque
70 Nm)
9
valve block
10
screw (tightening torque 47 Nm)
11
pinion
12,14 standpipe elbow
13
mounting
Figure 4.3.2
DANGER

relieved of pressure.
1.
Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and secure it against restart. If one or
more plug-in connectors are available, remove them.
2.
Dismantle the hood.
3.
Depressurise the hydraulics via the Minimess connectors MA and MB.

For this purpose, a Minimess hose must be connected to the Minimess connector of
the relevant section in such a way that the oil at the other end of the Minimess hose
can flow into a tank. (The connector MB is opposite to MA.)
4.
Unscrew the mounting (13) and put it down carefully on the slewing unit.
5.
Release the hoses (3) and (4) on the ball cocks and collect the hydraulic fluid.
6.
Unscrew the standpipe elbows (12) and (14) and collect the hydraulic fluid.
7.
Protect the dismantled pipe section from dirt.
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-4 E
10-3
8.
Release the hose (5) on the hydraulic motor (7), protect the opening of the hose
from dirt.
9.
Dismantle the valve block (9) and protect it from dirt.
10. Unscrew the screws (8) and (10) and lift the hydraulic motor (7) from the slewing
unit.
11. Assemble the new hydraulic motor in reverse order.
12. Fill the hydraulic motor with hydraulic oil through the drain connection (5) !
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.3.3
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-5 E
10-3
Replacement of hydraulic pump
Legend:
1, 2 hosepipes
3
screw (47 Nm)
4
hydraulic unit
5
cover
6
intermediate flange
7
distributor part
8
pump
9
plastic plug
10 screw (25 Nm)
11 measuring point MA
Figure 4.3.3
DANGER

1. Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and secure it against restart. If one or
2. Dismantle the hood.
3. Depressurise the hydraulics via the Minimess connectors MA and MB.
For this purpose, a Minimess hose must be connected to the Minimess connector
of the relevant section in such a way that the oil at the other end of the Minimess
hose can flow into a tank. (The connector MB is opposite to MA.)
4. Release the hoses (1) and (2) and protect them from dirt.
3. Unscrew the screws (3) and lift the hydraulic unit (4) from the slewing unit.
4. Unscrew the distributor parts (7) and protect them from dirt.
5. Unscrew the pump (8).
6. Remove the plastic plug (9) on the underside of the new pump !
7. Assemble the new pump in reverse order.
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.3.4
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-6 E
10-3
Replacement of axle bearing
Figure 4.3.4
Legend:
1 traverse
3 slip-ring transmitter
6 socket head cap screw
7
9
10
11
axle
slip-ring body
brush holder
axial cylindrical roller bearing
Before repair work and before replacement of the axle bearing, please consult
the after-sales service of Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG. Only specialist service
centres who have experience of handling with axial cylindrical roller bearings are
allowed to carry out this work.
Manager Service:
Mr. Kevin Wenke
+49 -5341 / 302 - 493
kevin.wenke@smag.de
Service Administration:
Mrs. Schwarz
+49 -5341 / 302 - 673
elke.schwarz@smag.de
Service Technicians:
Mr. Mller
Mr. Olbrich
Mr. Schmerschneider
marcus.mller@smag.de
olaf.olbrich@smag.de
bernd.schmerschneider@smag.de
+49 -5341 / 302 - 672

+49 -5341 / 302 - 491
+49 -5341 / 302 - 492
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
4.3.5
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-7 E
10-3
Replacement of pinion
Figure 4.3.5
Legend:
2 measuring point MB
3 hosepipes
4 hosepipes
5 ball cock
7 hosepipe
8 hydraulic motor
9 hexagon screw (tightening
torque 70 Nm)
DANGER
10 socket head cap screws (tightening

torque 47 Nm)
11 socket head cap screws (tightening
torque 250 Nm)
12 flange
13 lubricant duct
14 pinion
15 control block
16 pinion holder
17 cover

1. Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and secure it against restart. If one or
2. Dismantle the hood.
20.07.2010
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0718-8 E
10-3
3. Depressurise the hydraulics via the Minimess connectors MA and MB (2)

(measuring point MA see figure 4.3.3). (The connector MB is opposite to MA.)
For this purpose, a Minimess hose must be connected to the Minimess connector
of the relevant section in such a way that the oil at the other end of the Minimess
hose can flow into a tank.
4. Unscrew the cover (17).
5. Unscrew the screw (9)
6. Unscrew the screw (11)
7. Pull out the pinion (14) and dismantle the pinion holder (16). If the pinion cannot
be pulled out easily, proceed as described below. Use an extractor tool to
dismantle the pinion.
8. Assemble the new pinion in reverse order. For tightening torque of the screws,
see the spare parts list.
If the pinion cannot be pulled out easily:
8.a Dismantle the hydraulic motor (8) as described under 4.3.2.
9.
Unscrew the screws (11), unscrew the lubricant duct (13) and lift the flange (12).
10. Pull out the pinion (14) and dismantle the pinion holder (16).
11. Assemble the new pinion in reverse order. For tightening torque of the screws,
see the spare parts list.
03.06.2010
OIL RECOMMENDATION
PEINER Greifer
4.4
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0719-1 E
11-1

For normal operation, a hydraulic fluid of ISO-viscosity VG 46 shall be used. For
summer or winter operation, a hydraulic fluid of ISO-viscosity VG 68 or FB 32 is to be
used according to the ambient temperature.
In order to protect the hydraulic components, the oil must be in accordance with purity
level 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406 at least (approximately corresponding to class 9
according to NAS 1638).
Since the purity level of new oil is generally lower, the new oil must be filtered. To do this
either refill oil via the filter or use special filling devices that filter the oil to reach the
required purity class.
The following oil grades are appropriate and released by SMAG:
Winter
ISO viscosity
Summer
VG 32
VG 46
VG 68
HVLP 32
HLP 46
HLP 68
acc. to DIN51524/2
acc. to DIN51524/2
-15C
-5C
+5C
-5C
+5C
+12C
+70C
+80C
+85C
< -5C to -20C
-5C to +30C
> +30C
ARAL
Vitam HF 32
Vitam GF 46
Vitam GF 68
AVIA
AVIA FLUID HVI 32
Standard
Start up temperature *)
Temperature that is
Max. upper working
temperature
Ambient temperature
BP
AVIA FLUID RSL46 AVIA FLUID RSL68
ENERGOL
SHF-HV 32
ENERGOL
HLP-S 46
ENERGOL
HLP-HM 46
HYSPIN AWH-M 32
HYSPIN AWS 46
HYSPIN AWS 68
UNIVIS J 32
NUTO H 46
NUTO H 68
RENOLIN MR 32 MC
RENOLIN MR 15
RENOLIN MR 20
RENOLIN B 32 HVI
RENOLIN B 15
RENOLIN B 20
MOBIL
Univis N 32
DTE 25
DTE 26
SHELL
Tellus T 32
Tellus S2 V 32
Tellus 46
Tellus S2 M 46
Tellus 68
Tellus S2 M 68
TEXACO
Equivis ZS 32
Azolla ZS 46
Azolla ZS 68
CASTROL
ESSO
FUCHS
FUCHS LUBRITECH
*) Temperature from which the hydraulic pump may be started in order to preheat the
oil by means of the pressure relief valve up to the temperature that is necessary to
put the system into operation.
03.06.2010
OIL RECOMMENDATION
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0719-2 E
11-2
Do not use other hydraulic fluids without SMAGs prior release.

Mixing of different hydraulic fluids is not allowed without prior consultation of the
corresponding manufacturer and without prior release.
Do not use biodegradable hydraulic oil without SMAGs prior release. It is generally not
allowed to mix mineral and biodegradable hydraulic oil!
A hydraulic oil of type HVLP according to DIN 51524-3 NATO code: H 540 should be
used for operation at -50C to +40C. In case of temperatures below -25C, the
hydraulic oil must be pre-heated.
Winter
Standard
Winter
HVLP
NATO-code: H 540
Start up temperature *)
-25C
-30C
Temperature that is
-15C
-20C
Max. upper working

temperature
+85C
+70C
< - 50C bis +40C
< - 50C bis +40C
Ambient temperature
ARAL
Vitam H 540
AVIA
AVILUB HYDRAULIKFL H 540
SHELL
H&R ChemPharm GmbH
Hydraulikflssigkeit H-540
Shell Tellus Arctic
SRS Wiolan H-540
*) Temperature from which the hydraulic pump may be started in order to preheat the
oil by means of the pressure relief valve up to the temperature that is necessary to
put the system into operation.
03.06.2010
OIL RECOMMENDATION
PEINER Greifer
4.5
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0719-3 E
11-3
Lubricant recommendation
Grease for sliding and
rolling bearings
Grease for sliding and

rolling bearings
Low-temperature range
DIN 51502 KP 2 K
mineral lubricant
lithium thickener
AGIP
ARAL
AVIA
BP
DIN 51502 KPHC2N-50

synthetic lubricant
organic thickener
Agip GR MU EP 2
Agip Longtime Grease 2
-20C to +120C *)
- 35C to + 135C
Aralub HLP 2
Aralub SKL 2
-20C to +120C
- 50C to + 130C
AVIALITH 2 EP
AVIA SYNTOGREASE PE-T
-30C to +120C
-60 to +140C
Energrease LS-EP 2
Energrease SY 2202
-25C to +130C
- 40C to + 170C
BREMER &
LEGUIL GMBH
Rivolta S.K.D. 3602
Castrol
Spheerol E PL 2
Optitemp LG 2
-20C to +140C
-50C to +120C
FUCHS
EUROPE
SCHMIERSTOFFE GMBH
RENOLIT LZR 2 H
RENOLIT HLT 2
-30C to +140C
- 40C to + 140C
FUCHS
LUBRITECH
Lagermeister EP 2
URETHYN LT 60
-20C to +130C
- 50C to + 140C
KLBER
LUBRICATION
Klberplex BEM 41-132
ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52
-40C to +150C
- 50C to + 120C
Mobil Oil
Mobilux EP 2
Mobilith SHC 100
-20C to +120C
(KPHC2N-40)
- 40C to + 150C
Shell
Retinax HD2 (Li/Ca)
AeroShell Grease 33
-25C to +120C
-70 to + 120C
Multis EP 2
Multis XLT 2
-25C to +120C
-60C to +130C
Total
-20C to +140C
RENOLIT MP
-40C to +120C
*) operating temperature range

03.06.2010
OIL RECOMMENDATION
PEINER Greifer
Note:
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0719-4 E
11-4
Do not mix synthetic lubricants with mineral lubricants!

Mix synthetic lubricants with another synthetic lubricant only after
consultation with the lubricant manufacturer.
Lubricant for the bearings

in the electric motor
Lubricant for the bearings

in the electric motor
synthetic lubricant
synthetic lubricant
BREMER &
LEGUIL GMBH
Rivolta S.K.D. 4002

-50C to +210C *)
Castrol
Firetemp XT 2
- 25C to + 180C
Fuchs
RENOLIT PU 8-061/2
RENOLIT HLT 1
-20C to +180C
FUCHS
LUBRITECH
URETHYN E/M 2
URETHYN LT 60
- 20C to + 180C
- 50C to + 140C
KLBER
LUBRICATION
PETAMO GY 193
ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52
approx. - 20C to + 180C
- 50C to + 120C
Shell
Gadus S3 T100/2
Gadus S2 V100/2
- 20C to + 160C
- 30C to + 130C

If you change over to a grease based on another soap type or another thickening agent,
the grease that had been used so far should be completely removed if possible. After
changeover the regreasing periods should be reduced in order to ensure the old grease
is removed as quickly as possible. If greases are mixed, this will impair the lubricating
properties and thus reduce the service life of the parts.
03.06.2010
OIL RECOMMENDATION
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 16.0719-5 E
11-5
Grease for toothing

DIN 51502 KP2 K (KPF2 N) DIN 51502 KE 1 N -50
mineral lubricant
synthetic lubricant
calcium thickener
organic thickener
Grease for toothing
AGIP
AUTOL TOP 2000
AVIA
AVIACAL 2 LD
-30 to +120C *)
-30 to +120C
CERITOL PK 1
BREMER &
LEGUIL GMBH
-60C to +140C
Energrease Mp-MG 2
BP
-30C to +175C
Fuchs
RENOLIT CA-LZ
FUCHS
LUBRITECH
LAGERMEISTER 3000
PLUS
-30 to +120C
URETHYN LT 60
KLBER
LUBRICATION
Klberplex AG 11-462
ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52
- 40C to + 180C
- 50C to + 120C
Mllenberg &
Sonntag
Zhlit VZ
Shell
Retinax HD2
-20C to +130C
-30C to +120C
- 50C to + 140C
- 20C to + 90C
AeroShell Grease 7
- 73C to + 135C

Slip-ring transmitter: the contact oil is solely intended for very light spraying of
wire contact bows and their slip ring.
CRAMOLIN Protection
Manufacturer: ITW CHEMISCHE PRODUKTE GMBH & Co KG
Mhlacker Strasse 149
D-75417 Mhlacker
Phone: +49 (0) 7041-9634-0
Fax: +49 (0) 7041-9634-29
Website: www.itwcp.de
E-mail: info@itwcp.de
CAUTION: Too much contact oil may cause short circuits.

Do not spray the brush holder and its slip ring!
After spraying with contact oil, turn the slip-ring transmitter 5 times by 360.
13.09.1999
SLEWING UNIT
PEINER Greifer
5.0
5.2
Page-no.
A 16.0757 E
12-1

- Failure
5.1
Class-no.
- Symptoms
- motor is not running,

Slewing unit does
motor does not receive
not work (axle does
current
not turn)
Slewing unit does

not render enough
out-put (axle turns)
- Sources of failures
-
fuses
contactors
hoses
connecting terminal
sliprings and brushes in cable
drum
- plug-in connector
- current o.k.
- motor defect
- motor running
- nonreturn valve on the pump's

suction hole is jammed (due to
dirty oil)
- pressure line pump / control block
is defect
- spring inside the pressure relief
valve is broken
- tubes are not tight
- shut-off valve is still open
- solenoid valve is defect (jammed)
- motor is defect
- pinion is defect
- flow regulator is opened too wide
- shuttle valve is defect
- nonreturn valves are defect
- turning time and number - pressure relief valve is

of rotations are
maladjusted (see 4.2.2)
considerably slower
- pump is worn
- torque is too low
- either dirt in the pressure relief
valve or the spring is too old pressure adjustment is required
- oil level in the tank is too low
In case the pump sucks air, this
mostly leads to a destruction of the
pump.
- connection between pump and
control block is loose or damaged
- slide piston in the control block is
jammed; this might be caused by
foreign matter in the oil or a
broken spring
- tubes are not tight
- solenoid valve is defect (jammed)
- flow regulator
25.06.2010
-1/2-
P
PEINER Greifer
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents
Erzeugnis / Product: SW 100 DISK-L-B
Sach-Nr. / Subject no.:
Benennung
Bestell-Nr. /
Gruppe-Nr. /
Order-no.
Group-no.
Description
S 23080295
Zusammenstellung
compilation
23080295
1.0
Grundgert
basic unit
23080305
3.0
Haube
hood
23082943
5.0
Schelle fr Elektro-Leitung
clamp for cable
23084214
5.6
Bgel, kpl.
frame, cpl.
23082017
8.0
Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit
23082063
10.0
Rckschlagventil, kpl.
nonreturn valve, cpl.
23084713
10.1
Rcklauffilter
return filter
00020900
11.0
Steuerblock
control block
27690044
13.0
Doppelhaken mit Aufhngung
double hook with suspension
23082580
25.4
Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock hydraulic motor with valve plate
23084827
37.0
Hydraulikmotor
hydraulic motor
00041083
37.4
Antriebslager
drive end bearing
23084920
37.5
Schleifringbertrager
slip-ring transmitter
00040328
38.0
Bei Ersatzteilbestellung ist auer der Bestellnummer das Erzeugnis, die Werks-Nr. und Kommissions-Nr.
anzugeben.
For spare part orders, the product, serial-no. and commission-no. must be given in addition to the
requisition-no.
Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker

Registration court:
HRB 201 389
02.06.2009 (11015)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Motor-Schwenkwerk SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS

Motor Slewing Unit
SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS
B 23080295
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
1.0
1/1
30.04.2009 (11015)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Motor Slewing Unit SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23080295
1.0
Benennung
Description
01
23080305
Grundgert (s. Gruppe-Nr. 3.0)

basic unit (see group-no. 3.0)
02
23083462
Traverse
traverse
03
23082943
Haube (s. Gruppe-Nr. 5.0)

hood (see group-no. 5.0)
04
23083884
Achse
axle
05
23082580
Doppelhaken mit Aufhngung (s. Gruppe-Nr. 25.4)

double hook with suspension (see group-no. 25.4)
06
23084893
4/2 Wegeventil NG6 205VDC

4/2-way valve
07
65165309
6kt.-Shr. M 20x40 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017

hexagon screw
08
65161503

hexagon screw
09
23082111
Blinddeckel
blind cover
15
74731980
O-Ring 80x3
o-ring
16
65150203
16

hexagon screw
17
00016708
16
Federring A 8 / F-StA3P
spring washer
18
66828403
6kt.-Mu M 8 / 8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4032

hexagon nut
1/3
B 23080295
30.04.2009 (11015)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Pos.
Item
19
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23080295
1.0
Benennung
Description
65169511

hexagon screw
21
23082496
Stopfen
plug
22
23004907
Dichtung
gasket
26
23082553
Bolzen 130x315
pin
27
69520310
Schmiernippel AM 10x1 / 5.8Zn / DIN 71412

lubricating nipple
28
23082703
Achshalter 190x60x12
axle holder
29
23079288
E-Installation (s. Gerteausrstung Elektrik)

electrical installation (see electric equipment)
31
00016710
Federring A 20 / F-StA3P
spring washer
32
23083469
Deckel
cover
23083438
Dichtung
gasket
20
30
33
34
2/3
B 23080295
30.04.2009 (11015)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23080295
1.0
Benennung
Description
35
23084510
Anschluplatte
connecting plate
36
65145109

hexagon screw
3/3
B 23080295
22.06.2010
P
PEINER Greifer
Grundgert
basic unit
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23080305
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
3.0
1/1
28.07.2010 (11493)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23080305
3.0
Benennung
Description
01
23082063
Hydraulikaggregat (s. Gruppe-Nr. 10.0)

hydraulic unit (see group-no. 10.0)
02
23084827
Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock (s. Gruppe-Nr. 37.0)

hydraulic motor with valve plate (see group-no. 37.0)
03
23084920
Antriebslager (s. Gruppe-Nr. 37.5)

drive end bearing (see group-no. 37.5)
04
27690044
Steuerblock AV5383-3, DN8 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 13.0)

control block (see group-no. 13.0)
05
00040328
Schleifringbertrager 31x36A (s. Gruppe-Nr. 38.0)

slip-ring transmitter (see group-no. 38.0)
06
23082558
Stirnrad
spur gear
07
23082059
Flansch
flange
08
23082586
Halterung
mounting
11
65985303
Zyl.-Shr. M 10x25 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4762

cap screw, socket head
12
23082027
Keil
fitting key
13
23082196
Mutter
nut
14
00021749
Axial-Zylinderrollenlager 81234
axial-cylindrical roller bearing
15
23082556
Buchse 195/175x120
bush
1/6
B 23080305
28.07.2010 (11493)
P
PEINER Greifer
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23080305
3.0
Benennung
Description
16
17
65984107
12

18
65988408
Zyl.-Shr. M 20x50 / 8.8 / DIN EN ISO 4762

00023191
Verschlu-Shr. VSTI R-ED/A3C

screw plug
22
69372501
Schraubkupplung Minime
screw coupling
23
65161603

hexagon screw
24
65547211
16
Senk-Shr. M 8x20 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 10642

countersunk screw
25
23082060
Ring
ring
26
02416228
Kerbstift 12x50 / 6.8 / DIN 1EN ISO 8745

grooved dowel pin
27
65153607

hexagon screw
28
65150002
6kt.-Shr. M 8x20 / Ms / DIN EN ISO 4017

hexagon screw
29
63871925
Scheibe 8 / Ms / DIN EN ISO 7090

disc
19
20
21
2/6
B 23080305
28.07.2010 (11493)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23080305
3.0
Benennung
Description
30
00020722
Fcherscheibe A 8,4 / F-StZn / DIN 6798

serrated lock washer
31
65153410

hexagon screw
32
23082600
Ring
ring
33
23082601
Schauglas
side glass
34
08022741
Verschlu-Shr. R
screw plug
35
00022845
Dichtring C 27x32x2,5 / CuFa / DIN 7603

sealing ring
36
63873003
Scheibe 16 / 200HV-A3P / DIN EN ISO 7090

disc
37
63872402

disc
38
25 l
Hydraulikl HLP 46 (siehe lempfehlung)

hydraulic oil (look to oil recommendation)
39
65984603

40
00022499
O-Ring 65x2,5 / 70NBR/769

o-ring
41
00022404
Verschraubung EVW 10-PLR/A3C

bolted joint
42
00022403
Verschraubung RED 14/12-PS/A3C

bolted joint
43
27993613
Schlauchltg. DN 8x590
hose
3/6
B 23080305
28.07.2010 (11493)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23080305
3.0
Benennung
Description
44
00022795
Verschraubung SNV 14-S

bolted joint
45
27992799
hose
46
27992102
hose
49
00022463
V-Ring V-250A
V-ring
50
00028878
17
Nord-Lock-Sicherungsscheibe NL 10
locking washer Nord-Lock
51
00022409
Verschraubung EL 12-PS/A3C
bolted joint
52
65985507

53
00040612
Druckbegrenzungsventil
54
00022468
Verschraubung GE 12-PSR/A3C
bolted joint
55
00021138
Ro. 12x1,5 150 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C /

DIN EN 10305-4
pipe
56
00021138
Ro. 12x1,5 80 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C / DIN EN 10305-4

pipe
57
69359309
Verschraubung GE 10-PLR
bolted joint
4/6
B 23080305
28.07.2010 (11493)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23080305
3.0
Benennung
Description
58
60000118
Ro. 10x1,5 170 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C /

DIN EN 10305-4
pipe
59
00022405
Verschraubung GE 12-PS/R/A3C
bolted joint
70
08031074
Blockkugelhahn
ball cock
73
00022414
Verschraubung EVW 12-PS/A3C

bolted joint
74
27993614
hose
75
27992104
hose
76
27993615
hose
78
00020900
Rcklauffilter D 043-88 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 11.0)

return filter (see group-no. 11.0)
82
60000517

83
69106713
Verschraubung EWSD 12-S

bolted joint
77
5/6
B 23080305
28.07.2010 (11493)
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23080305
3.0
Benennung
Description
84
65987358

85
00025799
Nord-Lock-Sicherungsscheibe NL 16
locking washer Nord-Lock
86
23084947
Schmierverlngerung
lubricating extension
87
23084948
Schmierverlngerung
lubricating extension
88
69520310

lubricating nipple
91
23082557
Deckel
cover
92
00041314
Steckverschrauubng GEK6 M 10x1

bolted joint
93
00030881
Druckkunststoffrohr 6x1,5
plastic pipe
94
00022411
Verschraubung EVL 14-PS/A3C

bolted joint
95
00022412
Verschlubutzen VKA 12/A3C

locking slug
96
00022413
Verschlubutzen VKA 14/A3C

locking slug
97
65985503

90
6/6
B 23080305
10.11.2006
P
PEINER Greifer
Haube
hood
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082943
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
5.0
1/1
23.01.2009 (10686)
P
PEINER Greifer
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Haube 31pol.
hood
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23082943
5.0
Benennung
Description
01
07
23082017
Bgel, kpl. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 8.0)

frame, cpl. (see group-no. 8.0)
10
23083391
Deckel, kpl.
cover, cpl.
11
65157002

hexagon screw
12
63872804
Scheibe 12,0 / 200HV-A2 / DIN EN ISO 7090

disc
13
63959512
Fcherscheibe A 13 / F-StZn / DIN 6798

serrated lock washer
14
66908300
Hut-Mu M 12 / 6A3P / DIN 1587

cap nut
23084214
Schelle, kpl. fr E-Leitung (s. Gruppe-Nr. 5.6)

clamp, cpl. for cable (see group-no. 5.6)
15
16
1/1
B 23082943
05.11.2007
P
PEINER Greifer
clamp for cable
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084214
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
5.6
1/1
23.01.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
clamp for cable
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23084214
5.6
Benennung
Description
01
00030146
Anschweiplatte SPAL 6 S
welding plate
02
23084231
Schellenkrper, kpl.
clamp body, cpl.
04
23084229
Deckplatte
cover plate
05
23084227
Spezialschraube M 12x100
special screw
06
23084228
Scheibe
disc
07
68531840
Sprengring A 12 / DIN 7993

snap ring
08
P0000335
Knotenkette 2 500 mm / St / DIN 5686

knotted-link chain
09
65169538
6kt.-Shr. M 6x12 / A2-70 / DIN EN ISO 4017

hexagon screw
03
1/1
B 23084214
18.01.2006
P
PEINER Greifer
Bgel, kpl.
frame, cpl.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082017
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
8.0
1/1
09.12.2008
PEINER Greifer
Bgel, kpl.
frame, cpl.
Pos.
Item
01
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23082017
8.0
Benennung
Description
23082018
Bgel
frame
03
65150600

hexagon screw
04
63871908
Scheibe 8,0 / 200HV-A3P / DIN EN ISO 7090

disc
05
66828403

hexagon nut
02
1/1
B 23082017
10.02.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082063
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
10.0
1/1
09.12.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23082063
10.0
Benennung
Description
01
23082116
Zwischenflansch fr Pumpe
intermediate flange for pump
02
23005109
Verteilerstck
distributor part
04
08059424
Kupplung 24/28, kpl.

coupling, cpl.
05
00021689
E-Motor (siehe Maschinenkarte)

electric motor (see machine card)
06
08040466
Zahnradpumpe P3 DB2004 L10, kpl.

gear pump, cpl.
07
65157002

hexagon screw
08
65984700

09
65984450

11
00022426
Verschraubung WSV 14-PS/A3C

bolted joint
12
00022428
Verschraubung EVW 14-PSR

bolted joint
13
23084713
Rckschlagventil, kpl. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 10.1)

nonreturn valve, cpl. (see group-no. 10.1)
14
08014374
O-Ring 22x3
o-ring
03
10
1/2
B 23082063
09.12.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23082063
10.0
Benennung
Description
15
16
23004916
17
Dichtung
gasket
Ro. 14x2 - 500 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C / DIN EN 10305-4

pipe
18
23082117
Zwischenstck
intermediate piece
19
74577027
Dichtring A 22x27x1,5 / Cu / DIN 7603

sealing ring
2/2
B 23082063
02.02.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084713
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
10.1
1/1
09.12.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23084713
10.1
Benennung
Description
01
08031720
Rckschlagventil
nonreturn valve
02
69697702
Kugel
ball
1/1
B 23084713
11.11.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Rcklauffilter D 043-88 25 m
return filter
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 00020900
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
11.0
1/1
11.11.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Rcklauffilter D 043-88 25m

return filter
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Benennung
Description
01
D 043.2202
Deckel, kpl.
cover, cpl.
02
N 031.0562
Flachdichtung
gasket
03
D 023.0704
Flachdichtung
gasket
04
D 043-1104
Gehuse mit Rohr, kpl.

housing with pipe, cpl.
05
00021735
Exapor-Filterelement
filter element Exapor
00020900
11.0
1/1
B 00020900
29.10.2004
P
PEINER Greifer
Steuerblock AV 5383, DN 8
control block
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 27690044
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
13.0
1/1
11.11.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Steuerblock AV 5383-3, DN 8
control block
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
27690044
13.0
Benennung
Description
01
00027626
OF-1004-1-4
02
00020281
Druckventil, kpl.
pressure valve, cpl.
OF-473-0-4-2
03
00027628
Rckschlagventil, kpl. mit Einstellung

nonreturn valve, cpl. with adjustment
OF-473-1-4-3
05
00020282
Vorsteuerung, kpl.
pilot control unit, cpl.
OF-473-0-4-5
06
00020283
Druckfeder fr Pos. 05
pressure spring for item 05
OF-473-0-4-6
07
OF-473-1-4-7
08
OF-1004-3
04
09
00020286
OF-473-0-4-9
10
00027629
Dichtungssatz fr Pos. 01
packing set for item 01
OF-1004-2
11
00020288
OF-473-0-4-11
12
00027630
OF-473-1-4-12
13
00020290
OF-473-0-4-13
Dse fr Pos. 15
nozzle for item 15
OF-473-0-4-14
14
1/2
B 27690044
11.11.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Steuerblock AV 5383-3, DN 8
control block
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
27690044
13.0
Benennung
Description
15
Verschluschraube
screw plug
OF-473-0-4-15
16
Verschluschraube mit Hubbegrenzung, kpl.

screw plug with lift stop, cpl.
OF-473-1-4-16
2/2
B 27690044
31.01.2007
P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082580
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
25.4
1/1
09.12.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23082580
25.4
Benennung
Description
01
23082584
Kreuzstck
gimbal suspension
02
00022287
Doppelhaken Gr. 25
double hook
03
23082585
Bolzen 110x310
pin
04
27608405
Achshalter 190x50x12
axle holder
05
65165309

hexagon screw
69520310

lubricating nipple
06
07
1/1
B 23082580
05.08.2009 (10735)
P
PEINER Greifer
Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock

hydraulic motor with valve plate
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084827
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
37.0
1/1
29.07.2009 (11237)
P
PEINER Greifer
Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock

hydraulic motor with valve plate
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23084827
37.0
Benennung
Description
01
00041083
Hydraulikmotor HCC-M300 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 37.4)

hydraulic motor (see group-no. 37.4)
02
23005095
Ventilblock NG 6
valve block
03
65985068

04
08014374
O-Ring 22x3
o-ring
05
00016261
Verschlu-Shr. GA / 5.8A3P / DIN 908

screw plug
06
74576418

sealing ring
07
00022428
Verschraubung EVW 14-PSR/A3C

bolted joint
08
00022427
Verschraubung GE 10-PL/R3/8/A3C
bolted joint
09
00016264
Verschlu-Shr. GA / 5.8A3P / DIN 908

screw plug
10
74576616

sealing ring
1/1
B 23084827
11.06.2010
P
PEINER Greifer
Hydraulikmotor HCC - M300

hydraulic motor HCC - M300
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 00041083
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
37.4
1/1
11.06.2010
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Hydraulikmotor HCC - M300

hydraulic motor HCC - M300
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
00041083
37.4
Benennung
Description
1.2
74429104
O-Ring 15,54x2,62 2-114

o-ring
2.2
00041834
Wellendichtring 55x72x8
shaft seal
2.4
00040897
O-Ring 129,77x3,53
o-ring
3.7
00041835
O-Ring 82,27x1,78 2-042

o-ring
5.6
00041836
Zylinderdichtung fr HCC-M300 50x5,5

cylinder sealing
9.1
74429107
O-Ring 21,89x2,62 2-118

o-ring
9.2
00030441
O-Ring 82,14x3,53 2-236

o-ring
10.5
00030441
O-Ring 82,14x3,53 2-236

o-ring
12.1
74429152
O-Ring 39,34x2,62 2-129

o-ring
12.2
00041837
Dichtring fr HCC-M300 47,2x3

sealing ring
00041838
Dichtungssatz, kpl. fr HCC-M300

seal kit, cpl.
Zur fehlerfreien und schnellen Ersatzteillieferung sind folgende Daten anzugeben:

To ensure the correct and fast delivery of spare
parts, the following data must be specified:
Hydraulikmotor:
hydraulic motor:
Typ
Fabr.
Nr.
Sach
Nr.
1/1
B 00041083
22.06.2010
P
PEINER Greifer
Antriebslager
drive end bearing
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084920
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
37.5
1/1
29.07.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Antriebslager
drive end bearing
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23084920
37.5
Benennung
Description
01
23084924
Ritzel
pinion
02
23084567
Ritzelhalter
pinion holder
03
23084568
Flansch
flange
04
23084569
Distanzring
spacer ring
10
00041172
Rillenkugellager
deep groove ball bearing
11
63912500
Sicherungsring 125x4 / F-St / DIN 472

circlip
12
65158200

hexagon screw
13
00018419
Spannstift 6x20 / StA3P / DIN EN ISO 8752

dowel pin
14
63965502
Scheibe 13 / StTZn / DIN 432

disc
1/1
B 23084920
01.04.2009
1/1
P
PEINER Greifer
Beschreibung 00040328
Description
Wartungsanweisung fr Schleifringbertrager
ACHTUNG!
Installation, Wartung und Reparatur darf nur durch elektrotechnisch qualifiziertes und autorisiertes
Personal durchgefhrt werden. Der Schleifringbertrager muss vor Beginn der Wartung
spannungsfrei geschaltet werden.
Wartung:
Wartungsintervall: 1 x jhrlich oder nach 100000 Umdrehungen
Vorgehensweise:
1.
Der Schleifringbertrager muss vor Beginn der Wartung spannungsfrei geschaltet werden.
2.
Hauchdnnes Einsprhen der Kontaktstelle von Schleifring und Schleifbgel mit

Kontaktl. Es darf nur das Kontaktl CRAMOLIN Schutz verwendet warden.
Achtung! Zuviel Kontaktl kann Kurzschlsse verursachen.
3.
Nach dem Einsprhen mit Kontaktl Schleifringbertrager 5x um 360 drehen.
Kontaktl CRAMOLIN Schutz ist unter der Artikelnummer 920809000011 zu beziehen.
Maintenance instruction for slip ring transmitter

WARNING!
Installation, maintenance and repair may only carried out by authorised electrically qualified
personal. Before the start of any work on the slip ring assembly it be separated from the
electrical supply.
Maintenance:
Maintenance interval: Once per year or after every 100000 revolutions.
Procedure:
1.
The slip ring assembly must be separated from the electrical source before any work takes
place.
2.
Spray a very fine film of contact oil on the slip ring ways and wire brushes. Only the
contact oil CRAMOLIN Schutz may be used.
WARNING: Too much contact oil can cause short-circuiting.
3.
After spraying the slip ring assembly with contact oil turn it 5 times 360 degrees.
Contact oil CRAMOLIN Schutz can be ordered under article no. 920809000011.
03.12.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Schleifringbertrager 31x36A + PE, 150 A

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 00040328
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
38.0
18.06.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Schleifringbertrager 31x36A + PE, 150A

Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
00040328
38.0
Benennung
Description
01
920401600080
33
Schleifbgel 3xD1,2
slip bracket
02
920415000005
PE-Brstenhalter 150 A
brush holders
03
921100001319
Klemmscheibe oben, kpl.

terminal plate above, cpl.
04
921100001421
Klemmleiste
terminal strip
1/1
B 00040328
25.06.2010
-2/2-
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents
PEINER Greifer
Erzeugnis / Product: SW 100 DISK-L-B
Gerteausrstung Elektrik
electric equipment
Benennung
Schaltplan
wiring diagram
Description
Sach-Nr. / Subject no.:
S 23080295
2307.9288 D / E
Bestell-Nr. /
Gruppe-Nr. /
Order-no.
Group-no.
Gerteteil, Stifte
male part with pins
23079903
16.1
Gerteteil, Buchsen
female part with bushes
23079904
16.1
Kabelbaum Bron
wiring harness
23079272
16.11
Kabelbaum UW
wiring harness
23079273
16.11
Installation Elektrik
installation electric
23079288
40.0
Bei Ersatzteilbestellung ist auer der Bestellnummer das Erzeugnis, die Werks-Nr. und Kommissions-Nr.
anzugeben.
requisition-no.
Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker

Registration court:
HRB 201 389
-K1
nderung
3~
PE
-X03
PE
-X1.2
-W1
PE
PE
2 4 6
1 3 5
PE (37)
PE
PE
PE (37)
PE
26
-Y1
HO7RN-F3G1,5
3G1,5
-V1 +
-
-S2
25
-S1
-K1
A2
A1
22
21
-K2
-K1
A2
A1
22
21
Datum
Gepr.
Name Abt.
GK
Datum 12.03.2009Longwitz
Bearb. Longwitz
Ersatz durch:
Ersatz fr:
PeinerGreifer
Greifer
K1,K2
M1
Q1
S1
S2
V1
W1
X02,X03
X02.1
X1,X1.2
Y1
Urheberrecht nach DIN 34
Salzgitter Maschinenbau
SCHWENKWERK
-X1
-X02.1
26
CAN L
CAN L
CAN L2
CAN L1
23079288 D
NUR ZUR INFORMATION
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A
SCHALTPLAN
=*
27
CAN H
CAN H
CAN H2
CAN H1
SCHTZE
MOTOR
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER
STEUERSCHALTER *LINKS-RECHTS*
DRUCKTASTE *ENTKUPPELN*
GLEICHRICHTER
SCHLEIFRINGE
STECKVORRICHTUNGEN
STECKVORRICHTUNG CAN-BUS
KLEMMEN
MAGNETVENTIL
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
-K2
VERDRAHTUNG IM SCHWENKWERK H07V-K 2,5 IM WELLSCHLAUCH NW29
-M1
-K2
L1 L2 L2 L3 PE
27 28 29
2 4 6
1 3 5
HO7RN-F4G2,5
4G2,5
-X1
-X02
I>> I>> I>>
5-8A
2 4 6
1 3 5
-Q1
L1
L2
L3
PE
Bl. 1
Fbl. -
-K1
nderung
3~
PE
-X03
PE
-X1.2
-W1
PE
PE
2 4 6
1 3 5
PE (37)
PE
PE
PE (37)
PE
26
-Y1
HO7RN-F3G1,5
3G1,5
-V1 +
-
-S2
25
-S1
-K1
A2
A1
22
21
-K2
-K1
Datum
Gepr.
Name Abt.
GK
Datum 19.12.2007Longwitz
Bearb. Longwitz
Ersatz durch:
Ersatz fr:
PeinerGreifer
Greifer
A2
A1
22
21
K1,K2
M1
Q1
S1
S2
V1
W1
X02,X03
X02.1
X1,X1.2
Y1
SLEWING UNIT
-X1
-X02.1
26
CAN L
CAN L
CAN L2
CAN L1
23079288 E
ONLY FOR INFORMATION
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A
WIRING DIAGRAM
=**
27
CAN H
CAN H
CAN H2
CAN H1
Bl. 1
Fbl. -
CONTACTORS
MOTOR
MOTOR-PROTECTION CIRCUIT-BREAKER
OPERATION SWITCH *LEFT-RIGHT*
PUSH BUTTON *UNCOUPLE*
RECTIFIER (SUPPRESSOR)
SLIP-RINGS
PLUG CONNECTORS
PLUG CONNECTOR CAN-BUS
TERMINALS
MAGNETIC VALVE
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
-K2
WIRING IN THE SLEWING UNIT H07V-K 2,5 IN FLEXIBLE TUBE NW29
-M1
-K2
L1 L2 L2 L3 PE
27 28 29
2 4 6
1 3 5
HO7RN-F4G2,5
4G2,5
-X1
-X02
I>> I>> I>>
5-8A
2 4 6
1 3 5
-Q1
L1
L2
L3
PE
24.11.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Gerteteil UW-SEE
plug connection, mounted part
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079944
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.1
1/1
09.06.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gerteteil UW-SEE, 37pol., 27A, Stifte

male part, pins
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23079903
16.1
Benennung
Description
01
02
03
00023644
37
Schrumpfschlauch CPX 50 5x25

shrink hose
12
06165984
Schlssel 309 098 000 719

mounting key
16
06172240
Gerteteilgehuse 309 013 000 554

male part
17
00022868
Stifteinsatz 309 803 160 037 151, 37polig

male insert
19
06171808
Schutzring 309 001 151 721

protective ring
20
06171801
Zwischenring 802-0105
intermediate ring
21
74731980
O-Ring 80x3 / 70 NBR/769

o-ring
22
06172265
Deckel 309 097 005 926

cover
23
06172248
Schraubensatz 100 000 000 12

set of screw
18
1/2
B 23079944
09.06.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

male part, pins
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23079903
16.1
Benennung
Description
24
25
06172273
Kette 021 338 020 902

chain
27
08014726
O-Ring 80x6 / 70 NBR/769

o-ring
28
06171802
Gewindering 802-0107
threaded ring
26
2/2
B 23079944
30.05.2006
P
PEINER Greifer
Gerteteil
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079997
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.1
1/1
28.08.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gerteteil 3.09, Bron., 37pol., 27A, Buchsen

female part with bushes
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23079904
16.1
Benennung
Description
01
02
03
00023644
37
Schrumpfschlauch CPX 50 5x25

shrink hose
08
06171802
threaded pin
09
06171809
Zwischenscheibe 802-0106
intermediate washer
10
06172306
Gerteteilgehuse 309 010 554 00

female part housing
11
00022867
Buchseneinsatz 309 703 160 037, 37polig

female insert
12
06171801
intermediate ring
13
08013040
Dichtung 309 010 113 945 00

gasket
14
06165984
Schlssel 309 098 000 719

mouting key
1/1
B 23079997
25.09.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Kabelbaum SW LWN Bron

wiring harness
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079272
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.11
1/1
15.05.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Kabelbaum SW LWN Bron

wiring harness
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23079272
16.11
Benennung
Description
01
90017100
33
Leitung H07V-K 1x2,5 1,8 m

electric cable
02
90017108
Leitung H07V-K 1G2,5 1,8 m

electric cable
03
00024490
PVC-Isolierschlauch 35 mm 1,5 m
PVC insolating hose
07
23079904
Gerteteil 3.09, Bron, 37pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.1)

female part (see group-no. 16.1)
09
98900046
31
Adernendhlse 2,5 mm / 51342

cable end pieces
10
00027205
Quetschkabelschuh 1,5-2,5 mm / 42028

crimp type socket
08
1/1
B 23079272
25.09.2008
P
PEINER Greifer
Kabelbaum SW LWN UW
wiring harness
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079273
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.11
1/1
15.05.2009
P
PEINER Greifer
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Kabelbaum SW LWN UW
wiring harness
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
23079273
16.11
Benennung
Description
01
90017100
35
Leitung H07V-K 1x2,5 1,9 m

electric cable
02
90017108
Leitung H07V-K 1G2,5 1,9 m

electric cable
03
00024490
PVC-Isolierschlauch 35 mm 1,6 m
PVC insolating hose
07
23079903
Gerteteil UW-SEE, 37pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.1)

male part (see group-no. 16.1)
09
93140000
31
Stecker
plug
10
74731980
O-Ring 80x3
o-ring
11
98900046
Adernendhlse
cable end pieces
08
1/1
B 23079273
02.03.2010
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Installation Elektrik
installation electric
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Menge
Quantity
23079288
40.0
Benennung
Description
01
23079272
Kabelbaum SW LWN Bron 31pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.11)

wiring harness (see group-no. 16.11)
02
23079273
Kabelbaum SW LWN UW 31pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.11)

wiring harness (see group-no. 16.11)
03
00030133
Gertesteckdose mit Gleichrichter und 2 m Leitung

socket with rectifier and 2 m electric cable
08
90106900
Leitung H07RN-F 4G2,5 1,5 m

electric cable
09
00023342
Kabelverschraubung M 25x1,5
cable gland
11
00040329
Einbaustecker 10pol. Stifte mit Datenleitung

male plug with cable
12
00023355
Blindstopfen-Rund M 25x1,5
blind plug
13
08014259
Vergussmasse
sealing compound
14
91440010
Spiralwickelband 1 m
wrapping tape
15
90017508
Leitung H07V-K 1G16 2,5 m

electric cable
16
00024426
Quetschkabelschuh
crimp type socket
10
1/1
B ----------
Operations manual
for
BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER
TYPE: EH5U
General assembly drawing No: 1012408
Serial number: 0000
SWL: 41 tonne
Customer: Liebherr
End User: xxxx
Date of shipping: 2011
_____________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
00 01 ENG
rev.
Warning!
This Operations manual is intended as a guide to the use and maintenance of
Bromma spreaders.
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS

PLACED INTO OPERATION!
Bromma Conquip AB or its affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted

by law) accept no liability for loss or damage suffered as a result of the use
of this manual.
If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.
Refer at all time to the Safety precautions under section 5!
DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The
Safe Working Load is found on the nameplate that is permanently affixed
to the side frame of the spreader.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
00 02 ENG
rev.
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION
2 SPREADER DATA SHEET
3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER
Functional description
Design calculations
Safety features
In-plant testing
4 TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE
5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6 START-UP PROCEDURES
7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Maintenance instructions
Periodic maintenance procedure
Lubrication instructions
Instructions for adjustment and repairs of major items
8 SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE
Spare parts list by major groups
How to order spare parts and/or service
9 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
11 FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS
Hydraulic system
Electrical system
12 APPENDICES
Units and conversion tables
Hydraulic symbols
Electrical symbols
Cargotec Sweden AB 2009
Bromma Conquip
Box 1133
SE-164 22 Kista Sweden
www.bromma.com
_________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP
00 03 ENG
rev.01
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
1 Introduction
BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of
telescopic container handling spreaders. A great number of BROMMA
spreaders are in service today in ports and terminals around the world.
A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are available,
and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent reliability,
ease of maintenance and repair.
This Operation Manual describes the many features of the
BROMMA spreader. It will guide you in:
Maintenance.
Repairs.
Trouble-shooting.
Service.
Spare parts.
In the event You should need additional information or support, our

sales and/or technical staff will be pleased to assist you.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
01 01 ENG
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
2 Spreader - Datasheet
Type
EH5U
Art.nr:
1012408
Container Range
20- 40
Capacity
Lifting capacity (evenly loaded)
Lifting capacity (10% gravity point off set)
Lifting lug capacity (end beam)
Lifting lug capacity (main beam)
41 tonne
41 tonne
4 x 10 tonne
4 x 10 tonne
Operating Movements
Telescoping
20 to 40 or 40 to 20
Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90o
30 s
1,5 s
Electrical Equipment
Power voltage
Frequency
Control voltage
Control valve
Total power consumption
Electrical protection
400 V AC
50 Hz
230 V AC
24 V DC
2x2,2+3+5,5=12,9 kW
IP 65
Hydraulic Equipment
Pump running pressure
Pump flow
Tank capacity
Normal running temperature
Filter type
100 bar
2x15 l/min
2 x 50 l
50 C
10 m
Filter
Pressure line
10 m
Corrosion protection
All surfaces are grit blasted
Interzink 72 EPA 069/073 (Interzink 72 EPA 069/073)
Intervinux VL-Serie
(Intervinux VL-Serie)
Intervinux VS-Serie
(Intervinux VS-Serie)
Min. coating thickness, total
SA 2.5
50 m
2 x 50 m
50 m
200 m
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
02 01 ENG
rev..1
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
3 Technical description
GENERAL
BROMMA telescopic spreaders are fabricated as an all welded, high quality
steel, construction. Two pairs of telescopic arms, slide in the centre main
frame construction. The telescopic arms are joined together by end beams,
which house the twistlocks, guide arms and hydraulic valves.
The telescopic arms run on low friction bearing slide plates, one at each
bottom corner of the mainframe (totally 4) and on the top and bottom at the
end on each telescopic arm (totally 8). Sufficient clearance is provided
between the slide plates and the structure to allow the beams to flex,
enabling slightly distorted containers to be handled.
Lifting lugs are located inside the main frame, 2 at each end and 2 lugs in
each end beam. This makes it possible to attach slings for handling of
damaged containers or non-containerised cargo.
A built-in clearance (see General assembly drawing) under the main frame
compared to the bottom of end beam corner is incorporated. These enables
hatch covers and slightly overstuffed containers to be handled. If larger
clearances are required overweight extension legs need to be fitted.
TELESCOPIC SYSTEM
The telescopic system is driven by means of a hydraulic motor and reduction
gearbox connected to an endless chain. A valve locks the motor when it is in
non-operation. This will keep the spreader in position during operation.
This chain is fitted with blocks of springs, where it is attached to the
drawbars. The springs allow changes in the length of the spreader up to
15mm (5/8") and act as shock absorbers.
POSITIONING THE SPREADER
Positioning the spreader in the different required lengths is carried out by a
screw limit switch box (EH 5, EH 170), a system with proximity switches or a
pulse encoder (see spreader data sheet). All three systems make it possible
to adjust the length to an accuracy of 3 mm.
HYDRAULIC UNIT
The hydraulic unit is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock absorbers in the
main frame. The unit consists of a tank, a pump/motor unit and a filter.
The hydraulic components used are designed to work at over 200 bar, which
gives a good margin to working pressure. The hydraulic valves are solenoid
operated and can be tested by hand operating.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 01 ENG
rev.2
MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET

The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock
absorbers and is well protected being placed on, or within the mainframe,
depending on headblock design.
TWISTLOCK
The twistlock are manoeuvred by a separate hydraulic cylinder and
controlled by two switches, indicating the locked and unlocked position. The
twistlock can be manually operated in an emergency by loosening the rear
attachment of the cylinder.
The blockading pin (landing pin) prevents electrically and mechanically the
twistlock from turning unless it is in the "up" position. This position occurs,
when the spreader is correctly "landed" on a container. During hoisting the
blockading pin is in the "down" position and prevents the twistlock from
turning.
GUIDE ARMS (Flippers, if such are fitted)
Spreaders are normally fitted with automatic, manual or fixed guidearms.
Automatic flippers are normally fitted on the corners or ends of the end
beams. They are of strong construction and are driven by a powerful
hydraulic motor, which enables easy and fast location of the spreader onto
the containers. The flipper gather is normally 155 mm (6") and has a
gathering torque of app. 1250 Nm. Each arm has a shock relief valve, which
opens at a pre-set pressure of 50 bar above the normal working pressure,
which gives a resistance torque in down position of app. 1800 Nm. As soon
as the shock load ends the flipper returns to the vertical position.
The flipper is controlled by solenoid valves and can be manually operated.
The speed of the flipper is approximately 180 in 6 seconds and is controlled
by an orifice plug in the pipe connection to the motor.
Manual flippers can be manually retracted within the plan area of the
spreader by the removal of the fixing bolts.
A specially designed slotted adapter fits fixed flippers to the end of beam. If
the guide arm gets damaged and the fastening bolts are sheared, these bolts
can be easily slid out of the retaining slot for replacement.
SERVICE PANEL (If such is fitted.)
The service panel makes it possible to operate the spreader when it is
not connected to the crane for testing the functions as twistlocks,
telescoping, flippers etc. This is an option facility.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 01 ENG
rev.2
Design calculations
The spreader structure is designed according to DIN 15018 and to the
following loading group which represents a container handling crane.
HOISTING GROUP H2
LOADING GROUP B4
LIFTING CASES
The following lifting cases are considered:
1. Most frequent load case
A symmetrically loaded container of 41 tonnes. The permissible stress is
determined by analysis of direct loading and fatigue conditions. Depending
on intensity of use the structure is suitable for:
2 X 106 lifting cycles
"H load case is determining.
2. Exceptional load cases
Permissible stresses are determined by analysis of direct loading only.
a) A container of 30,5 tonnes weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10%
in the longitudinal direction.
"H.Z" load case is determining.
b) A container of 30,5 tonnes weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10%
in the longitudinal and lateral direction.
"H.S" load case is determining
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 02 ENG
rev.
Safety features
The following safety features are normally included in the crane:
1. The spreader should only be hoisted/lowered when all four twistlocks are
fully locked/unlocked.
2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is
Properly "landed" on a container. This being when all four landing switches
are actuated.
3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to
ensure the spreader is properly "landed" and not bouncing. This is in the
form of a timer whom is adjustable, but normally set to between 1 and 2
seconds.
4. During hoisting the four blockading pins move to the "down" position.
This prevents electrically the twistlocks from moving.
NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can
be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running
the twistlock.
5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins

are in the "down" position and the twistlocks are unlocked.
Individual switches indicate twistlocks locked, twistlocks unlocked and
blockading pins "up".
The following safety features are fitted on the spreader:
6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/
unlocking unless the blockading pin is "up" position.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 03 ENG
rev.
In-plant testing
STRUCTURAL
Each spreader is fully proof tested in the factory to a minimum of 50%
overload prior to delivery. The proof test loading report enclosed illustrates the
loads applied to the spreader.
All lifting lugs are also proof tested in the factory.
The testing is witnessed and certified by a third part inspection official.
All spreader twistlocks are individually proof tested, stamped and certified to a
loading of 37 tonne.
FUNCTIONAL
Each spreader is run in the factory prior to delivery being controlled by a
specially designed simulator.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 04 ENG
rev. x
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
4 Testing records and certificates

See Appendix
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
04 01 ENG
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
5 Safety precautions
Warnings
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT

INTO OPERATION.
The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the
correct use of the spreader.
Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for
any purposes outside what is described in the manual.
DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe
Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the
side frame of the spreader.
Safety precautions
1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized
personnel.
2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is
designed.
3. DO NOT change system settings and functions.
4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.
5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.
6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving
beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters.
7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is
on.
8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by
qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper
pressure adjustment.
9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It
could cause personnel injury or property damage.
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 01 ENG
rev.. 3
10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components

11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily.
12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the
spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by
personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and
movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur
13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the
spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts.
14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation.
15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5).
16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or
adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar.
17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.
18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden
or empty, by hand or by tagline.
19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many
prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could
cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container
and an obstruction (such as a building or another container).
20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the
spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates.
21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the
movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed
on crane-mounted spreader.
22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it
leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the
Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom.
23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled,
make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection
and earth cable.
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 01 ENG
rev.. 3
WARNING!
Because this spreader is equipped with single-coil flipper
arm valves, the following may occur:
If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves
disappears (intentionally or accidentally), the FLIPPER
ARMS move upwards to their starting position.
If EMERGENCY SPREADER STOP is used or if the
power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic power
unit is cut of in some other way, the flipper arms stop
immediately. The flipper arms start moving again when
the power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic
power unit is restored.
It is essential to inform the personnel who work close to
the spreader about this.
_____________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 02s ENG.
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
6 Start - Up procedure
ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476)
1 Check spreader and tower for damage.
2 Suspend the tower from a suitable forklift or crane (tower weight 1,4 t)
using
the main lifting pin (pos 1).
3 Remove the protective material from the robalon pads on tower (pos 2).
Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).
Remove the (2) lifting lugs from main frame of the spreader at the
assembly end
(pos 3).
5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening
hydraulic hoses on the motor.
NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury!
6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4).
7 Remove lamp assembly by taking out the quick release fastening from
the four pins and lay the lamp assembly in the main frame.
8 Release the gravity point chain, by removing the two screws and the
locking device from adjuster.
9 You are now able to slide the tower into the main frame close to the
centre.
Note the direction of assembly. Arrows are painted on the tower and
frame.
10 Now replace the lamp assembly, rubber covers and lifting lugs. If the
flipper is rise at this time, care should be taken as it is liable to fall, now
that the motor is empty.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).

It is now possible to install the chain, complete with the anchor block
fitted.
The chain goes, under the first sprocket, over the centre one and under
the third.
To assist with the chain installation, pull the brake release lever, towards
the back of the motor. It is then possible to turn the motor, using the
handle supplied.
12 Replace the chain back into it's fixing point and tighten the adjusting
screws, until the chain is tight (allow a sag of about 30 mm and place the
tower in middle position) and replace the locking device. Grease the chain.
13 Replace sprocket cover.
14 Pass the main plug up through the tower and fix conduit pipes with screws
supplied.
15 Place the cable into the top support clamp.
16 Connect the tower motor. The connections are marked u1 and w1 to give
correct position.
NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage!
17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties.
18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7).
19 Check all bolts are tight and the spreader is clear of all discarded material
and tools. Take care that nothing had fallen into the chain.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING

The tower function is to level/unlevel loaded containers. Any other use of the
tower is an abuse of the equipment and could result in serious damage.
When the spreader is locked onto a container, it is possible to move the tower
in any direction. The tower will stay where it is placed. The return to the middle
position is done by the crane driver. When he has driven the tower to yellow or
blue, it goes always to the middle position.
To test the newly assembled unit, place the blockading pin clamps onto the
spreader and lock the twistlocks. With the spreader on the ground, commence
to travel the tower towards one end of the spreader. Now hold a piece of
metal, i.e. spanner or screwdriver, in front of the stop switch, for the end that
the tower is travelling. The tower should now stop.
Try the other direction. If both of the limits work, travel the tower to both ends
of the spreader, to confirm the limits work on the detection bar. When at each
end, unlock the twistlocks and release a clamp, to confirm the tower returns to
it's centre position. If any of these functions fail, please seek advice.
WARNING!
Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur!
Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious
injury may occur!
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
Start - Up the spreader

1. Before any connection to container crane, place the main frame of the spreader
on trestles or similar about 0,7 m height and in such a way that the flipper arms
can be lowered.
2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage.
3. Connect the main current and control supply to the spreader. Connect the 24
pin plug to the service panel.
4. Start the electric motor of the hydraulic units by turning the pump on switch on
service panel.
5. For testing of the twistlocks all 4 blockading pins should be in up position. This
is achieved by using a blockading pin clamp. In the down position the
blockading pins electrically and mechanically block all twistlock rotation.
6. Test all functions of the spreader using the push buttons and switches on
service panel.
the
a) When pump on switch is on, both electric motors should be running in gable
ends.
b) Operate the push buttons to put the spreader in the different length positions.
As an additional length, check that the twistlock centre length is marked on
the plate positioned on side of the main beam.
c) Check that the flippers works in pairs along the length of the spreader,
individually at the gable ends, or all together by pressing the appropriate
buttons.
d) Check that when clamps are fitted to the blockading pins and all pins are up,
this will be indicated by the white lights on the spreader.
e) Check that the twistlocks lock/unlock and that the light indicators on the top
of the spreader main frame indicate red when locked and green when
unlocked.
7. Check that the pump operating pressure is 100 bar.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
8. Check each end hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil leaks.
9. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers and twistlocks can be manually
operated if required.This is achieved by pushing the end of the solenoid with a
small screwdriver. As power is generally always on the solenoid, the plug
connection has to be disconnected first.
10. Service and lubrication should be carried out in accordance with the
lubrication manual.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
5
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
7 Maintenance procedures
Maintenance Instructions
Pos. 1
TWISTLOCK (drg no 22606)

All twistlock are to be greased through the grease nipples, 4 (8 twinlift) per
spreader.
Pos. 2a
CYLINDER EAR (drg no 22606)

Piston rod ends are to be greased through the grease nipples, 8 (24 twinlift)
per spreader.
Pos. 2b
SPHERICAL BEARING (drg no 22606)

Spherical bearings are to be greased, 4 (8 twinlift) per spreader.
Pos. 3
HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22607)

Oil is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours.
Equal oil can be used (pls refer to hydraulic parts list).
Pos. 4
OIL FILTER (drg no 22607)

Filter is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours of
operation or when the indicator is red.
Pos. 5
LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22606)

(If the spreader/headblock is equipped with lifting shafts).
ACTION! To be greased.
Pos. 6
GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22619)

The robalon glide plates are to be replaced when the thickness is down to
17 mm.
ACTION! To be checked.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 01 ENG
rev 2
Pos. 7
GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22606)

Shafts are to be greased.
Pos. 9a
ALL ROLLER CHAINS (drg no 22606)

Roller chains and tension wheels are to be checked for abrasion and greased.
Pos. 9b
TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22606)

Bearings at the pedestal are to be greased through grease nipples.
Pos. 10
SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22619)

Vibration proof glow lamp.
ACTION! To be checked.
Pos. 11
TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22606)

To be greased as follows:
1. In 20'- position, through grease nipple underneath the mainframe approx.
50g/week.
2. In fully expanded position, with a brush on the sliding area under the
telescopic beams approx. 100g/ at interval min.1000 hour. The amount of
grease and service interval depends on spreader use and environmental
circumstances, which vary from place to place.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 01 ENG
rev 2
Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Quant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
6
3
1
4
2
1
4
6
3
6
3
1
1002945
1002945
Title
TWISTLOCK PIN
GUIDE BLOCK
SPHERICAL WASHER
TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY.
TWISTLOCK KEY
NUT
SCREW
SPACER RING
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BLOCKADING PIN
SPRING
NUT LOCK-KING
WASHER NORD-LOCK
LOCK PIN
GREASE FITTING
SWITCH ATTACH. STD.
SCREW
SWITCH PAD h=10
SCREW
SCREW
BLOCKADING PIECE
NUT
WASHER
BOLTING PLATE
WASHER NORD-LOCK
COVER PLATE DEP4
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. LEFT
TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
ISO, STD, LEFT
BGS
Material / Article No.
sign:
rev:
PWH
b / SC
Dwg No.
1000431
1000430
41683
43653
1000434
1000432
Art. No.
1000431
1000430
53968
43653
1000434
1000432
1000600
54049
74147
37704
70429
77891
701440
74044
71328
74970
1000596
1001482
1000585
1000587
43654
76460
77798
48916
701433
79850
1002453
A4
41731
37704
A4
A4
A4
1001482
A4
A4
43654
A4
A4
48916
A4
1002453
date
18.2.2005
23.1.2007
Remarks
TYPE 1
(M39x4-6H)
M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
(CA 32/20-100/65)
FZB
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
M12, Art. No was 75055
M12, Art. No. was 75295
R.R 3.0
R 1/8"
(SENSOR D=30)
M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694
M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
FZB
LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
FZB
M6, Art. No. was 75268
FZB
FZB
Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Quant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
6
3
1
4
2
1
4
6
3
6
3
1
1002946
1002946
Title
TWISTLOCK PIN
GUIDE BLOCK
SPHERICAL WASHER
TWISTLOCK KEY
NUT
SCREW
SPACER RING
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BLOCKADING PIN
SPRING
NUT LOCK-KING
WASHER NORD-LOCK
LOCK PIN
GREASE FITTING
SWITCH ATTACH. STD.
SCREW
SWITCH PAD h=10
SCREW
SCREW
BLOCKADING PIECE
NUT
WASHER
BOLTING PLATE
WASHER NORD-LOCK
COVER PLATE DEP4
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. RIGHT
TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
ISO, STD, RIGHT
BGS
sign:
rev:
PWH
b / SC
Dwg No.
1000431
1000430
41683
43653
1000434
1000432
Art. No.
1000431
1000430
53968
57059
1000434
1000432
1000600
54049
74147
37704
70429
77891
701440
74044
71328
74970
1000596
1001482
1000585
1000587
43654
76460
77798
48916
701433
79850
1002454
A4
41731
37704
A4
A4
A4
1001482
A4
A4
43654
A4
A4
48916
A4
1002454
date
18.2.2005
23.1.2007
Remarks
TYPE 2
(M39x4-6H)
M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
(CA 32/20-100/65)
FZB
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
M12, Art. No was 75055
M12, Art. No. was 75295
R.R 3.0
R 1/8"
(SENSOR D=30)
M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694
M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
FZB
LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
FZB
M6, Art. No. was 75268
FZB
FZB
A-A
1:5
H:\DWG\A3\A38\38073A.dwg
1 of 2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER
After 50 and 250 hours
1. Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
2. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved more than 25 mm
in vertical direction.
EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS
Nut
1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating

mechanism and ensure that all parts are
properly tightened down. Check that the
locking pin can be moved easily and that it
indicates the correct position
(see 'Adjusting the locking pin').
2. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight.
Twistlock pin
3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct.

4. Carefully inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections. Defective
hydraulic hoses and connections may cause personal injury when jets of
liquid escape under high pressure.
5. Leaking hose connections and defective hoses should be rectified
immediately.
EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS
Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical
supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent
personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch
or by disconnecting the power cable.
If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on
or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.
1 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE
Every 3000 working hours (100,000 containers handled2 or once annually3)
1. Dismantle all four twistlocks (eight on twin-liftspreaders).
Nut
2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which

necessitate their replacement.
Spherical
washer
3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults)

in the threads of the twistlock pins or 'heads'.
Use penetrating fluid to detect fissures.
4. Replace the twistlock pin if cracks are detected.
Twistlock
pin
5. Clean all parts.

6. Lubricate the parts.
7. Reassemble the twistlocks.
Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other

year5)
The twistlock pins and the spherical washers6 shall be replaced.
NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions
for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.
-------------------------2
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter

If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter
4
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
5
If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter
6
Only for floating twistlocks
3
2 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR

OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER
REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP
When ordering a new hydraulic pump always state the direction of rotation as
marked on the old pump housing.
To replace the hydraulic pump (free-standing pump unit):
1.Turn off the electrical supply using the main switch.
2. Disconnect the inlet , outlet hoses and drainhoses from the pump.
3. Reconnect the inlet and outlet hoses once the pump has been fitted.
4. Reconnect the drain hose to the pump.
5. See drawing no.45316 for setting the pump flow and pressure.
NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts
to run out of the drain hose.
SHOCK RELIEF VALVES, general
These are cross over relief valves which relieves excess hydraulic pressure
caused by external forces on the flipper arms or the telescopic system. The
rising hydraulic pressure acts against the spring to open the flow path to the
other port.
All leakages through these valves at the normal operating pressure of the
pump (lower setting than the pump's operating pressure) cause a substantial
increase in the temperature of the hydraulic oil. Leaks of this type are often
indicated by a hissing sound coming from the relief valve.
Possible causes are:
* Slides jamming due to poor hydraulic oil
* Defective seals
* Incorrect pressure setting
3 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN

(Drawing no. 38073)
1. Run the spreader to the maximum
position (40 foot).
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Remove the locking screws from
the adjuster nut.
4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides
with a torque wrench to 50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.)
alternately one turn at a time . It is important
to adjust both sides equally. If not done
properly this could cause future problems
in operation and reduce the life of the chain.
5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .
Locking
screws
Adjusting
nut
Cotter pin
Chain lock
REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN

If the chain should break and jump over the chain wheel, repair as follows:
1. Disconnect the electrical supply in the spreader control cabinet by turning
off the main switch.
2. Place the telescopic beams in the approximate position for a 30 foot
container using a fork lift truck or similar.
3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.
4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by pulling out the
cotter pin.
5. Remove the chain.
6. Install a new chain or insert a joining link and reinstall the chain and the
adjusting nut.
7. Perform the steps described above (Adjusting the telescopic chain).
8. Connect the power supply and make a fine adjustment as per the
instructions in 'Setting the spreader length'.
9. Check the distance between the twistlocks as per the instructions in
Spreader lengths with different twistlocks'.
10. Lubricate the chain according to drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
4 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
REPLACING ROBALON PLATES

Robalon plate in main frame
1. Extend the spreader to at least the 30 foot position.
2. Remove the locking plate and replace the Robalon plate.
Telescopic beam lower plates

1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic
valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible through the aperture in the
lower flange of the main beam. Replace the plates.
Telescopic beam upper plates

1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic
valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible.
4. Replace the plates.
DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT

If the telescopic beams require checking.
1. Start by removing all the Robalon plates from the ends of telescopic
beams. Leave the plates on the main frame in place.
2. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from the end units.
Seal all hydraulic hoses correctly.
3. Remove the stud from the drawbar connection in the end beam.
4. Take the weight off the end unit using a fork lift truck and extend the unit to
the 40 foot position.
5 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral

movement.
6. Extract the beams from the main frame and inspect them as required.
6. Reassemble the beams and the end units in the reverse order to that in
the instructions above.
FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS)

1. Remove the outlet plug to alter flipper arm speed.
NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is
correctly positioned.
2. Removing and installing bearings
a) Remove the flipper arms
b) Remove the key
c) Drift out the shaft. Once the shaft has been removed the bearing will be
pushed out by the middle key.
d) Drift out the second bearing.
e) Install the parts in the reverse order to dismantle except for that both
bearings have to be drifted into position using a pipe of a suitable bore.
6 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH

Sensors:
a) Adjust the centre to centre distance
between twistlocks for each position
by moving the sensors.
b) For 30' check the centre to centre
distance between twistlock both when
extending and retracing the spreader.
The accurate distances between the
twistlocks are shown in Spreader
length with different twistlocks.
Sensor
Sensor
plate
SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS

BROMMA ISO Twistlock
20'
30'
Floating:
5852
8918
40'
11984
ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN

a) Attach blockading pin clamps
at three of the corners.
b) At the fourth corner, press the
pin upwards.
c) When the lower part of the pin
is 6 - 7 mm from the bottom plate
of the corner, the lamp indicating
"spreader landed", shall go on.
Landing
switch
d) If the distance is not correct,

adjust the landing switch and
do the test again.
Landing pin
7 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners.

DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN
1. Dismout the twistlock cylinder as
described on the next page.
2. Remove the M6 screw and nut
from the top of the twistlock.
3. Grab hold of twistlock head.
4. Slack off the twistlock nut.
5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide
block.
6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.
Twistlock
nut
M6 nut
M6 screw
Guide
neck
Twistlock
MOUNTING
housing
1. Perform the steps above in the
Twistlock
head
reverse order.
2. Carry out the adjustment below
3. before mounting the M6 screw and nut.
4. Lubricate according to instructions on drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
Distance between top of twistlock head

and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm
Checking the Float

1. Grab hold of the twistlock head.
2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners.
3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock
housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be
adjusted /lowered.
4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the
twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner.
5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it
moves a lot, adjust it higher.
6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be
adjusted down.
Adjusting
1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut.
The distance between the top of twistlock head and the
bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
3. Recheck the float of the twistlock.
4. Reinstall the M6 screw.
8 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Twistlock nut
Spherical
washer
Key
Twistlock pin
Twistlock
head
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Removing the Twistlock Cylinder

1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected
and the oil pressure is relieved from the
Split pin
system.
2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder.
3. To avoid oil leakage, thread a plastic bag Spacer
over the end of the hoses and secure
ring
them with straps.
4. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer
rings and the cylinder.
Installing the Twistlock Cylinder
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order.
2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm
(70 ft-lbs) torque.
3. De-aerate the system by running the
cylinder several times.
Cylinder
Removing Sensors
1. Unscrew the cable connection from
the sensor.
2. Loosen the two screws on the switch
attachment.
3. Remove the sensor.
Sensor
Installing Sensors
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order, using blue Loctite to the cable
connection.
2. The distance between sensor face and
flag is approximately 5-6 mm. Check
the sensor by grabbing the twistlock
head and moving it around in different
positions. If the signal is lost, adjust the
sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the
flag does not come in contact with
the sensor.
9 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Signal
cable
connection
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Checking the tower motor brake

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the crank from its stowed position in the tower.
3. Install the crank at the rear end of the
tower motor.
4. Place a torque wrench in the socket on the crank
5. Adjust the torque to 65 Nm.
6. If the torque wrench releases as the 65 Nm torque is
reached, the brake adjustment is OK. If it does not release and
the motorshaft rotates, the brake must be adjusted.
See Inspection and maintenance of BGM8 Tower motor
at the end of this section.
Tower
motor
Crank
65 Nm
Torque
wrench
10 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Bromma Manual
Important tightening torques EH5/EH170

Tower and
main frame
434Nm
222Nm
434Nm
434Nm
434Nm
End beam
91Nm
6.5 Nm
52Nm
Telescopic motor
EH5 / EH170
Telescopic motor
EH5U / EH170U
434Nm
52Nm
434Nm
0-1- Month. 03 rev.00
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Manual
Limit switch box

EH5 / EH170
91Nm
Twistlock
EH5 / EH170
Twistlock
EH5U / EH170U
100 Nm
95 Nm
91Nm
Flipper motor and gearbox

250Nm
after 200
test
cycles
385Nm
91Nm
103Nm
after 200
test cycles
Bromma Conquip
0-2- Month. 03 .00

rev
Inspection and maintenance periods
Inspection and Maintenance
8.1
Inspection and maintenance periods

Equ ipm ent/com po nen ts
Frequency
BMG4 =Telescopic Motor
Every Year
BMG8 = Tower Motor
Every third month
What to do ?
Inspecting the brake:
Mea sure and set working air gap
brake disc, lining
P ressure plate
C arrier / gearing
P ressure rings
E xtract the ab raded ma tter
Inspect the switch elemen ts and
repla ce if necessary (e.g . in case o f
burn-out)
Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8
8.6
Inspection and maintenance of brake

BMG4 = Telescopic Motor
BMG8 = Tower Motor
9
8
6
5
2
22
21
e
10
b
20
19
a
15
11
12 13
14
16
17
18
Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8
, setting the working air gap
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
2. Remove the following:
If fitted, forced- cooling fan for
motor and brake maintenance.
F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ).
3. Pu sh the rubber sealing co llar (5) aside.
R elease the clip to do this, if necessary .
E xtract the abr aded ma tter.
4. Measure the brake disc (7 ):
If the brak e d isc is:
9 mm on b rake motors up to size 100 .(BMG4)
10 mm on bra ke motor s up to size 1 12.(BMG8)
Fit a new brake disc ( Section "Ch anging brake disc on BMG
4 and 8
Changing thebrake disk BMG 4 and 8

When fitting a ne w brake disc, in spect the other removed pa rts as well and fit new one s
if nece ss ary
1. Iso late the moto r and brake from the supply,, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
If fitted, forced coolin g fan
F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Rem ove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5 ) an d the ma nual brake release:
S etting nuts ( 18), con ica l coil sp rings (1 7), studs (16), rele ase lever (1 5), dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscr ew hex nuts (1 0e ), ca refully pull off the brake co il body (1 2) (brake ca ble!) an d
take out the brak e spr ings (11).
5. Rem ove the dam ping plate (9 ), pres sur e pla te (8) and brake disc (7, 7b) an d cle an
the br ak e com ponents .
6. Fit a ne w brake d isc.
7. Re- install th e br ake comp onents.
E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan and fan guard, se t the working air gap
( Inspe cting brake BMG 4 and 8, settin g the wor king air gap , points 5
through 8)
8. With m anual brake r elease: Use se tting n uts to set the flo ating clear ance "s"
between the conical co il springs (pressed flat) an d the settin g nuts ( following
illustration).
Brak e
BMG 4 and 8
Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

2
Importan t: This flo ating clerance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu ara nteed.
9. Fit the r ubber sea ling colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note:
T he locka ble man ual brake r elea s e ( type HF) is a lready r elea s ed if a re sistan ce is
encountered whe n ope rating the gr ub scre w.
T he se lf-reengaging manual b rake re lea s e (type HR) ca n be operated with normal
hand pressu re.
Imp ortant: In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the
manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance. A bracket
is provided for storing it on the outside of the motor.
Changing Springs
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional po wer -up.
If fitted, fo rced -cooling fan ,
For motor and brake ma intenance .
F lange cover or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Remove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5) an d the ma nual brake release:
s etting nuts (18 ), conical coil sp rings (1 7), studs ( 16) , release le ver ( 15) , dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscrew he x nuts ( 10e ), pull o ff the co il body ( 12) .
B y app rox. 50 mm (watch the bra ke ca ble!) .
5. Cha nge
brake springs (11).
P os ition the bra ke sp rings symme trically.

6. Re- install th e br ake components..
E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan an d fan gu ard,
set the wor king air ga p ( Ins pecting brake BMG 4 and 8 setting the
working air gap , points 5 th rough 8)
7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to s et floating c learance "s" between
the co nical coil springs (pressed fla t) an d the setting nuts ( following illustration.)
Brak e
Floa ting clear ance s [mm]
BMG 4 and 8
Importan t: This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu aranteed.
8. Fit the rubber sealing colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note
Fit new settingnuts (18) an d hexag on nuts ( 10e ) if the re moval pr oced ure is r epeated!
kVA
i
9.3
Brak e
type
Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8
P Hz
Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4-8
Fo r
motor size
Work do ne
until
main tenance
[10 6 J]
Workin g air gap

[mm]
min. 1)
0.25
ma x.
Br aking torque se ttings

Br aking
torque
[N m]
Type an d n o. of
springs
Order n umber o f
spr ings
Nor mal
Norma l
Red
Red
0.6
135 150 8 135 151 6

BMG 4
BMG 8
1)
100
112M
132S
40
75
260
600
0.3
1.2
184 845 3 135 570 8
Please note when checking the air gap:

Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rice to deviation of 0.1 after
a test run.
A ddres s lis t
C o n t a c t y o u r B R O M M A l o c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r S E W A ddres s es below.
G ermany
Headquarters
P roduc tion
S ales
S ervic e
B ruc hs al
S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o

E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 42
D-76646 B ruchs al
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 3023 D-76642 B ruchsal
Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0

F ax (0 72 51) 75-19 70
http://www.S E W-E UR ODR IV E .de
s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.de
P roduc tion
G raben

E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 1
D-76676 G raben-Neudorf
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 1220 D-76671 G raben-Neudorf
Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0

F ax (0 72 51) 75-29 70
Telex 7 822 276
A s s embly
S ervic e
G arbs en
(near Hannover)

Alte R icklinger S tra e 40-42
D-30823 G arbs en
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 110453 D-30804 G arbs en
Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30

F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55
s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de
K irc hheim
(near Mnchen)

Domagks tra e 5
D-85551 K irchheim
Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10

F ax (0 89) 90 95 52-50
s cm-kirchheim@ s ew-eurodrive.de
L angenfeld
(near Ds s eldorf)

S iemens s tra e 1
D-40764 Langenfeld
Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30

F ax (0 21 73) 85 07-55
s cm-langenfeld@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Meerane
(near Zwickau)

Dnkritzer Weg 1
D-08393 Meerane
Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0

F ax (0 37 64) 76 06-30
s cm-meerane@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Additional address es for s ervice in G ermany provided on reques t!

F ranc e
P roduc tion
S ales
S ervic e
Haguenau
S E W-US OC OME S AS
48-54, route de S oufflenheim
B . P. 185
F -67506 Haguenau C edex
Tel. 03 88 73 67 00
F ax 03 88 73 66 00
http://www.us ocome.com
s ew@ us ocome.com
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
B ordeaux
P arc da ctivit s de Magellan
62, avenue de Magellan - B . P. 182
F -33607 P es s ac C edex
Tel. 05 57 26 39 00
F ax 05 57 26 39 09
Lyon
P arc dA f faires R oos evelt
R ue J acques Tati
F -69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. 04 72 15 37 00
F ax 04 72 15 37 15
P aris
Zone indus trielle
2, rue Denis P apin
F -77390 Verneuil IE t ang
Tel. 01 64 42 40 80
F ax 01 64 42 40 88
Additional address es for s ervice in F rance provided on reques t!

A rgentina
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
B uenos A ires
S E W E UR ODR IV E AR G E NT INA S .A.

C entro Indus trial G arin, Lote 35
R uta P anamericana K m 37,5
1619 G arin
Tel. (3327) 45 72 84
F ax (3327) 45 72 21
s ewar@ s ew-eurodrive.com.ar
Melbourne
S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D.
27 B everage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00
F ax (03) 99 33 10 03
S ydney
S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D.
9, S leigh P lace, Wetherill P ark
New S outh Wales , 2164
Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00
F ax (02) 97 25 99 05
Wien
S E W-E UR ODR IV E G es .m.b.H.

R ichard-S traus s -S tras s e 24
A-1230 Wien
Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0

F ax (01) 6 17 55 00-30
s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.at
A us tralia
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
A us tria
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
Address list
Belgium
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Fax (010) 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Sao Paulo
SEW DO BRASIL
Motores-Redutores Ltda.
Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208
CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP
Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33

Fax (011) 64 80 33 28
sew@sew.com.br
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!

Bulgaria
Sales
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GMBH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65
Fax (92) 9 54 93 45
bever@mbox.infotel.bg
Toronto
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.

210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1
Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53

Fax (905) 7 91-29 99
www.sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver

7188 Honeyman Street
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2
Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35

Fax (604) 946-2513
Montreal

2555 Rue Leger Street
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9
Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24

Fax (514) 3 67-36 77
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!

Chile
Assembly
Sales
Service
Santiago de
Chile
SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE
Motores-Reductores LTDA.
Panamericana Norte No 9261
Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura
RCH-Santiago de Chile
Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63

Fax (02) 6 23 81 79
Tianjin
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.

No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457
Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12
Fax (022) 25 32 26 11
Bogot
SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.

Calle 22 No. 132-60
Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santaf de Bogot
Tel. (0571) 5 47 50 50
Fax (0571) 5 47 50 44
sewcol@andinet.com
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
PIT Erddy 4 II
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +385 14 61 31 58
Fax +385 14 61 31 58
Praha
SEW-EURODRIVE S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
16000 Praha 6
Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36
Fax 02/20 12 12 37
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Kopenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100
DK-2670 Greve
Tel. 4395 8500

Fax 4395 8509
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Paldiski mnt.125
EE 0006 Tallin
Tel. 6 59 32 30
Fax 6 59 32 31
China
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Address list
Finland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Tel. (3) 589 300

Fax (3) 780 6211
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
P.O. Box No.1
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR
Tel. 19 24 89 38 55
Fax 19 24 89 37 02
Athen
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

12, Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus
Tel. 14 22 51 34
Fax 14 22 51 59
Boznos@otenet.gr
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54
Fax 2-7 95-91 29
sew@sewhk.com
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Tel. +36 1 437 06 58

Fax +36 1 437 06 50
Baroda
SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No. 4, Gidc
Por Ramangamdi Baroda - 391 243
Gujarat
Tel. 0 265-83 10 86
Fax 0 265-83 10 87
sew.baroda@gecsl.com
Dublin
Alperton Engineering Ltd.

48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77
Fax (01) 8 30 64 58
Milano
SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.

Via Bernini,14
I-20020 Solaro (Milano)
Tel. (02) 96 98 01
Fax (02) 96 79 97 81
Toyoda-cho
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD

250-1, Shimoman-no,
Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun
Shizuoka prefecture, P.O. Box 438-0818
Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13

Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814
Ansan-City
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.

B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate
Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong
Ansan 425-120
Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51

Fax (031) 4 92-80 56
master@sew-korea.co.kr
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Fax (010) 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Skopje
SGS-Skopje / Macedonia
"Teodosij Sinactaski
6691000 Skopje / Macedonia
Tel. (0991) 38 43 90
Fax (0991) 38 43 90
Johore
SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD

No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09
Fax (07) 3 5414 04
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Greece
Sales
Service
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ireland
Sales
Service
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Macedonia
Sales
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Address list
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
Rotterdam
VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V.

Industrieweg 175
NL-3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
Tel. +31 10 44 63 700

Fax +31 10 41 55 552
http://www.vector.nu
info@vector.nu
Auckland
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.

P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland
Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27
Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za
Christchurch
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.

10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead
Christchurch
Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51
Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. (69) 2410 20

Fax (69) 2410 40
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Lima
SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES

S.A.C.
Los Calderos # 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Tel. (511) 349-52 80

Fax (511) 349-30 02
sewperu@terra.com.pe
Lodz
SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.

ul. Pojezierska 63
91-338 Lodz
Tel. (042) 6 16 22 00
Fax (042) 6 16 22 10
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Tel. (0231) 20 96 70
Fax (0231) 20 36 85
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Bucuresti
Sialco Trading SRL

str. Madrid nr.4
71222 Bucuresti
Tel. (01) 2 30 13 28
Fax (01) 2 30 71 70
sialco@mediasat.ro
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 193
193015 St. Petersburg
Tel. (812) 3 26 09 41 + 5 35 04 30
Fax (812) 5 35 22 87
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.

No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644
Tel. 8 62 17 01-705
Fax 8 61 28 27
Telex 38 659
Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.

UI. XIV. divizije 14
SLO 3000 Celje
Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20

Fax 00386 3 490 83 21
pakman@siol.net
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Sales
Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovenia
Sales
Service
10
Celje
Address list
South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service
Johannesburg
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00
Fax +27 11 494 23 11
ljansen@sew.co.za
Capetown

Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Tel. +27 21 552 98 20

Fax +27 21 552 98 30
Telex 576 062
Durban

2 Monaceo Place
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Tel. +27 31 700 34 51

Fax +27 31 700 38 47
Bilbao
SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L.

Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302
E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
Tel. 9 44 31 84 70
Fax 9 44 31 84 71
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Tel. (036) 34 42 00
Fax (036) 34 42 80
www.sew-eurodrive.se
Basel
Alfred lmhof A.G.

Jurastrasse 10
CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel
Tel. (061) 4 17 17 17
Fax (061) 4 17 17 00
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Chon Buri
SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.

Bangpakong Industrial Park 2
700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh
Muang District
Chon Buri 20000
Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22
Fax 0066-38 21 45 31
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL
Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3
83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15
Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67
seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Greenville
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37
Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30
Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48
Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66
Telex 805 550
Assembly
Sales
Service
San Francisco
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, California 94544-7101
Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60

Fax (510) 4 87-63 81
Philadelphia/PA
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77

Fax (856) 8 45-31 79
Dayton
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36

Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99
Dallas
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24

Fax (214) 3 30-47 24
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
USA
11
Address list
USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly
Sales
Service
12
Valencia
SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A.

Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319
Zona Industrial Municipal Norte
Valencia
Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04

Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75
sewventas@cantr.net
sewfinanzas@cantr.net
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
8 Spare parts and service

Spare parts list by major groups
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
08 01 ENG
rev.
Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1012408
1012408
Liebherr
400V AC - 230V AC - 50Hz
Quant Title
GENERAL ASSEMBLY
EH5U
sign:
rev:
BGY
a/BGY
Dwg No.
Art. No.
Frame EH5
1002140
1002140
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
Telescopic beam unit

Tower
Tension rod
Tension rod
Frame std. components
Tower std. components
Twistlock assembly
Twistlock assembly
Cable chain assy.
Tower, Cable chain assy.
Hydraulic assy.
Pump unit assy.
Flipper arm assy.
Gearbox assy. telescopic
Gearbox assy. tower
Decoration
Electrical system
LED-panel mount. det.
Identity sign
El.customised
24142
24161
23854
23855
24143
17023
1002945
1002946
37409
39047
17021
34375
24169
39055
44768
17452
1002499
1001444
44522
1002656
24142
24161
23854
23855
24143
17023
1002945
1002946
37409
39047
17021
34375
24169
39055
44768
17452
1002499
1001444
59708
1002656
ISO, STD, LEFT

ISO, STD, RIGHT
date:
2/20/2007
2/21/2007
Remarks
Frame standard 16930, Main beam 23852, Lifting
beam 23951 & 23952
Telescopic beam 38860, Gable end 16989
Floating ISO, 100

Floating ISO, 100
SCS / CANopen parallel interface

729030814
230V AC / SCS / CANopen parallel interface
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY

OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
12
SIGN
DESIGNED
13
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 021029
14
SPREADER TYPE
EH5
PLOT DATE
10
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Spreader EH5
General assy
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
01
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52000

48
3
33
47 4 32
49
1
35
36
50
37
16
20
14
7
26 34 17 10 21
39
43
38
8
39
9
24
15
29
23
11
5
43
44
38
43
41
18
6
38
22 43 44 20
28
12
31
25
40 38 36
38
43
46
39
43 42
19
38
43
39
27
30
45
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 021029
SPREADER TYPE
EH5
PLOT DATE
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Tower
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52001
EH5 Tower New standard

DRAWING SP-52001
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
401517
GLIDE PLATE ASSY
Include pos.6,7,14,20
38863
TOWER CHAIN ASSY
Include pos. 5,9,11,12,15,23,24
24161
TOWER
SEE OTHER DRAWING
See SP-52002
51624
LIFTING SHAFT 90x334
Included in Pos 48
54662
LOCKING SHAFT ASSY
Included in Pos 48
71529
TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN
39026
ROBALON PLATE LOWER
53137
GLIDE PLATE UPPER TOWER EH5
45476
CRANK ASSY EH5
401372
CHAIN ATTACHMENT
56242
CABLE CLAMP D=34
10
700737
CHAIN DUPLEX 1 1/2"
11
71520
CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"
12
den 10 oktober 2002
POS
REMARKS
Sida 1 av 4
POS
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
401518
STEERING PIN
16
14
43075
LOCKING PLATE 12X12X40
15
401534
CABLE ATTACHMENT
16
401074
COVER PLATE
17
39171
BRACKET UPPER RIGHT
18
39174
BRACKET LOWER RIGHT
19
75497
SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9
32
20
78218
SCREW M6S 12X120 FZB 8.8
21
75051
SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8
22
75713
SCREW MC6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8
23
700736
SCREW M6S 24x160 FZB 8.8
24
75052
NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB
25
75055
NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985
26
39173
BRACKET LOWER LEFT
27
75292
WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200
28
75268
WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB
29
39170
BRACKET UPPER LEFT
30
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Include pos. 10,17,21,26,34
Sida 2 av 4
POS
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
74339
WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB
31
72191
SCHACKLE "RAK GALV"
32
Included in Pos 48
85482
CHAIN HLZ 4.5-2 L=250
33
Included in Pos 48
75291
WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200
34
54528
ATTACHMENT CABLE WAGON
35
75328
WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2
10
36
75225
37
75090
NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB
16
38
70006
16
39
401471
ANGEL BAR
40
401547
ANGLE BAR
42
75328
32
43
70006
44
401546
ANGLE BAR
45
24199
FRAME SCS2
46
700457
SNAP HOOK
47
Included in Pos 48
45596
LIFTING SHAFT ASSY
48
Include Pos. 3,4,32,33,47
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 3 av 4
POS
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
46679
MOUNTING EL.CAB.
49
24263
SPREADER CABINET TOWER
50
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
See also drawing SP-52013
Sida 4 av 4

14
11 35 10 33 34 39 36 43
20
12
19
18
29
45
25
8
24
23
22
40
32
9
13
21
12
26
7
44
13
12
15
5
41
3
31
38
48
47
42
27
17 37 28 30
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
Illtek 021002
PLOT DATE
GENERAL ASSY
46 16
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
EH5 ll
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Tower gear box assy
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52002
EH5 Tower Gearbox Assy

DRAWING SP-52002
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
58549
GEARBOX R97 ELM.BRAKE 360-404V
54659
MOTOR SHELF EH5 TOWER
52196
CHAIN COVER TOWER EH5
51233
COVERPLATE CHAIN WHEEL EH5
53129
CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 25
36609
CHAIN WHEEL
34379
CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5
52150
TRANSMISSION SHAFT DIA 80
44756
SHAFT ASSY EH5
71328
GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"
10
71546
BEARINGHOUSE SNL 518-615
11
71548
SEALING TSNA 518A TOWER
12
48188
DISTANS
13
71547
BEARING BUSH
14
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Part no for gearbox is 72157 and for only El motor is 58538
SEAL KIT
Sida 1 av 4
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
71519
CHAIN 1 1/2" DUPLEX TOWER
15
71520
CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"
16
70622
SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9
17
71539
BEARING 22218 CCK W33 TOWER
18
71549
DISTANCE
19
74119
COVER BEARINGHOUSE ASNH518-615
20
51517
CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 13
21
44196
LOCKING PLATE 1X20X46
22
75092
23
76847
KEY 22X14X100 SMS2307
24
75052
25
73965
KEY 22X14X100 SMS 2306
25
79513
KEY 18X11X100 RK
26
75225
27
75286
SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP
28
70474
29
75008
30
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 2 av 4
DESCRIPTION
QTY
76848
SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 FULLT
31
75052
32
SEE REMARKS
33
75051
34
70477
35
75225
36
75285
LOCKING WASHER M20
37
70479
NUT M20 M6M FZB KLASS 8
38
75292
39
74339
40
70622
41
75267
42
75267
43
44769
WASHER
44
70919
WASHER NORD-LOCK M20
45
71521
CHAIN LOCK1/2 LINK DUPL.1 1/2"
46
75052
47
PART NO
den 10 oktober 2002
POS
REMARKS
CAP (SEW)
Sida 3 av 4
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
74339
den 10 oktober 2002
QTY
4
POS
REMARKS
48
Sida 4 av 4

13
14
15
16
1
32
25
8 26
36
37
22
24
18
5
4
21
23
31
10
34
11
20
19
12
33
35
2
29
17
6 28
30
27
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 020903
SPREADER TYPE
EH5
PLOT DATE
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Frame
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52003
EH5 Frame
DRAWING SP-52003
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
REMARKS
16997
FRAME
43072
LIFTING LUG ASSY
Include pos.10,11,21,23,31,34,
401278
GLIDE PLATE FRAME
Included in Glide plate assy See drawing SP-52004
401401
FRAME COVER ASSY
Include pos.12,19,20
43036
GLIDE PLATE 80X40X20
401279
20STOP ASSY
Include pos.17,27,28,29,30
SEE REMARKS
See lamp assy SP- 52010
401277
LANDING BUFFER ASSY
Include pos.25,26,32,36,37
SEE REMARKS
See Drawing SP 52006
47805
PLATE
10
75052
11
38865
COVER
12
SEE REMARKS
15
See Electric drawing part list
48392
CLIP
16
Complete clip with screw,washer and nut
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 3
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
401281
SHIM
17
75497
18
75092
19
54855
FLAT BAR
20
75051
21
75328
22
75090
24
79830
WASHER SRB 14X28X2 FZB
25
49853
SLEEV
26
75607
27
401280
20BUFFER
28
401282
HOLDER FOR GLIDE PLATE
29
75295
WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB
30
51110
LIFTING LUG WELD
31
75055
32
76332
GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT
33
71328
33
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 2 av 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY
75292
12
34
71328
35
401276
BUFFER
36
79141
37
PART NO
den 10 oktober 2002
POS
REMARKS
Sida 3 av 3

17
19 25
18
16
15
10
13
12
15
14
20
24
2
9
11
3
10
22
21
23
6
5
7
8
4
6
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 021002
SPREADER TYPE
EH5 ll
PLOT DATE
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Telescopic Beam
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52004
EH5 Telescopic Beam

DRAWING SP-52004
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
REMARKS
38861
GLIDE PLATE ASSY
Include pos. 4,5,6,7,8 and pos 3 on drawing SP-52003
24142
TELESCOPIC BEAM ASSY
Assy with 2 Beams and 1 Gable end
62595
FLIPPER ARM
Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11
24168
FLIPPER ARM
44615
GLIDE PLATE LOWER 20X100X200
44614
GLIDE PLATE UPPER 25X100X250
75756
75055
70538
24167
FLIPPER ARM
SEE REMARKS
10
See Drawing SP-52009
401528
BUFFER ASSY
11
Include pos.12,13,14,15,16
401529
BUFFER
12
Included in pos.11
401530
SHIM PLATE
13
Included in pos.11
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
REMARKS
75783
14
Included in pos.11
75291
WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200
15
Included in pos.11
75055
16
Included in pos.11
51593
ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45
17
Included in pos. 19
75330
18
Included in pos. 19
51593
ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45
19
Include Pos.17, 18, 25.
76842
SCREW M6S 20X110 FZB 8.8
20
75292
21
47678
SPACER (M20)
22
75052
23
75292
24
70918
25
den 10 oktober 2002
Included in pos. 19
Sida 2 av 2

15
2 3 38
53 54
231
55
41 23
47 10 13 12 16 17 59 19 58 40
4
34
37
65
57 49
35
33
56
43
45
11
44
32
7
24
22
39
31
30
46
42
61 18 14 51 14 25 28
20 28 29
62 60
8 9 74 63
27
26
36
71
68
72
73
67
69
SIGN
DESIGNED
Illtek
DATE
020926
70
52
64
69
70
66 65
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
EH5
SURFACE
TREATMENT
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
PLOT DATE
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Hydraulic Assy End beam
A Partek Company
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52005
EH5 Hydraulic Assy

DRAWING SP-52005
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
76526
HYDRAULIC OIL ISO VG 32
50
56350
HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87
74564
COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8"
13
44447
COUPLING RESTRICT.GE10SR 1.2MM
71864
COUPLING SV10-S
71877
79801
PRESSURE FILTER (50L) PI3605-
71297
FILTER INSERT
78371
SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR
76196
HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC
56360
HOSE 821-06/KL 580/P86/P86
10
24 June 2003
REMARKS
50L OIL
SEE DRAWING SP-52009 FOR MORE DETAILS
Sida 1 av 6
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
71872
COUPLING GE20-S 1 1/16"-12 UNF
11
71874
COUPLING GE12-S 9/16"-18 UNF
12
44553
DRAIN PIPE EH5
13
71764
COUPLING 3.5/28
14
78960
AIR BREATHER 3"MY"
15
71290
VALVE RHD12-S NON RETURN
16
73380
COUPLING EDKO 12-S
17
71320
HYDRAULIC PUMP PVQ10
18
72005
ELMOTOR 2.2kW 380/415/440/480
19
58016
HOSE 821-06/KL 460/P86/P86
20
56334
HOSE 821-06/KL 560/P86/P87
22
73096
VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-60
23
700735
VALV BLOCK
24
24 June 2003
REMARKS
WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT FOR THIS PUMP PLEASE STATE K4264
WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT PLEASE STATE PART NO K4222 AND SOLENOID 70422
Sida 2 av 6
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
75195
SCREW MC6S 8X100 12.9 DIN912
25
75090
26
75328
27
71871
28
70157
COUPLING VSTI 3/8"-JE
29
56350
HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87
30
71866
31
57419
HOSE 821-04/KL 630/P86/P86
32
56349
HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87
33
56348
HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87
34
56348
HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87
35
71343
SIGHT GLASS AS240 R 3/4"
36
56349
HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87
37
24 June 2003
REMARKS
Sida 3 av 6
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
56350
HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87
38
56349
HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87
39
57425
HOSE 821-06/KL 770/P86/P86
40
75375
SCREW MC6S 5X 30 12.9 OBEH
16
41
44552
SUCTION PIPE EH5
43
45965
PLUG VSTIR 1/2" KOMPL.
44
71896
COUPLING KOR20-12-S
45
70084
COUPLING MTNIP.ST-04-R FORM A
46
75055
49
79019
PLASTIC RING FOR COUPLI. 71764
51
46799
FLAP GB. EH130/600
52
34224
GASKET HYD.TANK EH5
53
39221
HYDR.TANK LID EH5
54
24 June 2003
REMARKS
Sida 4 av 6
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
REMARKS
75212
10
55
K3726
O-RING (HYDRV./BLOCK)
56
75294
WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200
57
SEE REMARKS
58
KEY FOR MOTOR SHAFT ON EL.MOTOR PART NO 72005
SEE REMARKS
59
KEY FOR PUMP PART NO 71320
70040
60
75290
61
70403
CUP SPRING 23X10.2X1.25 D-2093
62
79281
PLUG IN BOX 8' OFF
63
75293
14
64
75552
WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB
64
401400
FLATBAR
65
401399
FLAP
66
24 June 2003
Sida 5 av 6
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
44762
FLAT BAR
67
44760
FLAP EH5
68
75669
14
70
75098
14
71
75329
WASHER BRB 4.3X 9X0.8 FZB HB2
72
79265
73
75159
74
24 June 2003
REMARKS
Sida 6 av 6

18
8 6 5 2 7
26
25
1
7 4 5 7 3 9 10 13 15 16
12
11
23
22
19
14
17
20
24
21
28
27
30
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
Illtek 020910
PLOT DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
29
SPREADER TYPE
EH5
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Telescopic Gearbox Assy
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52006
EH5 Telescopic Gearbox Assy

DRAWING SP-52006
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
53596
SHAFT
53603
DISTANCE
53604
DISTANCE
53605
DISTANCE
73562
BEARING 22212 CC W33
74243
LOCKING RING SGA 60
73573
RUBBER SEALING V-70A
53595
COVER
53594
COVER
75212
12
10
700730
KEY 18X11X80
11
73564
KEY 18X11X 40
12
51515
CHAIN WHEEL E112-1-11
13
51664
WASHER 6X21X80
14
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 1 av 2
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
75285
LOCKING WASHER M20
15
75286
SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP
16
75289
17
71328
18
39055
GEARBOX ASSY TELESCOPIC
19
401287
PLATE
20
75008
21
75292
22
75052
23
79785
24
75294
25
75119
26
62345
EL MOTOR 3 KW BRAKE 230V
27
39059
GEARBOX KA87
79680
COUPLING GEARBOX+ELMOTOR KA87
29
77779
BRAKE ASSY 230V BM4 INCL.HR
30
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Include Pos.27-30
28
Sida 2 av 2
Bromma Group Manual
7.3.2.2 Spare parts list for Twistlock Floating ISO

1002945 Left
1002946 Right
May. 06 rev.01
Bromma Conquip
7.3.2.2 Twistlock Floating ISO
Page 1
Bromma Group Manual
Page 2
Bromma Conquip
May. 06 rev.01
Bromma Group Manual
SP-POS
SP-POS
1002945
TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT
DESCRIPTION
1002946
TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT
1000431
TWISTLOCK PIN
QTY
REMARKS
Items 28 and 29 exluded
GUIDE BLOCK
53968
SPHERICAL WASHER
57059
1000434
TWISTLOCK KEY
1000432
NUT
(M39x4-6H)
70165
SCREW
M6S 8x75 FZB 8.8
54049
SPACER RING
74147
HYDRAULIC CY LINDER
10
37704
BLOCKADING PIN
FZB
11
70429
SPRING
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
12
75055
NUT LOCK-KING
M12 FZB
13
75295
WASHER NORD-LOCK
M12 FZB
14
74044
LOCK PIN
R.R 3.0
15
71328
GREASE FITTING
R 1/8"
16
74970
SWITCH A TTACH. STD.
(SENSOR D=30)
SCREW
M6S 8x50 FZB 8.8
SWITCH PAD h=10
17
75226
18
1001482
TYPE 2 Right
(CA 32/20-100/65)
19
75694
SCREW
M6S 6x55 FZB 8.8
20
700686
SCREW
M6S 6x65 FZB 8.8
21
43654
BLOCKADING PIECE
FZB
22
75090
NUT
LOC-KING M8 FZB
BRB 8.4x16x1.5 FZB
23
75328
WASHER
24
48916
BOLTING PLATE
FZB
25
75268
WASHER NORD-LOCK
M6 FZB
26
79850
COVER PLATE DEP4
FZB
27
1002454
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. RIGHT
FZB
28
43653
TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY. LEFT
TYPE 1 Included in 1002945 Tw istlock assy left
29
1002453
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. LEFT
included in 1002945 Tw istlock assy left
May. 06 rev.01
NOTE
Items 4 and 27 exluded
Bromma Conquip
Page 3

6
7
13
9
10
3
4
S*
5
2
8
10
10
11
12
Single Sensor assembly SP10

6
9
10
15
7
13
4
S*
5
2
1
8
10
10
11
12
Dual Sensor assembly SP11

SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 020926
SPREADER TYPE
EH5 ll
PLOT DATE
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Sensor Assy
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52008
Single Sensor Assy Part no 38084 SP-52008

Pos Part no
Description
Qty
Remarks
38084
SENSOR SINGEL ASSY
Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
38082
SINGLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT
Welded parts on frame
400267
PLATE
38087
PROTECTION PLATE
74970
CLAMP 04-430 PP
53951
PAD FOR SWITCH H=22
700647
75268
75102
75422
10
75328
11
75090
12
76728
WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB
13
79850
COVER PLATE DEP 4
den 10 oktober 200
Sida 1 av 1
Dual Sensor Assy Part no 38085 SP-52008

Pos Part no
Description
Qty
Remarks
38085
DUAL SENSOR ASSY
Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
38083
DOUBLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT
Welded part on Frame
400267
PLATE
38086
PROTECTION PLATE
74970
CLAMP 04-430 PP
53951
PAD FOR SWITCH H=22
700647
75268
75102
75422
10
75328
11
75090
12
76728
WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB
13
79850
COVER PLATE DEP 4
den 10 oktober 200
Sida 1 av 1

9
19
16
3
17
1
13
15
12
7
5
6
20
21
10
22
8
2
19
18 11
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 021029
SPREADER TYPE
EH5 ll
PLOT DATE
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Gearbox
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52009
EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 53275

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
53275
GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1
51176
GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL
55503
SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL
51177
COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL
54465
GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03
54463
GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03
54590
BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING
51284
BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING
72010
KEY 20X12X 30 TK
76196
10
75049
11
70548
12
79683
KEY 32X8X7
13
75295
15
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Drawn)
Sida 1 av 2
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
71328
16
78493
SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8
17
75055
18
78371
20
76922
VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN
21
76915
SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR
22
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 2 av 2

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
60629
51176
55503
51177
54465
GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03
54463
GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03
54590
51284
72010
KEY 20X12X 30 TK
76900
GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR
76196
10
75049
11
70548
12
79683
KEY 32X8X7
13
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)
Sida 1 av 2
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
75295
15
78493
17
75055
18
76332
19
78371
20
76922
21
76915
22
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 2 av 2

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
60628
51176
55503
51177
54465
GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03
54463
GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03
54590
51284
72010
KEY 20X12X 30 TK
76900
GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR
76196
10
75049
11
70548
12
79683
KEY 32X8X7
13
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Drawn)
Sida 1 av 2
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
75295
15
78493
17
75055
18
76332
19
78371
20
76922
21
76915
22
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 2 av 2

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
56230
51176
55503
51177
54465
GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03
54463
GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03
54590
51284
72010
KEY 20X12X 30 TK
76196
10
75049
11
70548
12
79683
KEY 32X8X7
13
75295
15
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)
Sida 1 av 2
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
71328
16
78493
17
75055
18
78371
20
76922
21
76915
22
den 10 oktober 2002
REMARKS
Sida 2 av 2

2
6
35
36
33
34
52
53
47
39
46
42
43
45
44
48
41
7 54
40
14
28
29
27
25 8
30
31
32
26
37
38
13
48
49
50
51
10 11 15 16
4
23 18 22 17 20 21 24 19
12
SIGN
DESIGNED
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
Illtek 020911
SPREADER TYPE
EH5
PLOT DATE
SURFACE
TREATMENT
ARTICLE No
SCALE
Exploded View
Telescopic Drive
A Partek Company
TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768
REVISION
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52012
EH5 Telescopic Drive

DRAWING SP-52012
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
QTY
POS
REMARKS
23855
TENSION ROD
16441
TELESCOPIC DRIVE ATT. ASSY
See Telescopic assy Drawing SP-52006
38073
CHAIN ASSY
Include pos.7,37,38
400242
TENSION ROD PIN ASSY
Include pos. 10,11,15,16
400244
END STOP ASSY
Include pos. 49,50,51,55
23854
TENSION ROD
61698
SHOCK ABSORBER
Includ pos.39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,54
37409
CABLE CHAIN ASSY
Include pos.25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32
39047
CABLE CHAIN TOWER ASSY
Include pos.33,34,35,36
46744
SHAFT (TENSION ROD PIN ASSY)
10
Included in pos.4
400241
WASHER
11
Included in pos.4
38862
PEDESTAL BEARING
12
Include pos. 17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24
38084
SENSOR SINGEL ASSY
13
38085
DUAL SENSOR ASSY
14
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 4
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
REMARKS
75267
15
Included in pos.4
75365
16
Included in pos.4
46773
SHAFT
17
Included in pos.12
46765
CHAIN WHEEL
18
Included in pos.12
51659
WASHER
19
Included in pos.12
41794
WASHER
20
Included in pos.12
73562
BEARING 22212 CC W33
21
Included in pos.12
73950
KEY 12X 8X 30 DIN 6885 B TK
22
Included in pos.12
74243
LOCKING RING SGA 60
23
Included in pos.12
71328
24
Included in pos.12
37408
CABLE CHAIN
25
Included in pos.8
46771
GLIDE BLOCK
26
Included in pos.8
75499
27
Included in pos.8
75150
28
Included in pos.8
75323
29
Included in pos.8
79834
SCREW MC6S 5X 20 FZB
30
Included in pos.8
79835
SCREW MC6S 5X 12 FZB
31
Included in pos.8
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 4
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
REMARKS
75445
32
Included in pos.8
38996
CABLE CHAIN TOWER
33
Included in pos.9
75497
34
Included in pos.9
75090
35
Included in pos.9
75328
36
Included in pos.9
71512
CHAIN LOCK SIMPLEX 1 1/2" 177H
37
included in pos.3
47468
CHAIN SIMPLEX 1 1/2"177H 119
38
included in pos.3
53434
LINK SHOCK ABSORBER
39
Included in pos.7
59899
LINK L1=341 L2=381
40
Included in pos.7
59897
TUBE
41
Included in pos.7
53435
NUT SHOCK ABSORBER
42
Included in pos.7
74686
NUT M30 LOC-KING FZB KLASS 8
43
Included in pos.7
75098
44
Included in pos.7
75293
45
Included in pos.7
75694
46
Included in pos.7
71529
TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN
47
Included in pos.7
71686
CUP SPRING 71X36X4 No18
36
48
Included in pos.7
den 10 oktober 2002
35X2 L=196
Sida 3 av 4
DESCRIPTION
PART NO
QTY
POS
REMARKS
46757
SHIM
49
Include in pos.5
75267
50
Include in pos.5
78498
51
Include in pos.5
70142
CLAMP 01-110 PP
52
75099
53
71633
NUT M30 ML6M FZB
54
Included in pos.7
46743
END STOP
55
Include in pos.5
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 4 av 4
REV
a
b
DESCRIPTION
One item 701016 and
1001909 added
No manufacturing change
ECO-No.
DATE
BY
Value
2008-10-14
PON
Value
2009-02-16
PON
A-A ( 1 : 2 )
10
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AN OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
SIGNED BY
DATE
PON 2008-04-07
MATERIAL
ALT.
SHEET
1/1
WEIGHT
11,3 kg SS-ISO 2768-c

FORMAT
CABINET X100 MOBILE SPREADER

C/C 430x150
TOLERANCE GENERAL
A1
STANDARD
REV.
b
DRAWING NUMBER
1018972
F/N
Qty
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1,00
1,00
4,00
4,00
14,00
1,00
1,00
14,00
1,00
1,00
Name
1018972
1018967
1018235
1000657
701437
701016
701018
701019
1001909
1001911
1001912
Rev
b
c
-
Type
Cabinet
Cabinet
Connectors and Terminals
Fastening Components
Fastening Components
Enclosures and Accessories
Title
CABINET X100 MOBILE SPREADER
CABINET X100
MOUNTING PLATE ASSY
SCREW MC6S M8x16
WASHER NORD-LOCK M8
GLAND MS-M16 4.5-10mm
GLAND MS-M25 9-17mm
GLAND MS-M32 11-21mm
Electrical component
Title2
C/C 430x150
C/C 430x150
JIB SPREADER
A4 KLASS 70
A4
M16x1.5
M25x1.5
M32x1.5
Gland nut M16/ Skindicht
REV
DESCRIPTION
RUBBER COVER ADDED
AND MOUNTING PARTS
matrix update
MOUNTING PARTS FOR
RUBBER COVER CHANGED
a
b
c
1
ECO-No.
DATE
BY
Value
2008-09-30
PON
Value
2008-10-13
PON
Value
2009-02-04
PON
A-A
6
B
B (2:1)
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AN OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
SIGNED BY
DATE
PON 2008-04-07
MATERIAL
ALT.
SHEET
1/1
WEIGHT
7,35 kg SS-ISO 2768-c

FORMAT
CABINET X100
C/C 430x150
TOLERANCE GENERAL
A2
STANDARD
REV.
c
DRAWING NUMBER
1018967
F/N
Qty
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1,00
4,00
1,00
2,00
2,00
2,00
1,00
2,00
2,00
Name
1018967
1018159
76460
1018174
1008258
1020746
1020637
1022661
77851
1000742
Title
CABINET X100
DOOR ASSEMBLY
NUT LOC-KING M8
ELECTRICAL BOX
VALVE
LOCKING DEVICE
LOCKING DEVICE
RUBBER COVER
SCREW M6S 8x25
WASHER A4-RBS 8,4
Title2
C/C 430x150
X100
A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
WELD ASSEMBLY
Bednorz, 800-VH-NA-NR
Bednorz, 800-18-C-NR
X100
A4, CLASS 70
KLASS 70
Cabinet X100
Terminals for -M,-HL.

Marking 1,2,3......19.
Terminal fuses
Marking 1,2,......7.
Shield plate CAN side / -M,-HL side
Sheild CANopen cable

D
Terminal CANopen High

Marking 1,2,......7
Terminal CANopen Low

Marking 1,2,......7
Terminal 24V GND

Marking 1,2,......7
When stripping the CANopen cable,

sheild should be max. 20mm
due to minimize electrical interference to CANopen
MACHINE TYPE:
This drawing is copyright, and is

the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH170
-
SCS CANopen
Cable/ Sensor Layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
krpulha
2009-02-09
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
2009-02-09
15:13
FILENAME:
SHEET
42
43
F
53
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002493
9
Bromma Group Manual
BGS Accessories
8.15 LED signal lamps
Application
- Low power consumption
Bromma telescopic spreaders can be equipped with LED

signal lamps to inform the crane driver and other personnel if
the sprader has landed, (white or yellow), is unlocked (green)
or has locked (red) on a container. For twinlift spreaders a
fourth lamp is used to indicate twinboxes down (blue). For
mobile harbour crane spreaders the fourth lamp indicates
tower in mid position (yellow).
- No Phantom color effect
Description
The Bromma LED lamp assy consists of an aluminum bottom
plate and 1-4 LED lights. They are available in 24VDC or
110/230VDC versions. The 24VDC models are equipped
with a M12 connector. The 110/230 models come with 10 m
connection cable with an open end. The LED Lamp assy also
includes attachment screws, washers and nuts (M8 FZB).
- Low maintenance
- Excellent durability
Available models
Art. No.
Green, red, yellow
24 VDC
1001399
Green, red, white
24 VDC
1001400
Green, red, yellow, blue
24 VDC
1001401
Green, red, white, blue
24 VDC
1001402
Blue
24 VDC
1001403
Green, red
24 VDC
1001404
Red, green, yellow
24 VDC
1001479
Green, red, white, yellow
24 VDC
1001883
Green, red, yellow
110/230VAC
1001405
Green, red, white
110/230VAC
1001406
Green, red, yellow, blue
110/230VAC
1001407
Green, red, white, blue
110/230VAC
1001408
Blue
110/230VAC
1001409
Green, red
110/230VAC
1001410
Red, green, yellow
110/230VAC
700919
Green, red, white, yellow
110/230VAC
1001884
0-1- June. 06 rev.00
Rec. cable
70396 (M12 open end 10 m)
voltage
10m open end included
LED Colors
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Group Manual
Technical specifications
Model
Voltage range
Power consumption per light aspect
Light intesity per light aspect (clear cupola)
24VDC
110/230VAC
21--30 VDC
3.2 W
40 cd
100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz

2.5 W
30 cd
from -40OC to +55OC

up to 98% at temperature up to +35OC
IEC 60068-2-11
10-50 Hz with acceleration up to 10 g
IP68 (IEC 60529)
Hi tech polycarbonate Makrolon
10 mm aluminum alloy powder coated (RAL9005)
Ambient air temperature

Relative humidity
Salt mist conditions
Mechanical wibration
Ingress protection
Material Cupola
Material Bottm plate
Dimensions
Light
aspects
1
2
3
4
A (mm)
B (mm)
160
305
450
595
130
275
420
565
Spare parts
SP-POS
1
2
3
4
5
6
PART NO.
75102
75328
75090
DESCRIPTION
QTY
Screw M&S 8x30
4
Washer BRB 8,4x16x1,5 8
Nut M8 LOC-KING
4
1001415
1002903
70396
Attachment stright
Attachment tilted 300
Cable 10m
Warnings
CAUTION: LED light units are sources of bright light. Do
not stare directly into the beam from close distances and
observe all the warnings and guidelines in the instruction
manual. Bromma LED indicator panels are classified as
Class 2M LED devices according to the standard
IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001.
Bromma Conquip
8-2- June. 06 rev .00
REMARKS
FZB 8.8
FZB HB2
FZB
see page 1
2 per LED
2 per LED
for 24VDC
Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Quant
4
8
4
1001444
1001444
7004-18
HNN / Antwerpen
Title
SCREW M6S 8x30
WASHER BRB
NUT M8 LOC-KING
LED-PANEL MOUNT. DET.

STS 45

FZB 8.8
8,4x16x1,5 FZB HB2
FZB
sign:
rev:
Dwg No.
BNM
-
date
2004-04-19
Art. No. Remarks

75102
75328
75090
How to order spare parts and/or service
All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done by the Bromma e-commerce
website. To order the requested spare parts some important information must be
available.
The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3or the dataplate mounted on
main frame of the current spreader.
The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See Spare part list.
Registered User
To be able to log in at the Bromma e-commerce site you must be a registered user.
To become a registered user you have to fill in the Application Form on the Bromma
website. After a few days you will receive an User ID and a password by e-mail.
When you are a regitered user fill in your User ID and password at the fields on the
Bromma e-commerce website (www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Search Function
If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if you have any other
problems finding valid part numbers you can use the search function on the website
or call your local Bromma dealer. The phone number is published on the website
at www.bromma.com
FOR SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL

DEALER
To avoid damage to property or personal injury when replacing parts, always

use BROMMA CONQUIP original parts.
BROMMA CONQUIP
08 02 ENG
rev.3
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
9 Hydraulic circuit diagrams
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
09 01 ENG
rev.
10 Electrical wiring diagrams
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
10 01 ENG
rev
BROMMA
MALAXGATAN 7
S-164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN
Email: SALES@BROMMA.COM
+46 (0)8 620 09 00
Tel:
B
Customer
Plant designation
Drawing Number
Revision
:
:
:
:
Manufacturer (Company)
: BROMMA
Project name
Serial Number
Type
Responsible for project
: EH5U_SCS CANopen
: : EH5U
:
LIEBHERR
A1
1002499
f
LIEBHERR
C
BROMMA SPREADER EH5U

E
Created on the
The latest revition
:
:
11/19/2009
08/20/2010
By
Number of pages :
: chanka
Manufacturing site
MACHINE TYPE:

The design and/or constructions
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
45
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
aveklle
09/19/2001
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Flyleaf
CHECKED BY:
DATE
EH5U
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
1
2
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Table of content
Plant des.
Location
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
X0
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
A1
A1
X0
X0
Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Page description
Flyleaf
Table of contents
Table of contents
Connector designation
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
PLC diagram
I/O card overview
I/O card overview
I/O card overview
Rev
Revision note
Date
06/12/2007
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
11/02/2001
SHEET
SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
2
3
45
CONT.
Table of contents
CHECKED BY:
Editor
aveklle
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
Table of content
Plant des.
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
Location
X0
X1
X0
X1
X0
X0
X0
X0
Page
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Page description
I/O card overview
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Spreader layout
Parts list: (79125 - 75618)
Parts list: (73983 - 76576)
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
Rev
Revision note
Date
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
11/03/2004
SHEET
SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
3
4
45
CONT.
Table of contents
CHECKED BY:
Editor
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
SPREADER CONNECTOR
XP1 SPREADER MALE CONTACT

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
L
PE
CONTROL VOLTAGE
PROTECTION EARTH
SPREADER PILOT
CONTROL VOLTAGE HEATER

CONTROL VOLTAGE HEATER
SPARE
TWL LOCK
TWL UNLOCK
GREEN FLIPPERS DOWN
BLACK FLIPPERS DOWN
RED FLIPPERS DOWN
WHITE FLIPPER DOWN
ALL FLIPPERS UP
TWL LOCK
TWL UNLOCK
MOVE G.P. TO WHITE
MOVE G.P. TO BLACK
EXPAND TELESCOPE
RETRACT TELESCOPE
SPARE
SPARE
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
NEUTRAL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
SPARE
H.I.S
(OPTION)
B
SIG
SIG
CMD
CMD
CMD
XP1 PIN DESCRIPTION

1
5
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
10
16
11
17
34
13
25
14
20
26
31
35
21
27
22
28
37
RED POINT
L1
MALE INSERT
L2
L3
N
SOCKET= ODU 309 020 000 554 000 BROMMA Nr.73523

INSERT = ODU 309 803 150 037 151 BROMMA Nr.74410
MACHINE TYPE:

SIGN.
SIG
SIG
SIG
SIG
PE
ALL LANDED SIGNAL

TTDC OK
(OPTION)
PROTECTION EARTH
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
33
32
36
NOTE:
Plug is to be filled
with Elastosil RT607A
or similar Compound
15
L1
L2
L3
ITEM
4
8
19
30
12
24
29
3
7
18
23
CMD
CMD
2
6
SERIAL NO.
SCS CANopen
Connector designation
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
sharifsy
05/08/2002
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
SHEET
4
5
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
A1
+X0
-XP1
22
-WXP1
-X2
30
23
31
24
32
37
22
30
23
31
24
32
PE
:L1
:L1
:L2
:L2
:L3
:L3
:PE
:PE
-F1
2A
-QM8
I>
I>
2
-QM1
I>
4
I>
I>
2
1
2
-P1
I>
4
B
-Q1
-K1
/7.01
-K8
-K9
-K2
-K3
/10.04
/10.05
/10.01
/10.02
/6.01 / -Phase L3
/6.01 / -Phase L2
C
/6.01 / -Phase L1
-XP23
-X2
21
A1
+X100
-X2
-WM4
21
:7
:8
:9
:PE
PE
-M4
3.0KW
-WM1
PE
5.5KW
SIGN.
3
2
-BRAKE1
-M1
Gravity point motor
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
05/14/2002
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
PE
DATE
M
3 ~
-BRAKE2
MACHINE TYPE:

-M1
:PE
-M4
Telescopic motor
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
:3
M
3 ~
PE
ITEM
:2
A1
+X0
-WXP23
:1
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
5
6
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
A1
+X0
-XP1
-XP2
PE
-WXP2
BROWN
-WXP1
/5.01 / -Phase L3
PE
BLUE
/5.01 / -Phase L2
/5.01 / -Phase L1
-X2
-K6
/10.03
I>
I>
2
-QM7
I>
4
:103
:102
:104
-KA1
/7.07
-QM6
:101
I>
I>
2
14
12
11
-KA1
/7.07
24
22
21
I>
4
C
L
-XP23
22
20
-EH1
PE
A1
+X0
-WXP23
22
20
PE
:1
:2
:3
:PE
:4
:5
:6
:PE
:PE
PE
PE
A1
+X100
D
-X2
-WM2
-M2
2.2KW
-WM3
M
3 ~
-M3
2.2KW
M
3 ~
PE
PE
-M2
Hydralic pump
left
-M3
Hydralic pump
right
Cabinet heater
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
05/14/2002
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
6
7
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
1
A1
+X0
-XP1
-WXP1
25
25
-X2
:107
:105
:108
:106
-Q1
13
/5.01
14
1
-X2
22
GND
-X2
BN
C
A2
A1
:N
:N
-N.VAC / /13.00
:L
-L.VAC / /12.00
:L
YL/GL
BU
90-255VAC
---24VDC
-K1
21
NOTE:
All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected
10A
-F2
B
.01
-SS1
RD RD
BK BK
+ +
- -
A1
-G1
-KA1
A2
-24VDC SCS / /15.00

-24VDC / /9.00
-0VDC / /10.00
11
-SS1
.01
12
D
7
:2
-X1
:3
-K1
-XP21
.04
24VDC
+ 24VDC
MACHINE TYPE:

SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
:-
10
:-
:-
14
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
21/6.08
-KA1
Cabinet heater
EH5U
sharifsy
03/22/2002
11/6.08
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
22
0 VDC
ITEM
:-
12
24
Spreader
stop
:-
/8.08 / -XP21:10
:-
:-
/8.08 / -XP21:9
:+
/8.08 / -XP21:8
6 /5.01
:+
/8.07 / -XP21:7
:+
/8.07 / -XP21:6
4 /5.01
:+
/8.09 / -XP21:5
:+
/8.09 / -XP21:4
2 /5.01
:+
/8.09 / -XP21:3
:+
/8.08 / -XP21:2
.01
/8.08 / -XP21:1
/14.00 / -Spreader stop
:1
NOTE:
Wire for 24VDC
shall bee 2,5mm
with blue colour.
-X1
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
7
8
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
1
SIGN.
2
:3
:10
:17
:24
:4
:11
:18
:25

:5
:12
:19
:26
DATE
:6
:13
:20
MACHINE TYPE:
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
:27
sharifsy
08/27/2004
:7
:14
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
:21
-WXP21
6
EH5U
-
CHECKED BY:
A1
:
X1
7
7
PLOTTED:
8
9
08/20/2010
10
FILENAME:
17:10
2
3
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
/7.05 / -XP21:5
A1
+X100
/7.05 / -XP21:4
:23
brown
white
blue
red
brown
white
blue
red
brown
white
blue
red
-WX13
-Can low X13 / /24.09
-Can high X13 / /24.09
-GND X13 / /25.09
-VBB X13 / /25.09
-Can low X10 / /22.09
-Can high X10 / /22.09
-GND X10 / /23.09
-+VBB X10 / /23.09
-Can low X8 / /20.09
-Can high X8 / /20.09
-GND X8 / /21.09
-+VBB X8 / /21.09
-Can low X3 / /18.09
-Can high X3 / /18.09
-GND X3 / /19.09
-+VBB X3 / /19.09
-Can low X2 / /16.09
-Can high X2 / /16.09
/7.05 / -XP21:3
:16
-WX10
/7.04 / -XP21:2
:9
brown
white
blue
-WX8
/7.04 / -XP21:1
:2
/7.06 / -XP21:10
:22
/7.06 / -XP21:9
-WXP22
:15
red
-WX3
/7.06 / -XP21:8
A1
+X0
brown
white
-GND X2 / /17.09
/7.06 / -XP21:7
:8
/7.06 / -XP21:6
:1
Brown
-X1
White
/15.06 / -CAN low X1
/15.06 / -CAN high X1
-WX2
blue
-+VBB X2 / /17.09
red
0
8
9
A1
+X0
B
B
-0VDC / +X1/9.00
:28
D
D
E
E
SHEET
CONT.
DRAWING NO.
TOTAL SH.
1002499
9
8
9
F
45
REV.
:43
PIN NO: 21
PIN NO: 44
:41
:31
:42
:44
:21
+B1-XPX1
COMMON GROUP 2
:3
COMMON GROUP 1
-B1
:2
:11
:1
B
/7.08 / -24VDC
-24VDC / /10.00
-XP23
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A1
+X0
-WXP23
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A1
+X100
+X1/8.08 / -0VDC
-X2
:13
:14
:15
:16
:17
:18
:19
:16
-WHL 5-8
-WHL 1-4
-HL1
-HL2
Green
Red
-HL3
White
-HL4
Yellow
-HL5
-HL6
Green
-HL7
White
Red
-HL8
Yellow
-HL1
Unlocked left
-HL2
Locked left
-HL3
Landed left
-HL4
Tower in center left
-HL5
Unlocked right
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
05/14/2002
-HL8
Tower in centre right
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
-HL7
Landed right
-HL6
Locked right
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
9
10
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
PIN NO: 21
PIN NO: 44
:6
12
:7
:16
11
:35
13
:26
10
:8
:4
+B1-XPX1
COMMON GROUP 4
14
:5
COMMON GROUP 3
-B1
15
:25
16
:15
/9.09 / -24VDC
-24VDC / /11.00
A1
A1
-K2
A1
-K3
A2
-K6
A1
A1
A2
A2
-K8
A2
-K9
A2
D
/7.08 / -0VDC
-0VDC / /11.00
2 /5.07
2 /5.08
2 /6.02
2/5.04
2 /5.05
4 /5.07
4 /5.08
4 /6.02
4/5.04
4 /5.05
6 /5.07
6 /5.08
6 /6.02
6/5.04
6 /5.05
K3
Gravity point
to right
K2
Gravity point
to left
K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
Extend
telescope

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/29/2004
Not
connected
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Not
connected
Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
10
11
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
:30
20
:40
:20
19
:50
21
:10
18
PIN NO: 50
COMMON GROUP 6
:9
:46
+B1-XPX1
17
PIN NO: 9
COMMON GROUP 5
22
:47
-B1
23
:49
24
:48
/10.09 / -24VDC
-24VDC / /14.00
D
1
-P2
2
/10.09 / -0VDC
-0VDC / /14.00
Not
connected
Not
connected
Not
connected
Not
connected
Container
Counter
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
Not
connected
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
11/23/2004
Not
connected
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Not
connected
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
11
12
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
:41
:42
PIN NO: 43
PIN NO: 11
:31
28
:21
27
:43
29
:11
26
+B1-XPX3
25
:24
30
COMMON GROUP 8
COMMON GROUP 7
:35
31
-B1
:44
32
:45
/7.08 / -L.VAC
C
-X2
A1
+X0
-WXP1
-XP1
:109
:110
:111
35
:112
35
:113
:114
:115
:116
20
21
34
36
20
21
34
36
Unlocked
signal
Locked
signal
Spreader landed
signal
G.p. in centre
signal
G.p. to left
signal
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
03/12/2001
TTDS ok
signal (option)
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
H.I.S
signal (option)
G.p. to right
signal
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
12
13
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
A1
+X0
-XP1
19
-WXP1
18
19
13
18
10
13
12
10
11
12
11
-X2
:117
:118
:119
:120
:121
:122
:123
:124
115 VAC INPUT MODULE

BROMMA part no. 1001748
/7.08 / -N.VAC
-N.VAC / /14.00
+B1-XPX3
:1
:5
:4
:3
:2
:15
:6
:16
33
34
35
36
COMMON GROUP 9
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
Telescope
expand / to40
CMD
Flippers
all up
CMD
PIN NO: 15
Telescope
retract / to 20
CMD
:26
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
38
Flipper
right down
CMD
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
39
Flipper
left down
CMD
EH5U
-
40
sharifsy
09/26/2002
Flipper
landside down
CMD
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
COMMON GROUP 10
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
37
:25
-B1
PIN NO: 1
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
13
14
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
A1
+X0
-XP1
14
-WXP1
15
14
16
15
17
16
17

-X2
:125
:126
:127
:128
/11.09 / -24VDC
13
-SB1
14
GRAV.POINT
AUT. RETURN
OFF
ON
/11.09 / -0VDC
-0VDC / /15.00
D
/13.08 / -N.VAC
+B1-XPX3
:36
:49
:48
:47
:46
:8
:7
:10
:9
:40
:50
:30
:20
42
43
44
COMMON GROUP 11
Twl
lock
CMD
Twl
unlock
CMD
G.p.
move to left
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
46
DRAWN BY:
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
07/07/2004
47
Spreader
stop
48
G.p.
auto return
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Not
connected
Not
connected
45
PIN NO: 20
41
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 8
PIN NO: 36
-B1
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
14
15
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
-X2
:129
-CAN low X1 / /8.01
-CAN high X1 / /8.01
:130
-XP22
-WXP22
white
brown
EEPROM
+B1-XPX2
:42
:43
:44
:45
:10
:9
:19
:29
:39
:49
:30
:40
:50
:20
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
RED
GN
BN;GN
-KEY1
WH
/7.08 / -24VDC SCS
WH;BN
/14.09 / -0VDC
16
26
36
:48
:6
:16
:26
:36
Main supply
node B1
Node
Address
B-Can

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
EEPROM
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
07/07/2004
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
VCC
SC
SD
GND
Can-GND
Can-open L
SERIAL NO.
DATE
Can-open
MACHINE TYPE:
Can-open H
B-Can L
B-Can H
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID1
ID0
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
-B1
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
15
16
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
-WS2-S6
-S10
-WS9
3
-
-S9
3
-
-S6
-S2
-WS1-S5
-S5
-WS10
-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01
3
-
-S1
-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01
-R2
2
Node ID: 2
Left gable end
+X2-XP1
+X2-XP3
In 1
-S1
Unlocked
left landside
In 5
-S5
Locked
left landside
+X2-XP5
In 2
-S2
Unlocked
left waterside
In 6
-S6
Locked
left waterside
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
In 7
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
03/12/2001
+X2-X0
In 4
-S10
Landed
left waterside
In 8
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
:1
:2
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
Spare
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
In 3
-S9
Landed
left landside
+X2-XP7
CAN_low
-X2
/17.00
CAN_high
16
17
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Out 3
Out 7
Out 4
Out 8
GND
Left gable end

+X2-XP2
+X2-XP4
+X2-XP6
+X2-XP8
+X2-X0
+VBB
Out 6
Out 2
6
O
Out 5
Out 1
Node ID: 2
/16.00
0
-X2
:3
:5
-WY7-Y8
-WY1-Y2
-WY3-Y4
-WY5-Y6
B 2
-Y8
B 2
-Y1
A
B 2
-Y3
-Y2
B 2
-Y5
-Y4
-Y6
+X1/8.01 / -GND X2
+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2
-Y7
-Y7
Twistlock
unlock left
-Y8
Twistlock
lock left
-Y1
Flipper 1 up
left landside
-Y2
Flipper 1 down
left landside
-Y3
Flipper 2 up
left waterside
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
-Y4
Flipper 2 down
left waterside
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/22/2004
-Y6
Flipper 5 down
left centre
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
-Y5
Flipper 5 up
left centre
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
17
18
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
-S7
-WS4-S8
-WS11
-S12
-S11
-S8
-S4
-WS3-S7
-S3
-WS12
-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02
-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02
-R3
2
Node ID: 3
+X3-XP1
Right gable end
+X3-XP3
In 1
-S3
Unlocked
right waterside
In 5
-S7
Locked
right waterside
+X3-XP5
In 2
-S4
Unlocked
right landside
In 6
-S8
Locked
right landside
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
In 7
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/22/2004
+X3-X0
In 4
-S12
Landed
right landside
In 8
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
:1
:2
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
Spare
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
In 3
-S11
Landed
right waterside
+X3-XP7
CAN_low
-X3
/19.00
CAN_high
18
19
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Out 3
Out 7
Out 4
Out 8
GND
Right gable end

+X3-XP2
+X3-XP4
+X3-XP6
+X3-XP8
+X3-X0
+VBB
Out 6
Out 2
6
O
Out 5
Out 1
Node ID: 3
/18.00
0
-X3
:3
:5
-WY15-Y16
-WY9-Y10
-WY11-Y12
-WY13-Y14
B 2
-Y16
B 2
-Y9
A
-Y10
B 2
-Y11
B 2
-Y13
-Y12
-Y14
+X1/8.02 / -GND X3
+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3
-Y15
-Y15
Twistlock
unlock right
-Y16
Twistlock
lock right
-Y9
Flipper 3 up
right waterside
-Y10
Flipper 3 down
right waterside
-Y11
Flipper 4 up
right landside
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
-Y12
Flipper 4 down
right landside
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/22/2004
-Y14
Flipper 6 down
right centre
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
-Y13
Flipper 6 up
right centre
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
19
20
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
-WS52-S53
-WS13-S16
-WS14-S114
3
-
-S114
-S14
3
-
-S16
-S13
3
-
-S53
-S52
-WS54-S55
-S55
-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05
3
-
-S54
-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05
Node ID: 8
+X8-XP1
Centre landside
+X8-XP3
In 1
-S54
G.P tower
left stop
In 5
-S55
GP tower
right stop
+X8-XP5
In 2
-S52
G.P tower
left centre
In 6
-S53
G.P tower
right centre
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
In 7
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/23/2004
+X8-X0
In 4
-S14
30' telescope
positon
In 8
-S114
30' telescope
positon
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
:1
:2
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
-S16
40' telescope
positon
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
In 3
-S13
20' telescope
position
+X8-XP7
CAN_low
-X8
/21.00
CAN_high
20
21
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Out 3
Out 7
Out 4
Out 8
GND
Centre landside
+X8-XP2
+X8-XP4
+X8-XP6
+X8-XP8
+X8-X0
+VBB
Out 6
Out 2
6
O
Out 5
Out 1
Node ID: 8
/20.00
0
-X8
:3
:5
+X1/8.05 / -GND X8
+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
Spare
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/23/2004
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
Spare
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
21
22
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
X10 Option
1
3
-
-S84
4
-WS83
-WS84
-Can low X10 / +X1/8.06
-Can high X10 / +X1/8.06
-S83
/23.00
Node ID: A
+X10-XP1
Centre waterside
+X10-XP3
In 1
Spare
Spare
In 5
+X10-XP5
In 2
Spare
Spare
In 6
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
In 7
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/24/2004
+X10-X0
In 4
-S84
High indication
right (option)
In 8
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
:1
:2
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
Spare
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
In 3
-S83
High indication
left (option)
+X10-XP7
CAN_low
-X10
CAN_high
22
23
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Out 3
Out 7
Out 4
Out 8
GND
Centre waterside
+X10-XP2
+X10-XP4
+X10-XP6
+X10-XP8
+X10-X0
+VBB
Out 6
Out 2
6
O
Out 5
Out 1
Node ID: A
/22.00
0
-X10
:3
:5
+X1/8.06 / -GND X10
+X1/8.05 / -+VBB X10
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
Spare
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
06/24/2004
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
Spare
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
23
24
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
X13 Option
-S91
-WS92-S93
-S95
-WS94
-WS95-S96
3
-
-S96
3
-
-S94
3
-
-S93
-S92
-WS90-S91
-S90
-Can high X13 / +X1/8.07
-Can low X13 / +X1/8.07
Node ID: 13
+X13-XP1
Middle landside
option
+X13-XP3
+X13-XP5
In 1
-S91
TTDS
sensor
In 5
In 2
-S92
TTDS
sensor
-S93
TTDS
sensor
In 6
In 3
-S94
TTDS
sensor

SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
In 7
+X13-X0
DRAWN BY:
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
10/15/2002
In 4
-S95
TTDS
sensor
In 8
-S96
TTDS
sensor
:1
:2
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
-S90
TTDS
sensor
+X13-XP7
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
CAN_low
/25.00
CAN_high
-X13
24
25
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Out 3
Out 7
Out 4
Out 8
GND
+X13-XP4
+X13-XP6
+X13-XP8
+X13-X0
+VBB
Out 6
Out 2
6
O
Out 5
Middle landside
+X13-XP2
option
Out 1
Node ID: 13
/24.00
0
-X13
:3
:5
+X1/8.06 / -VBB X13
+X1/8.07 / -GND X13
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
Spare
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
10/29/2004
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
Spare
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Spare
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
25
26
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
MOTOR WITH BRAKE AND CURRENT RELAY
SR
B
ws
rt
ws
bl
BGE
ws
W2 U2 V2
rt
2
BS
TS
U1 V1 W1
3
4
bl
L1
L2 L3
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
05/09/2003
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
26
27
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
NODE
I/O
TYPE
PIN NR.
DESCRIPTION
NODE
I/O
-B1
Digital output
-XPX1:31
-HL1 Unlocked left
-B1
25
-B1
Digital output
-XPX1:41
-HL2 Locked left
-B1
-B1
Digital output
-XPX1:43
-HL3 Landed left
-B1
Digital output
-XPX1:42
-B1
Digital output
-B1
-B1
TYPE
PIN NR.
DESCRIPTION
Digital output
-XPX3:21
Locked signal
26
Digital output
-XPX3:31
Unlocked signal
-B1
27
Digital output
-XPX3:41
Spreader landed signal
-HL4 Tower in center left
-B1
28
Digital output
-XPX3:42
G.p. in centre signal
-XPX1:3
-HL5 Unlocked right
-B1
29
Digital output
-XPX3:24
G.p. to leftsignal
Digital output
-XPX1:2
-HL6 Locked right
-B1
30
Digital output
-XPX3:35
G.p. to rightsignal
Digital output
-XPX1:11
-HL7 Landed right
-B1
31
Digital output
-XPX3:44
H.I.S signal (option)
-B1
Digital output
-XPX1:1
Not connected
-B1
32
Digital output
-XPX3:45
TTDS ok signal (option)
-B1
Digital output
-XPX1:26
K2 Gravity point to left
-B1
33
Digital input
-XPX3:5
Telescope retract / to 20 CMD
-B1
10
Digital output
-XPX1:16
K3 Gravity point to right
-B1
34
Digital input
-XPX3:4
Telescope to 30' CMD
-B1
11
Digital output
-XPX1:6
K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable
-B1
35
Digital input
-XPX3:3
Telescope expand / to40 CMD
-B1
12
Digital output
-XPX1:7
K8 Retract telescope
-B1
36
Digital input
-XPX3:2
Flippers all up CMD
-B1
13
Digital output
-XPX1:4
K9 Extend telescope
-B1
37
Digital input
-XPX3:6
Flipper waterside down CMD
-B1
14
Digital output
-XPX1:5
Not connected
-B1
38
Digital input
-XPX3:16
Flipper right down CMD
-B1
15
Digital output
-XPX1:25
Not connected
-B1
39
Digital input
-XPX3:25
Flipper left down CMD
-B1
16
Digital output
-XPX1:15
Not connected
-B1
40
Digital input
-XPX3:26
Flipper landside down CMD
-B1
17
Digital output
-XPX1:10
Not connected
-B1
41
Digital input
-XPX3:49
Twl lock CMD
-B1
18
Digital output
-XPX1:20
Not connected
-B1
42
Digital input
-XPX3:48
Twl unlock CMD
-B1
19
Digital output
-XPX1:30
Not connected
-B1
43
Digital input
-XPX3:47
G.p. move to left CMD
-B1
20
Digital output
-XPX1:40
Not connected
-B1
44
Digital input
-XPX3:46
G.p. move to right CMD
-B1
21
Digital output
-XPX1:46
Container Counter
-B1
45
Digital input
-XPX3:7
Not connected
-B1
22
Digital output
-XPX1:47
Not connected
-B1
46
Digital input
-XPX3:9
Not connected
-B1
23
Digital output
-XPX1:49
Not connected
-B1
47
Digital input
-XPX3:50
Spreader stop
-B1
24
Digital output
-XPX1:48
Not connected
-B1
48
Digital input
-XPX3:20
G.p. auto return
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
01/04/2005
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
27
28
45
CONT.
PLC diagram
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
K2
Gravity point
to left
K3
Gravity point
to right
K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
Extend
telescope
-HL1
Unlocked left
-HL2
Locked left
-HL3
Landed left
-HL4
Tower in center left
-HL5
Unlocked right
Not
connected
Locked
signal
Not
connected
Unlocked
signal
Not
connected
Spreader landed
signal
Not
connected
G.p. in centre
signal
Container
Counter
G.p. to left
signal
-HL6
Locked right
Not
connected
Not
connected
G.p. to right
signal
-HL7
Landed right
Not
connected
Not
connected
H.I.S
signal (option)
Not
connected
Not
connected
Not
connected
TTDS ok
signal (option)
Twl
lock
CMD
Twl
unlock
CMD
G.p.
move to left
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD
Telescope
retract / to 20
CMD
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
Telescope
expand / to40
CMD
Flippers
all up
CMD
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
Flipper
right down
CMD
Flipper
left down
CMD
Flipper
landside down
CMD
Not
connected
Not
connected
Spreader
stop
G.p.
auto return
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black
115 / 230VAC / Input

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black

yellow
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black

yellow
24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output
black

yellow
24VDC / Input white
230VAC / Output
black

yellow
24VDC / Input white
24VDC / Output red
XP1
XP2
XP3
-B1
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
01/04/2005
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
28
29
45
CONT.
I/O card overview
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
CAN-Open I/O
-X2
-X3
Left gable end
Right gable end
INPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Connector 7
Pin
Connector 8
INPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
Connector 7
Connector 8
Spare
-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre
Spare
-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre
-S10 Landed left waterside
-Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre
-S12 Landed right landside
-Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre
Connector 5
Connector 5
Connector 6
Spare
-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside
-S9 Landed left landside
-Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside
Connector 3
Connector 6
Spare
-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside
-S11 Landed right waterside
-Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside
Connector 3
Connector 4
Connector 4
-S6 Locked left waterside
-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside
-S8 Locked right landside
-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside
-S2 Unlocked left waterside
-Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside
-S4 Unlocked right landside
-Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside
Connector 1
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 2
-S5 Locked left landside
-Y8 Twistlock lock left
-S7 Locked right waterside
-Y16 Twistlock lock right
-S1 Unlocked left landside
-Y7 Twistlock unlock left
-S3 Unlocked right waterside
-Y15 Twistlock unlock right
Module ID: 2
Module ID: 3
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
12/03/2004
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
A1
:
X0
PLOTTED:
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
29
30
45
CONT.
I/O card overview
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
CAN-Open I/O
-X8
-X10
Centre landside
Centre waterside
INPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Connector 7
Pin
Connector 8
INPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
Connector 7
Connector 8
-S114 30' telescope positon
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
-S84 High indication right (option)
Spare
Connector 5
Connector 5
Connector 6
Spare
-S13 20' telescope position
Spare
Connector 3
Connector 6
Spare
Spare
-S83 High indication left (option)
Spare
Connector 3
Connector 4
Connector 4
-S53 G.P tower right centre
Spare
Spare
Spare
-S52 G.P tower left centre
Spare
Spare
Spare
Connector 1
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 2
-S55 GP tower right stop
Spare
Spare
Spare
-S54 G.P tower left stop
Spare
Spare
Spare
Module ID: 8
Module ID: 10
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
01/04/2005
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
A1
:
X0
PLOTTED:
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
30
31
45
CONT.
I/O card overview
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
CAN-Open I/O
-X13
Middle landside option
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
Pin
Connector 7
Pin
-S96 TTDS sensor
Spare
-S95 TTDS sensor
Spare
Connector 5
Connector 8
INPUTS
Connector 5
Connector 6
Spare
Spare
-S94 TTDS sensor
Spare
Connector 3
Connector 7
Connector 6
2
4
Connector 3
Connector 4
Connector 4
-S93 TTDS sensor
Spare
-S92 TTDS sensor
Spare
Connector 1
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 2
-S91 TTDS sensor
Spare
-S90 TTDS sensor
Spare
Module ID: 13
Module ID:
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50
Connector 8

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
01/04/2005
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
A1
:
X0
PLOTTED:
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
31
32
45
CONT.
I/O card overview
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
Internal layout X1 cabinet EH5U
B1
290mm
XP1
XP2
XP3
Rubber boot
Distance between cable

trunk and edge 45mm
30x90x115mm
30x90x640mm
X1
/6.02
/10.03
/6.04
/5.04
/10.04
/5.07
/10.01
/11.05
740mm
-K6
30x90x380mm
G1
-QM6
-QM7
-K8
-K2
-QM8
-QM1
-P2
30x90x490mm
-F1
2A
-EH1
/5.09
/7.02
/7.07
/7.01
10A
Power supply
-F2
/5.09
-KA1
-K1
X2
-P1
E
15mm
60x90x520mm
40mm
733mm
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
11/02/2001
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DATE
EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
32
33
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
External cable connection X1 cabinet / EH5U
GLANDS
CABLE
PG11
EEPROM
M25
Plug
M25
WM1
PG36
WXP1
XP21
XP22
XP23
6
1
3
4
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
SCS CANopen
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
sharifsy
05/16/2002
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
SHEET
33
34
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
A
GORETEX VENT PLUG
700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside
GORETEX VENT PLUG

700984, 700985
Q1
SB1
SS1
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
09/02/2002
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DATE
EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
34
35
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
WXP23
WM2
External cable connection X100 cabinet / EH5U
15
10
11
12
16
13
14
GLAND
CABLE
M16
WX3
PLUG
10
M16
WX8
M16
WX10 (OPTION)
11
M16
WXP22
M16
WX13 (OPTION)
12
M16
WM4
M16
PLUG
13
M16
WHL1-4
M16
WM2
14
M16
WHL5-8
M16
WM3
15
M32
WXP23
M16
WX2
16
M25
WXP21
GLAND
CABLE
M16
PLUG
M16
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
SCS CANopen
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
sharifsy
11/17/2004
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
SHEET
35
36
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
Cabinet X100
Terminals for -M,-HL.

Marking 1,2,3......19.
Terminal fuses
Marking 1,2,......7.
Shield plate
Sheild CANopen cable

D
Terminal CANopen High

Marking 1,2,......7
Terminal CANopen Low
Marking 1,2,......7
Terminal 24V GND

Marking 1,2,......7
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
SCS CANopen
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
sharifsy
02/05/2009
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
SHEET
36
37
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
External cable connection between X1, X100 cabinet / EH5U
WXP23
Part no. 1001865
CABINET
X1
XP23
XP21
XP22
CABINET
X100
WXP21
Part no. 1001864
WXP22
Part no. 1001863
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
SCS CANopen
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
sharifsy
06/12/2002
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
SHEET
37
38
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
XP1
A
B1
X1 CABINET
M1
HL1 = GREEN
HL2 = RED
HL3 = WHITE
HL4 = YELLOW
WATERSIDE
Y1-Y2 FLIPPER1
Y3-Y4 FLIPPER2
Y5-Y6 FLIPPER5
Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK
2
GREEN
HL8 = YELLOW
HL7 = WHITE
HL6 = RED
HL5 = GREEN
C
S14, S114 30' POS.
S2 UNLOCK
S6 LOCK
S10 LANDED
X13
OPTION
S13 20' POS.
3
GREEN
S3 UNLOCK
S7 LOCK
S11 LANDED
X2
6
YELLOW
BLACK
M3
M4
5
WHITE
BLUE
M2
1
RED
X3
S83 H.I.S
OPTION
S1 UNLOCK
S5 LOCK
S9 LANDED
S16 40' POS.
X100 CABINET
S54
TOWER STOP
LEFT
S84 H.I.S
OPTION
X8
S52
TOWER LEFT
CENTRE
LEFT
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
08/20/2002
SHEET
SCS CANopen
Spreader layout
CHECKED BY:
DATE
RIGHT
MACHINE TYPE:

4
RED
LANDSIDE
ITEM
S4 UNLOCK
S8 LOCK
S12 LANDED
S55
TOWER STOP
RIGHT
S53
TOWER RIGHT
CENTRE
Y9-Y10 FLIPPER3
Y11-Y12 FLIPPER4
Y13-Y14 FLIPPER6
Y15-Y16 TWISTLOCK
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X0
08/20/2010
17:10
FILENAME:
38
39
F
45
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
9
UNIT
ITEM
QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.
DENOMINATION
MANUFACTURE
SUPPLIER
TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA
X0
-BRAKE1
=A1+X1/8.08
79125
CURRENT RELAY SR15
SEW
SEW
SR15
8267626
BSR 150-500VAC M25
X0
-BRAKE1
=A1+X1/8.08
700026
GLAND ADAPTER
LAPP
MILTRONIC AB
12 67 42
12 67 42
SKINDICHT M32/M25
X0
-BRAKE2
=A1+X1/8.04
700026
GLAND ADAPTER
LAPP
MILTRONIC AB
12 67 42
12 67 42
SKINDICHT M32/M25
X0
-BRAKE2
=A1+X1/8.04
79125
CURRENT RELAY SR15
SEW
SEW
SR15
8267626
BSR 150-500VAC M25
X0
-CABINET_X100
=A1+X1/9.04
1018972
CABINET X100 CANopen
Bromma
1018972
1018972
Mobile Spreader 10 fuse
X0
-HINK_X0
=A1+X1/9.03
1002595
CABLE AND ITEM MARKING
FLEXIMARK
MILTRONIC
X0
-HINK_X0
=A1+X1/9.03
1002018
PROTECTION COVER HTS
ABB
ABB
5DLN296350-A
5DLN296350-A
X0
-HINK_X0
=A1+X1/9.03
1002520
ABB
ABB
5DLN296350-C
5DLN296350-C
X0
-HINK_X0
=A1+X1/9.03
1002490
X1 cabinet EH5 ASSY
X0
-HINK_X0
=A1+X1/9.03
1002607
CABLE AND ITEM MARKING
FLEXIMARK
MILTRONIC
X0
-R2
=A1+X0/19.09
1002390
RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W
Elfa
Elfa
60-103-83
60-103-83
X0
-R3
=A1+X0/21.09
1002390
RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W
Elfa
Elfa
60-103-83
60-103-83
X0
-S1
=A1+X0/19.01
1002367
PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S2
=A1+X0/19.03
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S3
=A1+X0/21.01
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S4
=A1+X0/21.03
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S5
=A1+X0/19.02
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S6
=A1+X0/19.04
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S7
=A1+X0/21.02
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S8
=A1+X0/21.04
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S9
=A1+X0/19.05
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S10
=A1+X0/19.07
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S11
=A1+X0/21.05
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S12
=A1+X0/21.07
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S13
=A1+X0/23.05
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S14
=A1+X0/23.07
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S16
=A1+X0/23.06
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S52
=A1+X0/23.03
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S53
=A1+X0/23.04
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S54
=A1+X0/23.01
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S55
=A1+X0/23.02
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-S114
=A1+X0/23.08
1002367
IFM
IFM
II5910
IIA3015BBPKG/US
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
X0
-X2
=A1+X0/19.00
1001762
IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN
IFM-Electronic
IFM-Electronic
CR9011
CR9011
X0
-X3
=A1+X0/21.00
1001762
IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN
IFM-Electronic
IFM-Electronic
CR9011
CR9011
8 in / 8 out
X0
-X8
=A1+X0/23.00
79282
GLAND PLUG
MURR
MILTRONIC AB
ZVKM12
40 57 05
ASB BOX PLUGS M12
X0
-X8
=A1+X0/23.00
1001762
IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN
IFM-Electronic
IFM-Electronic
CR9011
CR9011
8 in / 8 out
X0
-XP1
SHRINK HOUSE 85/25
NELCO CONTACT
NELCO CONTACT
MWTM-85/25-1000/172
75618
END BEAM 3-FLIPPER
BROMMA
Part List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50
SIZE1
1002490
Complete with SCS for CAN open

TOWER JIB
MACHINE TYPE:

SIZE4
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
10/03/2001
SHEET
SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
39
40
45
CONT.
Parts list: (79125 - 75618)
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
8 in / 8 out
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
UNIT
ITEM
DENOMINATION
MANUFACTURE
SUPPLIER
X0
-XP1
73983
CRIMPING HOSE
NELCO
X0
-XP1
78707
SOCKET ODU 309 COVER
ODU
GUNNAR PETTERSON AB
309.097.001.642.000
3,09097E+14
X0
-XP1
74410
INSERT 37P (M) ODU
ODU
GUNNAR PETTERSON AB
309 803 150 037 151
309 803 150 037 151
X0
-XP1
73523
PLUG ODU 309
ODU
GUNNAR PETTERSON AB
309.020.000.554.000
309.020.000.554.000 ODU 309 BAJONETT BRONCE PG42
X0
-XP1
73272
GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm
LAPP
MILTRONIC AB
SKINDICHT-SR 42/35
12 02 35
X0
-XP2
76576
SOCKET HNA TYPE 215
KARL DOSE
KARL DOSE GmbH
INSATS 162 MED HYLSA LNG
3121501
MACHINE TYPE:
Part List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
02/05/2009
ODU 309 37 POL MALE
SHEET
SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
40
41
45
CONT.
Parts list: (73983 - 76576)
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
COVER FOR BAJONETT SOCKET
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
FROM
PIN No.
CABLE
CORE
TO
TERMINAL No.
TYPE
ART. NR.
QTY SHEET
X0
-HL1
-WHL 1-4
X100
-X1 :14
LED LAMPS
24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE
1001883
=A1+X1/11.07
X0
-HL1
-WHL 1-4
X100
-X2 :13
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/12.01
X0
-HL2
-WHL 1-4
X100
-X2 :14
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/12.02
=A1+X1/12.03
X0
-HL3
-WHL 1-4
X100
-X2 :15
LED LAMPS
1001883
X0
-HL4
-WHL 1-4
X100
-X2 :16
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/12.04
X0
-HL5
-WHL 5-8
X100
-X1 :14
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/11.07
=A1+X1/12.05
X0
-HL5
-WHL 5-8
X100
-X2 :17
LED LAMPS
1001883
X0
-HL6
-WHL 5-8
X100
-X2 :18
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/12.06
X0
-HL7
-WHL 5-8
X100
-X2 :19
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/12.07
X0
-HL8
-WHL 5-8
X100
-X2 :16
LED LAMPS
1001883
=A1+X1/12.08
=A1+X1/8.07
X0
-M1
-WM1
X1
-X2 :1
CABLE
4x2,5mm PUR
70996
X0
-M1
-WM1
X1
-X2 :2
CABLE
4x2,5mm PUR
70996
=A1+X1/8.07
X0
-M1
-WM1
X1
-X2 :3
CABLE
4x2,5mm PUR
70996
=A1+X1/8.07
-X2 :PE
=A1+X1/8.07
X0
-M1
PE
-WM1
PE
X1
CABLE
4x2,5mm PUR
70996
X0
-M2
-WM2
X100
-X2 :1
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
12
=A1+X1/9.02
X0
-M2
-WM2
X100
-X2 :2
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
12
=A1+X1/9.02
X0
-M2
-WM2
X100
-X2 :3
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
12
=A1+X1/9.02
X0
-M2
PE
-WM2
PE
X100
-X2 :PE
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
12
=A1+X1/9.02
X0
-M3
-WM3
X100
-X2 :4
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
11
=A1+X1/9.04
X0
-M3
-WM3
X100
-X2 :5
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
11
=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/9.04
X0
-M3
-WM3
X100
-X2 :6
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
11
X0
-M3
PE
-WM3
PE
X100
-X2 :PE
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
11
=A1+X1/9.04
X0
-M4
-WM4
X100
-X2 :7
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
=A1+X1/8.04
X0
-M4
-WM4
X100
-X2 :8
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
=A1+X1/8.04
X0
-M4
-WM4
X100
-X2 :9
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
=A1+X1/8.04
X0
-M4
PE
-WM4
PE
X100
-X2 :PE
CABLE
4x1,5mm PUR
78173
=A1+X1/8.04
X2
-XP5
-WS9
X0
-S9 4
CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M
M12 2xANGLE
79294
=A1+X0/19.05
=A1+X0/19.07
X2
-XP7
-WS10
X0
-S10 4
M12 2xANGLE
79292
X3
-XP5
-WS11
X0
-S11 4
M12 2xANGLE
79294
=A1+X0/21.05
X3
-XP7
-WS12
X0
-S12 4
M12 2xANGLE
79292
=A1+X0/21.07
=A1+X0/25.05
X10
-XP5
-WS83
X0
-S83 4
X10
-XP7
-WS84
X0
-S84 4
=A1+X0/25.07
X13
-XP5
-WS94
X0
-S94 4
=A1+X0/27.05
MACHINE TYPE:
Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
01/24/2002
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
41
42
45
CONT.
CABLE LIST
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
FROM
PIN No.
CABLE
CORE
TO
TERMINAL No.
TYPE
ART. NR.
QTY SHEET
X0
-S1
-WS1-S5
X2
-XP1 4
M12 Twin cable Prox.
700960
=A1+X0/19.01
X0
-S5
-WS1-S5
X2
-XP1 2
700960
=A1+X0/19.02
X0
-S2
-WS2-S6
X2
-XP3 4
CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m
79903
=A1+X0/19.03
=A1+X0/19.04
X0
-S6
-WS2-S6
X2
-XP3 2
79903
X0
-S3
-WS3-S7
X3
-XP1 4
700960
=A1+X0/21.01
X0
-S7
-WS3-S7
X3
-XP1 2
700960
=A1+X0/21.02
=A1+X0/21.03
X0
-S4
-WS4-S8
X3
-XP3 4
79903
X0
-S8
-WS4-S8
X3
-XP3 2
79903
=A1+X0/21.04
X0
-S13
-WS13-S16
X8
-XP5 4
M12 Twin cable prox.
1002386
=A1+X0/23.05
X0
-S16
-WS13-S16
X8
-XP5 2
1002386
=A1+X0/23.06
=A1+X0/23.07
X0
-S14
-WS14-S114
X8
-XP7 4
700959
X0
-S114
-WS14-S114
X8
-XP7 2
700959
=A1+X0/23.08
X0
-S52
-WS52-S53
X8
-XP3 4
700960
=A1+X0/23.03
=A1+X0/23.04
X0
-S53
-WS52-S53
X8
-XP3 2
700960
X0
-S54
-WS54-S55
X8
-XP1 4
1002386
=A1+X0/23.01
X0
-S55
-WS54-S55
X8
-XP1 2
1002386
=A1+X0/23.02
X0
-S91
-WS90-S91
X13
-XP1 2
=A1+X0/27.02
X0
-S90
-WS90-S91
X13
-XP1 4
=A1+X0/27.01
X0
-S93
-WS92-S93
X13
-XP3 2
=A1+X0/27.04
X0
-S92
-WS92-S93
X13
-XP3 4
=A1+X0/27.03
X0
-S96
-WS95-S96
X13
-XP7 2
=A1+X0/27.08
X0
-S95
-WS95-S96
X13
-XP7 4
X2
-X0
:1
-WX2
white
X100
-X1 :15
=A1+X0/27.07
CABLE
Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0
1001860
12
=A1+X1/11.01
=A1+X1/11.01
X2
-X0
:2
-WX2
brown
X100
-X1 :22
CABLE
1001860
12
X2
-X0
:5
-WX2
red
X100
-X1 :1
CABLE
1001860
12
=A1+X1/11.00
X2
-X0
:3
-WX2
blue
X100
-X1 :8
CABLE
1001860
12
=A1+X1/11.01
X3
-X0
:1
-WX3
white
X100
-X1 :16
CABLE
1001860
11
=A1+X1/11.02
=A1+X1/11.02
X3
-X0
:2
-WX3
brown
X100
-X1 :23
CABLE
1001860
11
X3
-X0
:5
-WX3
red
X100
-X1 :2
CABLE
1001860
11
=A1+X1/11.01
X3
-X0
:3
-WX3
blue
X100
-X1 :9
CABLE
1001860
11
=A1+X1/11.02
=A1+X1/11.05
X8
-X0
:1
-WX8
white
X100
-X1 :19
CABLE
1001860
X8
-X0
:2
-WX8
brown
X100
-X1 :26
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.05
X8
-X0
:5
-WX8
red
X100
-X1 :5
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.04
MACHINE TYPE:
Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
05/16/2002
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
42
43
45
CONT.
CABLE LIST
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
FROM
PIN No.
CABLE
CORE
TO
TERMINAL No.
TYPE
ART. NR.
QTY SHEET
X8
-X0
:3
-WX8
blue
X100
-X1 :12
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.05
X10
-X0
:1
-WX10
white
X100
-X1 :20
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.06
X10
-X0
:2
-WX10
brown
X100
-X1 :27
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.06
=A1+X1/11.05
X10
-X0
:5
-WX10
red
X100
-X1 :6
CABLE
1001860
X10
-X0
:3
-WX10
blue
X100
-X1 :13
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.06
X13
-X0
:1
-WX13
white
X100
-X1 :21
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.07
=A1+X1/11.07
X13
-X0
:2
-WX13
brown
X100
-X1 :28
CABLE
1001860
X13
-X0
:5
-WX13
red
X100
-X1 :7
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.06
X13
-X0
:3
-WX13
blue
X100
-X1 :14
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/11.07
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :108
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/10.02
=A1+X1/8.02
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :PE
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :106
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/10.02
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :101
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/9.08
=A1+X1/9.08
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :102
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :109
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/15.01
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :110
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/15.02
X0
-XP1
-WXP1
X1
-X2 :121
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/16.05
X0
-XP1
10
-WXP1
10
X1
-X2 :122
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/16.06
X0
-XP1
11
-WXP1
11
X1
-X2 :124
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/16.08
X0
-XP1
12
-WXP1
12
X1
-X2 :123
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/16.07
=A1+X1/16.04
X0
-XP1
13
-WXP1
13
X1
-X2 :120
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
14
-WXP1
14
X1
-X2 :125
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/17.01
X0
-XP1
15
-WXP1
15
X1
-X2 :126
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/17.02
=A1+X1/17.03
X0
-XP1
16
-WXP1
16
X1
-X2 :127
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
17
-WXP1
17
X1
-X2 :128
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/17.04
X0
-XP1
18
-WXP1
18
X1
-X2 :119
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/16.03
X0
-XP1
19
-WXP1
19
X1
-X2 :117
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/16.01
=A1+X1/15.05
X0
-XP1
20
-WXP1
20
X1
-X2 :113
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
21
-WXP1
21
X1
-X2 :114
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/15.06
X0
-XP1
22
-WXP1
22
X1
-X2 :L1
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/8.00
=A1+X1/8.01
X0
-XP1
23
-WXP1
23
X1
-X2 :L2
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
24
-WXP1
24
X1
-X2 :L3
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/8.01
X0
-XP1
25
-WXP1
25
X1
-X2 :107
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/10.01
MACHINE TYPE:
Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
09/14/2004
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
43
44
45
CONT.
CABLE LIST
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
FROM
PIN No.
CABLE
CORE
TO
TERMINAL No.
TYPE
ART. NR.
QTY SHEET
X0
-XP1
30
-WXP1
30
X1
-X2 :L1
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/8.01
X0
-XP1
31
-WXP1
31
X1
-X2 :L2
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/8.01
X0
-XP1
32
-WXP1
32
X1
-X2 :L3
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/15.07
X0
-XP1
34
-WXP1
34
X1
-X2 :115
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP1
35
-WXP1
35
X1
-X2 :111
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/15.03
X0
-XP1
36
-WXP1
36
X1
-X2 :116
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
=A1+X1/15.08
=A1+X1/8.02
X0
-XP1
37
-WXP1
PE
X1
-X2 :PE
CABLE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
701222
X0
-XP2
-WXP2
BROWN
X1
-X2 :103
CABLE
3x1,5mm PUR
76126
=A1+X1/9.08
X0
-XP2
-WXP2
BLUE
X1
-X2 :104
CABLE
3x1,5mm PUR
76126
=A1+X1/9.08
X0
-XP2
PE
-WXP2
PE
X1
-E1
CABLE
3x1,5mm PUR
76126
=A1+X1/9.09
=A1+X1/11.06
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :7
CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :7
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.06
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :7
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.06
=A1+X1/11.06
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :7
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :7
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.06
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :14
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.07
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :14
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.07
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :14
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.07
X1
-XP21
-WXP21
X100
-X1 :14
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.07
X1
-XP21
10
-WXP21
10
X100
-X1 :14
12x2,5mm PUR
1001864
=A1+X1/11.07
=A1+X1/11.01
X1
-XP22
-WXP22
White
X100
-X1 :15
3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn
1001863
X1
-XP22
-WXP22
Brown
X100
-X1 :22
3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn
1001863
=A1+X1/11.01
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :1
CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.02
=A1+X1/9.02
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :2
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :3
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.02
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :4
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.04
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :5
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/9.04
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :6
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :7
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/8.04
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :8
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/8.04
=A1+X1/8.04
X1
-XP23
-WXP23
X100
-X2 :9
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
X1
-XP23
13
-WXP23
13
X100
-X2 :13
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/12.01
X1
-XP23
14
-WXP23
14
X100
-X2 :14
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/12.02
MACHINE TYPE:
Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
09/14/2004
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
44
45
45
CONT.
CABLE LIST
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
REV.
1002499
FROM
PIN No.
CABLE
CORE
TO
TERMINAL No.
TYPE
ART. NR.
QTY SHEET
X1
-XP23
15
-WXP23
15
X100
-X2 :15
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/12.03
X1
-XP23
16
-WXP23
16
X100
-X2 :16
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/12.04
X1
-XP23
17
-WXP23
17
X100
-X2 :17
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/12.05
=A1+X1/12.06
X1
-XP23
18
-WXP23
18
X100
-X2 :18
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
X1
-XP23
19
-WXP23
19
X100
-X2 :19
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/12.07
X1
-XP23
20
-WXP23
20
X100
-X2 :PE
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/8.04
X1
-XP23
21
-WXP23
21
X100
-X2 :PE
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
X1
-XP23
22
-WXP23
22
X100
-X2 :PE
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.02
X1
-XP23
PE
-WXP23
PE
X100
-X2 :PE
25x1,5mm PUR
1001865
=A1+X1/9.05
X0
-Y2
-WY1-Y2
X2
700970
=A1+X0/20.04
=A1+X0/20.03
-XP4 2
M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC
X0
-Y1
-WY1-Y2
X2
-XP4 4
700970
X0
-Y4
-WY3-Y4
X2
-XP6 2
700970
=A1+X0/20.06
X0
-Y3
-WY3-Y4
X2
-XP6 4
700970
=A1+X0/20.05
=A1+X0/20.08
X0
-Y6
-WY5-Y6
X2
-XP8 2
700970
X0
-Y5
-WY5-Y6
X2
-XP8 4
700970
=A1+X0/20.07
X0
-Y8
-WY7-Y8
X2
-XP2 2
700970
=A1+X0/20.02
X0
-Y7
-WY7-Y8
X2
-XP2 4
700970
=A1+X0/20.01
X0
-Y10
-WY9-Y10
X3
-XP4 2
700970
=A1+X0/22.04
X0
-Y9
-WY9-Y10
X3
-XP4 4
700970
=A1+X0/22.03
X0
-Y12
-WY11-Y12
X3
-XP6 2
700970
=A1+X0/22.06
=A1+X0/22.05
X0
-Y11
-WY11-Y12
X3
-XP6 4
700970
X0
-Y14
-WY13-Y14
X3
-XP8 2
700970
=A1+X0/22.08
X0
-Y13
-WY13-Y14
X3
-XP8 4
700970
=A1+X0/22.07
700970
=A1+X0/22.02
700970
=A1+X0/22.01
38905
=A1+X1/18.03
38905
=A1+X1/18.04
=A1+X1/18.04
X0
-Y16
-WY15-Y16
X3
-XP2 2
X0
-Y15
-WY15-Y16
X3
-XP2 4
B1
-XPX2
:10
-KEY1
WH
B1
-XPX2 :9
IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS
B1
-XPX2
:9
-KEY1
BN
B1
-XPX2 :39
B1
-XPX2
:39
-KEY1
GN
B1
-XPX2 :49
38905
B1
-XPX2
:50
-WXP22
white
X1
-XP22 2
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/18.06
B1
-XPX2
:20
-WXP22
brown
X1
-XP22 3
CABLE
1001860
=A1+X1/18.06
1001860
=A1+X1/18.06
X0
-E2
-WXP22
Sheild
X1
-WXP22
CABLE
MACHINE TYPE:
Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
sharifsy
09/14/2004
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
08/20/2010
17:10
45
CONT.
CABLE LIST
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
SHEET
SCS CANopen
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.
45
REV.
1002499
Page 1 of 1
Article No:
PDF No:
Serial No:
SW
Customer:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1002656
.
.
.
.
Quant Title
13 Input module
Customised no.
230VAC SCS
with CANopen
Specification
sign:
rev:
BLN
a
Dwg/PDF No.
Art. No.
1001747
date
7/2/2004
Remarks
BROMMA CONQUIP
MALAXGATAN 7
S-164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN
E-mail : SALES@BROMMA.COM
+46 (0)8 620 09 00
Tel :
CABINET X1
Customer
Plant designation
Drawing Number
Revision
:
: A1
: 1002490
: j
Manufacturer (Company)
: BROMMA CONQUIP
Project name
Serial Number
Types
Responsible for project
: 1002490 CANopen
: : EH5U
:
Sub. drawings
Created on the
The latest revision
:
:
By : krpulha
2009-03-02
Manufacturing site
Number of pages :
:
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
24
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen

Flyleaf
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
aveklle
2007-06-04
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
2009-03-02
11:11
SHEET
1
2
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
Table of content
Plant des.
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
Location
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Page description
Flyleaf
Table of contents
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Sign Plate
PLC diagram
I/O card overview
Parts list: (38906 - 1019811)
Parts list: (1019819 - 79371)
Rev
Revision note
Date
2007-06-04
2009-03-02
2005-06-11
2007-06-05
2008-09-03
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
2009-03-02
2009-03-02
2009-03-02
2005-01-19
2009-02-27
2006-07-03
2007-06-04
2008-12-30
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
2005-01-04
2005-01-04
2009-03-02
2009-03-02
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-

Table of contents
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
Editor
aveklle
krpulha
BLN
aveklle
filipiv
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
LAT
krpulha
bln
aveklle
filipiv
krpulha
krpulha
LAT
LAT
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
2009-03-02
11:11
SHEET
2
3
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
NOTE:
Wire for 380-400VAC
shall bee 2,5mm
with black colour.
-X2
:L1
:L1
:L2
:L2
:L3
:L3
:PE
:PE
-F1
2A
-QM8
-K1
/5.01
-Q1
I>
I>
-QM1
I>
-K8
-K9
/7.04
/7.05
I>
I>
-P1
I>
-K2
-K3
/7.01
/7.02
-XP23
PE
20
21
22
-X2
:1
:2
:3
/4.00 / -Phase L3
/4.00 / -Phase L2
/4.00 / -Phase L1
3 Phase
-M4
Telescopic motor
.
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
BLN
2005-06-11
Time
counter

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
-M1
Gravity point motor
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
3
4
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
NOTE:
Wire for 380-400VAC
shall bee 2,5mm
with black colour.
-X2
:101
:103
14
12
:102
:104
24
22
/3.01 / -Phase L3
/3.01 / -Phase L2
/3.01 / -Phase L1
-KA1
/5.07
-K6
/7.03
-KA1
/5.07
11
21
C
1
-EH1
-QM6
I>
-XP23
I>
-QM7
I>
I>
I>
I>
-M2
Hydralic pump
left
-EH1
Cabinet heater
.
-M3
Hydralic pump
right
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
aveklle
2007-06-05
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
4
5
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
NOTE:
All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected
-X2
:107
:105
:108
-Q1
13
/3.01
14
B
-F2
10A
.01
-SS1
:106
-X2
21
22
PE
-X2
:N
:N
-N.VAC / /10.00
:L
-L.VAC / /9.00
:L
C
BN
YL/GL
BU
90-255VAC
---24VDC
A2
-K1
A1
RD RD
BK BK
+ +
- -
A1
-G1
-KA1
A2
-24VDC SCS / /12.00

-24VDC / /6.00
-0VDC / /7.00
11
-SS1
.01
NOTE:
Wire for 24VDC
shall bee 2,5mm
with blue colour.
-X1
7
:2
:1
.01
-X1
:3
-K1
-XP21
1
2/3.01
4/3.01
6/3.01
:+
:+
:+
:+
:+
:+
:-
:-
:-
10
:-
:-
14
22
11/4.07
21/4.07
.04
Spreader
stop
24VDC
+ 24VDC
MACHINE TYPE:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
filipiv
2008-09-03

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
-KA1
Cabinet heater
0 VDC

:-
:-
12
24
ITEM
:+
12
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
5
6
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
:43
:42
PIN NO: 21
PIN NO: 44
:41
:31
:21
:44
+B1-XP2
:3
COMMON GROUP 2
COMMON GROUP 1
-B1
:11
:2
:1
/5.08 / -24VDC
-24VDC / /7.00
-XP23
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
HL1
Unlocked left
HL2
Locked left
HL3
Landed left
HL4,8
Tower in centre left/right
HL5
Unlocked right
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-02-27
Not
connected

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
HL7
Landed right
HL6
Locked right
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
6
7
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
:7
PIN NO: 21
PIN NO: 44
:6
12
:16
11
:35
13
:26
:8
10
:4
+B1-XP2
COMMON GROUP 4
14
COMMON GROUP 3
-B1
15
:25
:5
16
:15
/6.09 / -24VDC
-24VDC / /8.00
A1
A1
-K2
A1
-K3
-K6
A2
A2
A1
A1
A2
A2
-K8
-K9
A2
D
/5.08 / -0VDC
-0VDC / /8.00
2 /3.07
2 /3.08
2 /4.01
2 /3.04
2 /3.05
4 /3.07
4 /3.08
4 /4.01
4 /3.04
4 /3.05
6 /3.07
6 /3.08
6 /4.01
6 /3.04
6 /3.05
K3
Gravity point
to right
K2
Gravity point
to left
K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
Extend
telescope

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-02-27
Not
connected

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Not
connected
Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
7
8
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
:40
PIN NO: 50
PIN NO: 9
:30
20
:20
19
:50
21
18
:10
:9
:46
+B1-XP2
17
COMMON GROUP 2
6
COMMON GROUP 5
22
:47
-B1
23
:49
24
:48
B
/7.09 / -24VDC
-24VDC / /11.00
D
1
-P2
2
/7.09 / -0VDC
-0VDC / /11.00
Not
connected
Not
connected
Not
connected
Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
Not
connected
Container
Counter
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-02-27
Not
connected

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Not
connected
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
8
9
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
:41
:42
PIN NO: 43
PIN NO: 11
:31
28
:21
27
:43
29
:11
26
+B1-XP3
25
:24
COMMON GROUP 8
COMMON GROUP 7
30
:35
-B1
31
:44
32
:45
/5.08 / -L.VAC
-X2
:109
:110
:111
:112
:114
:113
:115
:116
Unlocked
signal
Locked
signal
Spreader landed
signal
G.p. in centre
signal
G.p. at left
signal
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
TTDS ok
signal (option)

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
H.I.S
signal (option)
G.p. at right
signal
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
9
10
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9

-X2
:117
:118
:119
:120
:121
:122
:123
:124
/5.08 / -N.VAC
-N.VAC / /11.00
+B1-XP3
:5
:4
:3
:15
:2
:16
:6
33
34
35
36
COMMON GROUP 9
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
Telescope
expand to 40'
CMD
Flippers
all up
CMD
PIN NO: 15
Telescope
retract to 20'
CMD
:26
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
39
Flipper
left down
CMD
EH5U
-
40
krpulha
2009-03-02
Flipper
landside down
CMD

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
38
Flipper
right down
CMD
MACHINE TYPE:
COMMON GROUP 10

ITEM
37
:25
-B1
PIN NO: 1
:1
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
10
11
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9

-X2
:125
:127
:126
:128
/8.09 / -24VDC
13
-SB1
14
GRAV.POINT
AUT. RETURN
OFF
ON
D
/8.09 / -0VDC
-0VDC / /12.00
/10.08 / -N.VAC
+B1-XP3
:36
:49
:48
:47
:46
:8
:40
:9
:50
:30
:20
42
43
44
COMMON GROUP 11
Twl
lock
CMD
Twl
unlock
CMD
G.p.
move to left
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD
MACHINE TYPE:

SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
46
DRAWN BY:
EH5U
-
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
47
Spreader
stop
48
G.p.
auto return

Circuit diagram
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Not
connected
Not
connected
ITEM
45
PIN NO: 20
41
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 36
PIN NO: 8
-B1
:10
:7
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
11
12
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
-X2
:129
:130
C
-XP22
-WXP22
white
brown
EEPROM
-E2
/11.09 / -0VDC
+B1-XPX2
:42
:43
:44
:45
:10
:19
:9
:29
:39
:49
:30
:40
:20
GREEN
RED
16
26
36
:48
:16
:6
:26
:36
Main supply
node B1
Node
Address
B-Can

SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
LAT
2005-01-19
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
VCC
SC
SD
GND
EH5U
-
CHECKED BY:
DATE
Can-GND
Can-open L
Can-open
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
Can-open H
B-Can L
B-Can H
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID1
ID0
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
-B1
:50
BLUE
GN
BN;GN
-KEY1
WH
/5.08 / -24VDC SCS
BLACK
D
WH;BN
EEPROM

Circuit diagram
SHEET
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
12
13
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
Internal layout X1 cabinet EH5U
B1
290mm
XP1
XP2
XP3
Rubber boot
Distance between cable

trunk and edge 45mm
30x90x115mm
30x90x640mm
X1
/4.01
/7.03
/4.03
/3.04
/7.04
/3.07
/7.01
/8.05
740mm
-K6
30x90x380mm
G1
-QM6
-QM7
-K8
-K2
-QM8
-QM1
-P2
30x90x490mm
-F1
2A
-EH1
/3.09
/5.02
/5.07
/5.01
10A
Power supply
-F2
/3.09
-KA1
-K1
X2
-P1
E
E
15mm
60x90x520mm
40mm
733mm
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
krpulha
2009-02-27
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
13
14
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
101-130
Even number on top
105-106
1-3
2-3
L1-L3
Blue
X1
X2
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
bln
2006-07-03
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
14
15
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
External layout X1 cabinet (glands,plugs) EH5
EEPROM-gland assembly
from the inside and out
XP21
(Female)
XP22
(Female)
XP23
(Female)
B
Contact No.1
Contact No.1
Guide Pin
Guide Pin
M25 Plug
M25 Gland PG36 Gland

E
Use Locktite 243 when assamble the chassi plug in to the cabinet
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
aveklle
2007-06-04
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
15
16
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
PE-rail 12/3
Assembly the earth braid

between this two pin bults
200 mm
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
filipiv
2008-12-30
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
16
17
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
B
Bromma art. no 1002455
CE-label
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
P.O Box 1133
SE- 164 22 KISTA
SW EDEN
Control Cabinet
Circuit
diagram no.
10XXXXX
Rated voltage
Hz
400-460
25
50/60
IP
55
Spreader no.
Year of manufacturing
89/336/EEC
73/23/EEC
Art.No. 1002455
Bromma art. no 78127
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
krpulha
2009-02-27
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
17
18
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
CE-label
B
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
P.O Box 1133
SE- 164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN
Control Cabinet
Circuit
diagram no.
Rated voltage
400-460
1002490
Hz
25
50/60
IP
55
Spreader no.
Year of manufacturing
89/336/EEC
73/23/EEC
Art.No. 1002455
E
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
krpulha
2009-02-27
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
18
19
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
A
GORETEX VENT PLUG
700984, 700985
GORETEX VENT PLUG

700984, 700985
Q1
SB1
SS1
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Cabinet layout
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
LAT
2005-01-04
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
19
20
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
A
SPREADER
STOP
AUT.RETURN
OFF
ON
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
SERIAL NO.

Sign Plate
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DATE
EH5U
-
LAT
2005-01-04
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
PLOTTED:
A1
:
X1
2009-03-02
11:11
FILENAME:
SHEET
20
21
F
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
9
NODE
I/O
TYPE
PIN NR.
-B1
Digital output
-XP2:31
HL1 Unlocked left
-B1
25
Digital output
-XP3:21
Locked signal
-B1
Digital output
-XP2:41
HL2 Locked left
-B1
26
Digital output
-XP3:31
Unlocked signal
-B1
Digital output
-XP2:43
HL3 Landed left
-B1
27
Digital output
-XP3:41
Spreader landed signal
-B1
Digital output
-XP2:42
HL4,8 Tower in centre left/right
-B1
28
Digital output
-XP3:42
G.p. in centre signal
-B1
Digital output
-XP2 :3
HL5 Unlocked right
-B1
29
Digital output
-XP3:24
G.p. at left signal
-B1
Digital output
-XP2 :2
HL6 Locked right
-B1
30
Digital output
-XP3:35
G.p. at right signal
-B1
Digital output
-XP2:11
HL7 Landed right
-B1
31
Digital output
-XP3:44
H.I.S signal (option)
-B1
Digital output
-XP2 :1
Not connected
-B1
32
Digital output
-XP3:45
TTDS ok signal (option)
-B1
Digital output
-XP2:26
K2 Gravity point to left
-B1
33
Digital input
-XP3 :5
Telescoperetract to 20' CMD
-B1
10
Digital output
-XP2:16
K3 Gravity point to right
-B1
34
Digital input
-XP3 :4
Telescope to 30' CMD
-B1
11
Digital output
-XP2 :6
K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable
-B1
35
Digital input
-XP3 :3
Telescope expand to 40' CMD
-B1
12
Digital output
-XP2 :7
K8 Retract telescope
-B1
36
Digital input
-XP3 :2
Flippers all up CMD
-B1
13
Digital output
-XP2 :4
K9 Extend telescope
-B1
37
Digital input
-XP3 :6
Flipper waterside down CMD
-B1
14
Digital output
-XP2 :5
Not connected
-B1
38
Digital input
-XP3:16
Flipper right down CMD
-B1
15
Digital output
-XP2:25
Not connected
-B1
39
Digital input
-XP3:25
Flipper left down CMD
-B1
16
Digital output
-XP2:15
Not connected
-B1
40
Digital input
-XP3:26
Flipper landside down CMD
-B1
17
Digital output
-XP2:10
Not connected
-B1
41
Digital input
-XP3:49
Twl lock CMD
-B1
18
Digital output
-XP2:20
Not connected
-B1
42
Digital input
-XP3:48
Twl unlock CMD
-B1
19
Digital output
-XP2:30
Not connected
-B1
43
Digital input
-XP3:47
G.p. move to left CMD
-B1
20
Digital output
-XP2:40
Not connected
-B1
44
Digital input
-XP3:46
G.p. move to right CMD
-B1
21
Digital output
-XP2:46
Container Counter
-B1
45
Digital input
-XP3 :7
Not connected
-B1
22
Digital output
-XP2:47
Not connected
-B1
46
Digital input
-XP3 :9
Not connected
-B1
23
Digital output
-XP2:49
Not connected
-B1
47
Digital input
-XP3:50
Spreader stop
-B1
24
Digital output
-XP2:48
Not connected
-B1
48
Digital input
-XP3:20
G.p. auto return
DESCRIPTION
NODE
I/O
TYPE
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:06

SERIAL NO.
PIN NR.
DESCRIPTION
EH5U
-

PLC diagram
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
A1
:
X1
PLOTTED:
FILENAME:
2009-03-02
11:11
SHEET
21
22
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
K2
Gravity point
to left
K3
Gravity point
to right
K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
Extend
telescope
HL1
Unlocked left
HL2
Locked left
HL3
Landed left
HL4,8
Tower in centre left/right
HL5
Unlocked right
Not
connected
Locked
signal
Not
connected
Unlocked
signal
Not
connected
Spreader landed
signal
Not
connected
G.p. in centre
signal
Container
Counter
G.p. at left
signal
HL6
Locked right
Not
connected
Not
connected
G.p. at right
signal
HL7
Landed right
Not
connected
Not
connected
H.I.S
signal (option)
Not
connected
Not
connected
Not
connected
TTDS ok
signal (option)
Twl
lock
CMD
Twl
unlock
CMD
G.p.
move to left
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD
Telescope
retract to 20'
CMD
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
Telescope
expand to 40'
CMD
Flippers
all up
CMD
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
Flipper
right down
CMD
Flipper
left down
CMD
Flipper
landside down
CMD

Not
connected

Not
connected
Spreader
stop
G.p.
auto return
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow

yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow
24VDC / Output red
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow
24VDC / Input white
115 / 230VAC /
Output black

yellow
24VDC / Input white
24VDC / Output red
XP1
XP2
XP3
-B1
MACHINE TYPE:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:07

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-

I/O card overview
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
A1
:
X1
PLOTTED:
FILENAME:
2009-03-02
11:11
SHEET
22
23
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
UNIT
ITEM
DENOMINATION
MANUFACTURE
SUPPLIER
X1
-1
=A1+X1/12.07
38906
EEPROM
CC-SYSTEM
CC-SYSTEM
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
700086
SCS PLUG K2
AD-CONTACT
AD-CONTAKT AB
DRC 26-50-S08
DRC 26-50-S08
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
700087
SCS PLUG K3
AD-CONTACT
AD-CONTAKT AB
DRC 26-50-S09
DRC 26-50-S09
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
38905
CC-SYSTEM
CC-SYSTEM
SEE DRAWING 38905
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
1002003
SCS CONNECTOR COVER
BMAL
BMAL
1002003
X1
-B1
80
=A1+X1/9.00
700079
SCS SOCKET PIN
AD-CONTACT
AD-CONTAKT AB
0462-201-2031 AU
0462-201-2031 AU
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
700085
SCS PLUG K1
AD-CONTACT
AD-CONTAKT AB
DRC 26-50-S07
DRC 26-50-S07
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
78601
INPUT MODULE DC
OPTO22
ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB
G4IDC5
G4 IDC 5
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
37524
SCS PLC
Bromma
CC-System
BROMMA
LENGTH 850MM
Rubber boot for deutsch connectors
24 VDC
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
700498
SCS I/O MARKING
BROMMA
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
39952
Attachment for SCS in cabinet
NPP/ Bromma
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
700020
SCS SOFTWARE LICENS
ENEA
X1
-B1
=A1+X1/9.00
1001750
OUTPUT MODULE 0-240VAC
DELCON/AXIOM
OEM-AUTOMATIC
G4/SLO5TR
G4/SLO5TR
X1
-B1
80
=A1+X1/9.00
700080
SCS DUMMY PIN
AD-CONTACT
AD-CONTAKT AB
0413-204-2005
0413-204-2005
X1
-B1
13
=A1+X1/9.00
78603
OUTPUT MODULE DC
OPTO22
ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB
G40DC5
G4 ODC 5
X1
-EH1
=A1+X1/4.07
1001690
HEATER CABINET
STEGO
OEM AUTOMATIC
HG140
14001.0-01
30W 110-250V AC/DC
X1
-F1
=A1+X1/3.09
1001828
MCB 1-POL 2A
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
5SY6 102-7
C-CHARACTER
X1
-F2
=A1+X1/5.02
1001829
MCB 2-POL 10A
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
5SY6 210-7
C-CHARACTER
X1
-G1
=A1+X1/5.02
1001859
POWER SUPPLY 90-255VAC/ 24VDC
PrimePower
OEM-Automatic
0036515
0036515
X1
-K1
=A1+X1/5.01
1001826
CONTACTOR
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RT13 25-1BB40
3RT13 25-1BB40
X1
-K2
=A1+X1/7.01
1001827
PHASEREVERSER
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4
3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4
24VDC 7,5kW 17A
X1
-K6
=A1+X1/7.03
1000763
CONTACTOR
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RT1025-1BB40
32 667 91
24VDC 7.5KW 17A
X1
-K8
=A1+X1/7.04
1001827
PHASEREVERSER
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4
3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4
24VDC 7,5kW 17A
X1
-KA1
=A1+X1/5.07
78980
RELAY SOCKET 2-SWITCHING
RELECO
OEM-AUTOMATIC AB
40 165 54
S7M
C7 A20 D24D
700498
See document
39952
39952
EH5-170-U
ENEA OSE SYSTEMS AB

Sek:0-240VAC 3A
24VDC 4A
30A / 0-400HZ
24VDC 22kW 4-pol SIZE 0
X1
-KA1
=A1+X1/5.07
78986
AUXILIARY CONTACTOR
RELECO
OEM
C7 A20 D24D
X1
-KEY1
=A1+X1/12.03
38905
CC-SYSTEM
CC-SYSTEM
SEE DRAWING 38905
X1
-P1
=A1+X1/3.09
70873
TIMECOUNTER 380 VAC
BAUSER
METRIC AB
632A.2 380VAC
24-0015-78
X1
-P2
=A1+X1/8.05
76140
PULSECOUNTER 190.07 24V DC
BAUSER
METRIC AB
632 A.2 24VDC
24-2032-25DC
X1
-Q1
=A1+X1/3.01
700869
LOCK HANDLE GREY 66X66mm
BACO
OEM
0174601
0174601
X1
-Q1
=A1+X1/3.01
700870
SEALING IP65
BACO
OEM
0172267
0172267
X1
-Q1
=A1+X1/3.01
700871
AUXILIARY BLOCK
BACO
OEM-AUTOMATIC AB
0172179
172179
X1
-Q1
=A1+X1/3.01
700868
MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
BACO
OEM
0172200
0172200
X1
-QM1
=A1+X1/3.07
78993
THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RV10 21 - 4BA10
3RV1021-4BA10
7.5KW 14-20A
X1
-QM6
=A1+X1/4.01
79042
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RV10 11-1GA10
3RV1011-1GA10
2.2kW 4.5-6.3 A
X1
-QM7
=A1+X1/4.03
79042
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RV10 11-1GA10
3RV1011-1GA10
2.2kW 4.5-6.3 A
X1
-QM8
=A1+X1/3.04
79043
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
3RV10 11-1HA10
3RV1011-1HA10
X1
-SB1
=A1+X1/11.08
1019811
AUXILIARY BLOCK
BACO
OEM-AUTOMATIC AB
230 E10
230E 10
MACHINE TYPE:
Part List
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:07

SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
NO+NC 400V 10A SIGNALCONTACT
50A
3,0kW 5,5-8A
switch body with 1NO block

Parts list: (38906 - 1019811)
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
24VDC 2-SWITCHING
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
2009-03-02
11:11
SHEET
23
24
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
UNIT
ITEM
DENOMINATION
MANUFACTURE
SUPPLIER
X1
-SB1
=A1+X1/11.08
1019819
WHITE SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING)
BACO
OEM-IDEALGRAVYR AB
LIB5
GRAVERING ENL BILAGA (Suitable with LWG3 - 1019818)
X1
-SB1
=A1+X1/11.08
1019832
SWITCH HEAD
BACO
OEM
L21KA03
L21KA03
X1
-SB1
=A1+X1/11.08
1019818
FRAME
BACO
OEM
LWG3
X1
-SS1
=A1+X1/5.01
1019809
AUXILIARY BLOCK
BACO
OEM-AUTOMATIC AB
333E 02
X1
-SS1
=A1+X1/5.01
1019818
FRAME
BACO
OEM
LWG3
X1
-SS1
=A1+X1/5.01
1019810
PUSH BUTTON BLACK
BACO
OEM-AUTOMATIC AB
L22 EC03
X1
-SS1
=A1+X1/5.01
1019819
WHITE SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING)
BACO
OEM-IDEALGRAVYR AB
LIB5
GRAVERING ENL BILAGA (Suitable with LWG3 - 1019818)
X1
-XP21
700858
INSERT FEMALE 10POLE
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
HE.10.BU.C
2-1103637-3
X1
-XP21
700863
GUIDE PIN
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
F-Sti-M3
1-1106102-1
X1
-XP21
700854
SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
HIP-K.10/24.AG
2-1102647-5
SCREW LOCK
X1
-XP21
10
700862
CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
4-1105101-1
2,5mm2 AWG14
X1
-XP21
1002018
PROTCTION COVER
ABB
ABB
5DLN296350-A
X1
-XP22
1001921
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
HIP.3/4.AG
X1
-XP22
1001926
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
X1
-XP22
1001923
INSERT FEMALE 7+POLE
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
X1
-XP22
1002520
ABB
X1
-XP23
700854
X1
-XP23
700863
X1
-XP23
1002018
X1
-XP23
700856
INSERT FEMALE 42POLE
1001927
switch boddy with 2NC block

(Suitable with LIB5 - 1019819)
L22 EC03
FOR SPREADER STOP 29mm
CRIMP
5DLN296350-A
HTS SIZE4
1-1102603-5
SCREW LOCK
0,14-0,37mm
HN.D.7.Bu.C
2-1103103-3
CRIMP
ABB
5DLN296350-C
5DLN296350-C
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
HIP-K.10/24.AG
2-1102647-5
GUIDE PIN
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
F-Sti-M3
1-1106102-1
PROTCTION COVER
ABB
ABB
5DLN296350-A
5DLN296350-A
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
HN.2D.42.BU.C
2-1103206-3
X1
-XP23
24
HTS
TYCO ELECTRONICS
:1
=A1+X1/5.02
79367
FUSE ATTACHMENT
WAGO
HELLERMANN TYTON AB
X1
:1
=A1+X1/5.02
79371
FUSE 30A
LITTELFUSE
ELFA AB

SIZE1
SCREW LOCK
HTS SIZE4
CRIMP
1,5mm
4-1105051-1
282-696
282-696
Blade fuse terminal
33-051-82
MACHINE TYPE:
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:07
(Suitable with LIB5 - 1019819)

333E 02
1-1105051-1
X1
Part List
Only operating head 2 pos, 45
SERIAL NO.
EH5U
-

Parts list: (1019819 - 79371)
CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
2009-03-02
Blade fuse 30A
PLANT (=)
PLOTTED:
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
2009-03-02
11:11
SHEET
24
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
24
REV.
DRAWING NO.
1002490
GETTING STARTED
WITH
SCS
REV 3
Index
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4
DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4
General............................................................................................................................ 4
The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5
Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5
Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6
CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7
I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7
Common junction........................................................................................................ 8
Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8
Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9
Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9
I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10
ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10

System view .............................................................................................................. 10
Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11
Component view ....................................................................................................... 11
Load view.................................................................................................................. 14
ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
General.......................................................................................................................... 15
Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15
Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16
APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18
ABE............................................................................................................................... 18
ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20
General.......................................................................................................................... 20
BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21
Power connector........................................................................................................ 21
BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21
Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21
Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21
APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22

General...................................................................................................................... 22
The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22
From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23
REV 3
Teach......................................................................................................................... 23
EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24
General...................................................................................................................... 24
Hardware................................................................................................................... 24
Software .................................................................................................................... 25
Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26
REV 3
Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.
X2- I/O, bus

& supply
Connector
X1- I/O
Connector
X3- I/O
Connector
I/O LED
1-48
Field
bus
RS232
(X5)
Digital I/O
General
Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with
one input and the other with one output.
Switch
Input
Slave (A1)
SCS2
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
Output
Valve
REV 3
Display &
Power
LEDS
The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility
of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is
easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw
there is a number 7, 8 or 9.
connection
key
The X2
should be
marked 8
Front view of X2 connector
Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins
9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10)
correspond to zeroes and pins left unconnected are correspond to ones. A master
node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader
Node)
A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together.
Start with making ID jumpers.
And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.
REV 3
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector
due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The
potential is measured between the A section and the B section.
Name
Pin number in
connector
24INA
X2/42
Potential 1
24INA
X2/43
24INB
X2/45
Potential 2
24INB
X2/44
CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector.
All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and
CAN Low to be able to establish communication.
Name
Pin number in
connector
CAN High
X2/30
CAN Low
X2/40
Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id,
CAN bus and power supply connected.
ID SUPPLY CAN BUS
+
-
24V Supply
Low
CAN Bus High

ID
9 10 19 29
30 40 42 43 44 45 49
10 19 29
B1 X2
30 39 40 42 43 44
45 49
A1 X2
Pin no.
CAN-bus
24V SUPPLY
6
REV 3
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)

Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them
in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number 7 on the front of the
connector, and the X3 connector by the number 9.
connection
key
I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an
output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups.
I/O 45 to 48 are single I/Os. Each group has a Common junction. This makes it
possible to have different voltages in each group.
Name
Description
X1 pin
number
I/O-9
I/O-10
I/O-11
I/O-12
Common/Supply 3
General purpose input or output

Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12
Description
26
16
6
7
8
Name
I/O-48
Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48
X3 pin
number
30
20
REV 3
Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for
inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can
be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.
G roup used as Input
G roup used as O utput
L/24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S
9
26
10
16
11
12
26
SC S
10
SC S 11
16
12
I/O M oduls
In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group
is used as outputs.
Internal jumper bars

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups
of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The
following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves
with common potential.
Pin number
Link
configuration
Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
32
33
34
17
18
19
27
28
29
37
39
38
(Only in X1) 45
(Only in X1) 36
(Only in X1)
24
Link
configuration
REV 3
Connecting a switch
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1.
One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is
connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
N /0V Supply
Internal jumper groups
Switch
Cablage
6
8 12 13 1 4
16 17 18 19
22 23 24 26
27
X1 Connector
11 12
10
One Input group
SCS Internal
Connecting a valve
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1.
One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the
other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
N /0V Supply
Internal jumper groups
Valve
Cablage
6
11 12
8 12 13 1 4
16 17 18 19
10
22 23 24 26
One output group
27
X1 Connector
SCS Internal
REV 3
I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state
interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage
range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output
modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS cover. The
cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside.
LED
FUSE
Application
ABE (Application Builder Environment)
System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is
the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the
software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and
these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some
properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
In the system view we have to activate

the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is
the master and is active per default.
Menu tabs
System properties
10
REV 3
Pin configuration
Next menu tab is pin configuration, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1)
Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name switch.
(2) Comment field is optional. (3)
Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name
VALVE. (2)
Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any
of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use _.
A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.
Component view
Next menu tab is the component view
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette
displaying all components is available in the view.
The palette can be made visible
by pressing components if it is
not already visible.
Available
component
pallet
11
REV 3
Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet
(1). Its located in the Digital tab (2).
1
Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the
right button to get the arrow back.
Right click the mouse on

the left red dot and work
your way to the input
SWITCH and left click.
Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case VALVE
12
REV 3
Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select properties.
Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal
component address and should not be changed. When ready press OK.
Instance name
Delay time
If the application needs to be

saved before it is ready choose
Save. The file will be stored as
a spi file.
When the application is ready

choose Compile. The file will
then be saved as a loadable file
spr and is of curse editable.
13
REV 3
Load view
The last view is the Load view. From this view it is possible to download and up load
applications to and from a connected SCS system. Press the Download button and a
dialogue box will appear, choose the desired spr file and press the Open button.
Download
Choose file
and press
open
Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar.

First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the
connected node bar as percent.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if
necessary).
When the download is ready
this dialogue box appears.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Total transfer
completed (%)
14
REV 3
Anybus
General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes,
but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced
with an Anybus
interface
Outside net
Slave (A1)
with anybus
SCS2
CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master
Input
Output
Switch
Valve
Connecting the B1 node

Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the
picture below
G roup used as O utput
G roup used as Input

L /24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S
1
44
31
41
43
42
26
SC S
10
SC S 11
16
12
I/O M oduls
15
REV 3
Connecting the A1 node

Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector.
An Anybus card is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital
I/Os are located.
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)

This card is used for translation
between different field buses and
a standardized format read by the
SCS system.
There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector
for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification
of the unit in the outside net (3).
1
Item 3.
HW address
*10
*1
4
3
The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the
Anybus-card and the outside net.
1:not used
2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus
3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus
4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows:
Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set
during configuration of the network.
Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.
16
REV 3
The Anybus card

is to be mounted
inside the hood on
the right upper
corner of the node
Connect an Anybus jumper

to the D-sub connector on
the Anybus card.
And connect to the outside
connector on the connection
rail beside the card.
On the connection rail the
wires from the D-sub should
be connected in the
following order from the
right 8 3 5 (for Profibus)
Fieldbus connector used for
connecting to the outside
interface.
17
REV 3
Application with a Anybus interface

ABE
Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the pin configuration view
and remove the switch from A1, add a new switch to B1 in Port id# 1
Then get in to the component view and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector
(on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is
acquired for the component to function.
Get an Input bit(1) from the available component

menu under the Anybus tab (2) and place it out in front
of the OD timer and also take an or gate from gates 1
and a split from digital.
Connect the switch to the split, the input bit and the split to the or and the or to
the OD timer. Yore connection should now be as below.
Choose an Output bit and connect it to the split
Note: A red dot on any of the components

makes it impossible to compile the application.
18
REV 3
Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to
configure following.
Note is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
Bit number is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7)
Byte number is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63)
Node is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)
Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both
directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card
(outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than
in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.
19
REV 3
Anybus gateway
General
Compared to a conventional SCS node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or
analogue I/Os, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally
The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is
when the SCS system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node)
on the crane PLC.
Status LEDs
Power connector
Anybus card
(in this case
Profibus)
BCAN connector
Node address key
switches
Serial port
connector
20
REV 3
BCAN - Status LEDs

There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status
and one red LED indicating error status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and
flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when
configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card)
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.
Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).
24Volt DC powers the node internally.
NAME
DESCRIPTION
PIN NUMBER
VCC
GND
10 to 28 V DC 1
Ground
2
NAME
DESCRIPTION
PIN NUMBER
CAN H
CAN L
CAN high
CAN low
1
2
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in
the system have to be connected equal (bus
topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be
able to establish communication.
Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address. The node
identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the
conventional nodes.
For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane)
node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF.
Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set
DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.
A1
A2
Serial port connector

The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a
computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS nodes)
Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.
21
REV 3
APS
Absolute encoder on the telescope
General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and
channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the analogue tab, the RS485
port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to
be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this
is the scale component. The scale component is also located under the analogue
tab.
Teach is used
for storing
positions
Add the RS485 port component

from the analogue tab
The scale component
makes it possible to
translate the sensor
value to the
mechanical distance
The RS485 component

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle
some different types of protocol in this case slin.
The parameters:
Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the
component in the software to the correct hardware input,
choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is
wired to.
Protocol: it is possible to choose
between some different standardised
protocols to suit the sensor used.
When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture
for data)
Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting
to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary.
Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution.
Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.
22
REV 3
From bits to millimetres (scale)

Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single
twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a
note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same
procedure.
Note: It is very important that the sensor doesnt wraparound (when counting up, after
the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the
expanded value should be larger.
Right click on the scale component and choose properties
And fill in the noted values as following.
The measured max
value in millimeters
The measured min
value in millimeters
The up loaded max value
from the ABE online
The up loaded min value
from the ABE online
Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare
with the scaled value.
Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function
called TEACH. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is
possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter PWM value for
teach in APS properties) to the required length, for position 20ft, hold the teach
command and give the go to position 20ft command. The value is now stored in the
spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions.
The connection point for teach
The connection points for position
direct commands
The connection points for expand/
retract commands
Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by
activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on
the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is
given at the same time that position is destroyed.
23
REV 3
External EE-prom
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock
counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system
without loosing this information.
Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following.
Name
Pin number in
Cable
connector
10V supply
X2/36
Red
Serial data
X2/16
Blue
Serial clock
X2/26
Green
Signal ground
X2/6
Black
The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS
node within the cable range.
24
REV 3
Software
A spreader properties component needs to be added in the application, that make the
system try to find the EE-prom at boot.
The spreader properties component (1) is located in the misc tab (2) in the
available component menu.
4
3
The spreader properties contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make
the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the
connection points on the left of the component (3).
The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net
(if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the
component (4).
25
REV 3
Activate the EE-prom

The EE-prom is activated after the Serial number value is set.
The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to.
Left click on the Serial number key in the BMS spreader info tab.
In the current key dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen serial
number.
Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the set button to store and
activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.
The Spreader info tag
The get all button
The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the
spreader info tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the get all button.
26
REV 3
User Manual
Version 1.0
Revision
Issued by
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems

Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip
GO, AL
2000-05-26
2000-08-09
2000-10-10
2000-10-10
2001-01-22
PB2
PB3
PB4
Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems

2002-06-04
2003-06-10
2004-10-08
PA1
PA2
PA3
A
PB1
Date
Measures
First draft.
Corrections
More corrections
Version 1.0
PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd
changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set.
Revision after system release 1.04
Printed: 05-2-23 13.40
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
2(92)
Table of contents
1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5
INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5
2.1
HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3
Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5
USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6
3.1
Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.2
Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.3
Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4
General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.1
File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2
Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.3
Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.4
Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.5
Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
4
4.1
SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9

General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2
Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.1
Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.2
Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.3
Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.4
Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5
Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.6
Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.7
Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.8
Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.9
Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10
5
5.1
PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2
Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.1
Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.2
Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11
5.2.3
Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
5.2.4
CANopen I/O................................................................................................................................................... 12
2(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
6
6.1
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
3(92)
COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................13

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 13
6.2
Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 14
6.2.1
Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3
Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.1
Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 14
6.3.2
Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.3
Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 15
6.3.4
Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 15
6.3.5
Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.6
Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 15
6.3.7
Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 15
LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................16
7.1
General ................................................................................................................................................................... 16
7.2
Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 16
COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................17
8.1
Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 17
8.1.1
TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 17
8.1.2
TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 20
8.1.3
FAC Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 24
8.1.4
DPS Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 26
8.1.5
Tower Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 29
8.1.6
APS Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 32
8.1.7
MPS Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 36
8.1.8
Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 40
8.1.9
TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 42
8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 46
8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 50
8.2
AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.2
Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 54
8.2.3
Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.4
Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.5
Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.2.6
Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 56
8.2.7
Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
8.2.8
Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 57
8.3
CANopen ................................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.2
PDO Read Bit .................................................................................................................................................. 58
8.3.3
PDO Read........................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.4
PDO Write Bit ................................................................................................................................................. 59
8.3.5
PDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.3.6
SDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.4
Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 61
3(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
4(92)
Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 61

TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 61
Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 62
Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 63
8.5
Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.5.1
AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 64
8.5.2
NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.3
NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.4
OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 66
8.5.5
NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.6
XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.7
SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.8
RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.9
Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6
Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.1
OD Timer On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.2
UpDn Counter Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 70
8.6.3
OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 70
8.6.4
Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 71
8.6.5
Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 71
8.7
Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.1
Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.2
Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.3
Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.4
Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.5
Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 76
8.7.6
Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 76
8.8
Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 78
8.8.1
RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 78
8.8.2
IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
8.8.3
IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.4
IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.5
IN0 IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.6
IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.7
Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.8
AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.9
Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.10 AuxAnalogue................................................................................................................................................... 82
9
10
TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................83
CANOPEN TUTORIAL ...............................................................................................90
4(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
5(92)
1 Introduction
ABE Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the
Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and
programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface.
In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied
together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system
together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the
target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection.
The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic
Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter
settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader
experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM
(log).
This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of
the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to
logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.
2 Installing ABE
2.1
HW requirements
The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are:

an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
at least 2Mb of free disk space.
2.2
2.3
Installation
Close any other applications running under windows.
Insert the CD into your station.
Run the file Setup.exe.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.

Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
5(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
6(92)
3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions.
This chapter describes the four main functions of the program.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.
3.1
Main window
The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the
four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations.
The application supports tool tips.
The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.
3.2
Error control
Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control
can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.
3.3
Multiple language support
The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.
3.4
General functions
The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.
3.4.1
File
Two types of files are available.

Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2.
Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but
want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.
3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.
3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.
3.4.1.3 Save As...

Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.
3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.
3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.
6(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
3.4.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
7(92)
Edit
3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.
3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.
3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses
will also be pasted into the page.
3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.
3.4.3
Settings
3.4.3.1 Error Control

Turns the error control on/off.
3.4.3.2 Show hints

Turns the tool tips on/off.
3.4.3.3 Show component connection info

Turns information at component connection points on/off.
3.4.4
Tools
3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view

Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation

Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.3 Export parameters

Exports the selected components parameters to a file.
3.4.4.4 Import parameters

Imports parameters from a file to current project.
3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks

Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder
look activated.
7(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
3.4.5
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
8(92)
Help
3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.
8(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
9(92)
4 System view
4.1
General
The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system
properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes
intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name
corresponds to a unique address key setting.
The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of
checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that
system. An exception is if the EXISTS function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input
on the master node.
The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and
seven spreader nodes are available for selection.
Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as Spreader stop have to be checked here as well if these
functions are used.
Figure 4:1 System view
4.2
Functionality
The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out
(topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and
Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key.
You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
The properties are:
4.2.1
Author
This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.2
Last date saved
Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
9(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
4.2.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
10(92)
Creation date
Displays the date of the current projects creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project.
Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
4.2.4
Version number
A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.
4.2.5
Revision number
The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.
4.2.6
Spreader type
A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.7
Drawing number
A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.8
Customer
This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80
characters.
4.2.9
Comments
This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
10(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
11(92)
5 Pin configuration view

5.1
General
The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list
corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed.
A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red.
The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN,
OUT or NC (Not connected) and if its a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited.
Remark:
Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view
5.2
Functionality
This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each
individual I/O its nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments
to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the
component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit
I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of
groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.
5.2.1
Address key
The address key field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to
the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.
5.2.2
Exists port
The exists port is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input replace a node
within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active
in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of
Spreaders are to be used within the same system.
11(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
5.2.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
12(92)
Anybus I/O
With this button you can view all Anybus inputs and outputs in current spreader program.
5.2.4
CANopen I/O
With this button the CANopen configuration form appears, from this view you can create the CANopen functionality.
You can add up to 15 CANopen slaves and add inputs and outputs on each slave (Digital and Analogue).
Advanced configuration of a CANopen slave can be done by using SDO:s (Service Data Object).
For more information about CANopen see general available sources.
Figure 5:2:4 CANopen configuration view
12(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
13(92)
6 Component view
6.1
General
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available
in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse.
Remark:
Figure 6:1 Component view
Figure 6:2 Palette
Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.
13(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
14(92)
The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual.

Name
Output tag
Symbol
Description
An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making
the program more readable and efficient.
Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed
by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s)
An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag.
Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be
followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag.
A component contains logic. The components range from
simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full
functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of
the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or
right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its
properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A
component also carries component connection points (round
circles).
A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be
connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the
connection point is connected it turns white. This means that
it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white
although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.
Input tag
Component
Component connection
Output port
A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the

Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple
connections are not possible for an Output port.
A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the
Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view.
A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with
two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind
the user that the Input port has been connected at least once
before.
Information about the generic name of the component
connection is shown above each connection point when
turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the
Settings menu.
Input port
Multiple connections
Component connection
information
6.2
Page functionality
One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be
accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary.
The component view provides the following functionality:
6.2.1
Adding pages
By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.
6.3
Component functionality
In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:
6.3.1
Adding a component
This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and
then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page youre working on.
14(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
6.3.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
15(92)
Moving a component
Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.
6.3.3
Selecting multiple components
Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).
6.3.4
Cutting / coping / pasting components
The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same
application or in other ABE applications.
6.3.5
Delete a component
By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.
6.3.6
Connecting / disconnecting components
Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components.
One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists
displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags).
Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.
6.3.7
Online monitoring
Online monitoring is performed under Component view.

The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2.
Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button.
Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked
The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).
15(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
16(92)
7 Load view
7.1
General
The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is
selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the
three progress bars.
Figure 7:1 Load view
7.2
Functionality
When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a
compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is
shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of
the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.
16(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
17(92)
8 Components
Terminology:
In this section the follow terms are used:
False = 0 = logical low level
True = 1 = logical high level
Parameter Instance name:
Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse
button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title Instance
name. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be
altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine
the interconnection between components.
State transition diagrams:
The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the
same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the
complete listing.
Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: not All unlocked
This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4).
The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand.
Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.
8.1
8.1.1
Controllers
TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4
The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the
Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection
of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it
also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.
8.1.1.1 State transition diagram

Not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4
Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).
LOCK_ALL:
Lock all Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock all Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.
17(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Project No
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
Page:
PB4
18(92)
For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
LOCK_ALL
[ Lock after landed OR
(landed override AND
Lock) ]
[ All locked ]
[ not All unlocked ]
STARTUP

Lock) ]
[ Unlock after landed OR

Unlock) ]
IDLE
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED
[ Unlock after landed

OR (landed override
AND Unlock) ]
UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4
8.1.1.2 Input ports

Input
Landed override
Type
Digital
Description
Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable
Digital
Enables component. If set to false

component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command
Digital
Unlock command to unlock all

Twistlocks.
Lock command
Digital
Lock command to lock all

Twistlocks.
18(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
19(92)
Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4
Digital
Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status

on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.
Locked 1,..., Locked 4
Digital

on locked sensor 1 to 4.
Landed 1,..., Landed 4
Digital

on landed sensor 1 to 4
Output
Unlock
Type
Digital
Description
Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.
Lock
Digital
Lock signal to all Twistlocks.
Locked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are landed.
Parameter
Delay
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time after all landed sensors are true
and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until a warning message will be

prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked 1,...,
Locked 4 shall become true within
this time when a lock output has
gone high.)
Timeout landed
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time from the first landed input has

gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging
Digital
If set to true (checked) the logging of

messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.
8.1.1.3 Output ports
8.1.1.4 Parameters
8.1.1.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.
19(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
2005-02-23 13:40
Code
60
Message
TLC_NO_SENSOR
61
TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR
62
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
63
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
64
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
65
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
66
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING
67
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK
118
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT
ED
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV
ATED
TLC_LOCK_COMMAND
TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND
TLC_LOCKED
TLC_UNLOCKED
TLC_LANDED
TLC_UNLANDED
119
175
176
177
178
244
245
8.1.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
20(92)
Description
No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.
Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal
has not been received after output to valve.
Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
When override input is set to true and
previous state is false.
When override input is set to false and
previous state is true.
Twist-lock lock command received
Twist-lock unlock command received
All Twistlocks have been locked
All Twistlocks have been unlocked
The spreader has been landed.
The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)
TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8
The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from
changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and
always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends
event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

Twin is down (two containers):
not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8
Twin is up (single container):
not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4
Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
20(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
21(92)

STARTUP:
LOCK_ALL:
Lock single and twin Twistlocks.
LOCK_SINGLE:
Lock single Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock single and twin Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_SINGLE:
Unlock single Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.
For all states:

T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if
LOCK_ALL
LOCK_SINGLE
[ T wi n i s down ]
[ T wi n i s up ]
[ All locked ]
[ All locked ]
[ Unlock after landed OR

Unlock) ]
ST ART UP

Lock) ]

Lock) ]
IDLE
[ Unlock after landed

OR (landed override
AND Unl ock) ]
enable = 1
[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED
[ T wi n is down ]
T win is up
UNLOCK_SINGLE
UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8
21(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
22(92)
8.1.2.2 Input ports

Input
Landed override
Type
Digital
Description
Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable
Digital

Unlock command
Digital
Unlock command to unlock all

Twistlocks.
Lock command
Digital
Lock command to lock all

Twistlocks.
Twin unlocked 1
Twin unlocked 4
Digital

on unlocked sensor
Single unlocked 1
Digital

on unlocked sensor
Twin locked 1
Twin locked 4
Digital

on locked sensor
Single locked 1
Digital

on locked sensor
Twin landed 1
Twin landed 4
Digital

on landed sensor
Single landed 1
Single landed 4
Digital

on landed sensor
Twin is up
Digital
Input signal telling that Twinboxes

are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled
only.
TTDS Fault
Digital
Input signal telling that there is a

TTDS fault. Disables lock
operations.
Type
Description
Single unlocked 4
Single locked 4

Output
22(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
23(92)
Unlock single
Digital
Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.
Unlock twin
Digital
Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Lock single
Digital
Lock signal to single Twistlocks.
Lock twin
Digital
Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Locked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are landed.
Parameter
Delay
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time after all landed sensors are true
and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks
Milliseconds
[ms]

prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked single 1,...,
Locked single 4 shall become true
within this time when a lock output
has gone high.)
Timeout landed
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time from the first landed input has

gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging
Digital

8.1.2.4 Parameters

Code
60
Message
TLC_NO_SENSOR
61
TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR
62
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
63
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
23(92)
Description
No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
Locked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all locked.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
2005-02-23 13:40
64
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
65
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
66
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING
67
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK
118
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT
ED
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV
ATED
TLC_LOCK_COMMAND
TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND
TLC_LOCKED
TLC_UNLOCKED
TLC_LANDED
TLC_UNLANDED
119
175
176
177
178
244
245
8.1.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
24(92)
Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal

has not been received after output to valve.
Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
When override input is set to true and
previous state is false.
When override input is set to false and
previous state is true.
Twist-lock lock command received
Twist-lock unlock command received
All Twistlocks have been locked
All Twistlocks have been unlocked
The spreader has been landed.
The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)
FAC Flipper Arm Controller
The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the
component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to
the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached.
UP:
All Flippers are sent up.
DOWN:
All Flippers are sent down.
24(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
For all s tates :

Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
25(92)
UP
[ UpCom m and ]
START_UP
IDLE
[ DownCom m and ]
DISABLED
DOWN
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC
8.1.3.2 Input ports

Input
Up command
Type
Digital
Description
Command to send all Flippers up.
Down command
Digital
Command to send all Flippers down.
Enable
Digital

Output
Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n
Type
Digital
Description
Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n
Digital
Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The

number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Unit
Number
Description
The number of Flippers to be
controlled.
8.1.3.4 Parameters
Parameter
Number of Flippers
25(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
26(92)
Operation mode
Option
Impulse (only impulse required for

the command to execute) or Constant
(constant command required).
Enable logging
Option


Code
246
247
8.1.4
Message
FAC_UP_COMMAND
FAC_DOWN_COMMAND
Description
Flipper up command received
Flipper down command received
DPS Discrete Positioning System
The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box
indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as
well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions
are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant
commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will
perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of
that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from
the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has
been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions arent reached within a parameter
adjusted time etc.
The DPS component is equipped with an fast I/O concept, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a
higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the
component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the
same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract).
If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the fast I/O concept will be disabled.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
EXPAND:
Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
RETRACT:
26(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
27(92)
Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
CONSTANT REPEAT:
When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must
be released before a new command will be excepted.
Example:
1. Expand command is given.
2. Next stop is reached.
3. The telescope stops.
4. Expand command is released.
5. New expand command is given.
6. The telescope continues.
DELAY:
A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in
Operation mode (parameter) else ignored.
currentCommand = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to
position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position
and desired position.
For all s tates :
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]
[ desiredStop = current
Stop, Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]
EXPAND
[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]
DELAY
[ Delay perform ed ]
IDLE
[ com m andInput =
NO_CMD ]
CONSTANT REPEAT
[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ]

Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
Operation m ode = Delay ]
START_UP
DISABLED
[ SpreaderStop = 0,
Enable = 1 ]
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS
8.1.4.2 Input ports
27(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
28(92)
Input
Expand command
Type
Digital
Description
Input command to expand telescope
to next stop.
Retract command
Digital
Input command to retract telescope

to next stop.
Return to position 0
Return to position n
Digital
Input command to expand telescope

to predefined stop. The number of
predefined stops is set by the
parameter Number of stops.
Sensor 0
...
Sensor n
Digital
Sensor input.
Example with 4 stops:
Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1,
Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3,
Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5,
Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6.
Etc..
Any landed
Digital
Sensor input from landed sensors.

Prevents telescoping when landed.
All unlocked
Digital
Sensor input from unlocked sensors.

Permits telescoping when unlocked.
Enable
Digital

Slave
Digital
Enables slave mode. Telescope will

run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled
Output
Expand
Type
Digital
Description
Output to expand telescope.
Retract
Digital
Output to retract telescope.
In position 0,..., Reached stop n
Digital
Output signal indicating that the

specific valid stop has been reached.
In position
Digital
Output signal indicating that a valid

stop has been reached.
Unit
Description
8.1.4.4 Parameters
Parameter
28(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
29(92)
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time permitted from when an output

is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Operation mode
Option
Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.
Delay at each stop
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time the telescope is delayed

(stopped) at each stop.
Number of stops
Number
The number of stops in use.
Enable logging
Option
If set to true (checked) the storing of

no generated messages will be stored.

8.1.5
Code
68
Message
DPS_TIMEOUT
69
DPS_SENSOR_MISSING
70
DPS_SENSOR_LOST
71
DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR
179
180
181
DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND
DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND
DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND
182
DPS_STOP_REACHED
Description
No valid stop reached within timeout
time.
The expected sensor has not been
reached within specified sequence.
Position sensor has been lost without
any command given
More than one position sensor active
simultaneously.
Expand command received
Retract command received
A command to go to a certain
position received
A valid position has been reached
Tower Head block
The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
FEED_LEFT:
29(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Project No
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
PB4
Page:
30(92)
Feeds the Tower to the left.

FEED_RIGHT:
Feeds the Tower to the right.
CENTER:
Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true.
DELAY:
A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).
For all s tates :

FEED_LEFT
FEED_RIGHT
[ Feed right ]
[ Feed left ]
START_UP
IDLE
[ Center ]
DISABLED
CENTER
DELAY
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower
8.1.5.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Enable right
Digital
Enables feeding in right direction.

Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Enable left
Digital
Enables feeding in left direction.

(i.e. no effect).
Right end sensor
Digital
Position sensor input.
At right sensor
Digital
30(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
31(92)
At left sensor
Digital
Left end sensor
Digital
Right command
Digital
Input command to feed head block

right.
Left command
Digital
Input command to feed head block

left.
Centre command
Digital
Input command to feed head to the

centre position.
Output
In centre
Type
Digital
Description
Output signal telling Head block is in
centre position.
At right side
Digital
Output signal telling Head block is to

the right.
At left side
Digital
Output signal telling Head block is to

the left.
Feed right
Digital
Output signal to feed Head block

right.
Feed left
Digital
Output signal to feed Head block left.
Parameter
Operation mode
Unit
Option
Description
Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only
valid for the Centre command
Delay
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time before a change of direction

will take effect.
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time permitted from when an output

is turned on until a valid position
exceeded the motion will be stopped.
Use end stops
Option
If set true (checked) Right end sensor

and Left end sensor does not need to
be connected.
Enable logging
Option

8.1.5.4 Parameters

31(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Code
325
326
327
328
329
330
369
8.1.6
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Message
TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND
TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND
TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND
TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS
TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS
TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS
TOWER_TIMEOUT
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
32(92)
Description
Centre command is given.
Feed left command is given.
Feed right command is given.
Tower has reached centre position.
Tower has reached left position.
Tower has reached right position.
Tower has not reached the desired
position within the time limit.
APS Automatic Positioning System
The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the
chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is
possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be
used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract
commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter
as well as are certain parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The
absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands telescope.
PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
RETRACT:
Retracts telescope.
PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
DELAY:
Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter)
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
32(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
33(92)
CONSTANT_REPEAT:
A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode
(parameter).
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
For all s tates :

[ Operation m ode = Delay ]
EXPAND
DELAY
[ desiredPos ition >

currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode =
Im puls e, des iredPosition
= currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode = Delay,

des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ no button is pres s ed ]
[ Operation m ode = Im puls e,
des iredPos ition = current
Pos ition ]
[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat,

des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition <

currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
[ Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
CONSTANT REPEAT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS
8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions

This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach
input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the
encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops,
have to be taught a value.
8.1.6.3 Input ports

Input
Type
33(92)
Description
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
34(92)
Enable
Digital

Teach
Digital
Command to teach in new positions.

When this signal is true any Go
position command will store a new
position for corresponding stop.
Slave mode
Digital
Enables slave mode. Telescope will

run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled.
Hooks are up
Digital
Input signal indicating that all hooks

are in up position. Only used for twin
telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is
connected here telescoping is
permitted, can also be used as a
general permit.
Any landed
Digital
Input result from landed sensors.
Go position 0
Go position n
Digital
Command to feed to defined

positions 0,...,n.
Retract command
Digital
Command to retract telescope.
Expand command
Digital
Command to expand telescope.
Current position
Analogue
Scaled input signal of the current

position.
Output
Stop position0
Stop position n
Type
Analogue
Description
Output signal indicating the stored
positions for the corresponding stop.
In position
Digital
Output signal indicating that a valid

stop has been reached.
In position 0
In position n
Digital
Output signal indicating that the

specific valid stop has been reached.
PWM retract
PWM
PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
PWM expand
PWM
PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
Digital retract
Digital
34(92)
Digital output to control the

telescope.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
35(92)
Digital expand
Digital
Digital output to control the

telescope.
Digital high speed
Digital
Digital output for high speed

telescoping in two-speed system.
Parameter
Delay at each stop
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Delay time at each stop if Expand or
Retract command is given and Delay
is enabled under Operation mode.
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until from when an output is

turned on until a valid position
Number of stops
Number
The number of stops enabled.
Auto correction
Option
If enabled the APS will feed back the

telescope to its original position if it
of some reason has got out of
position.
Operation mode
Option
Impulse: sequence completes until a

new command is given
8.1.6.5 Parameters
Delay: delay at each stop

Constant repeat: when a stop is
reached a new expand or retract
command must be given.
Stop window
Millimetre
[mm]
Distance from defined stop to be

considered as a stop.
Signal window
Millimetre
[mm]
Window around the desired position

in which a signal indicating that the
correct position has been reached is
given.
Impact range
Millimetre
[mm]
Hysterisis for impact detection.
Impact off delay timer
Milliseconds
Delay after impact detected to run.
[ms]
Length of travel
Millimetre
[mm]
Time of telescope
Milliseconds
[ms]
Ramp Gain
Number
Distance between minimum and

maximum positions.
Time between minimum and
maximum positions.
Ramp gain.
[value *1000]
35(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
36(92)
Ramp offset
Millimetre
[mm]
Ramp offset for stop speed
Time to reach max speed
Milliseconds
The time it shall take to reach max

speed.
[ms]
Proportional Gain
Number
Proportional part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
Integral Gain
Number
Integral part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
PWM value for teach
Number
PWM output when teach enabled.
Reverse Min PWM output
Number
Minimum value on PWM that causes

a reversed movement.
Reverse Max PWM output
Number
Maximum value on PWM that causes

a reversed movement
Forward Min PWM output
Number
Minimum value on PWM that causes

a forward movement.
Forward Max PWM output
Number
Maximum value on PWM that causes

a forward movement.
Enable logging
Option


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
183
Message
APS_TIMEOUT
184
185
186
187
272
396
397
398
APS_EXPAND_COMMAND
APS_RETRACT_COMMAND
APS_GOPOS_COMMAND
APS_STOP_REACHED
APS_TEACH_COMMAND
APS_IMPACT_ON
APS_AUTOCORR_ON
APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T
EACH_RANGE
APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_
WIN
399
8.1.7
Description
The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time
limit.
Command to go to a specific position received
The desired position reached
Teach in command received
Impact is detected
Spreader is auto correcting
The position value is not within the teached range.
Spreader is bumped out of signal window.
MPS Memory position system
The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin
telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to
return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has
36(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
37(92)
the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a
command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
For all s tates :

RETRACT
[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
EXPAND
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS
37(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
38(92)
8.1.7.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Current position
Analogue
Scaled input signal reading the

current position.
Return to predefined position 0

...
Return to predefined position n
Digital
Command to feed Twin boxes to

predefined position 0,...,n
Returned to stored position 0

...
Returned to stored position n
Digital
Command to feed Twin boxes to

logged position 0,...,n
Store new position 0

...
Store new position n
Digital
Command to log new positions.

When this signal is true the current
position will be stored in the RAM of
the SCS2.
Teach
Digital
Command to teach in new positions.

When this signal is true any Go to
pre-defined position command will
store a new position for
corresponding stop.
Output
Current reference position
Type
Analogue
Description
Signal indicating the currently
desired position.
Predefined position 0
Predefined position n
Analogue
Signal indicating the positions for the

corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position 0
Predefined position n
Analogue
Signal indicating the positions for the

corresponding predefined stop.
Logged position 0
Logged position n
Analogue
Output signal indicating the positions

for the corresponding logged stop.
In position
Digital
Output signal indicating that any

position has been reached & logged
or predefined).
Expand
Digital
Output signal to expand Twin boxes.
Retract
Digital
Output signal to retract Twin boxes.
38(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
39(92)
8.1.7.4 Parameters
Parameter
Stop window
Unit
Millimetre
[mm]
Description
Offset from stop to be considered as
a stop.
Operation mode
Option
Impulse: sequence completes until a

new command is given
Constant: when a stop is reached a
new expand or retract command must
be given.
Predefined positions
Number
The number of stops that will be

stored in none volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be available after
shutting down system.)
Storable positions
Number
The number of stops that will be

stored in volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be lost when shutting
down system.)
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time from when an output is turned

on until a valid position should be
reached. If this time is exceeded the
motion will be stopped and a warning
generated.
Enable logging
Option


box Enable logging.
Code
281
282
Message
MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS
MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS
280
MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS
284
MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS
285
MPS_TIMEOUT
39(92)
Description
Teach command received.
Command to go to a pre-defined position has
been received.
A command to store a new value for a log
position has been received.
A command to return to a log position has been
received.
The twin-legs haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.1.8
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
40(92)
Twin Telescope
The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs.
The component, although it doesnt hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false.
Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right
sensor is false.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.
For all s tates :

EXPAND
[ Expand, !in45Pos ]
[ !Expand OR in45Pos ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in

ZeroPos Right) ]
[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ]
[ Retract, !inZeroPos Left,
!inZeroPos Right ]
DISABLED
RETRACT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope
40(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
41(92)
8.1.8.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
In 45ft
Digital
Sensor input signal.
In zero right
Digital
In zero left
Digital
Retract command
Digital
Command input to retract the twin

boxes.
Expand command
Digital
Command input to expand the twin

boxes.
Output
Retract
Type
Digital
Description
Output signal to retract twin boxes.
Expand
Digital
Output signal to expand twin boxes.
Parameter
Timeout
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time until from when an output is
turned on until a valid position
Enable logging
Option

8.1.8.4 Parameters

box Enable logging.
Code
273
274
275
276
Message
TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND
TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND
TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT
TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT
41(92)
Description
Left console reached zero gap position
Right console reached zero gap position
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.1.9
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
42(92)
277
TWINTELE_EXPANDING
Twinlegs expand in motion
278
279
TWINTELE_RETRACTING
TWINTELE_TIMEOUT
Twinlegs retract in motion

Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion
within time limit
TwinUpDown
The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin
up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down
consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks
situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the
hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until
the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are
fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output Twin up ready pulse ,
which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.
42(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
PB4
Page:
43(92)

TWIN_DOWN
TWIN_UP
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft
Disconnected || !hookRight
Disconnected ]
[ twinDownReques tM ]
2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook
LeftDis connected &&
hookRightDis connected) ]
RAISE_BOXES
CONNECT
[ allTwinUp ]
[ !allTwinUp ]
[ hookLeftConnected && hook

RightConnected ]
1 : [ !allTwinUp ||
!hookLeftDis connected
|| !hookRight
Disconnected ]
RAISE_HOOKS
[ hookLeftDis connected &&

hookRightDis connected ]
2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left
&& twinInZeroPosRight) ]
BOXES_DOWN
INCH_IN
2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF

_DELAY_INCH && twinInZero
Pos Left && twinInZeroPos
Right && energis eInchInM ]
[ anyTwinUp ]
[ !anyTwinUp ]
3:
HOLD_DOWN
HOLD_UP
1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn
ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ]
H*
OFF_DELAY_INCH
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if

twinDownCom m and
H*
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if

twinUpCom m and
[ twinUpCom m and ]
[ twinDownCom m and ]
1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin

DownCom m and && hookLeft
Connected && hookRightConnected ]
IDLE
2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook
LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected) ]
1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook

LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected ]
2 : [ twinUpReques tM ]
3:
STARTUP
For all s tates :

DISABLED
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown
43(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
44(92)
8.1.9.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Twin box up 1
Twin box up 4
Digital
Sensor input indicating that Twin

boxes are up.
Hook connected right
Digital
Hook connected left
Digital
Sensor input indicating that right

hook is down.
Sensor input indicating that left hook
is down.
Right attach permit
Digital
Sensor input indicating that position

has been reached to attach twin boxes
on right side.
Left attach permit
Digital
Sensor input indicating that position

has been reached to attach twin boxes
on left side.
Hook disconnected right
Digital
Sensor input indicating that hook is

up on right side.
Hook disconnected left
Digital
Sensor input indicating that hook is

up on left side.
Twin in zero right
Digital

boxes has reached zero position on
right side.
Twin in zero left
Digital

boxes has reached zero position on
left side.
Chain in 40ft
Digital
Sensor input indicating that chain is

in 40ft position.
Permit twin down
Digital
Permits down motion if set to true.
Permit twin up
Digital
Permits up motion if set to true.
Twin down command
Digital
Command to send Twin boxes down.
Twin up command
Digital
Command to send Twin boxes up.
Output
Twin up ready pulse
Type
Digital
Description
Signal telling that up sequence is
completed.
Twin down
Digital
Signal to lower Twin boxes.
Twin up
Digital
Signal to raise Twin boxes.
8.1.9.3 Output port
44(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
45(92)
Disconnect twin unit left
Digital
Signal to disconnect left hook.
Disconnect twin unit right
Digital
Signal to disconnect right hook.
Connect twin unit left
Digital
Signal to connect left hook.
Connect twin unit right
Digital
Signal to connect right hook.
Inch to zero gap
Digital
Signal to inch in Twin boxes.
Inch to connect left
Digital
Signal to inch out left Twin box.
Inch to connect right
Digital
Signal to inch out right Twin box.
Parameter
Timeout Twin down
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
prompted if sequence doesnt
complete.
Timeout hook
Milliseconds
[ms]

complete.
Timeout Twin inching
Milliseconds
[ms]

complete.
Enable logging
Option

8.1.9.4 Parameters

box Enable logging.
Code
255
Message
TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT
256
TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT
257
TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT
258
TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT
259
TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT
260
TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT
261
TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT
45(92)
Description
Twin boxes have failed to get to their
upper position within time limit.
Left hook has failed to reach its' upper
Right hook has failed to reach its' upper
Twin boxes left timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
Twin-boxes right timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
Left hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
Right hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
262
TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT
263
TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST
264
TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST
265
TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST
266
TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST
267
268
286
287
288
TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST
TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST
TWIN_UP_COMMAND
TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND
TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP
289
TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN
PB4
Page:
46(92)
Twin-boxes have failed to get to their

lower position within time limit.
Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not
due to output).
Twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down.
Left hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
Right hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
Twin up command has been received.
Twin down command has been received.
Twin boxes have reached their upper
position.
Twin boxes have reached their lower
position.
8.1.10 PID
8.1.10.1 Overview
The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders
with special requirements.
Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed.
The PID component have the following features:
Position control
Velocity control
Syncronisation of two cylinders
Acceleration limitation
These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5.
The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.
8.1.10.2 Position control

The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position
mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with
configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The position mode can be activated in run time.
8.1.10.3 Velocity control

In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range 100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then
moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as
fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The velocity mode can be activated in run time.
When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.
8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders

Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in
the PID to handle this.
46(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
47(92)
There are two different kind of syncronisation modes:

Parallel sync
Non-parallel sync
Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position
between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode.
Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means
that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions
during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions.
In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position.
You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.
8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation

Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an acceleration limiter is
installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation.
The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.
8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used.
Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify
the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively.
When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.10.7 Input Ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Enables regulator if set true.
Regulator mode
Digital
Sets the operational mode,

POSITION (Low level, 0) or
VELOCITY (High level, 1).
Sync parallel mode
Digital
Synchronise
Digital
Reference value
Analogue
Reference value. This signal is scaled

within the component and must not
be pre-scaled or scaled to desired
value.
(Port not visible in ABE)

Input
Sensor value
Type
Analogue
Description
Depending on regulator index the
sensor signal will be read from either
analogue input 0 or analogue input 1.
This signal is scaled within the
component and must not be prescaled.
8.1.10.8 Output Ports
47(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
48(92)
Output
Retract output (PWM)
Type
Analogue
Description
The actual value sent to the PWM
when retracting.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Expand output (PWM)
Analogue
The actual value sent to the PWM

when expanding.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Retracting
Digital
This signal indicates that the

regulator is retracting.
Expanding
Digital
This signal indicates that the

regulator is expanding.
(Ports not visible in ABE)

Output
PWM 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Used for forward output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 1
Analogue
Used for reverse output (PID 0 which

PWM 2
Analogue
Used for forward output (PID 1 which

PWM 3
Analogue
Used for reverse output (PID 1 which

Unit
Percent
Description
The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
8.1.10.9 Parameters
Parameter
Filter weight
[%]
Aim window
Millimetres
[mm]
The distance from the reference

position where to aim for the nonlinear regulator. It is only used in
Position mode.
Rate limiter gain
Number
This should be the frequency [Hz],

i.e. 1/sample interval.
Fraction of square root
Percent
Fraction of the non-linear regulator

signal to use. Should be between 6090.
[%]
48(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Switch window
2005-02-23 13:40
Millimetres
[mm]
Time to reach input
Milliseconds
[ms]
Sync max integrator
Percent
[%]
Sync Integral (I)
Number
[value * 1000]
Sync Proportional (P)
Number
[value * 1000]
Sample interval
Milliseconds
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
49(92)
Distance from reference position

where to switch from the non linear
regulator to the PI regulator. This
parameter must be higher than the
Aim window parameter. It is only
used in Position mode.
Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
mode.
Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
Sampling interval.
[ms]
Velocity window
Percent
[%]
Position window
Millimetres
[mm]
Device length
Millimetres
[mm]
When regulating velocity and if the

Reference value is inside Velocity
window it is interpreted as zero.
When regulating position the
cylinder will stop when it reaches
reference position +/- Position
window.
Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
Insignal max
Number
Maximum insignal from analogue

input.
Insignal min
Number
Minimum insignal from analogue

input.
R Half PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between

Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.
R Max PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between

Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.
R Min PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output that causes

movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
R Half PWM
Number
PWM output between R Min PWM

and R Max PWM.
Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max
PWM) / 2
R Max PWM
Number
49(92)
Minimum PWM output at max

speed. (Upper threshold limit).
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
50(92)
F Half PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between 0

and Device length at F Half PWM.
F Max PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between 0

and Device length at F Max PWM.
F Min PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output that causes

movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
F Half PWM
Number
PWM output between F Min PWM

and F Max PWM.
Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max
PWM) / 2
F Max PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output at max

speed. (Upper threshold limit).
Pos. Integral (I)
Number
Integral part of PI regulator. Only

used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Pos. Proportional (P)
Number
[value * 1000]
Acceleration limit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Regulator index
Number
Proportional part of PI regulator.

Only used in Position mode.
Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Node
Option
Location of regulator. Choose

between B1 B8 and A1 A4.
Store mode
Option
Select which parameters to use:

ALL PARAMS: use all parameters
from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
REGULATOR PARAMS: use only
the regulator parameters from
NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear
parameters from NVRAM stored by
AutoTuner
ABE ONLY: use parameters only
from Spreader program file
8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and
measuring its characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID
components, its possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check
box Prepare for sync parameter.
50(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
51(92)
The AutoTuner will store its measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and
monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is
supposed to use the auto tuned parameters.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.11.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Enables component if set true. When
the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the
auto tune procedure is restarted.
Slave
Analogue
Sensor input signal for the slave

cylinder. Only needed if prepare for
sync is checked.
Main
Analogue
Sensor input signal for the cylinder to

auto tune.
Output
Finished
Type
Digital
Description
Output for telling when tuning is
complete.
Slave Retract
Analogue
Output for retracting slave cylinder.

Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Slave Expand
Analogue
Output for expanding slave cylinder.

Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Main Retract
Analogue
Output for retracting main cylinder.

This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Main Expand
Analogue
Output for expanding main cylinder.

This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Unit
Description
8.1.11.3 Parameters
Parameter
51(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Position window
2005-02-23 13:40
Millimeter
[mm]
Velocity window
Percents
[%]
Sync Proportional [P]
Number
[value * 1000]
Sync Integral [I]
Number
[value * 1000]
Sync max integrator
Percents
[%]
Time to reach input
Milliseconds
[ms]
Fraction of square root
Percents
[%]
Filter weight
Percents
[%]
Natural frequency
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
52(92)
When regulating position the

cylinder will stop when it reaches
reference position +/- Position
window.
When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
window it is interpreted as zero.
Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
mode.
Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 6090.
The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
Number
[value * 1000]
Moderation factor
Number
[value * 1000]
Regulator index
Number

Sample interval
Milliseconds
Sampling interval.
[ms]
Acceleration limit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Device length
Millimetre
[mm]
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Record name
Text
52(92)
Minimum time for valve to open full

and to close full.
Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
Timeout for a full cylinder stroke.
This parameter must be greater than
the tiem it takes for the cylinder to
perform a full stroke.
The instance name of the matching
PID component.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Prepare for sync
Option
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
53(92)
This shall be enabled when using

syncronisation between two
cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder
to the slower one.

fault and event log onboard the SCS2.
Code
385
8.2
8.2.1
Message
AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM
Description
The component has stored its
parameters in NVRAM.
AnyBus
Introduction
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs
IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics
are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard
display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for
53(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
54(92)
indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and
therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic
message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.
8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.

The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0
=> Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1
=> Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
=> Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
=> Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD)
=> Sequential counter value (message number)
8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0
=> Node ID
Byte 1-2 (WORD)
=> Row Number (of source code)
Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD)
=> Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 9-10 (WORD)
=> Sequential counter
The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
8.2.2
Anybus System
The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr).
Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.
8.2.2.1 Input ports

Input
Download start
Type
Digital
Description
If set true, component expects
download data on Anybus.
Parameter
Node
Unit
Node id
Description
The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.
Log active
Option
Indicates if the log should be

exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
8.2.2.2 Parameters
54(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.2.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
55(92)
Log address
0-63
The Anybus output address in the

access area where the log should be
exported.
Assert active
Option
Indicates if the assert log should be

exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
Assert address
0-63
The Anybus output address in the

access area where the assert log
should be exported.
Type
Analogue
Description
Input from analogue input port.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number
Number
Word in Anybus interface to which

the value from IN is to be
transferred to.
Node
Node id

Type
Analogue
Description
Input from analogue input port.
Unit
Text
Description
Output Word
8.2.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN
8.2.3.2 Parameters
8.2.4
Output Byte
8.2.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN
8.2.4.2 Parameters
Parameter
Note
55(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.2.5
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
56(92)
Byte number
Number
Byte in Anybus interface to which

the value from IN is to be
transferred to.
Node
Node id

Type
Digital
Description
Input from digital input port.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Byte number
Number
Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number
Number
Bit number of the chosen byte in

Anybus interface.
Node
Node id

Type
Analogue
Description
The word number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the OUT value.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Word number
Analogue
The word within the Anybus

interface from which
Output Bit
8.2.5.1 Input ports

Input
IN
8.2.5.2 Parameters
8.2.6
Input Word

Output
OUT
8.2.6.2 Parameters
56(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Node
8.2.7
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
57(92)
Node id

Type
Analogue
Description
The byte number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the OUT value.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Byte number
Number
Node
Node id

Type
Digital
Description
Digital value from Anybus interface.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Byte number
Number
Bit number
Number
Bit number in Anybus interface.
Node
Node id

Input Byte

Output
OUT
8.2.7.2 Parameters
8.2.8
Input Bit

Output
OUT
8.2.8.2 Parameters
57(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.3
8.3.1
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
58(92)
CANopen
Introduction
CANopen is a field bus protocol based on CAN and provides a flexible and powerful open industrial communication
solution.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes the SCS2 master node can control up to 15 CANopen slaves. The SCS2 master
node acts as a CANopen master, this includes network management, SDO services and PDO handling.
The SCS2 master node processes the CANopen slave data i.e reads inputs and controls outputs.
All configuration of the CANopen functionality is made in the CANopen IO configuration view described in section
5.2.4. Note that the components described in the following section is not visible in the component palette.
The following components is used to create CANopen IO and SDO objects.
8.3.2
PDO Read Bit

Output
OUT
Type
Digital
Description
Digital value from CANopen slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
Node id of CANopen slave
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Byte Number
Number
Byte in PDO
Bit number
Number
Bit in byte
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value from CANopen slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Start Byte in PDO
Number
Start Byte in PDO
Start Bit number
Number
Start bit in Byte
8.3.2.2 Parameters
8.3.3
PDO Read

Output
OUT
8.3.3.2 Parameters
58(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Data Length
8.3.4
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
59(92)
Number
Length of data
Type
Digital
Description
Digital value written to CANopen
slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Byte in PDO
Number
Byte in PDO
Bit number
Number
Bit in Byte
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value written to CANopen
slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Start Byte in PDO
Number
Start Byte in PDO
Start Bit number
Number
Start Bit in Byte
Data Length
Number
Length of data
Unit
Number
Description
PDO Write Bit
8.3.4.1 Input ports

Input
Input
8.3.4.2 Parameters
8.3.5
PDO Write
8.3.5.1 Input ports

Input
Input
8.3.5.2 Parameters
8.3.6
SDO Write
8.3.6.1 Parameters
Parameter
Slave node ID
59(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
60(92)
OD index
Number
Index in OD (dec)
OD sub index
Number
Sub index in OD
Value
Number
Value written to OD
Size of data
Option
Unsigned 8: The size of data(value)

is 1 byte
is 2 byte
is 4 byte
Sequence number
Number
60(92)
Specifies in which order all SDO

objects will be sent
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.4
8.4.1
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
61(92)
Guards
Spreader stop
The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them
to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log
8.4.1.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Command to stop spreader.
true = spreader stops
false = spreader stop resumed
8.4.1.2 Parameters
Parameter
Enable logging
Unit
Option
Description

box Enable logging
Code
97
8.4.2
Message
SPREADER_STOP
Description
Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated.
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.
TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System
The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting
two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful
lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output
can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is
designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an
override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS
component generates log messages every time an override has been used.
8.4.2.1 Input ports

Input
Override
Type
Digital
Description
Overrides TTDS result.
true = output (Twin) is always false
false = normal output
61(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Sensor 1
...
Sensor 7
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
Digital
Input from TTDS sensors.
Type
Digital
Description
true = two containers detected
62(92)

Output
OUT
false = one or none detected

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
box Enable logging.
Code
290
291
8.4.3
Message
TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED
TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED
Description
Override request received.
Override request ended.
Analogue guard
The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values
can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9)
unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 155 within the log system. Apart from sending
a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the
parameters of the component.
8.4.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.
Type
Digital
Description
Signal indicating that Analogue input
has gone outside lower or upper limit
longer than the specified time Delay.
Unit
Description

Output
OUT
8.4.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
62(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
63(92)
Note
Text
Descriptive string indicating the

function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Delay
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until warning message is

prompted if Analogue input has gone
out of boundaries.
Lower limit
Number
Lower limit of allowable input range.
Upper limit
Number
Upper limit of allowable input range.
Warning code
Option
Warning code that will identify the

component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging
Option


box Enable logging.
Code
146
155
8.4.4
Message
USERDEFINED_0
...
USERDEFINED_9
Description
User chooses what message to use. The messages
generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read
out of the log.
Digital guard
The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.
8.4.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Descriptive string indicating the
function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Input NO/NC
Option
Normally open or normally closed

behaviour on input.
8.4.4.2 Parameters
63(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
64(92)
Delay
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until warning message is

prompted if digital value is true or
false (depending on input NO / NC
setting).
Warning code
Option
Warning code that will identify the

component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging
Option


box Enable logging.
Code
146
155
8.5
Message
USERDEFINED_0
...
USERDEFINED_9
Description
User chooses what message to use. The messages generated
in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
Gates
This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.
8.5.1
AND
This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
OUT
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
8.5.1.1 Input ports

Input
IN0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from AND
operation.

Output
OUT
64(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
65(92)
8.5.1.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.2
Unit
Number
Description
Number of inputs on component.
NAND
This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
1
1
1
0
8.5.2.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Digital values from other component
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from NAND
operation.
Unit
Number
Description

Output
OUT
8.5.2.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.3
NOR
This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
1
0
0
0
65(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
66(92)
8.5.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from NOR
operation.
Unit
Number
Description

Output
OUT
8.5.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.4
OR
This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
0
1
1
1
8.5.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from OR
operation.

Output
OUT
66(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
67(92)
8.5.4.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.5
Unit
Number
Description
NOT
This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN
OUT
0
1
1
0
8.5.5.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from NOT
operation.

Output
OUT
8.5.6
XOR
This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the
parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
0
1
1
0
8.5.6.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
Type
Digital
Description
IN 1
Digital

67(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
68(92)

Output
OUT
8.5.7
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from XOR
operation.
SR Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).
8.5.7.1 Input ports

Input
Set
Type
Digital
Description
Reset
Digital

Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from SR latch.

Output
OUT
8.5.8
RS Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).
8.5.8.1 Input ports

Input
Set
Type
Digital
Description
Reset
Digital

Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from RS latch.

Output
Result
68(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.5.9
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
69(92)
Logical gate
The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values.
Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.
8.5.9.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
component will set Result to zero.
(i.e. enabled all time).
IN 1
Analogue
Input value 1.
IN 2
Analogue
Input value 2.
Type
Analogue
Description
Result of logical operation.
Unit
Option
Description
Determents type of logical operation
preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The
operations available are AND, OR
and XOR.

Output
Result
8.5.9.3 Parameters
Parameter
Operation mode
8.6
8.6.1
Digital
OD Timer On Delay Timer
The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.
8.6.1.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
or digital input port. Starts the timer
on positive flank.
Type
Description

Output
69(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
OUT
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
70(92)
Digital
Digital output that goes high if the

input is high and the specified time
has elapsed.
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time that the in put signal is to be
delayed before the output goes high
8.6.1.3 Parameters
Parameter
Delay
8.6.2
UpDn Counter Up Down Counter
The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN
input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero.
The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).
8.6.2.1 Input ports

Input
Up
Type
Digital
Description
Increments the counter value
Down
Digital
Decrements the counter value
Reset
Digital
Sets the counter value to zero
Output
OUT
Type
Digital
Description
OUT = 1 (high) when the counter
value is equal to or above the
specified value in the parameter
listing
Counter value
Analogue
The current value of the counter
Unit
Digital
Description
The counter value when the digital
output goes high. The output is on
when the counter value is equal to or
above this value.
8.6.2.3 Parameters
Parameter
Trigger count
8.6.3
OSC - Oscillator
The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.
8.6.3.1 Input ports
70(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Input
Enable
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
71(92)
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Clock pulse output.
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Cycle time for Clock output.

Output
OUT
8.6.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
Cycle time
8.6.4
Split
The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in
many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the
same.
8.6.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Outputs have same status as the IN
input port
Unit
Number
Description
Number of outputs on component.

Output
OUT 0
OUT n
8.6.4.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of outputs
8.6.5
Pulse
The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged
on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse.
An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.
71(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
72(92)
8.6.5.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Input
Digital
Trigger for starting pulse.
Output
Time remaining
Type
Analogue
Description
Time remaining (ms) until pulse is
unlit.
Output
Digital
Pulse output.
Parameter
Active flank
Unit
Option
Description
Determines active flank of trigger,
POS or NEG.
Length of pulse
Milliseconds
[ms]
Duration of pulse.
8.6.5.3 Parameters
8.7
8.7.1
Miscellaneous
Constant
The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note
that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

Output
Digital
Type
Digital
Description
Constant value > 0 : Digital output
= true
Constant value = 0 : Digital output
= false
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue output = Constant value
Unit
Description
8.7.1.2 Parameters
Parameter
72(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Value
8.7.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Number
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
73(92)
Value to put on output ports.
Dead end
The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be
used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that
signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one
doesnt want the logic to control the outputs.
8.7.3
Output
Digital IN
Type
Digital
Description
Terminates a digital connection.
Analogue IN
Analogue
Terminates an analogue connection.
Input
Twin boxes are down
Type
Digital
Description
Input port telling that twin boxes are
down.
Landed
Digital
Input port telling that spreader has

landed.
Locked
Digital
Input port telling that all Twist locks

are locked.
Unlocked
Digital
Input port telling that all Twist locks

is unlocked.
Pump 1 on
Digital
Used for activating the clock for

drive time 1. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 1
counts.
Pump 2 on
Digital

counts.
Pump 3 on
Digital

counts.
Type
Description
Spreader properties
8.7.3.1 Input ports

Output
73(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
74(92)
Number of lock operations on twin
Analogue
Number of lock operations

performed on twin Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of lock operations on single
Analogue
Number of lock operations

performed on single Twist locks.
Number of containers
Analogue
Number of containers handled. When

twin is down this number is
incremented by two. Saved in
external EEPROM.
Spreader serial number
Analogue
Spreader unique number. User

defined. Read from external
EEPROM.
Drawing number
Analogue
Spreader unique number. User

defined. Read from parameter
Drawing number.
Counter clock pulse
Digital
Clock pulse that toggles from false to

true when container is handled.
When a new sequence is ended
output goes back to false.
Drive time 1 HI Word
Analogue
Accumulated drive time since

delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Drive time 1 LO Word
Analogue

where this output is the low word.
Analogue

Analogue

74(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
75(92)
Analogue

Analogue

Parameter
Enable logging
Unit
Option
Description
Drawing number
Number
User defined number. Number is

used to present the drawing number
of the spreader.
8.7.3.3 Parameters

box Enable logging.
Code
318
319
320
321
322
323
8.7.4
Message
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E
EPROM
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D
S
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP
ROM_OK
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP
ROM_FAIL
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N
ODE_TO_EEPROM
Description
Last saved properties are read from
EEPROM.
System has read properties from NVRAM.
Spreader properties read from EEPROM
and NVRAM differ.
System succeeded to write properties to
EEPROM.
System failed to write properties to
EEPROM.
System detected that a new node is
connected since last shut down.
Memory
The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.
8.7.4.1 Input ports

Input
Type
75(92)
Description
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
76(92)
Enable
Digital

component will set the Analogue
OUT to zero. Default value if not
connected is true (i.e. no effect).
Write
Digital
If set true, component reads

Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.
Read
Digital
If set true, component reads from

NVRAM and writes to Analogue
OUT.
Analogue IN
Analogue
Analoge value that is to be stored.
Type
Analogue
Description
Value stored in NVRAM.

Output
Analogue OUT
8.7.5
Digital buffer
The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
8.7.5.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Digital IN
Digital
Digital value that is to be buffered.
Type
Digital
Description
Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
next cycle and so on.
Unit
Number
Description
Number of cycles to remember.

Output
OUT 0
..
OUT n
8.7.5.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of samples to hold
8.7.6
Analogue buffer
The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
76(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
77(92)
8.7.6.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
zero. Default value if not connected
Analogue IN
Analogue
Analogue value that is to be buffered.
Type
Analogue
Description
Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
next cycle and so on.
Unit
Number
Description
Number of cycles to remember.

Output
OUT 0
..
OUT n
8.7.6.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of samples to hold
77(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
78(92)
Analogue
The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.
8.8.1
RS485 port
This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view
the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

Output
OUT
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value of output from
sensor
Parameter
Protocol
Unit
Option
Description
Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor
specific protocol). Only SLIN is
implemented SSI is implemeted.
Node
Option
Node the RS485 sensor is connected

to.
Code Type
Option
Applys only if SSI protocol is

selected
Input resolution
Number
Applys only if SSI protocol is

selected. Specifies the resolution of
the component.
Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Input
IN 1
Analogue
Input
Type
Digital
Description
IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1
IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0
8.8.1.2 Parameters
8.8.2
IN0 > IN1
8.8.2.1 Input ports

Output
OUT
78(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
79(92)
IN0 * IN1
8.8.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Input
IN 1
Analogue
Input
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 * IN 1
Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Nominator input
IN 1
Analogue
Denominator input
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 / IN 1
Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Input
IN 1
Analogue
Input
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 IN 1

Output
OUT
8.8.4
IN0 / IN1
Note. Always avoid division by zero.
8.8.4.1 Input ports

Output
OUT
8.8.5
IN0 IN1
8.8.5.1 Input ports

Output
OUT
79(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8.6
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
80(92)
IN0 + IN1
8.8.6.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Analogue
Description
Inputs to be added together
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, ,+ IN n
Unit
Number
Description
Number of input ports on component.

Output
OUT
8.8.6.3 Parameters
Parameter
Input counter
8.8.7
Scale
The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula,

OUT = ((scaledMax scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin,
which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.
8.8.7.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.
Type
Analogue
Description
Scaled analogue value with
constraints from parameter listing.
Parameter
Max value after scale
Unit
Number
Description
Largest scaled value.
Min value after scale
Number
Smallest scaled value.

Output
OUT
8.8.7.3 Parameters
80(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8.8
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
Max value of input
Number
The maximum value of input.
Min value of input
Number
The minimum value of input.
81(92)
AnalogueLatch
The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an
internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is
directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the
current value until a new digital command is given.
8.8.8.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
IN
Digital
Input that trigger the component to

read the value IN Value.
IN Value
Analogue
Input value that is read and stored in

the component
Type
Analogue
Description
The stored value of the component

Output
OUT
8.8.9
Filter
The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.
8.8.9.1 Input ports

Input
Analogue IN
Type
Analogue
Description
Unfiltered signal.
Type
Analogue
Description
Filtered signal.

Output
Analogue OUT
81(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
82(92)
8.8.9.3 Parameters
Parameter
Filter type
Unit
Option
Description
Determines type of filter. Only
MOVING AVR is implemented.
Filter weight
Number [%]
Determents how many percents of

previous filtered signal that is to be
used.
Output
Port 5
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value
Port 4
Analogue
Analogue value
Unit
Option
Description
Specifies the node.
8.8.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.
8.8.10.2 Parameters
Parameter
Node
82(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
83(92)
9 Tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE.
Steps covered in this tutorial.
Creating a new project
System view
Pin configuration
Component view
Load view
Step 1: Creating a new project
Start ABE from your Start menu if it isnt already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for
you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.
Figure 9:1 Create project

Step 2: System view
Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.
Figure 9:2 Activating nodes
Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.
Figure 9:3 Setting system parameters
83(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
84(92)
Step 3: Pin configuration

All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the
following names. Comment field is optional.
Figure 9:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1

Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4.
Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.
Figure 9:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2

Step 4: Component view
Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.
Figure 9:6 Choosing component

If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.
84(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
85(92)
Figure 9:7 Bringing up Available components
Place the component on Page 1 in the view.
Figure 9:8 Default look of FAC component

Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that
they are optional to connect.
Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.
Figure 9:9 Changing properties for FAC component
85(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
86(92)
The new appearance for the component should look like this:
Figure 9:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers
By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about
the properties for the component or its connection.
Figure 9:11 Look of component hint
Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as
shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.
Figure 9:12 Making component connections
86(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
87(92)
Your component should now look like this:
Figure 9:13 Appearance of a connection

Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected.
If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect
when it appears.
When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item
identifiers in the Pin configuration view.
Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.
Figure 9:14 Appearance of a connection
Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu.
If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item
identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isnt you must delete it.
Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name tutorial.spr.
Figure 9:15 The Spreader program contains errors
When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must
not edit this file.
87(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
88(92)
Step 5: Load view

Downloading spreader programs
1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
In the picture below COM1 is selected.
Figure 9:16 Select Connection

2.
3.
4.
Press the Download button.

Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr).
Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the
master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected
node) and than distributed to the master node.
Uploading spreader programs

1.

2. Press the Upload button.
The two following dialogues will appear in sequence.
Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.
Figure 9:18 Save current spreader program

Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to
manually open the uploaded spreader program.)
Figure 9:19 Open spreader program in ABE

3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node.
When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.
88(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
89(92)
Step 6: Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
1.
Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).
2.

3.
Make sure Auto is not checked.
Figure 9:21 Deselect Auto option

If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval.
4.
Start online monitoring
Figure 9:22 Start online monitoring

The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of
your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the
monitoring again.
5.
Update online values by pressing the Update button.
Figure 9:23 Updated online values
89(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
6.
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
90(92)
Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.
Figure 9:24 Stop online monitoring
10 CANopen tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of configuring a Spreader program containing CANopen functionality.
The tutorial covers the following steps:
Add a CANopen slave
Add an input
Connecting input to Spreader logic
Step 1: Add a CANopen slave
In the Component view activate the CANopen configuration view by clicking CANopen IO button.
In this view click the Add slave button.
Figure 1. Add slave button

When this button is clicked the following view appears.
Here you can configure:
Type of slave (predefined connection set or not).
The name of the slave
Slave options (CRITICAL or NON CRITICAL).
Adress of slave 1-126
Click OK button when done
Figure 2. Slave properties
90(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
91(92)
Step 2: Add a CANopen input

Make sure that the I/O leaf in the tree view is selected as in the picture below.
Click on the Add input button.
Figure 2. Add input

The following view appears.
Figure 3. Input properties

In this view the properties of this input is set.
Name of the input (in this example IN_1)
PDO number
Byte number
Bit number
Data length
Click OK button when done
The CANopen I/O configuration view now looks like the picture below.
Figure 4. CANopen I/O cunfiguration view after input is added
91(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
92(92)
Step 3: Connecting CANopen input to Spreader logic

When no more configuration is to be done click the OK button to return to the Pin configuration view
Add a component to page and right click on the input to bring up the pop up window
Select the CANopen menu and the slave on where the input is configured and click on your left mouse button.
Figure 5. Making component connections

Your component should now look like this:
92(92)
2000
User Manual
BMS - Light
Version 1.0
Revision
Issued by
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB

2000-08-22
2000-10-13
2000-10-23
PA4
2001-01-10
PA5
A
B
C
Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB

Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB
Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB
Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB
2001-10-29
2002-06-12
2003-06-11
2004-08-10
PA1
PA2
PA3
Date
Printed: 04-8-12 9.15
Measures
First draft.
Added modem functions.
Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed
on cells in string grids.
Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus
functions added.
New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader.
Minor changes after release of System 1.04.
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
2(20)
Table of contents
1
2
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Installing BMS Light .................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.1
HW requirements................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.3
Disclaimer.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
3 User interface................................................................................................................................................................. 4
3.1
Menu (top toolbar) options: ................................................................................................................................... 4
3.2
Status bars in main window................................................................................................................................... 5
4 Download view.............................................................................................................................................................. 6
5 Get log view .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
5.1
Filtering constraints ............................................................................................................................................... 8
6 I/O status view............................................................................................................................................................... 9
7 Misc. view ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Anybus view........................................................................................................................................................................ 11
8 Spreader info view....................................................................................................................................................... 12
9 CANopen IO view ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
10
Upload view............................................................................................................................................................. 14
11
Advanced................................................................................................................................................................. 15
11.1 CAN Tester.......................................................................................................................................................... 15
11.2 Boot Loader ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
11.3 Asserts ................................................................................................................................................................. 18
11.4 POM Loader ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
11.5 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
11.6 CANopen services ............................................................................................................................................... 20
2(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
3(20)
Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user
has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.
Installing BMS Light

HW requirements
An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.

At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
At least 1Mb of free disk space.
Installation
Close any other applications running under Windows.

Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc)
Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
3(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
4(20)
User interface
Menu (top toolbar) options:
File:
Exit --- Terminates the application.
View:
Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload]
Tools:
Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears.
The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.
Modem connection
Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232
link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node.
Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel.
Help:
About: shows the version of the BMS.
4(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
5(20)
Status bars in main window

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel.

Status of current operation.
Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2).
Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations.
Status of serial cable connection.
2
3
1
Main window
5(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
6(20)
Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to
update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node.
Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes
on the bus.
Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded.
Connected node (to PC).
Receiving node when distributing between nodes.
Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts.
Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution
between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).
3
6
4
Download view
6(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
7(20)
Get log view

This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its pressed)
Get all messages in log.
If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4].
Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds.
Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log.
Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here.
Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected.
Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc.
Cancels current operation.
Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.
6
4
9
7
10
Get log view
7(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
8(20)
Filtering constraints
Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view.
Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table.
Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not
appear in the filtered table.
1.
2.
3.
Message categories
Nodes that have reported messages.
Message codes for entire table
Filtering constraints
8(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
9(20)
I/O status view

This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select node to view.

Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press
Write [4]
Current value/current overridden value of I/O.
Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if
values are to be forced on more than one node.
Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown).
Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6].
Update interval for Auto read [6].
Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:

Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be
checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.
4
5
I/O status view
9(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
10(20)
Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed.
Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields.
Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields.
Get address key information from the node [5].
Destination of question.
Serial cable connection.
Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program
version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Dont care about the COM
versions.
Reboots the system.
Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the
same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer:
Key: 5
E-Stop: YES
Redundancy: YES
Module name: B1
8
2
3
7
6
10(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
11(20)
Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the
value of that byte in binary format.
Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field
the value of that byte in binary format.
Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface.
Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
Select node where to Read [3] data from.
1
6
7
3
Anybus view
11(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
12(20)
Spreader info view

This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders.
Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited.
Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1].
Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1].
Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value.
Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC.
Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM.
1
2
5
7
4
3
Spreader info view
12(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
13(20)
CANopen IO view
The CANopen view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the CANopen interface.
From this view its also possible to select individual or groups of I/O and override it/them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Retrieves the CANopen I/Oconfiguration from the system

Updates the I/O status
Updates system with overridden I/O
Dropdown box for selection of which node to show I/O from
Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally
press SetIO [3]
6. Current value/current overridden value of I/O
7. I/O port identifier
8. Cancels current operation
9. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [2] with interval determined by the value of: [10]
10. Update interval for Auto [9]
Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:

Uncheck the corresponding I/O [5] and press SetIO [3]. All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.
4
1
2
3
7
6
10
CANopen IO view
13(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
14(20)
Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.
Upload view
14(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
15(20)
Advanced
These six sub views are mainly intended for Brommas R&D personnel only.
CAN Tester
This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as
Test. See the SCS2 manual for information.
The main functionality is as follows:
Every node connected to the CAN network is tested.
Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate.
When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time.
The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list.
1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested.

2. Sets the duration time of each test.
3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results.
4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file.
5. Starts the test.
6. Sows status of the CAN test.
7. Closes dialog.
8. Result field showing which node that is tested.
9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used.
10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test.
11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test.
12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test.
13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test.
14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test.
15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test.
16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.
15(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Date:
hans
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
16(20)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3
4
7
5
CAN Tester view
16(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
17(20)
Boot Loader
The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19).

Downloads the selected file.
Progress bar showing percentage completed.
Cancels the download.
Closes dialog.
3
1
Boot Loader view
17(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
18(20)
Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system
events.
Asserts view
18(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
19(20)
POM Loader
The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .
POM Loader view
Bluetooth
From this dialog its possible to configure and manage Bluetooth settings.
Note that the configuration possibilities only works with Bromma Conquips own Serial port adapter.
Bluetooth configurator view
19(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
20(20)
CANopen services
From this view its possible to perform read and write actions to CANopen slave nodes OD (Object Dictionary).
The read and write actions uses the SDO (Service Data Objects) concept of CANopen. For a more detailed description of
CANopen and its functionality its referred to more specific documentation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Page containing the read functionality

Page containing the write functionality
Selection of CANopen node to read/write from/to. The SCS2 master node has address 127.
Index in OD. (Dec.)
Sub index in OD (Dec.)
Read value/ value that is to be written
Reads/writes value
Cancels current command
Closes the dialog
Status of current command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
CANopen services view
20(20)
2000
Spreader Control System

2:nd generation
SCS
Rev 1.0
2004-12-08
Document:
Project:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
2(55)
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................................................3
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................3
DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS ..........................................................................................................................3
DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................3
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................4
THE NODES ..............................................................................................................................................................5
SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1
3.2
3.3
Date:
Andy Lewis
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................4
2.1
2.2
Prepared by:
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Project No
SCS2
Manual
BOOT PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................6

SYSTEM PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................6
SPREADER PROGRAM ...............................................................................................................................................6
HARDWARE OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................7
4.1 I/O LEDS ................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2 DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2.1
Event categories.............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.2
Message format..............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.3
Priority of displayed messages ......................................................................................................................9
4.3 GROUND CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................9
4.4 THE X1 AND X3 CONNECTORS .................................................................................................................................9
4.4.1
X1 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................10
4.4.2
X3 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................11
4.5 THE X2 CONNECTOR ..............................................................................................................................................13
4.5.1
Main Supply .................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.2
CAN .............................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.3
Address Key .................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.4
Analogue Inputs ...........................................................................................................................................15
4.5.5
PWM Outputs...............................................................................................................................................15
4.5.6
External Spreader Memory..........................................................................................................................15
4.5.7
RS 485 and SSI.............................................................................................................................................16
4.5.8
Additional Jumper Group ............................................................................................................................16
4.6 THE X4 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................17
4.6.1
AnyBus .........................................................................................................................................................18
4.6.2
Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs ....................................................................................................................18
4.7 THE X5 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................19
4.7.1
RS-232..........................................................................................................................................................19
4.8 THE REDUNDANCY FUNCTION ...............................................................................................................................19
4.9 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................................................................20
4.9.1
Mapping of I/O ............................................................................................................................................20
4.10
SPREADER STOP ................................................................................................................................................21
4.11
FAULT FINDING TABLE ......................................................................................................................................22
SOFTWARE TOOLS................................................................................................................................................23
5.1
5.2
5.3
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................23
ABE.......................................................................................................................................................................23
BMS ......................................................................................................................................................................23
MISCELLANEOUS ..................................................................................................................................................24
Manual
File: SCS_1
2
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
2004 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
6.1
6.2
7
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
3(55)
DATA SHEET ...........................................................................................................................................................24

DIMENSIONS...........................................................................................................................................................25
APPENDIX A (ERROR MESSAGES) ....................................................................................................................26
General
1.1
Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.
1.2
References
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/
1.3
Dictionary and abbreviations
ABE
BMS
Boot program
CAN
PWM
Spreader Program
SCS2
System Program
SSI
1.4
Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details.
Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
Synchronous Serial Interface sensor interface
Document layout
Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.

Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.
Manual
File: SCS_1
3
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
4(55)
Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.
SCS2 includes the following features:
A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel.
Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable no screening, no twisted pair.
A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net.)
Optional duty cycle input
2.1
General
As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node1
A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.
Crane-Spreader Communications Link
A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane

control system and the spreader.
Spreader Node
A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.
Sensors and Switches
Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
1
For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual
Manual
File: SCS_1
4
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
5(55)
number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.
Crane
I/O
...
Slave A1
Slave A4
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
I/O
B2 Slave
...
SCS
B8 Slave
Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.
2.2
The Nodes
The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also
have distributed functions such as regulators.
Manual
File: SCS_1
5
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
6(55)
Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.
3.1
Boot Program
When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for
Initialising hardware
Checking that all the system Programs match.
Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
Performing a program downloads.
3.2
System program
After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC via the com-port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Handling in the event log
Reading and writing I/O
3.3
Spreader Program
The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.
Manual
File: SCS_1
6
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
7(55)
Hardware Overview
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.
X1- I/O
Connector
4.1
X2- I/O, bus

& supply
Connector
X3- I/O
Connector
I/O LED
1-48
Bus/AI
(X4)
RS232
(X5)
Display &
Power
LEDS
I/O LEDs
The I/O LEDs indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V)
of the module.
4.2
Display
The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1
second. The pages show the following:
Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>.
Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours
and MM the number of minutes.
Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain
text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section.
There are also four red LEDs in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different
levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LEDs are lit.
LED1 11V, FAIL
LED2 14V, WARNING 2
LED3 17V, WARNING
LED4 21V, OK
It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may
malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the power on indicator.
Manual
File: SCS_1
7
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
8(55)
4.2.1
Event categories
There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error.
Type
Error
Prefix
E
Example
E102
Note
Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are
turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with
an E.
Warning
W60
Warning shows information about the system status that is of high

importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will
begin with a W.
Information
I59
Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information

that could qualify to be displayed as information:
Program load status (how many percent are completed), version
verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will
begin with an I.
Information
4.2.2
Message format
The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format:
LTTTSSSS
L = Level type
TTT = Message type
SSSS = Sub type
Example:
E102 => Error in initialising the hardware
W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1.
I59 => Information that the system has started.
Level type
The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error
Message type
The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system
version and I/O error.
All these types are described in appendix A.
Sub type
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings
for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14
instead of just I/O error.
These sub types are described in appendix A.
Manual
File: SCS_1
8
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
9(55)
4.2.3
Priority of displayed messages
Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show
information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for errorinformation and error-warning.
Priority in descending order:
Error
Warning
Information
Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the
warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.
4.3
Ground connection
The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the
node for this purpose.
4.4
The X1 and X3 connectors
There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44
are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a Common junction. See the connector part for more
detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.
Manual
File: SCS_1
9
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
4.4.1
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
10(55)
X1 I/O connector

Description
Name
I/O-1
General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0
I/O-2
I/O-3
I/O-4
Common/Supply 1 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4
X1 pin number
31
41
43
42
44
I/O-5
I/O-6
I/O-7
I/O-8
Common/Supply 2
General purpose input or output / Locked_0

3
2
11
1
21
I/O-9
I/O-10
I/O-11
I/O-12
Common/Supply 3

26
16
6
7
8
I/O-13
I/O-14
I/O-15
I/O-16
Common/Supply 4

4
5
25
15
35
I/O-17
I/O-18
I/O-19
I/O-20
Common/Supply 5
General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0

General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1
General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0
General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1
10
20
30
40
9
I/O-212
I/O-22
I/O-23
I/O-24
Common/Supply 6
General purpose input or output / Lock_left

General purpose input or output / Lock_right
General purpose input or output / Unlock_left
General purpose input or output / Unlock_right
46
47
49
48
50
Redundancy remark.
I/O signals 21 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8
Manual
File: SCS_1
10
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
11(55)
To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.
X1 - Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
24
32
33
34
45
4.4.2
Link configuration X1 - Pin number

17
18
19
27
28
29
37
39
38
36
Link configuration
X3 I/O connector

Name
I/O-25
I/O-26
I/O-27
I/O-28
Common/Supply 7
Description
X3 pin number
21
31
41
42
11
I/O-29
I/O-30
I/O-31
I/O-32
Common/Supply 8

24
35
44
45
43
I/O-33
I/O-34
I/O-35
I/O-36
Common/Supply 9

5
4
3
2
1
I/O-37
I/O-38
I/O-39
I/O-40

6
16
25
26
Manual
File: SCS_1
11
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
Name
Description
Common/Supply 10 Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40
X3 pin number
15
I/O-41
I/O-42
I/O-43
I/O-44
Common/Supply 11
49
48
47
46
36

I/O-45
7
8
I/O-46
9
10
I/O-47
50
40
I/O-48
30
20
12(55)
X3 - Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
32
33
34
Manual
File: SCS_1
Link configuration X3 - Pin number

17
18
19
27
28
29
37
38
39
12
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Link configuration
Document:
Project:
4.5
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
13(55)
The X2 connector
The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.
4.5.1
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single
pins. DC voltage can be applied either way.
Name
24INA
24INA
24INB
24INB
Pin number in connector

X2/42
X2/43
X2/45
X2/44
4.5.2
CAN
The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second
net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors.
Name
CAN High 1
CAN Low 1
CAN High 2 / Reserved3
CAN Low 2 / Reserved3
CAN GND 2/ Reserved3

X2/30
X2/40
X2/50
X2/20
X2/48
CAN channel is std CAN for CAN-Open installations
Manual
File: SCS_1
13
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
14(55)
4.5.3
Address Key
All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 ID4 where pins being connected to the ground
pin corresponds to zeroes and pins left unconnected are considered ones.
Name
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
Ground

X2/49
X2/39
X2/29
X2/19
X2/9
X2/10
Configuration
Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different
roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling
Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8.
The address key setting is described in the following table:
Key input
Node
name
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
1001111110
11111
Test
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not
Used
Test
Spreader
stop
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in

override of landing
X2 connector
pins
10,9,19,29,39,49
No
10,19,29,39,49
No
10,9,29,39,49
No
10,29,39,49
No
10,9,19,39,49
Yes
10,19,39,49
No
10,9,39,49
Yes
10,39,49
No
10,9,19,29,49
Yes
10,19,29,49
No
10,9,29,49
Yes
10,29,49
No
10,9,19,49
No
10,19,49
No
10,9,49
No
10,49
No
10,9,19,29,39
No
10,19,29,39
No
10,9,29,39
Node number identifier

when viewing Display and
Log
8
9
10
11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
None
Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key:
A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000.
A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001.
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.
Manual
File: SCS_1
14
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
15(55)
4.5.4
Analogue Inputs
There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal
has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor
device.
Name
Analogue in 1
10Vref 1
Signal ground 1

X2/18
X2/28
X2/8
Analogue in 2
10Vref 2
Signal ground 2
X2/17
X2/27
X2/7
4.5.5
PWM Outputs
There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two
connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop.
Name
PWM out 1
PWM in 1

X2/3
X2/4
PWM out 2
PWM in 2
X2/2
X2/1
PWM out 3
PWM in 3
X2/21
X2/11
PWM out 4
PWM in 4
X2/31
X2/41
4.5.6
External Spreader Memory
An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory
is connected as below.
Name
10V supply
Serial data
Serial clock
Signal ground
Manual
File: SCS_1

X2/36
X2/16
X2/26
X2/6
Cable
Red
Blue
Green
Black
15
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
16(55)
4.5.7
RS 485 and SSI
The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with
external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485
and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time.
When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used:
Name
Channel A
X2/38
Channel B
X2/37
When used as SSI the following pins are used:
Name
Clock+
X2/38
ClockX2/37
Data+
X2/15
DataX2/25
4.5.8
Additional Jumper Group
X2 - Pin number
22
23
32
33
34
Manual
File: SCS_1
Link configuration
16
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
4.6
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
17(55)
The X4 Connector
The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS
232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin
headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the
relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a
circle to the left is number one in that header.
Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS
232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by
connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.
Front view of connectors inside node.
Manual
File: SCS_1
17
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
18(55)
4.6.1
AnyBus
The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN.
Name
A-Line
B-Line
GND-BUS

X4/2
X4/1
X4/3
4.6.2
Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs
These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2.
The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin
number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on
CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used
internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20
mA range.
Name
GND
GND
Analogue Input 1
Analogue Reference 10 V
Analogue Input 2
Manual
File: SCS_1

X5/1
X5/2
X5/5
X5/3
X5/4
18
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
4.7
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
19(55)
The X5 Connector
4.7.1
RS-232
The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose.
Name
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
GND

X5/1
X5/2
X5/5
X5/3
X5/4
4.8
The Redundancy Function
For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the
operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.
A
E
The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself.
The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program).
The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised
correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation.
At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in
what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only
preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the
redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock
outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on
that particular node.
The outputs to the lock/unlock valves
The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked.
To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as
Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode
and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.
Manual
File: SCS_1
19
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
4.9
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
20(55)
Field bus Connections.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
4.9.1
Mapping of I/O
OUT
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs
IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
Byte 6-7 (WORD)
Manual
File: SCS_1

=> Diagnostic code
20
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
21(55)

way.
Byte 8
=> Node ID
Byte 9-10
Byte 11-16
Byte 17-18
=> sequential counter
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
4.10 Spreader Stop

A Spreader stop function can be used in the system.
This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the
spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2).
The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if
and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in
the spreader program.
Manual
File: SCS_1
21
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
22(55)
4.11 Fault Finding table

Symptom
What to do
Comment
Power Supply
Node wont start. No text appears in
the display after power-on.
Measure the main supply. The voltage

should exceed 17V AC or DC.
The green and all red LEDs in the

display should be lit.
Probe TxD and RxD lines with

oscilloscope while trying to
communicate.
Data lines should show square waves

between 10V to +10V relative to
GND pin.
RS-232
BMS system can not communicate
with the node.
CAN
The node can not communicate with
the other nodes.
Digital Ports
Input signal fault
Output signal fault
Node ID
The node stops at start-up with Node
Id displayed.
Analogue Inports
Analogue input signal appears to be
faulty.
PWM Outports
PWM output appears to be faulty.
Manual
File: SCS_1
Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.

CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.
Check if LED indicator on I/O module

responds to sensor signal.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
Check if LED indicator on I/O module
responds to command.
Check the load for proper connection
and grounding.
Check for broken fuse on the I/O
module.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
The LED should be lit when current

flows through the module.
Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V

represent ones and 0V represents
zeroes. The measures should indicate
the expected id.
This can indicate that the node has

wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.
Check the reference voltage relative to

the GND.
Check if the node chassis is properly
grounded to the spreader.
There should be exactly 10V

difference between them.
This is very important in an AC driven
system.
The LED should be lit when the circuit

is closed.
The load should be connected between
the modules out pin and ground.
The supply voltage depends on the

type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.
Check the load for errors.

Try another load.
22
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
23(55)
Software tools
5.1
Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.
5.2
ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.
5.3
BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.
Manual
File: SCS_1
23
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
24(55)
Miscellaneous
6.1
Data sheet
Parameter
Note
Min
Max
Unit
Operating voltage
Current consumption
Power monitoring
Pin X2 42-44
Depending on number and type of I/O modules
Level and quality measurement of voltage.
Indicated via LEDs. (faults stored in log)
Operating temperature
Internal temperature monitoring
IP67
In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
17
300
40
800
V AC/DC
mA
-40
+85
0
0
2,5
10
A
V
12
300
230
kHz
V AC/DC
Temperature
EMC conformity
Controller
Memory
Time
PWM current output
Analogue inputs
SSI
I/O 48 programmable
Scan time
Serial interfaces
Diagnostics
FB programming
Manual
File: SCS_1
EN 50081-2: 1993
EN 50082-2: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996
EN 61000-4-8:1993
ENV 50204: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995
32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz

Program 1.4Mb
Log/NVRAM 128kb
External EEPROM 256byte
1*realtime clock
4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected.
12 bit resolution voltage/current
10V reference voltage output
serial
Voltage depending on type of module used.
Galvanic isolation. LED indication.
SC/OL protected 3A.
System scan time
Node scan time
BCAN Bromma CAN based bus
RS485 Asynchronous for sensors etc.
RS232 For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
8 character display for messages & information
Power level via LEDs
Event and error log
Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
24
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
50
5
ms
ms
Document:
Project:
6.2
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
25(55)
Dimensions
Figure 1 All dimensions in mm
Manual
File: SCS_1
25
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
26(55)
Appendix A (Error messages)
The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.
Nu level
m.l
cod
e
0
1
2
Description of code
Description of sub code Consequence
WARNING Failed reading temperature

spare 0
Hints
.
.
spare 1
spare 2
spare 3
Two different PCs' trying to

download to the system
Id of one of the node

connected to the PC
spare 4
spare 5
spare 6
10
spare 7
11
spare 8
12 ERROR
Program memory failure, HW

fault
System is brought into failsafe mode.
13 ERROR
No response from slave when

initialising system
System is brought into

failsafe mode.
14 ERROR
Boot sequence failed

failsafe mode.
15
spare 9
16
spare 10
17
spare 11
18
spare 12
19
spare 13
20 ERROR
Downloading error, connection .

broken
21
spare 14
22 ERROR
Memory collides when

downloading program
23
spare 15
ERROR
Manual
File: SCS_1
26
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

failsafe mode.
Ensure that only

one PC is
downloading
Ensure that all

slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
Restart system

failsafe mode.
reload program

failsafe mode.
recompile and
download
program again
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
27(55)
24
spare 16
25
spare 17
26
spare 18
27
spare 19
28 WARNING No data in program/system

memory
29
spare 20
30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt
31 ERROR
HW fault on memory
32
spare 21
33
spare 22
34 ERROR
System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.
35 ERROR
System failed in reading

.
spreader program from memory

failsafe mode.
reload and
restart
36 ERROR
No spreader program residing in .

memory

failsafe mode.
download
program
37 ERROR
System failed to run spreader

program

failsafe mode.
reload proram
38 ERROR
Spreader program object

instances failed

failsafe mode.
39 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
40 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
41 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
42 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader.
If problems
persist contact
Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Manual
File: SCS_1
System cannot start
Contact Bromma

failsafe mode.
Contact Bromma
if problem
persists
27
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
43 ERROR
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51

instances failed
44 WARNING I/O message lost

45 ERROR
Memory failure
.
.
46
47
spare 23
spare 24
.
.
48
spare 25
49
spare 26
50 ERROR
Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has

generated the error
The node ID which has
Duplicate answers on I/O
generated the error
configuration from the same
node when initialising system
51 ERROR
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Version:
Page:
11
28(55)

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

failsafe mode.
Restart system.
If problems
persist contact
Bromma

failsafe mode.
failsafe mode.
restart
restart
52 ERROR
System initialising error when

configuring nodes I/O
The node ID which has System is brought into

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
53 ERROR


generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
54
spare 27
55 ERROR


generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
56 ERROR
No answer when master

.
requesting configuration
information during intitialisation

failsafe mode.
57 ERROR

.

failsafe mode.
58 ERROR

.

failsafe mode.
59 INFO
System started
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor

.
inputs active during system start
Manual
File: SCS_1
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
28
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Message stored in log and check wiring,

displayed on Spreader
sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
29(55)
61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked
which generated the
damaged sensors
warning
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received
which generated the
valves and/or
after output to valve
warning
wiring or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost
which generated the
during operation. Sensor lost
damaged sensors
without command/output when warning
and sensor
twistlocks are all locked
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking.
which generated the
Unlocked signal has not been
valves and/or
warning
received after output to valve
wiring or
mechanical
reasons
65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost
which generated the
during operation. Sensor lost
damaged sensors
without command/output when warning
and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not
which generated the
received after first landed and
damaged sensors
warning
timeout.
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not
released when the other sensors which generated the
damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning
and sensor
out
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No .
Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within
displays/stores message damaged sensors
and sensor
timeout limit after output has
been activated
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type.
ID no. of the sensor
Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping
missing which
displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached
and sensor
generated the warning
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
Manual
File: SCS_1
29
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost

position sensor is lost without an sensor
output.
Version:
Page:
11
30(55)
Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader
71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors
damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR
Duplicate answers from one
restart (check
node during boot verification
generated the error
failsafe mode.
address keying)
73 ERROR
Wrong boot version in a node

generated the error
failsafe mode.
contact Bromma
74 ERROR

requesting boot version.

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
75
76
77
78
spare 28
spare 29
spare 30
spare 31
79
spare 32
80 ERROR
Wrong node answered request

from master to check if pc was
connected
No answer after master request
to check PC port (RS232)

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart, check
connections
82 ERROR
Unable to download program

failsafe mode.
retry
83 ERROR
Unable to download program

(checksum failure)

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time

couldn't be read
85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time

couldn't be set
81 ERROR
86 INFO
87 INFO
88 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
minimum system CPU cycle

time in ms
time. Periodically reported every
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
maximum system CPU cycle
time in ms
time. Periodically reported every
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
average system CPU cycle time. time in ms
Periodically reported every half
hour. The counter is reset after
30
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader

Spreader

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
31(55)
reporting.
89
spare 33
90 INFO
The number of the

counter
91
92
The number of control loops

exceeding 100ms for th last half
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
spare 34
spare 35
93
spare 36
94 ERROR
No operative system in Node
95 ERROR
Duplicate answer on
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error
failsafe mode.
check adress key
96 ERROR
No answer on Master request for .

"Spreader stop" configuration

failsafe mode.
check adress key
97 INFO
Spreader stop has been

activated/deactivated
0= activated
1=deactivated

Spreader
98
spare 37
99
spare 38
100 ERROR
Spreader program fault

failsafe mode.
System shutdown
contact Bromma

failsafe mode.
check
battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma

Spreader
.
.
Systems fails to start
contact Bromma
recompile and
reload spreader
program
The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer
Spreader
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full
102 ERROR
System failed to initialise HW
103
spare 39
104
spare 40
105 ERROR
Onboard NV RAM failed

memory test
106
spare 41
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low
Actual voltage *10
Message stored in log and check supplies

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low
Actual voltage *10

Manual
File: SCS_1
31
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
109 ERROR
Battery voltage too low
110 ERROR
The System failed to lock th I/O .

on a node during system init.
111
spare 42
112
spare 43
113
114 INFO
spare 44
System is shutting down
.
.
115 INFO
116
System shutdown has been

completed
spare 45
117
spare 46
118 INFO
120
Landed override has been

activated
Landed override has been
deactivated
spare 47
121
spare 48
122
spare 49
123
spare 50
124
spare 51
125
spare 52
126
spare 53
127
spare 54
128
spare 55
129 ERROR
Spreader program fault or load

file has been korrupted
130 ERROR
131 ERROR
119 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Actual voltage *10
Version:
Page:
11
32(55)
Message stored in log and check battery

failsafe mode.
restart

failsafe mode.


failsafe mode.


failsafe mode.
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
.
.
32
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
132
spare 56
133
spare 57
134
spare 58
135
spare 59
136 ERROR

137
spare 60
138
spare 61
139
spare 62
Version:
Page:
11

failsafe mode.
33(55)
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message

received
The ID type of the

message

Spreader
141 INFO
CAN messages missed.

Cyclically reported.
The count of the

missed messages

Spreader
142 ERROR
Two nodes within the system

have the same ID/adress
The ID which is
duplicate

failsafe mode.
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too

high
Voltage * 10
check and
correct the
adress key
144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10

145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high

Voltage * 10
146 WARNING User defined Warning. The

.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.
Message stored in log and Check specific

project.

.

project.
Manual
File: SCS_1
33
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
34(55)
.

project.

.

project.

.

project.

.

project.
.

project.
.

project.
.

project.

.

project.
156
spare 63
157
spare 64
158
spare 65
159
spare 66
160
spare 67
161 WARNING CAN error
Manual
File: SCS_1
34
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
35(55)
162 WARNING RS232 error

Spreader
163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor

supply voltage. Warning 1 =
Voltage < 21V

164 ERROR
check supplies
System is taken down
into idle mode. Ie if the
system voltage comes up
again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

.
Power monitor P2 = internal
logic supply voltage. ERROR =
Voltage below permissive
voltage of system.
check supplies
167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM

Voltage < 21V

168 ERROR
check supplies
Power monitor P1 = sensor

supply voltage. ERROR =
voltage of system.
165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal

Voltage < 21V
166 ERROR
Power monitor P3 = PWM

supply voltage. ERROR =
voltage of system.
169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port:

I/O port
Digital=0+port_no,
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.
170
spare 68
171
spare 69
172
spare 70
173
spare 71
Manual
File: SCS_1
35
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
36(55)
174 ERROR
No answer when on general

information request between
nodes.

Spreader
175 INFO
TWL - twistlock lock command .

received

Spreader
176 INFO
TWL - twistlock unlock

command received

Spreader
177 INFO
TWL - twistlock has been

locked

Spreader
178 INFO
TWL - twistlock has been

unlocked

Spreader
179 INFO
TELESCOPE - prox. type.


Spreader
180 INFO


Spreader
181 INFO

Command to go to a speceific
position has been received
The ID of the position

requested

Spreader
182 INFO
TELESCOPE - prox. type. The

desired position has been
reached

requested

Spreader
183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position

The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time
position within time limit
limit.
1 = telescope has not
moved more than 1 cm
during 3 seconds.
The telescopic motion is

stopped until a new
command is given.
Message stored in log and
184 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. .

expand command received

Spreader
185 INFO


Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
36
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
check sensor,
pressure,mechan
ics. If necessary
calibrate system.
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
37(55)
186 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position

Command to go to a specific
requested
position received

Spreader
187 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position

The desired position reached
requested

Spreader
188 INFO
The year has been set
current value (year)

Spreader
189 INFO
The month has been set
current value (month)

Spreader
190 INFO
The day/date has been set
current value (date)

Spreader
191 INFO
The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour)

set

Spreader
192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for

10s
The ID of the node

which doesn't have
contact
Message stored in log and check

connections
193 ERROR
Message reported during boot.

Unknown role
Information request (system
boot functionality)
restart (check
address keying)
Spreader
195 INFO
Download request active

(system boot functionality)

Spreader
196 INFO
Information request received


Spreader
197 INFO
set time request received


Spreader
198 INFO
Boot version request received.


Spreader
199
spare 72
194 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
37
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
38(55)
200 INFO
Download flag request received. .

201
spare 73
202
spare 74
203
spare 75
204
spare 76
205 INFO
Check flash memory request

received. (system boot
functionality)

Spreader
206 INFO
Restart node request received.


Spreader
207 INFO
System start init. (system boot

functionality)

Spreader
208 INFO
System look for downloadflag.


Spreader
209 INFO
Send datablock request. (system .

boot functionality)

Spreader
210 INFO
Received datablock. (system

boot functionality)

Spreader
211 INFO
Download in progress
percentage of
downloaded data
progress shown on Spreader display
212 INFO
copy serial information to flash .

memory
213
spare 77
214
spare 78
215 ERROR
No answer when waiting for

present nodes response
216 INFO
Inforamtion on present nodes

has been received

Spreader
217 ERROR
Download timeout

failsafe mode.
218
spare 79
Manual
File: SCS_1
38
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader

Spreader
reload
Document:
Project:
219 ERROR
220 ERROR
221 ERROR
222 ERROR
223 ERROR
224 ERROR
225 ERROR
226 ERROR
227
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
39(55)
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
The size of received data is to
large. Boot message
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
spare 80
.
during boot
Spreader error and event log has .
been cleared
230 ERROR
Failed to set up spreader

program correctly
destination of error

failsafe mode.
231 ERROR
Spreader program download

error
232 ERROR
Spreader program download

error
233 INFO
Power monitor P1 = sensor

supply voltage. OK
234 INFO
Power monitor P2 = internal

supply voltage. OK
228 ERROR
229 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
39
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
failsafe mode.
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
failsafe mode.
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Spreader
Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
40(55)
235 INFO
Power monitor P3 = PWM

supply voltage. OK

Spreader
236 INFO
Reboot (restart) request sent

.
from master to slaves. Happens
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
System has been taken down to .
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake
up.

Spreader
237 INFO

Spreader
238
Spare 81
239 INFO
System failed to cancel

shutdown process

Spreader
240 INFO
No answer when attempting to

cancel shutdown process

Spreader
241 INFO
System received timeout when

attempting to cancel shutdown
process

Spreader
242 INFO
System shutdown aborted

Spreader
243
spare 82
244 INFO
TWL - The spreader has been

landed

Spreader
245 INFO
TWL - The Spreader has been

totally lifted (not landed)

Spreader
246 INFO
FLIPPER - flipper up command .

received

Spreader
247 INFO
FLIPPER - flipper down

command received

Spreader
AI can start to flicker. Message stored in

log and displayed on Spreader
248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor

Voltage < 17V
Manual
File: SCS_1
40
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
41(55)
249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal

Voltage <17V

250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM

Voltage < 17V

251 ERROR
System failed to initialise fielbus .

interface
252 ERROR
Duplicate answers when setting .

up fieldbus interface
253 ERROR
No answer when configuring

fieldbus interface
254 WARNING System failed in locking

fieldbus interface
255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have

failed to get to their upper
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed .

to reach its' upper position
within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed .

to reach its' upper position
within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left

timed out when expanding to
their attach position. Failed to
reach switch within time limit
check
Twin down sequence
stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
Spreaer to twin up
position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader
259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right

timed out when expanding to
their attach position. Failed to
reach switch within time limit
Twin down sequence

check
stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
Spreaer to twin up
nics/sensors
position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader
260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed .

to reach its' lower position
(connect) within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
Manual
File: SCS_1
41
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
42(55)
261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed .

to reach its' lower position
(connect) within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have

failed to get to their lower
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost

unexpectedly. (not due to
output)
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor

received when twinboxes are
down
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down

sensor lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down

sensor lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor .

lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor .

lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
269 ERROR
System failed to init. RS485
Node ID

failsafe mode.
restart / contact
Bromma
270 ERROR
Duplicate answers in system

when setting up RS485
Node ID

failsafe mode.
restart / contact
Bromma
271 ERROR
System timed out when trying to .

configure RS485

failsafe mode.
restart / contact
Bromma
272 INFO

Teach in command received

Spreader
273 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - expand
command received

Spreader
274 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - retract
command received

Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
42
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
43(55)
275 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - left
console reached zero gap
position

Spreader
276 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - right
console reached zero gap
position

Spreader
277 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs
expand in motion

Spreader
278 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs
retract in motion

Spreader
279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't

reached an endstop when in
motion within time limit
motion is stopped.
check
Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves
280
spare 83
281 INFO
TWINMPS - teaching a predefined position

teached

Spreader
282 INFO
TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position

a pre-defined position has been requested
received

Spreader
283 INFO
TWINMPS - A command to
store a new value for a log
position has been received
284 INFO
TWINMPS - A command to
return to a log position has been requested
received

Spreader
Spreader
285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs

haven't reached their requested
Motion is stopped.
check
Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves
286 INFO
TWIN195 - twin up command

has been received

Spreader
287 INFO
TWIN195 - twin down

command has been received

Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
43
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
44(55)
288 INFO
TWIN195 - twin boxes have

reached their upper position

Spreader
289 INFO
TWIN195 - twin boxes have

reached their lower position

Spreader
290 INFO
TTDS - override request

received

Spreader
291 INFO
TTDS - override request ended

Spreader
292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial

port info over CAN bus

Spreader
293 WARNING No answer when transferring

serial port info over Can bus

Spreader
294 ERROR
Failed to communicate with

RS485
System is brought
into failsafe mode.
295
spare 84
296
spare 85
297
spare 86
298 ERROR
Failed reading spreader

program.
299
spare 87
300
spare 88

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as

intended
Depending on type of
sensor/device

Spreader
302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as

intended
Depending on type of
sensor/device

Spreader
303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup
Node ID
304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock

AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup
306 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
Spreader properties
Number of containers
44
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
loaded/unloaded
307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure
Version:
Page:
11
45(55)
308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok

309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup
311 ERROR
Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM
312 WARNING Spreader properties

318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO
Spreader properties EEPROM

set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
323 INFO
Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node
324 INFO
RS485 status ok
325 INFO
Gravity point to centre

command
Gravity point to left side
command
Gravity point to right side
command
Gravity point has reached the
centre position
326 INFO
327 INFO
328 INFO
329 INFO
330 INFO

left end stop
right endstop
.
.
.
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap

.
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.
Manual
File: SCS_1
45
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
46(55)
.
332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has
wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO
Added value to NVRAM
.
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration
node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus
regarding digital I/O
node from which an answer is expected

regarding analogue I/O

regarding encoder data

regarding AnyBus message

regarding RS485 data
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code
341 ERROR
Error when trying to dowload

program
Node is missing on the bus
during system start.
343 ERROR
Inclination sensor initialisation

error
node that failed to initialise the sensor
344 ERROR
Timeout when trying to

node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor
342 ERROR
node that is missing

regarding inclination sensor
346 INFO
347 INFO
Node bus communication ok.

BCAN ok
BCAN bus status warning.
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .

349 ERROR
AnyBus Spreader/systems
diagnostic area failed to set up.
350 ERROR
Timeout when trying to set up

AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area
failed to set up
351 ERROR
352 ERROR
Manual
File: SCS_1
Timeout when trying to set up

AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.
46
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
353 INFO
Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value
354 INFO
AnyBus slave card plugged in
357 INFO
AnyBus Input data area size
size of data area (bytes)
358 INFO
AnyBus output data area size
size of data area (bytes)
359 ERROR
Hardware initialisation failed

(system prog.)
psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
360 ERROR
NVRAM full. No space left for .

Storage
NVRAM checksum Error
.
47(55)
node ID holding the

card
355 INFO
AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing
node ID of the node missing the card
361 ERROR
362 ERROR
365 ERROR
OS code. Operating system fatal

error
OS subcode.Operating system
fatal error
OS extra.Operating system fatal
error
Local regulator (PID) failed.
366 ERROR
Local regulator (PID) timeout
367 ERROR
Error in interpreting the spreader .

program. Parameter mismatch
between system and ABE file.
363 ERROR
364 ERROR
code from OS
call Bromma
code from OS
call Bromma
code from OS
call Bromma
node ID that failed to

initialise the regulator
.
restart
368 ERROR
Error in recognising a
.
component downloaded with the
spreader program
.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached
the requested position within
time limit.
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR
Error in locking regulator setup .
372 INFO
The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.
373 INFO
The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing
Manual
File: SCS_1
47
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
retstart
Check versions
of system and
ABE.
Check versions
of system and
ABE.
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
48(55)
to with the actual value

set in the Spreader info.
374 INFO
The time of day (minute) has

been set
Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader
375 INFO
Received a change bitrate

request. Boot message.
Requested bitrate
376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor

values from left hook

Spreader
377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor

values from right hook

Spreader
378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed.

(start sequence)

handle start sequence.

Spreader

(download sequence)

download.

Spreader

(finish sequence)
node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on

handle finish sequence. Spreader
381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed.

disable outputs.
382 WARNING No answer when attempting to

disable outputs.
383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild.

Spreader
enabeling outputs.
384 WARNING No answer when attempting to

enabeling outputs.
385 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
AutoTuner stored in NVRAM

Spreader

Spreader
Spreader
Regulator index.
48
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51

teached
Version:
Page:
11
49(55)
386 INFO
Tandem - Teaching a predefined position

Spreader
387 INFO
Tandem - A command to store a

new value for a log position has
been received
388 INFO
Tandem - command to go to a
pre-defined position has been
received

requested

Spreader
389 INFO
Tandem - A command to return The ID of the position

to a log position has been
requested
received

Spreader

Spreader
390 WARNING Tandem - Cylinder position has The ID of the cylinder Message stored in log and displayed on
changed more than allowed.
Spreader
391 INFO
Tandem Both landside and

waterside spreaders enabled

Spreader
392 INFO
Tandem Landside spreader

enabled

Spreader
393 INFO
Tandem Waterside spreader

enabled

Spreader
394 INFO
TandemPush A push
command received

Spreader
395 INFO
TandemPush Inner position

reached.

Spreader
396 INFO
TELESCOPE Impact detected

Spreader
397 INFO
TELESCOPE Telescope is
autocorrecting

Spreader
398 WARNING TELESCOPE Sensor value is

out of range
Manual
File: SCS_1
49
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
50(55)
399 INFO
TELESCOPE Bumped out of

signal window

Spreader
400 INFO
TWL TTDS active

Spreader
401 WARNING TWL Lock attempt with

TTDS active

Spreader
402 INFO
Digital I/O configured on an

AnybusGateway
Node id on where I/O

configured

Spreader
403 INFO
Analogue I/O configured on an

AnybusGateway

configured

Spreader
404 INFO
PWM configured on an
AnybusGateway

configured

Spreader
405 INFO
ASC Antisway sytem active

Spreader
406 INFO
ASC Antisway sytem ready

Spreader
407 INFO
ASC Antisway sytem failed

Spreaderi
408
spare 88
409 ERROR
OS extra 2.Operating system

fatal error
code from OS
call Bromma
410 INFO
Current hardware version
HW type
Type of hardware version.

5 = SCS2 revision
4 = SCS2
6 = Anybus gateway
The PID component found a strange
parameter saved in NVRAM. The PID
component uses the ABE parameters
instead.
411 WARNING Strange parameter saved in

NVRAM. (AutoTuner)
Manual
File: SCS_1
Parameter No.
50
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
412 WARNING Auto Tuner Finished but failed Parameter No.

to calculate some parameters
Version:
Page:
11
51(55)
Some parameters could not be calculated.

Check sensors etc.
413 ERROR
CANopen Failed to initialize

the software.
414 ERROR
CANopen Failed to configure

PDO
415 ERROR
CANopen - Error in locking

CANopen setup
416 INFO
CANopen Node removed from Node number

heartbeat list

Spreader
417 INFO
CANopen New node added to Node number

heart beat list

Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]
418 INFO
CANopen Boot message

received from node
Node number

419 INFO
CANopen Node stopped
Node number

420 INFO
CANopen Node in operational Node number

state

421 INFO
CANopen Node in
preoperational state
Node number

422 WARNING CANopen Heartbeat failed on Node number

node

423 ERROR
CANopen To many slaves in

use

Spreader. Check spreader program.
424 ERROR
CANopen Failed to configure

SDO

Manual
File: SCS_1
Check spreader program
51
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
52(55)
425 WARNING CANopen Failed to send SDO Node number

426 WARNING CANopen Bus off occured

Spreader.
427 ERROR
CANopen Failed to change the

bitrate on CAN interface

Spreader.
428
Spare 89
429
Spare 90
430
Spare 91
431 WARNING CANopen Emergency object

additional byte 1
Contents of byte

additional byte 2
Contents of byte

additional byte 3
Contents of byte

additional byte 4
Contents of byte

additional byte 5
Contents of byte
436 INFO
Node number
CANopen Slave OK
437 WARNING CANopen Generic error
Manual
File: SCS_1
Node number
52
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
53(55)
438 WARNING CANopen Current
Node number

439 WARNING CANopen Current, device

input side
Node number

440 WARNING CANopen Current, inside

device
Node number

441 WARNING CANopen Current, device

output side
Node number

442 WARNING CANopen - Voltage
Node number

443 WARNING CANopen Mains voltage
Node number

444 WARNING CANopen - Voltage inside
Node number

445 WARNING CANopen Voltage output
Node number

446 WARNING CANopen - Temperature
Node number

447 WARNING CANopen Temperature

ambient
Node number

448 WARNING CANopen Temperature device Node number

449 WARNING CANopen Hardware device
Node number

450 WARNING CANopen Software device
Node number

Manual
File: SCS_1
53
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
54(55)
451 WARNING CANopen Software inside
Node number

452 WARNING CANopen software user
Node number

453 WARNING CANopen Data set
Node number

454 WARNING CANopen Additional module Node number

455 WARNING CANopen - Monitoring
Node number

456 WARNING CANopen CAN overrun
Node number

457 WARNING CANopen CAN error passive Node number

458 WARNING CANopen Lifeguard or

heartbeat
Node number

459 WARNING CANopen Recover from bus

off
Node number

460 WARNING CANopen - Transmit COB id
Node number

461 WARNING CANopen General

communication
Node number

462 WARNING CANopen General protocol
Node number

463 WARNING CANopen PDO not processed Node number

Manual
File: SCS_1
54
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
55(55)
464 WARNING CANopen PDO length

exceeded
Node number

465 WARNING CANopen External error
Node number

466 WARNING CANopen Additional

functions
Node number

467 WARNING CANopen Device specific
Node number
468 WARNING CANopen Node missing
Node number

slave user manual
Check CAN connections and spreader
program.
469 INFO
Changed to node
number

Spreader.
470 WARNING CANopen Node id chage

failed
Node number

Spreader.
471 WARNING TTDS No sensors

Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
CANopen Node id changed
55
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Spreader Control System

2
2:nd generation
SCS Anybus Gateway
Rev 1.0
05-03-08
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
2(13)
General ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 THE NODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Software........................................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 BOOT PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 6
Hardware Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 BCAN - STATUS LEDS ........................................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 THE ANY BUS CARD ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.3 POWER CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.4 BCAN CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.5 NODE ADDRESS KEY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................ 7
4.6 SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................................ 7
4.7 GROUND CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.8 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS. ....................................................................................................................................... 8
4.8.1
Mapping of I/O .............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.9 FAULT FINDING TABLE........................................................................................................................................... 10
Software tools............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.2 ABE....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
5.3 BMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
6.1 DATA SHEET........................................................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Appendix A (Error messages)................................................................................................................................... 13
Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual
2
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
3(13)
General
1.1
Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the those installing and using the Bromma SCS2 Anybus
Gateway. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.
1.2
Dictionary and abbreviations
ABE
BMS
Boot program
CAN
PWM
Spreader Program
SCS2
System Program
Anybus Gateway
1.3
Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic.

Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
A node that can be used in the Spreader Control System generation 2.
Document layout
Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.

Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning (see main SCS2 manual for details).
Manual
3
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
4(13)
Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.
2.1
General
As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node
A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.
Crane-Spreader Communications Link
A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane

control system and the spreader.
Spreader Node
A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensorsand actuators.

One of the Spreader nodes normally acts as Master.
Sensors and Switches
Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
The system is divided into several hardware blocks called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
number of I/O needed.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.
Manual
4
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
5(13)
Crane PLC
Crane field bus
Anybus Gateway A1
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
I/O
B2 Slave
...
SCS2
B8 Slave
Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.
2.2
The Nodes
The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master.
Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.
3.1
Boot Program
When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for
Initialising hardware
Verifying that all system versions match.
Performing a program download
3.2
System program
After the Boot program is finished, the System will execute until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Interpreting the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC-connection via the RS232 port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Logging events in the event log
Reading input signals and writing output signals
Manual
5
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
3.3
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
6(13)
Spreader Program
The Spreader Program is the specific application program that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see
chapter 5.2 for a brief description.
Hardware Overview
Figure2 is a SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. The different parts are explained in the
following chapter. This view shows a Profibus card, this can naturally be exchanged for any other available fieldbus.
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
status LEDS
Status LEDs
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
address
selectors
Power connector
BCAN connector
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
terminator
switch
Node address key

switches
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
fieldbus
connector
Figure 2. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card.
4.1
BCAN - Status LEDs
There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error
status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the communication
interface is not working as inteded.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when configured and operating normaly.
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.
4.2
The Any bus card
For details regarding the specific field bus card connection, termination, addressing and status LEDs, please see the
separate manual for that specific type of card.
4.3
Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2-pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).

Name
VCC
GND
Manual
Description
10 to 28 V DC
Ground
Pin number
1
2
6
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
4.4
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
7(13)
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81).

Name
CAN H
CAN L
CAN GND
4.5
Description
CAN high
CAN low
CAN ground, not required by BCAN
Pin number
1
2
3
Node address key switches
There are five switches selecting node address, where the DIP switch 1 corresponds to LSB.
The nodes are addressed according to the following table:
DIP setting
0=off, 1=on
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011-11110
11111
4.6
Node
name
Test
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not Used
Test
Spreader
stop
Redundancy block and override

of landing pins
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
The serial port connector is a standard DSUB 9-PIN female connector. A pin-to-pin cable is needed when connecting the
SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port.
Name
Tx
Rx
Signal GND
CTS
RTS
Not connected
4.7
Description
Transmitted data RS-232
Received data RS-232
Ground
Clear to send RS-232
Request to send RS-232
Not connected
Pin number
2
3
5
7
8
1, 4, 6, 9
Ground connection
The SCS2 Anybus Gateway chassis must be properly connected to protective earth, for example by mounting the unit on a
grounded DIN rail.
Manual
7
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
4.8
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
8(13)
Field bus Connections.
By using the AnyBus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be
used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card
translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change
between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a
specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane. Hence the crane PLC and the AnyBus card must have corresponding
addresses and the nymber of bytes configured for input/output data have to be the same on both sides of the
communication link i.e. the crane PLC and the SCS2.
4.8.1
Mapping of I/O
OUT
IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
Byte 6-7 (WORD)

=> Diagnostic code

way.
Byte 8
=> Node ID
Byte 9-10
Byte 11-16
Byte 17-18
=> sequential counter
Manual
8
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
9(13)
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
Manual
9
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
4.9
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
10(13)
Fault Finding table
Symptom
Power Supply
The node wont start. The power LED
is off.
RS-232
BMS system can not communicate
with the node.
CAN
The node can not communicate with
the other nodes.
Node ID
The unit stops at start-up.
Project No
Manual
What to do
Comment
Measure the main supply. The voltage

should exceed 10V DC and be less
than 30V DC.
The power LED should be on.
Probe TxD and RxD lines with

oscilloscope while trying to
communicate. Ensure that connection
cables arent damaged.
Data lines should show square waves

between 10V to +10V relative to
GND pin.
Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.

CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.
Check that CAN high and CAN low

are not mixed up.
Check selected node ID.
This can indicate that the node has

wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.
Software tools
5.1
Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.
5.2
ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.
5.3
BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.
Manual
10
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
11(13)
Miscellaneous
6.1
Data sheet
Parameter
Note
Min
Max
Unit
Operating voltage
Current consumption
Temperature
EMC conformity
Power connector
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Operating temperature
In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
10
50
-20
28
200
+85
V DC
mA
0
C
EN 61000-6-4:2001 (Emission requirements)

EN 55011 (Radiated emission)
EN 61000-6-2:2001 (Immunity requirements)
EN 61000-4-2 (Immunity: ESD)
EN 61000-4-3 (Immunity: RF electromagnetic field)
EN 61000-4-4 (Immunity: Fast transients)
EN 61000-4-5 (Immunity: Surge) (2)
Controller
Memory
32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz

Program 1.4Mb
Log 128kb
Scan time
System scan time
50
ms
Node scan time
5
ms
Serial interfaces
BCAN Bromma CAN based bus
RS232 For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics
System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
Event and error log
FB programming
Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
Note 2) For compliance with EN 61000-6-2 the power cable and the serial port cable have to be limited to 10 meters in
length
Manual
11
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
6.2
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
12(13)
Dimensions
Figure 3. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. All dimensions are in mm.
Manual
12
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
13(13)
Appendix A (Error messages)
The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). See main system manual for list of codes.
Manual
13
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
11 Fault finding diagnostics

Fault finding in hydraulic system
NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT
Check oil level and that filter is clean.
Check that pump is functioning correctly as illustrated in the "system test".
Particularly check that setting of pressure relief valves are correct (as
enclosed sheet) and that the pump suction line (inlet) is not blocked.
Pump suction is checked by removing drain line and measuring flow at
running pressure of 100 BAR.
Maximum flow should be 1 litre/min. If greater than this, replace the pump.
TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE
Check manual operation of the solenoid valve.
If twistlocks work then check electrical supply & solenoid.
NOTE! Blockading pin must be in the "up" position!
IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK

Check that pump pressure is correct.
Check pressure relief valve.
When valve is operated manually the pressure should remain at working
pressure. If it decreases check the seals in the cylinder.
Remove the cylinder and ensure that the twistlocks are free to rotate.
Check directional valve.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
11 01 ENG
rev.
Fault finding in electrical system

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED
Possible cause
3 phase supply missing.
Motor contactor not functioning.
Feed from crane missing.
Action______________
____
Check cable, plug, socket.
Check crane control signal.
Check connection.
HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT

Action________________
__
Possible cause
Pump pressure too high or pump faulty. Refer to Hydraulic section.
Pump motor faulty.
Change motor.
Motor supply has one missing phase.
Check to find where supply is
connected and repair.
TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK
Possible cause__________________
Pumps stopped.
Crane spreader is fitted with the safety
feature only work with all four landing
switches actuated.
If timer fitted timer faulty set wrongly.
Check if fault is hydraulic by
operating valve by hand.
Check supply to solenoid if yes.
Check leads and plugs to solenoids.
Check blockading circuit.
Check supply at B and C junction boxes.
FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE

Possible cause
Pump stopped.
Check if fault is mechanical or hydraulic
by operating valve by hand.
Check supply to solenoid if yes.
Check flipper supplies from crane.
Action________________
__
Check pump procedure.
Check that the spreader is correctly
landed on the container.
Replace or set to 0,5 or 2 sec.
Refer to hydraulic section.
Replace solenoid.
Repair or replace
Check relays, check limit switch and
adjust or replace. Check connection.
Check connections. Replace main
supply cable.
Action________________
__
Check pump procedure.
Carry out mechanical hydraulic
procedure.
Replace solenoid.
Check crane controls. Check plugs,
socket and cable.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
11 02 ENG
rev.
12 Appendices
Units & conversion tables
LENGTH
1 ft
1m
1 in
1 mm
= 0,3048 m
= 3,2808 ft
= 25,4 mm
= 0,03937 in
WEIGHT
1 lb
1 kg
1 ton
1 Lt
1 tonne
= 0,4536 kg
= 2,2046 lb
= 1 t = 2000 lb = 907 kg = 0,893 Lt= 0,907 tonne
= 2240 lb = 1016 kg = 1,016 tonne = 1,120 ton
= 1 mT = 2204 lb = 1000 kg = 0,9842 Lt = 1,103 ton
VOLUME
1l
= 0,21997 UKgal = 0,26417 USgal
PRESSURE
1 bar
= 10 N/cm2 = 1,02 Kp/cm2 = 14,503 lbf/in2
POWER
1 Hp
1 kW
= 0,746 kW
= 1,341 Hp
TORQUE
1 Kpm
= 9,81 Nm = 7,233 lbf
FORCE
1 Kgf = 1 kp = 9,81 N = 2,2046 lbf
TEMPERATURE
dgr C = 5 (dgr F-32)
9
A = ampere
o
C = degrees centigrade
c/s = cycles per second
o
F = degrees Fahrenheit
ft = foot
gal = gallon
Hp = horse power
Hz = hertz
in = inch
kg = kilogramme
Kgf = kilopond force
l = litre
lb = pound
lbf= pound force
m = meter
min= minute
n = newton
s = second
t = tonne
v = volt
w = watt
m = micron
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 01 ENG
rev.
Hydraulic symbols
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 02 ENG
rev.
Electrical symbols
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 03 ENG
rev.
PEINER Greifer
DOCUMENTATION
Greifer-Typ / Grab type:
MZGL 10000-3-L
Auftrags-Nr. / Com.-no.:
AB00001867
Werks-Nr. / Serial-no.:
2291 / 2292
Windmhienbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter/Germany
Telefon:
-^49 5341 302 647
Telefax:
H-49 5341 302 424
E-Mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet
vmfw.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender)
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker
Sitz der Cesellschaft Salzgitter Bad

Registergericht
Registernummen
HRB 201389
13.01.2000
OSMAG
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Tl
FEINER Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0186-1 D
1-1
I n h a l t s v e r z e i c h n i s
Blatt-Nr.
1.0
Maschinenkarte
2.0
Beschreibung und bersichten
2.1
2.1.1
Grundgert: Bau- und Funktionsbeschreibung

Baubeschreibung
2.1.2
Funktionsbeschreibung
2.2
Schaltplan, hydraulisch 2303.3934
2.4
Teiiebenennungsplan
3.0
Betriebsanleitung
3.1
Hinweise auf Beachtung der U W
3.2
3.2.1
Inbetriebnahme
Erst-Inbetriebnahme
3.2.2
Tgliche Inbetriebnahme
3.3
Hinweise fr den Betrieb
3.4
Auerbetriebnahme
3.5
Wieder-Inbetriebnahme
3.6
Transport
4.0
Instandhaltung
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
Pflege und Wartung

lwechsel
Schmieranweisung
lfilter
Motor
Kondenswasser
Salzgltter Mascliinenbau AG
Wlndmhienbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgltter / Germany
Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
pelnergismaa.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de
Sortier-Nr.
3-1
4/1-3
A 01.0252 D
A 01.0316/1-3 D
5/1-2
A 01.0419/1-2 D
7-1
A 01.0465 D
8/1-2
A 01.0551/1-2 D
8/1-2
8/1-2
A 01.0551/1-2 D
A 01.0551/1-2 D
9-1
A 01.0126 D
9-2
AOI.0580 D
9-2
A 01.0580 D
9-2
A 01.0580 D
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
Vorstand:
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker
Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgltter Bad

Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschwelg
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389
13.01.2000
OSAAAG
I M H H SalzgitterMaschinenbau
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0186-2 D
1-2
I n h a l t s v e r z e i c h n i s
Blatt-Nr.
Sortier-Nr.
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
Durchzufhrende Prfungen
lstand prfen
Druckprfung und Einstellung
Sonstige Prfungen
10-2
10-2
10-2
A 01.0657/1-2 D
A 01.0657/1-2 D
A 01.0657/1-2 D
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
Instandsetzung
Allgemeines
Demontage
Reparatur
Montage
Steuerblock
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
A 01.0751/1-2 D
A 01.0751/1-2 D
A 01.0804 D
A 01.0020 D
A 01.0904/1-2 D
4.4
lempfehlung
11/1-2
A 05.1800/1-2 D
5.0
Strung - Kennzeichen - Fehlerquellen
5.1
Greifer arbeitet nicht
12/1-2
A 01.0955/1-2 D
5.2
Greifer bringt keine Leistung
12/1-2
A 01.0955/1-2 D
5.3
Strungen an der Hydraulik
12/1-2
A 01.0955/1-2 D
6.0
Ersatzteilliste
Saizgitter Maschinenbau AG
WindmOhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgltter/Germany
Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424
E-mall:
pelnerlgismao.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de
Vorstand:
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker

Registergericht:
Registernummer:
HRB 2 0 1 3 8 9
Maschinenkarte / Technische Daten
Auftrags-Nr.:
AB00001867
Erzeugnis:
MZGL 10000-3-L
Materlal-Nr.:
1000052928
Werks-Nr.:
2291 / 2292
Baujahr:
2011
Eigengewicht:
7085 kg
erf. Krantragfhigkeit:
17.085 kg
Betriebsanleitung: A 01.0186
Fllvolumen / zulssige Tragfhigkeit
( )
Fllvolumen [m^]
Schttgewicht [t/m^]
zul. Tragfhigkeit / SWL [t]
Vi = 10,0
1,0
10,0
Schttgutkrnung:
1,0 - max. 50 mm
Theoretische Arbeitszeiten (frei im Raum / ohne Schttqutaufnahme)
Greifer ffnen
Greifer schlieen
50 Hz
60 Hz
8 sec.
14-18 sec.
sec.
sec.
Elektrische Daten
Betriebsart:
IVIotor-Typ:
Aussetzbetrieb:
Motorleistung:
Spannung:
Frequenz:
Strom art:
Nennstrom:
28
400
50
57
Schutzart:
Isolierklasse:
max. Schalthufigkeit:
Schaltplan-Nr.:
Steckvorrichtung:
Steuerspannung
S6
180L-4
40 % ED
kW
V
Hz
Drehstrom
A + 10%
IP65
H
2307.9520
ODU-UW
220 V/50Hz
Hvdrauiische Daten
max. Betriebsdruck
Messstelle MA
Messstelle MB
Messstelle MP
Messstelle MPI
Messstelle MP2
Messstelle MLS
Pumpentyp:
Steuerblock:
Zylindergre:
eingefllte lsorte:
Inhalt ltank:
Filtertyp:
Filterfeinheit:
zul. Betriebstemperatur:
Erstellt:
12.04.2011 / GK-Heuer
Greifer ffnen [10 bar]
Greifer schlieen [10 bar]
230
120
V30D-075
AV 4298 NG20 E
180/110x750 Hub
HLP 46
255 1
Argo
i6(c) = 200 Exapor
-5C bis +85C
A(
Abmessungen
Erstellt:
12.04.2011 / GK - Heuer
Maschinenkarte / Technische Daten
05.11.2008
OSAAAG
UMI!*
Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer
2.0
Beschreibung und bersichten
2.1
Grundgert: Bau- und Funl<tionsbeschreibung
2.1.1
Baubeschreibung (siehe Blatt-Nr. 7-1
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0252 D
3-1
Der PEINER Motor-Zweischalengreifer hat folgenden Aufbau:

Die beiden Schalen", sie dienen zur Aufnahme des Schttgutes, sind mittels Bolzen an
der Unteren Traverse" angelenkt. Diese Bolzen bilden die Drehpunkte der Schalen. Die
Schneiden der Schalen" bestehen aus verschleifestem Werkstoff.
Die Untere Traverse" ist als lbehlter ausgebildet. Auf der Traverse senkrecht
aufgebaut ist das Hydrauiikaggregat"; bestehend aus Motor und einer im lbehlter
hngenden Hochdruck-Axial-Regelpumpe, sowie der Steuereinrichtung. Zum Schutz ist
das Hydrauiikaggregat" mit einer Haube abgedeckt. Durch die tiefe Anordnung des
Hydraulikaggregates" erhlt der PEINER Motor-Zweischalengreifer eine geringe
Bauhhe und gnstige Schwerpunktlage.
Beidseitig des Hydraulikaggregates" sind die Hubzylinder" angeordnet. Ihre Festpunkte
sind in der Unteren Traverse" und Oberen Traverse". Durch Ein- bzw. Ausfahren der
Kolbenstangen werden die Schalen" geschlossen bzw. geffnet. Die Kolbenstangen
der
Hubzylinder
sind oberflchenbehandelt
und
korrosionsgeschtzt.
Die
Steuereinrichtung ist ber Hydraulikschluche mit den Hubzylindern" verbunden.
Als Verbindungsglied zwischen der Oberen Traverse" und den Schalen" sind die
Lenkarme" angeordnet.
Ebenfalls an der Oberen Traverse" befindet sich die Aufhngung". Sie wird mit dem
Tragmittel des vorhandenen Hebezeuges verbunden.
Die Stromzufhrung zum Motor" erfolgt ber Steckvorrichtung" und Gummischlauchleitung. Um Schden vorzubeugen, wird die Steckvorrichtung" mittels Zugentlastung"
entlastet.
Smtliche Baugruppen und Teile bestehen aus hochwertigen Baustoffen und sind gut
austauschbar. Die Lagerbuchsen sind aus seewasserbestndigem Werkstoff gefertigt.
PEINER Motor-Zweischalengreifer mit Einschubelementen (siehe Teiiebenennungsplan,
Blatt-Nr. 7-1) knnen nach Entfernen dieser Einschubelemente Schttgter mit grerer
Schttgutdichte aufnehmen. Verschiedene Schttgutdichten sind in der Maschinenkarte
genannt.
13.09.1999
OSMAG
I B B ^ Salzgitter Maschinenbau
2.1.2
FEINER Greifer
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0316-1 D
4-1
Funktionsbeschreibung (siehe Bl.-Nr. 5-1, Schaltplan)

Durchlaufbetrieb (S6)
Regelpumpe (Leistungsregler plus LS-Regler)
Steuerblock NG-20-E / NG 30-E
Grundstzliches:
Betriebsart S6 bedeutet, da bei in Betrieb genommenem Greifer der Antriebsmotor und
damit auch die Hydraulikpumpe nur in eine Drehrichtung rotiert. Die Umsteuerung der
Bewegungsrichtung der Arbeitszylinder wird mittels jeweils einem 2-Wege-Einbauventil
fr "Greifer ffnen" und "Greifer schlieen" bewerkstelligt. Wird bei rotierendem
Antriebsmotor kein Ventil zugeschaltet (Verbraucher), d. h. die Greiferschalen bewegen
sich weder in Richtung "Greifer ffnen" noch in Richtung "Greifer schlieen", saugt die
Hydraulikpumpe nur soviel l an, wie zur Aufrechterhaltung von Schmierung und Betriebssicherheit der Pumpe erforderlich ist. Dieser Betriebszustand der Pumpe wird
nachfolgend auch mit dem Begriff "Null-Hubregelung" beschrieben.
Der Load-Sensing-Regler, kurz LS-Regler genannt, wird lediglich als "Min./Max.Schalter" eingesetzt, d. h. mittels LS-Regler erkennt die Pumpe,
1.
da ein Verbraucher zugeschaltet worden ist und die Pumpe auf max. Frdermenge ausschwenken mu,
2.
da ein Verbraucher weggeschaltet worden ist und die Pumpe in die "Null-Hubregelung" zurckschwenken mu,
3.
da ein am Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV1 bzw. DV2) eingestellter Systemdruck erreicht worden ist und die Pumpe in Richtung "Null-Hubregelung" zurckschwenken
mu, um nur noch soviel l zu frdern, wie zur Aufrechterhaltung des Systemdruckes erforderlich ist.
Der Leistungsregler der Pumpe ist auf die maximale Leistung des Antriebsmotors abgestimmt, d. h. in Abhngigkeit von der Antriebsleistung wird bei berschreiten eines
bestimmten Betriebsdruckes die Frdermenge der Pumpe bei weiter ansteigendem Betriebsdruck kontinuierlich der Leistungsabgabe des Antriebsmotors angepat. Die hydraulische Leistung, das Produkt aus Frdermenge und Druck, bleibt somit konstant.
Funktionsbeschreibung "Greifer ffnen":

Magnet (M2) wird vom Vorsteuerventil des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV2) geschaltet.
Sobald das Vorsteuerventil die Schaltposition erreicht, schwenkt die Pumpe aus der
"Null-Hubregelung" und frdert den maximalen Volumenstrom. Gleichzeitig wird das
Hauptventil (Kegelsitzventil) vom 2-Wege-Einbauventil (WV2) rckseitig entlastet, d. h.
Steuerl kann ber den Anschlu (T1) in den ltank entweichen. Der anstehende
Pumpendruck ffnet das Hauptventil (WV2) und das l fliet durch die Druckleitung
(Po) ber das geffnete Hauptventil (WV2), den internen Blockanschlu (P2), das Rckschlagventil (R2), den Steuerblockanschlu (B) und eine Schlauchleitung zur Kolbenseite (KS) der Arbeitszylinder.
13.09.1999
OSMAG
iHMiiiiiww
SalzgitterMaschinenbau
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0316-2 D
4-2
Gleichzeitig wird ber die Steuerleitung (St1) das Sperrventil (SV1) geffnet und ber
die Steuerleitung (St2) das Sperrventil (SV2) geschlossen. Weiterhin wird ber das
Wechselventil (WV) die Signalleitung (LS) der Funktion "Greifer ffnen" zugeschaltet.
Mit der Hubbewegung der Arbeitszylinder entweicht das l aus der Kolbenstangenseite
(KSS) der Arbeitszylinder und wird ber eine Schlauchleitung, den Blockanschlu (A)
und das geffnete Sperrventil (SV1) der Druckleitung zugefhrt, d. h. zum ffnen des
Greifers addieren sich die Frdermengen von Pumpe und rckflieendem l (Eilgangschaltung).
Wird der am Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV2) eingestellte Systemdruck "Greifer ffnen"
erreicht, ffnet das Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV2) und l wird ber den Anschlu (T)
und den Rcklauffilter in den Tank geleitet. Die Dse (D2) ist so bemessen, da weniger l aus der Druckleitung Po nachflieen kann als ber das Druckbegrenzungsventil
abfliet. Der daraus resultierende Differenzdruck in der Leitung (LS) wird als Signal auf
den "LS-Regler" bertragen. Die Pumpe schwenkt zurck und frdert nur noch soviel l,
wie zur Aufrechterhaltung des Systemdruckes erforderlich ist.
Jetzt kann der Magnet (M2) abgeschaltet werden und die Leitung (LS) kann sich ber
das Vorsteuerventil des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV2) und den Anschlu (T1) zum
Tank hin druckentlasten. Die Pumpe schwenkt in die "Null-Hubregelung".
Zur zustzlichen Systemabsicherung (z. B. Ausfall der Pumpenregeleinheit) befindet
sich in der Druckleitung (Po) ein Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV3), das fest auf 280 300 bar eingestellt ist. Je nach Pumpentyp kann dieses Ventil auch pumpenintern angeordnet sein.
Funktionsbeschreibung "Greifer schlieen":

Durch Schalten von Magnet (M1) des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV1) wird der Schlievorgang eingeleitet.
Der Ablauf gestaltet sich analog der Beschreibung "Greifer ffnen" mit der Ausnahme,
da beim Einfahren der Kolbenstangen das aus der Kolbenseite (KS) der Arbeitszylinder entweichende l ber eine Schlauchleitung, den Blockanschlu (B), das geffnete
Sperrventil (SV2), den Blockanschlu (T) und den Rcklauffilter (F) zum Tank geleitet
wird. Zum Schlieen des Greifers steht also lediglich die einfache Pumpenfrdermenge
zur Verfgung.
Der beim Schlieen der Schalen ansteigende Druck in der Leitung A, wird durch den
Druckschalter DS begrenzt. Wird der am Druckschalter DS eingestellte Systemdruck
Greifer schlieen" erreicht, unterbricht ein im Druckschalter eingebauter elektrischer
Kontakt die elektrische Verbindung zum Magnet (M1) und mit der Magnetabschaltung
kann sich die Leitung (LS) ber das Vorsteuerventil des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV1)
und den Anschlu (T1) zum Tank hin druckentlasten. Die Pumpe schwenkt in die NullHubregelung. Das Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV1) liegt in der Druckeinstellung ber dem
Einstellwert des Druckschalters DS", d. h. DV 1 ist bei der Funktion Greifer ffnen" und
Greifer schlieen" ohne Funktion (siehe Tabelle Standard Druckeinstellung")
13.09.1999
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
MAG
FEINER Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
A 01.0316-3 D
Biatt-Nr.
4-3
Der maximale Druck in der Leitung A wird durch den Druckschalter (DS) bestimmt. Bei
Erreichen des max. Druckes an DS wird das Magnet (M1) abgeschaltet (siehe Grundstzliches unter Punkt 2).
Bei abgeschalteten Ventilen (WV1, WV2) verhindern die Rckschlagventile (R1, R2)
und die Sperrventile (SV1, SV2) ein selbstttiges ffnen bzw. Schlieen des Greifers.
Leistungsregelung:
ACHTUNG!
Die Drehrichtung der Pumpe ist rechts, mit Blick auf die Pumpenantriebswelle!
Sollte bei der ersten Inbetriebnahme der Greifer weder ffnen noch schlieen, knnte
der Motor die falsche Drehrichtung haben. Zuleitung zum Motor umklemmen.
Standard-Druckeinstellung:
Greifer schlieen
DS
230 bar
DV1
250 bar
DV2
120 bar
Greifer ffnen
DV3
280-300 bar
Sicherheitsventil
Einstellwerte siehe auch Maschinenkarte.
Manometeranschlsse:
Die Systemdrcke knnen an den hierfr vorgesehenen Mestellen berprft werden
(Drcke siehe Maschinenkarte).
Schlieen:
ffnen:
MP1,MA
MP2, MB
Pumpendruck:
LS-Druck:
MP, MP1,MP2
MLS
Rattern der Schalen:

Um whrend des Schlievorganges das Rattern der Schalen zu verhindern, sollte das
entsperrbare Rckschlagventil SVl leicht angedrosselt werden. (Einstellung durch
Stellschraube siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
ACHTUNG !
SV1 nicht zu weit zudrehen, da sich sonst das l sehr stark erwrmt!
13.09.1999
0 SAAAG
Salzgitter IVlaschinenbau
2.2
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0419-1 D
5-1
Schaltplan 2303.3934 (mit Druckschalter)

Durchlaufbetrieb (S6)
Regelpumpe (Leistungsregler plus LS-Regler)
Steuerblock NG 20-E, Eilgangausfhrung
h
KSS
KS
mi>SV2j-
05
MA
"iSVI
512 i
LU Iii
o
I CM
o O
CM z
o
O _o
z
I
_
g c
CO o
X3
u
513
SU
V RZ
WV
02
Ol
DV2
DVI
-6MP1
CD
CO
PI
!P2
Wh
JS
B-1
WV1
WV2
Tl
4
300
bar
n.
c
o
o
Mij
MP
Po
(D
CO
0) 0)
LS
13.09.1999
l ^ ^ l SalzgitterMaschinenbau
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0419-2 D
5-2
Bezeichnungen:
A
B
D1,D2
DS
DV1,DV2
DVS
E
F
KS
KSS
LS
M
M1,M2
MA, MB, MP
MP1,MP2
N
P
Po
P1,P2
R1,R2
St1 - St4
SV1
SV2
T
T1
WV
WV1, WV2
Leitung (Greifer sclilieen)

Leitung (Greifer ffnen)
Dse
Drucksciialter
Druckbegrenzungsventil
Druckbegrenzungsventil (Sicherheitsventil)
Eilgangausfhrung
Filter
Kolbenseite
Kolbenstangenseite
Signalleitung "Load Sensing"
Elektromotor
Magnet
Manometeranschlu
Manometeranschlu
Normalausfhrung
Hydraulikpumpe
Druckleitung
Pumpenanschlu
Rckschlagventil
Steuerieitung
Sperrventil mit Hubbegrenzung
Sperrventil
Hydrauliktank
Tankleitung
Wechselventil
Wegeventil
03.05.2001
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0465 D
7-1
13.09.1999
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer
3.0
Betriebsanleitung
3.1
Hinweise zur Beachtung der U W
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0551-1
8-1
Bestimmungen der UW-Lastaufnalimemittel sind zu beachten.

ACHTUNG !
Beim Besteigen des Greifers mu sich das Bedienungs- und

Wartungspersonal zur Vermeidung von Unfllen in geeigneter
Weise und entsprechend der Unfallverhtungs-vorschriften vor
Absturz und anderen Gefahren sichern bzw. schtzen.
3.2
Inbetriebnahme
3.2.1
Erst-Inbetriebnahme
- Vorhandene Spannung mit Spannung des Greifers prfen, (siehe Maschinenkarte).
-
lstand prfen (siehe 4.2.1). Evtl. beim Transport verlorengegangenes l nachfllen

(siehe lempfehlung Bl.-Nr. 11-1).
Bei Temperaturen unter -10C l anwrmen oder Greifer im geschlossenen Zustand

gegen Schlieen fahren, bis sich das l auf ca. 0C erwrmt hat.
- Aufhngung mit Tragmittel verbinden, Tragfhigkeit des Hebezeuges beachten.

-
Schutzkappen der Steckvorrichtung entfernen.
Greifer mit Steckvorrichtung verbinden. Auf Drehrichtung achten!

Bei nicht montierter Steckvorrichtung diese nach Schaltplan anschlieen.
Zugentlastung anbringen;
Steckvorrichtung ausben.
Greifer probefahren; vorher Punkt 4.3 beachten.
Gummischlauchleitung
darf
- Verschraubung auf Dichtheit prfen.

-
Nach ca. 50 Betriebsstunden lfilter wechseln (siehe Bild).

Normal-Ausfhrung
keinerlei Zug
auf
die
13.09.1999
OSMAG
3.2.2
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
FEINER Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0551-2
8-2
Tgliche Inbetriebnahme
-
lstand prfen (siehe 4.2.1).
l anwrmen bei Temperaturen unter -10C oder Greifer im geschlossenen Zustand

gegen Schlieen fahren, bis sich das l auf ca. 0C erwrmt hat.
Steckvorrichtung auf einwandfreien Sitz und Zugentlastung prfen.
- Verschraubungen, Schluche und Zylinder auf Dichtheit prfen.
27.11.2003
OSAAAG
i Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
3.3
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER
Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0126 D
9-1
Hinweise fr den Betrieb

Bei Sciittgtern, bei denen der Greifer nicht einwandfrei schliet, empfiehlt es sich,
beim Schlievorgang den Greifer etwas anzuheben. Um den maximalen Fllungsgrad
zu erreichen, sollte der Greifer nach Mglichkeit gerade aufgesetzt werden.
Greifer nie mit groer Geschwindigkeit auf das Schttgut aufschlagen lassen.
Starkes Anschlagen des Greifers ist zu vermeiden, um Beschdigungen zu verhindern.
ACHTUNG!
Der Antriebsmotor sollte nach Erreichen der Position Greifer

geffnet" abgeschaltet werden, da sonst das Hydraulikl whrend
des normalen Umschlagbetriebes unntig erwrmt wird.
05.11.2008
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
OSMAG
3.4
PEINER
Greiter
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0580 D
9-2
Auerbetriebnahme
-
Der Greifer ist im geschlossenen Zustand abzustellen, so da die Kolbenstangen

eingefahren sind.
Beim Abstellen an Bord von Seeschiffen sollte zwischen den Bodenschneiden ein
Spalt von 1 - 2 cm eingestellt sein (Wasserablauf).
Das freie Ende der Kolbenstange zum zustzlichen Schutz vor Korrosion mit Haftschmierstoff einstreichen.
Wird der Greifer langfristig auer Betrieb genommen, sind grundstzlich alle
Schmierstellen mit Fett zu versorgen.
Ferner ist bei lngerer Auerbetriebnahme darauf zu achten, da der Greifer in
Abstnden von ca. 3 Monaten mehrere Male bettigt wird, um eine Korrosionsbildung
bzw. ein Verharzen des Hydraulikles in den Steuerelementen zu verhindern.
3.5
Die Belftungsffnungen sind durch Aufsetzen der Kunststoffhaube zu verschlieen,

(siehe auch Hinweisschild auf der Oberen Traverse).
Die Steckvorrichtung ist mit Schutzkappen zu versehen.
Wiederinbetriebnahme
- Alle Punkte von 3.2 beachten.
- Auf eventuelle Beschdigungen prfen.
3.6
Transport
Greifer senkrecht stellen und gegen Kippen sichern.
Kolbenstangen gegen Beschdigungen schtzen, wenn Greifer im geffneten Zustand transportiert wird.
05.11.2008
QSMAG
1
4.0
Instandhaltung
4.1
Pflege und Wartung
4.1.1
lwechsel
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0602-1 D
10-1
Der erste lwechsel ist nach ca. 500 Betriebsstunden vorzunehmen. Weitere lwechsel
nach jeweils 1000 Betriebsstunden - sptestens nach 1 Jahr.
Auergewhnliche Betriebszustnde knnen eine unzulssig hohe Verunreinigung oder
eine Alterung des les verursachen. In solchen Fllen wird empfohlen, bereits vor dem
flligen lwechsel eine lanalyse im Labor des lherstellers durchfhren zu lassen.
-
larten, siehe Tabelle: lempfehlung Bl.-Nr. 11-1
Durchfhrung:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
geffneten Greifer absetzen

lmestab herausschrauben (Tankbelftung)
geeigneten Auffangbehlter unter die lablaschraube positionieren
lablaschraube entfernen und reinigen
Tankfllung ablassen (bei betriebswarmer Anlage)
Tank reinigen
lfiltereinsatz wechseln
lablaschraube einschrauben
Tank fllen (ber Filter)
lstand prfen (siehe 4.2.1)
Tank luftdicht verschlieen, wenn Greiferschalen geffnet sind
05.11.2008
OSAAAG
BIM8I
4.1.2
B
PEINER
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0602-2 D
10-1
Schmieranweisung
Alle Schmierstellen (rot gekennzeichnet) G, H und K sind wchentlich abzuschmieren.
Schmierstelle I alle 6 Monate schmieren. (Fettempfehlung siehe Bl.-Nr. 11-2;
Schmierstellen im Teiiebenennungsplan Bl.-Nr. 7-1 gekennzeichnet).
Grundstzlich sollten vor jeder Wiederinbetriebnahme alle Schmierstellen mit Fett
versorgt werden.
4.1.3
lfilter
Bei Neuanlagen ist der Filtereinsatz nach etwa 50 Betriebsstunden auszuwechseln ansonsten nach jedem lwechsel. Ferner ist der lfilter nach Reparaturarbeiten an der
Hydraulik zu kontrollieren und ggf. der Filtereinsatz zu reinigen bzw. zu wechseln.
4.1.4
Motor
Nach 15000 Betriebsstunden Lager reinigen und zur Hlfte mit lithiumverseiftem Fett,
Tropfpunkt 160-180 C, fllen.
4.1.5
Kondenswasser
Kondenswasser ablassen. Dazu Kondenswasserablaschraube entfernen (nur bei UWBetrieb).
13.09.1999
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
QSAAAG
E M
PEINER Greifer
4.2
Durchzufhrende Prfungen
4.2.1
lstand prfen
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0657-1 D
10-2
Der lstand wird im geschlossenen Zustand, also bei eingefahrenen Kolbenstangen

gemessen.
Greifer mssen gerade stehen.
Maximaler oder minimaler lstand wird am lmestab abgelesen.
- Zuviel l erzeugt berdruck im Tank.

- Zuwenig l fhrt zur berhitzung der Hydraulikanlage und kann Pumpenschden zur
Folge haben.
4.2.2
Bei erforderlicher lnachfllung siehe lempfehlung Bl.-Nr. 11-1.
Druckprfung, Druckeinstellung (siehe Bild)

Die Druckprfung kann an folgenden Stellen vorgenommen werden:
Bei geschlossener Haube ffnungsdruck am Hubzylinder Mestelle MB und
Schliedruck am Hubzylinder MA.
Bei geffneter Haube ffnungsdruck am Steuerblock Mestelle MB und Schliedruck
am Steuerblock Mestelle MA.
An der Steuerplatte kann man (bei geffneter Haube) den Hauptpumpendruck und den
Load-Sensing-Druck messen.
Bei Druckeinstellung mu die Haube geffnet werden. Einstellung des ffnungsdruckes
erfolgt durch Verstellen des Vorsteuerventils fr Druckbegrenzungsventil DV2.
Einstellung des Schliedruckes erfolgt durch Verstellen des Vorsteuerventiles fr
Druckbegrenzungsventil DVI. Daten siehe Maschinenkarte Pkt. 1.0.
Ellgangausfhrung
quick-motion design
MA
MB
MPI
MP
= Greifer schlieen
= Greifer ffnen
= Pumpendruck schlieen
= Pumpendruck
DVI
DV2
MP2
MLS
=
=
=
=
Schlieen
ffnen
Pumpendruck ffnen
Load-Sensing
13.09.1999
OSMAG
W^^si
4.2.3
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0657-2 D
10-2
Sonstige Prfungen
-
Schluche auf Beschdigung prfen.
- Verschraubungen und Hubzylinder auf Dichtheit prfen.

-
Schraubenverbindungen prfen.
Lagerverschlei kontrollieren.
Steckvorrichtung und Zugentlastung prfen.
ltemperatur berwachen.
05.11.2008
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Sortier-Nr.
A 01.0751-1 D
4.3
Instandsetzung
4.3.1
Allgemeines
Biatt-Nr.
10-3
Bei der Instandsetzung mu grundstzlich folgendes beachtet werden:

Greifer stromlos machen. Nach jeder Demontage bzw. Reparatur ist eine berprfung
der Betriebsdrcke erforderlich. Bei der Druckeinstellung unbedingt die Angaben auf Bl.Nr. 10-2 beachten. Geeignete Prfmanometer sind zu verwenden.
4.3.2
Demontage
1. Schalen
Greifer im geffneten Zustand abstellen. Untere Traverse auf Bcke auflegen, damit
Bolzen entspannt sind. Untere Lenkarmbolzen entfernen. Schalenbolzen entfernen
(eventuell mit Abziehvorrichtung).
2. Lenkarme
Greifer abstellen wie unter Punkt 1 beschrieben. Untere und obere Lenkarmbolzen
entfernen.
3. Hydrauiikaggregat
Greifer im geffneten Zustand abstellen. Zuleitung zum Motor in Steckvorrichtung
abklemmen. Haube komplett entfernen. Schluche entfernen und auslaufendes l
auffangen. Behlterdeckelschrauben herausdrehen. Seil in Motor-Tragsen einhngen und Hydrauiikaggregat herausheben. Je nach Verschmutzungsgrad l filtern
oder erneuern. ltank abdecken (Verschmutzungsgefahr).
4. Pumpe
Das Hydrauiikaggregat, wie unter Punkt 3. beschrieben, demontieren. Hydrauiikaggregat, mit Motor nach unten, auf Bcke abstellen. Rohrleitungen von der Pumpe
zum Behlterdeckel entfernen. Befestigungsschrauben der Pumpe herausdrehen
und Pumpe abnehmen.
5. Steuerblock
Haube ffnen und Schluche am Steuerblock entfernen. Befestigungsschrauben
lsen und Steuerblock herausheben.
6. Motor (in Verbindung mit Punkt 3)
Zuleitung zum Motor in Steckvorrichtung abklemmen. Demontage des Steuerblockes
wie unter Punkt 5 beschrieben. Befestigungsschrauben entfernen. Seil in MotorTragsen einhngen und Motor herausheben.
05.11.2008
H ^ ^ h I
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PBNER
Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0751-2 D
10-3
7. Hubzylinder
Greifer im geffneten Zustand abstellen und Hubzylinder in senkrechter Position
fixieren. Die Sicherungsschrauben (Gewindestifte) an den Hutmuttern der Kolbenstangenbefestigung (obere Traverse) lsen und die Hutmuttern entfernen. Mit Hilfe
der Greiferhydraulik knnen die Kolbenstangen aus den Aufnahmekltzen gezogen
werden. Dazu wird die Hydraulik in Betrieb genommen und der Greifer auf
Schlieen" gefahren. Sollten sich die Kolbenstangen nicht lsen, kann durch vorsichtiges Erwrmen der Aufnahmekltze bei gleichzeitiger Bettigung der Hydraulik
(Schlieen") die Verbindung Kolbenstange / Aufnahmeklotz gelst werden. Wenn
die Kolbenstangen vollstndig eingefahren sind, knnen nach Entfernen der Zylinderfhrungsmuttern die Stangendichtungen, Abstreifer und Fhrungsbnder bzw.
Fhrungsbuchsen gewechselt werden.
Sollen die Hubzylinder vollkommen ausgebaut werden, so sind diese nach den Entfernen der Schlauchverbindungen in ein geeignetes Hebezeug einzuhngen. Nach
Lsen der Achshalter an der unteren Traverse mssen die unteren Befestigungsbolzen durch leichtes Anheben der Hubzylinder entlastet werden und die Zylinderbefestigungsbolzen lassen sich seitlich austreiben.
Die Hubzylinder werden auf geeignete Unteriagen abgelegt, d.h. es ist insbesondere
darauf zu achten, da die Kolbenstangen bei der Lagerung und bei Montagearbeiten
nicht beschdigt werden knnen.
22.09.1999
^ ^ ^ ^ Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
4.3.3
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0804 D
10-4
Reparatur
1.
Schalen- und Lenkarmlagerbuchsen erneuern

Demontage wie unter 4.3.2 besclirieben. Versclilissene Buclisen durcli neue
ersetzen und mit geeignetem Kleber (z. B. Loctite, Typ 638) sichern.
2.
Bolzen erneuern
Bei Erneuerung der Lagerbuchsen ist die Laufflche der Bolzen zu berprfen.
Bei stark verschlissener Laufflche sollten auch die Bolzen erneuert werden.
3.
Hubzylinder-Dichtungen auswechseln
3.1 Stangendichtung
a)
Flansch entfernen. Defekte Dichtung entfernen und durch neue ersetzen.
b)
In Sonderfllen kann auch zum Austauschen eine geteilte Stangendichtung eingesetzt werden. Bei Ersatzteilbestellung mu dann der
Hinweis geteilte Ausfhrung" in der Bestellung angegeben werden.
Die Vorgehensweise gem Punkt b) sollte wirklich nur in Sonderfllen
zum Tragen kommen.
3.2 Kolbendichtung und O-Ringe

Hubzylinder bis auf den Hubzylinderbolzen demontieren (wie unter 4.3.2 Punkt 7 beschrieben). Stangenfhrung lsen und Kolbenstange komplett, aus
dem Zylinderrohr herausziehen. Es ist hierbei zweckmig, alle Dichtungen
komplett zu wechseln.
4.
Pumpe
Eine eigenstndige Reparatur der Pumpe ist nicht empfehlenswert. Defekte
Pumpe evtl. durch die SMAG reparieren lassen.
5.
Steuerblock
a)
Druckbegrenzungsventil auswechseln - siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6
b)
Sperrventil wechseln - siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6.
Beide Deckel entfernen und kompletten Sperrventileinsatz wechseln. Es mssen

alle zum Sperrventileinsatz gelieferten Teile komplett ausgetauscht werden, damit
eine einwandfreie Funktion gewhrleistet ist.
05.11.2008
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
4.3.4
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0020 D
10-5
Montage
Die Montage ist in umgekelirter Reifienfolge der Demontage vorzunehmen. Bei den
mit Dichtungen versehenen Teilen ist darauf zu achten, da diese beim Einbau nicht
beschdigt werden.
Fr Gelenklager drfen keine Fette mit Bestandteilen aus MoS2 (Molydndisulfid)
venwendet werden, sondern nur druckfeste, lithiumverseifte Fette nach DIN 51825K2k.
Nach erfolgter Montage ist der auf der Maschinenkarte angegebene Betriebsdruck
zu berprfen.
ACHTUNG!
Bei greren Instandsetzungen bitte Kundendienst anfordern!
13.09.1999
B [ ^
4.3.5
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0904-1 D
10-6
Steuerblock NG 20 - Normal- und Eilgangausfhrung
Stellschrauben nur verstellen, wenn Greifer beim ffnen oder Schlieen rattert. Bei
erforderlicher Verstellung folgendermaen vorgehen:
Stellschraube vollkommen herausdrehen und so weit wieder einschrauben, bis Rattern
aufhrt. Der angestaute Druck soll 30 bar nicht berschreiten, da sonst unntige ierwrmung auftritt oder die einwandfreie ffnungs- und Schliefunktion des Greifers nicht
gewhrleistet ist.
Bei Verschmutzung Druckbegrenzungsventileinheit reinigen.
13.09.1999
^ B B ^ Salzgitter
flAaschinenbau
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 01.0904-2 D
10-6
2/2-Wege-Einbaupatrone
IVIagnet
05.11.2008
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
LEMPFEHLUNG
4.4
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 05.1800-1 D
11-1
Tabelle: lempfehlung - Hydraulikle

Fr den normalen Betrieb ist ein Hydraulikl der ISO-Viskosittsklasse VG 46 zu
verwenden. Fr Sommerbetrieb bzw. Winterbetrieb ist entsprechend der
Umgebungstemperatur ein Hydraulikl der ISO-Viskosittsklasse VG 68 bzw. VG 32 zu
verwenden.
Nachfolgend sind einige geeignete lsorten aufgefhrt; weitere knnen nach den o. g.
Kriterien ausgewhlt werden:
^
ISO-Viskosittsklasse
Winter
Sommer ^
VG 32
VG 46
VG 68
HVLP 32
HLP 46
HLP 68
nach DIN 51524/3 HV
nach D1N51524/2
nach DIN51524/2
ltennperaturberelch
-20C bis +80C
-5C bis +80C
O X bis +80C
Umgebungstemperatur
< -5C bis -20C
-5C bis +30C
> +30C
Vitam HF 32
Vitam GF 46
Vitam GF 68
ENERGOL SHF 32
ENERGOL HLP 46
ENERGOL HLP 68
HYSPIN AWH 32
HYSPIN AWS 46
HYSPIN AWS 68
ESSO
UNIVIS J 32
NUTO H 46
NUTO H 68
MOBIL
DTE 13
DTE 25
DTE 26
SHELL
Tellus Oel T 32
Tellus Oel 46
Tellus Oel 68
Rando Oil HD AZ-32
Rando Oil HD B-46
Rando Oil HD C-68
Norm
ARAL
BP
CASTROL
TEXACO
Sollten diese le nicht beschaffbar sein, kann auf ATF-le (Automatic-TransmissionFluid) ausgewichen werden.
ATF-le gem Spezifikation
DEXRON - Qualitt
Typ A, Suffix A
ARAL
Getriebel SGF 84
Getriebel ATF 22
BP
Autran ATF
Autran DX II
CASTROL
Castrol TQ
Castrol TQ-Dexron II, Fluid 9226
ESSO
ATF-Type A Suffix A
ATF Dexron
MOBIL
ATF 200
ATF 220
SHELL
Donax TM
Donax TA
DEA
Deafluid 1585
Deafluid 4011
05.11.2008
OSAAAG
k O
i I Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
PEiNERGreifer
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
LEMPFEHLUNG
Sortier-Nr.
Blatt-Nr.
A 05.1800-2 D
11-2
Haftschmierstoff
Lithiumverseiftes Schmierfett
DIN 51513 B C
DIN 51825/2 KTA-L2k
AGIP
FIN 332/F
Longlime Grease 2
ARAL
Sinit FZL 3
Aralub HL 2
AVIA
Avilub BB 21
Avilub Spezialfett WL
BP
Energrease l\/IP-l\/IG2
Energrease LS 2
Calypsoi
Eculit ST
Calypsoi H 442
Castrol
Spheerol SX2
Spheerol AP 2 LZV-EP
Spheerol E PL 2
DEA
Trixolit 2X
Glissando 20
DEFROL
Defrol BC
Defrol Fett KTA-L2k
ESSO
Surett Fluid 4K
Beacon 2
FINA
Cabline 1060
Marson LU
Fuchs
Duotac F 310 L
Renolit MP
Mobil Oil
Mobiltac D
Mobilux 2
Shell
Cardium Fluid C
Alvania R 2
Alvania G 2
25.08.2000
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
OSAAAG
PEINER Greifer
PfPP''"* Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
5.0
5.1
5.2
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0955-1 D
12-1
- Strung
Kennzeichen
Greifer arbeitet
nicht
Motor luft nicht, Motor

erhlt keine Spannung
Spannung vorhanden
Motor luft
ffnungs- oder
Schliezeiten merklich
vedangsamt
Greifer bringt keine

Leistung
Fehlerquellen
Sicherungen
Schtze
Schlauchleitungen
Anschluklemmen
Schleifringe und Brsten der
Kabeltrommel
- Steckvorrichtung
Motor defekt
Kupplung defekt
Magnete M3, M4 (M1 oder M2)
schalten nicht
- Druckleitung von der Pumpe zum
Steuerblock defekt
- Druckfeder im Druckbegrenzungsventil gebrochen (siehe Bl.Nr. 10-6)
Druckbegrenzungsventil verstellt
(siehe 4.2.2)
- Pumpe verschlissen
- Druckbegrenzungsventil verschmutzt oder Feder ermdet.
Drucknachstellung erforderlich
(siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
- lstand im Tank zu niedrig
ACHTUNG!
Wenn die Pumpe hierbei Luft
ansaugt, fhrt es meistens zur
Zerstrung der Pumpe.
Zuleitung von der Pumpe zum
Steuerblock hat sich gelst oder
ist beschdigt.
Zylinderdichtungen undicht
25.08.2000
QSMAG
i ^
5.0
LB
PEiNERGreifer
5.3
Sortier-Nr.
Biatt-Nr.
A 01.0955-2 D
12-2
Strung
5.2
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Greifer bringt keine

Leistung
Strungen an der
Hydraulik
Kennzeichen
Fehlerquellen
Schalen ffnen oder

schlieen selbstttig
Sperrventil im Steuerblock
(Schlie- bzw. ffnungsseite)
O-Ring fr Sperrventilkrper beschdigt
Zylinderdichtungen
Eine Rohrverschraubung ist undicht.
Schalen ffnen und

schlieen nicht
Der Motor hat die falsche Drehrichtung; siehe auch 5.1
Schalen rattern beim

ffnen und Schlieen
Drosselquerschnitt nicht richtig

eingestellt (siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
ltemperatur zu hoch
Die Magnete sind nach Beendigung des Schlie- bzw.

ffnungsvorganges zu lange
eingeschaltet
- Drosselquerschnitt nicht richtig
eingestellt (siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
- Im ltank befindet sich zu wenig
oder ungeeignetes l.
- Wegeventil WV4 defekt. Pumpe
wird nicht auf Frdermenge 0
geregelt.
13.09.1999
OSMAG
PEINER
MOTOR GRABS
Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0186-1 E
1-1
C o n t e n t s
Page-no.
1.0
Data sheet
2.0
2.1
2.1.1

Constructional Description
3-1
2.1.2
Functional Description
4/1-3
2.2
Hydraulic diagram 2303.3934
5/1-2
2.4
Parts list
7-1
3.0
3.1
Observation of U W regulations
3.2
3.2.1
Putting into Operation

Initial start-up
3.2.2
Daily start-up
3.3
Information for Operation
3.4
Shut-down
3.5
Reoperation
3.6
Transportation
4.0
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
Maintenance
Oil changes
Lubrication instructions
Oil filter
Motor
Condensation water
Salzgltter Maschinenbau AG
WindmhlenbergstraBe 20-22
3B259 Salzgltter / Germany
Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
pelnerPsmaa.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de
Class-no.
A 01.0252 E
A 01.0316/1-3 E
A 01.0419/1-2 E
A 01.0465 E
8/1-2
A 01.0551/1-2 E
8/1-2
8/1-2
A 01.0551/1-2 E
A 01.0551/1-2 E
9-1
A 01.0126 E
9-2
A 01.0580 E
9-2
A 01.0580 E
9-2
A 01.0580 E
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
A
A
A
A
A
Vorstand:
Jrgen Blalel<
Ulrich Decker
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E

Registergericht:
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389
13.09.1999
OSAAAG
IVI Q T O K G R A B S
PBNER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0186-2 E
1-2
C o n t e n t s
Page-no.
Class-no.
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
Required cliecl<s
Ciiecl< oil level
Check and adjust pressure
10-2
10-2
10-2
A 01.0657/1-2 E
A 01.0657/1-2 E
A 01.0657/1-2 E
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
Repair
General
Disassembly
Repair works
Assembly
Control block
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
A
A
A
A
A
4.4
Table of recommended hydraulic oil
11/1-2
A 05.1800/1-2 E
5.0
5.1
Grab not functioning
12/1-2
A 01.0955/1-2 E
5.2
Grab malfunctioning
12/1-2
A 01.0955/1-2 E
5.3
Failure of hydraulic system
12/1-2
A 01.0955/1-2 E
6.0
Spare parts list and electric equipment
38259 Salzgitter/Germany
Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424
E-mall:
pelner@smaq.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de
Vorstand:
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker
01.0751/1-2 E
01.0751/1-2 E
01.0804 E
01.0020 E
01.0904/1-2 E

Registergericht:
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389
Salzgitter IVlaschinenbau
Order no.:
AB00001867
Product:
MZGL 10000-3-L
Material no.:
1000052927
Serial no.:
2291 / 2292
Year of construction:
2011
Deadweight:
7085 kg
Required crane lifting capacity:
17.085 kg
Operatina instructions: A 01.0186
Fillinq volume/admissible liftinq capacitv

Filling volume [m^]
Piled density [t/m^]
adm. lifting capacity / SWL [t]
Vi = 10,0
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =
1,0
10,0
Bulk material grain size:
1,0 - max. 50 mm
Theoretical workinq times (free in space / without pickinq up bulk material)

60 Hz
50 Hz
8 sec.
- 14-18 sec.
Opening of grab
Closing of grab
sec.
sec.
Electric Data
Mode of Operation:
Motor type:
Intermittent service:
Motor power:
Voltage:
Frequency:
Current:
Rated current:
28
400
50
57
S6
180L-4
40 % duty cycle
kW
V
Hz
three phase
A10%
System of protection:
Insulation class:
max. duty Classification:
Circuit diagram no.:
Plug-in connector:
Control voltage:
IP65
H
2307.9520
ODU-UW
220 V / 50 Hz
Hvdraulic Data
max. service pressure
Measuring point MA
Measuring point MB
Measuring point MP
Measuring point MPI
Measuring point MP2
Measuring point MLS
Pump type:
Control block:
Cylinder size:
Filled oil quality:
Oil tank capacity:
Filter type:
Filter mesh:
Admissible service temperature:
Author:
12.04.2011 / GK - Pape
Opening of grab [+10 bar]
Closing of grab [10 bar]
230
120
V30D-075
AV4298-NG20E
180/110x750 stroke
HLP 46
255 1
Argo
i6(c) = 200 Exapor
- 5 C up to + 85 C
Dimensions
Author:
12.04.2011 / GK - Pape
05.11.2008
OSMAG
fBBKH Salzgitter Maschinenbau
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer
2.0
Description and surveys
2.1
Basic unit: Description of construction
2.1.1
Description of construction (see page-no. 7-1)
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0252 E
3-1
The structure ofthe PEINER Motor Dual-Scoop Grab is as follows:

The two scoops, provided to pick up the bulk material, are pivoted at the lower traverse
by means of pins. These pins forms the pivot points of the scoops. The lips of the
scoops consist of wear-resistant material.
The lower traverse is designed to serve as oil tank. The hydraulic unit, consisting of a
motor, a variable high-pressure axial pump being suspended in the oil tank and a control
unit, is vertically mounted onto the traverse. The hydraulic unit being protected by a
hood is arranged in a low position on the grab thus permitting a small overall height and
a favourable position of the centre of gravity of the grab.
The lifting cylinders are mounted on both sides of the hydraulic unit and are fixed to the
lower and upper traverse. The scoops are opened and closed by retraction and
extension of the piston rods. The piston rods are surface-treated and corrosionresistant. The hoist cylinders are connected with the control unit via hydraulic hoses.
The link arms are fitted to connect the scoops with the upper traverse. The Suspension
device which forms the connection between the grab and the existing lifting equipment is
mounted to the upper traverse.
The motor is supplied with current by means of a plug-in connector as well as by means
of a rubber hose. In order to prevent damages a tension relief is provided to discharge
the plug-in connector.
All components and parts are made out of high-quality material and are easily
interchangeable. The bearing bushes are made of seawater-resistant material.
PEINER Motor Dual-Scoop Grabs with kick plates (see parts list, page no. 7-1) are able
to handle material with high-density after the kick plates have been removed. Please
see data machinery card concerning various material densities.
13.09.1999
OSMAG
2.1.2
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0316-1 E
4-1
Functional description (see page-no. 5-1, hydraulic diagram)

Operating mode:
Continuous duty (S6)

Variable delivery pump (Power regulator plus Load-Sensing
regulator)
Control block NG 20-E / NG 30-E
General:
Operating mode S6 means tliat when the grab is in Operation the drive motor and thus
also the hydraulic pump turn in only one rotational sense. The change of the motional
sense of the working cylinders is controlied by one bidirectional valve for the open grab"
function and one bidirectional valve for the close grab" function. If, with drive motor
rotating, no valve is connected (consumer), i. e. the grab Shells do not close nor open,
the hydraulic pump only sucks as much oil as is required to maintain the lubrication and
the operational safety of the pump. This operating working order of the pump is
hereinafter described under the term zero-lift regulation".
The Load-Sensing regulator, for short LS regulator, only functions as a min./max.regulator", i. e. via the LS regulator the pump recognizes that,
1.
a consumer has been connected and the pump must switch to max. output,
2.
a consumer has been disconnected and the pump has to return to zero-lift
regulation",
3.
a System pressure pre-set at the pressure relief valve (DV1 or DV2) has been
reached and that the pump has to return towards zero-lift regulation" in order to
suck only as much oil as is required to maintain the system pressure.
The power regulator of the pump is adapted to the maximum drive motor power, i. e.
depending on the drive power, the output of the pump is continuously adjusted to the
Output of the drive motor in case a determined operating pressure is exceeded and
continues to increase.
Functional description open grab":
The soienoid valve (M2) of the pilot control valve of the bidirectional valve (WV2) is
actuated. As soon as the pilot control valve reaches the switch position, the pump
changes over from the zero-lift regulation" to suck the maximum flow volume. At the
same time the main valve (bevel seat valve) is relieved at the rear side by the
bidirectional valve (VW2), i. e. hydraulic oil can escape via the connection (T1) into the
oil tank. The present pump pressure opens the main valve (WV2) and the oil flows
through the pressure line (Po) via the opened main valve (WV2), the internal block
connection (P2), the non-return valve (R2), the control block connection (B) and a hose
line to the piston side (KS) of the working cylinder.
At the same time, the non-return valve SV1 is opened via the control line (St1) and the
non-return valve (SV2) is closed via the control line (St2). Furthermore, the directional
valve (VW) connects the signal line (LS) to the open grab" function.
13.09.1999
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
A 01.0316-2 E
Page-no.
4-2
Upon the lifting motion of the working cylinder, the oil escapes from the piston rod side
(KSS) of the working cylinder and is led to pressure line via a hose line, the block
connection (A) and the opened non-return valve (SVl), i. e. to open the Grab the output
ofthe pump and the returning oil quantity are added (quick motion mode).
If the System pressure open grab" pre-set at the pressure relief valve (DV2) is reached,
the pressure relief valve (DV2) is opened and oil is led via connection (T) and the return
filter into the tank. The nozzle (D2) is dimensioned in such a way that less oil can follow
from the pressure line Po than escapes via the pressure relief valve. The resulting
pressure difference in line (LS) is transmitted in form of a signal to the LS-regulator".
The pump switches back and only sucks as much oil as is required to maintain the
System pressure.
Now the soienoid valve (M2) can be disconnected and the line (LS) can be relieved from
pressure via the pilot control valve of the bidirectional valve (VW2) and the connection
(T) towards the tank. The pump switches to zero-lift regulation".
As an additional system protection (e. g. if the pump regulation unit fails), there is a
pressure relief valve (DV3) in the pressure line (Po), which is permanently set to 2830Mpa. Depending on the pump type, this valve can also be located inside the pump.
Functional description "close grab":
The closing procedure is initiated by switching the magnet (M1) ofthe bidirectional valve
(WV1).
The procedure is analogue to the description open grab", except that when retracting
the piston rods, the oil getting out of the piston side (KS) of the working cylinders is lead
to the tank via a hose line, the control block connection (B), the opened non-return valve
(SV2), the connection (T) and the return filter (F). This means that for closing the grab
only the normal pump delivery rate is available.
The pressure in line A, which increases upon closing the scoops, is limited by pressure
switch DS. If the system pressure for close grab" adjusted on the pressure switch is not
reached, an electrical contact incorporated in the pressure switch disconnects the
electrical connection to the magnet (M1) and thanks to the disconnection ofthe magnet,
the line (LS) can be relieved towards the tank via pilot control valve of the bidirectional
valve (WV1) and the connection (T1). The pump goes over to zero-lift-regulation. The
pressure adjustment of pressure relief valve (DV1) is higher than the value set on the
pressure switch DS", i. e. for the functions open grab" and close grab", DV1 does not
have any function (please refer to the table Standard pressure adjustment").
The maximum pressure in line A is defined by the pressure switch (DS). When reaching
the maximum pressure on DS, the magnet (M1) is switched off (see general under
item 2).
If the bidirectional valves are switches off (WV1, WV2), the check valves (R1, R2) and
the non-return valves (SV1, SV2) prevent an automatic opening respectively closing of
the grab.
13.09.1999
MOTOR GRABS
QSMAG
PEiNERGreifer
M ^ W i Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0316-3 E
4-3
Output regulation:
ATTENTION !
The pump's sense of rotation is to the right, while looking at the

pump's drive shaft!
If, during the initial start-up, the Grab neither opens nor cioses, the motor might have the
wrong sense of rotation. Reconnect the supply cable to the motor.
Standard pressure adjustment:

DS
230 bar
DV1
250 bar
DV2
Grab closing
Grab opening
120 bar
DV3
Safety valve
280-300 bar
For the shall values, please also refer to the machinery data card.
Manometer connections:
The System pressures can be checked at the provided measuring points (for pressures
please refer to the machinery data card).
Closing:
Opening:
MPI.MA
MP2, MB
Pump pressure:
LS-pressure:
MP, MP1, MP2

MLS
Chattering of the scoops:

In order to prevent the scoops from chattering during the closing procedure, the
unlockable non-return valve SV1 should be slightly throttied. (Adjustment by means of
set screw, see page no. 10-6).
ATTENTION!
Do not close SV1 too far, as otherwise the oil will be heated
excessively!
01.10.2002
2.2
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0419-1 E
5-1
Hydraulic diagram 2303.3934

continuous duty (S6)
variable delivery pump (power regulator and LS-regulator)
control block NG 20-E, quick-motion design
KSS
KS
DS
MP2<^
01.10.2002
B ^ ^ H Salzgitter AAaschinenbau
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0419-2 E
5-2
Leqend:
A
B
D I , D2
DS
DV1,DV2,
=
DVS
E
F
KS
KSS
LS
M
M1,M2
MA, MB, MP =
MP1,MP2
N
P
Po
P1,P2
R1,R2
St1 - St4
SV1
SV2
T
T1
WV
WV1,WV2
=
pipe (closing)
pipe (opening)
nozzle
pressure switch
pressure relief valve (security valve)
quick-motion design
filter
piston side
piston rod side
Signal line "Load Sensing"
motor
magnet
pressure gauge connection
pressure gauge connection
Standard design
pump
pressure line
pump connection
nonreturn valve
control line
stop valve with lift stop
stop valve
oil tank
tank line
Shuttle valve
directional valve
03.05.2001
^ I M M ^ SalzgitterMaschinenbau
2.4
Parts list
MOTOR G R A B S
FEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0465 E
7-1
MOTOR GRABS
Saizgitter Maschinenbau
PEiNERGreifer
Class-no.
A 01.0551-1 E
3.0
3.1
Observation of U W regulations
Page-no.
8-1
The rules for the prevention of accidents concerning load-bearing equipment must be
complied with.
ATTENTION!
In order to prevent accidents when climbing up the grab, the

personnel for Operation and maintenance must take adequate
precautionary measures in accordance with the regulations for
the prevention of accidents in order to be protected against
falling down and other dangers.
3.2
Putting into Operation
3.2.1
Initial start-up
-
Check existing voltage with that of the grab (please refer to manual).
Check the hydraulic oil level (refer to point 4.2.1).
Refill oil which may have leaked during transportation (refer to Recommended Fluids
- sheet no. 11-1).
At temperatures below -10C either preheat the hydraulic oil or operate the closed
grab (locked against opening) until the oil has warmed up to QC.
Fit the Suspension device to the load-bearing equipment.
Check the SWL of the crane.
Remove the protective caps from plug and socket outlets.
Connect the plug-in connector to the grab. Pay attention to the sense of rotation!
Should the grab be supplied without assembled electrical device, connect an
adequate device according to the hydraulic diagram.
Fit tension relief, take care that cable does not stress the plug-in connector.
Observe point 4.3 and make a trial run.
Check if bolted joint is leakproof.
After approx. 50 operational hours change hydraulic oil filter (refer to drawing sheet
no. 10-1).
Standard desicin
oil level indicator oil drain plug
oil filter
13.09.1999
OSMAG
i
3.2.2
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0551-2 E
8-2
Daily start-up
-
Check oil level. (refer to point 4.2.1).
- At temperatures below -10C, either preheat the hydraulic oil or operate the closed
grab (locked against opening) until the oil has warmed up to approx 0C.
-
Check plug-in connector and tension relief to proper fit.
Check whether bolted joints, hoses and cylinders are leakproof.
13.09.1999
AG
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
A 01.0126 E
3.3
Operation
3.3.1
Information for Operation
Page-no.
9-1
When handling bulk material which impedes the perfect closing of the grab, we
recommend to lift the grab slightly during the closing procedure. In order to reach the
maximum filling capacity, the grab should be set down horizontally. The grab must never
dash down on the bulk material at high speed. Heavy impacts should be avoided, in
order to prevent damages.
ATTENTION!
In order to avoid unnecessary heating of the hydraulic oil, the

opening procedure must be switched off immediateiy after the
operating condition "grab opened" is reached!
05.11.2008
QSAAAG
H H ^ M SalzgitterMaschinenbau
3.4
MOTOR GRABS
FEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0580 E
9-2
Shut-down
- The grab has to be placed in closed condition so that the piston rods are retracted.
- If the grab is laid down on board seagoing vessels, there should be an aperture of 1
to 2 cms between the bottom lips (water outlet).
The grab must additionally be protected against corrosion by greasing the free end of
the piston rod with an adhesive lubricant.
In case the grab is intended to be put out of Operation for a longer period of time,
grease must be applied to all lubricating points.
In addition, for longer periods out of service, the grab should be exercised every
three months to prevent corrosion and gumming of the hydraulic fluid in the control
elements.
- The vent must be closed by means of the plastic cover (see reference plate on the
upper traverse)
- The plug-in connector must be covered by means of a protection cap.
3.5
Reoperation
- All instructions described under item 3.2 must be observed.
-
3.6
Make sure that the equipment is free of damages.
Transportation
- The grab is to be transported in a vertical position and is to be secured against tilting.
- The piston rods must be protected against damage if the grab is transpori:ed in
opened position.
05.11.2008
QSMAG
4.0
4.1
Maintenance
4.1.1
Oil cliange
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0602-1 E
10-1
The first oil ist to be carried out after about 500 service hours. Further oil changes every
1000 service hours - after one year at the latest.
Extraordinary service conditions nnight cause excessive pollution or an ageing ofthe oil. In
such cases we recommend to have on oil analysis carried out in the laboratories of the oil
supplier.
Oil brands, see table:
Recommended hydraulic oil page no. 11-1
Proceeding:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Set down the opened grab.

Unscrew oil dipstick (tank Ventilation).
Put a suitable collecting basin under the oil drain plug.
Unscrew and clean drain plug.
Drain oil out of tank (at operating temperature of the unit).
Clean tank.
Replace oil filter insert.
Rescrew oil drain plug.
Fill tank (via filter).
Check oil level (see 4.2.1).
Close the tank air-tight, while the grab scoops are opened.
05.11.2008
MOTOR GRABS
OSMAG
w i M l SalzgitterMaschinenbau
4.1.2
PEINER Greirer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0602-2 E
10-1
Lubricating Instructions
Lubricating points are marked in red. Lubricating points G, H and K are to be lubricated
weekly.
Lubricating point I is to be lubricated every 6 months. (Recommended grease see page
no. 7-1). In principle, all the lubricating points should be greased before restarting the
grab.
4.1.3
Oil filter
In case of new units, the filter insert is to be replaced after about 50 service hours, in
any other case after every oil change. Furthermore, the oil filter must be checked after
repairs of the hydraulic system and, if necessary, the filter insert must be cleaned or
replaced.
4.1.4
Motor
After 15000 service hours, the bearings are to be cleaned and half-filled with lithiumsaponified grease, dropping point 160 - 180C.
4.1.5
Condensation water
Drain Condensed water. For this purpose, the drain plug is to be unscrewed (only for
undenwater Operation).
14.09.1999
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER
Greifer
Class-no.
A 01.0657-1 E
Page-no.
10-2
Required ciiecks
Clieck oil level
-
Oil level is to be checked when grab is closed and piston rods are retracted.
grab must be in correct vertical position.
Check oil dipstick for max. or min. oil level.
- Too much oil will lead to an excessive pressure in the tank.

-
Insufficient oil can cause overheating in the hydraulic system and could damage the
pump.
Check and adjust pressure (see picture)

Oil pressure should be checked at the following points:
Point MB on the lifting cylinders for opening pressure and point MA on the lifting
cylinders for closing pressure when the hood is closed.
Point MB on the control block for opening pressure and point MA on the control block for
closing pressure, when the hood is opened.
At the control plate (opened hood), the main pump pressure and the load-sensingpressure can be measured.
The hood must be closed to adjust the oil pressure. Opening oil pressure is regulated by
adjusting the pilot valve for the pressure relief valve DV2. Closing oil pressure is
regulated by adjusting the pilot valve DV1. For data see machine card point 1.0.
Eilgangausfhrung
Measuring points:
MA
DVI
MP1
MP
close grab
closing
pump pressure closed
pump pressure
MB
DV2
MP2
MLS
open grab
opening
pump pressure opened
Load Sensing
14.09.1999
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
A 01.0657-2 E
4.2.3
-
Check high pressure hoses for dannage.
Check tightness of bolted joints and lifting cylinders.
Check screw connections.
Check bearing for wear.
Check plug-in connector and tension relief.
Page-no.
10-2
05.11.2008
OSMAG
1
4.3
Repairs
4.3.1
Genera!
IVIOTOR G R A B S
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0751-1 E
10-3
When repairing the grab fundamentqally consider the following.

Disconnect the grab from the power supply. After every dismounting resp. repair, a
check of the operating pressuresis necessary. When adjusting the pressure, the figures
mentioned on sheet no. 10-2 have to be complied with at any case. Adequate test
manometers are to be used.
4.3.2
Dismanteling
1. Scoops
Deposit grab in open position. Put lower frame on supports, so that pins are released.
Remove lower steering arm bolts and scoop pins (may be by means of a detaching
device).
2. Steering arms
Deposit the grab in the position described under point 1. Remove upper and lower
pins of the steering arm.
3. Hydraulic aggregate
Deposit grab in its open position. Disconnect the cable from the grab motor to the
electric socket. Remove complete hood. Remove hoses and collect leaking oil.
Unscrew tank cover screws. Connect rope with the carrying handles ofthe motor and
lift out the hydraulic aggregate. Depending on the contamination level, filter or renew
oil. Cover the oil tank (danger of contamination).
4. Pump
Dismount the hydraulic aggregate as described under point 3. Deposit the hydraulic
aggregate on frames, with the motor at the bottom. Disconnect tubes from the pump
to the tank cover. Unscrew fastening screws and lift up the pump.
5. Control block
Open hood and disconnect hoses from the control block. Unscrew fastening screws
and take up the control block.
6. Motor (in connection with item 3)
Disconnect cable from grab motor to electric socket. Dismount control block as
described under point 5. Remove fastening screws. Connect rope to the carrying
handles and lift out the motor.
Salzgitter ftAaschinenbau
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer
Ciass-no.
A 01.0751-2 E
Page-no.
10-3
7. Lifting cylinders
Deposit the opened grab and fix lifting cylinders in vertical position. Loosen the
locking screws (stud bolts) at the cap nuts of the piston rod fixation (upper traverse)
and remove the cap nuts.
The piston rods can be pulied out of the holding blocks by means of the grabs
hydraulic system. For this purpose, the hydraulic system must be started and drive
the grab to "CLOSING".
If, contrary to expectation, the piston rods cannot be loosened, the connection of
piston rod/holding block can be loosened by carefui heating of the holding blocks and
simultaneous Operation of the hydraulic system ("CLOSING"). If the piston rods are
completely retracted, the rod packings, the scrapers and the guide bands resp. guide
bushes can be replaced after removal of the cylinder guide nuts.
If the cylinders are completely dismounted, they have to be suspended by a suitable
lifting appliance after removal of the hose connections. After having loosened the pin
locking device (axle holder) at the lower traverse, the lower cylinder fastening pins
have to be relieved by slight lifting of the lifting cylinders so that the cylinder fastening
pins can be removed laterally.
The cylinders are to be deposited on suitable material, i. e. special attention has to be
paid that the piston rods are not susceptible to damages during the storage or
assembly works.
MOTOR GRABS
4.3.3
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0804 E
10-4
Repair worlts
1.
Replace the bearing bushes of the Shells and steering arms

Disassembly as described under point 4.3.2. Replace the worn bushes by new
ones and stick in by means of a suitable adhesive, e. g. Loctite type 638.
2.
Replace the pins

When replacing the bearing bushes, check the contact surface of the pins.
Replace the pins too, if the contact surface is very worn.
3.
Replace the lifting cylinder seals

3.1
Rod seal
a) Remove flange, disassemble piston. Replase new packings for damaged
ones.
b) In special cases a split rod packing may also be used for replacement. In
this case the piston need not be disassembled. The notion split design"
must be mentioned in the spare parts order.
The proceeding described in item b) really applies only for special cases.
3.2
Piston packing and o-rings

Completely disassemble the lifting cylinder except cylinder pin (refer to point
7 of 4.3.2). Loosen the piston guide and completely withdraw piston rod from
the cylinder. When doing this, it is expedient to replace all the packings.
4.
Pump
We do not recommended to repair the pump. Send the defective pump to our
works.
5.
Control block
a)
Replace the pressure relief valve (see page-no. 10-6)
b)
Replace the stop valve (see page-no. 10-6)

Remove both covers and replace the whole stop valve assembly. Replace all
parts completely, so as to ensure perfect Operation.
05.11.2008
MOTOR G R A B S
4.3.4
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0020 E
10-5
Assembly
Carry out the assembly in reverse order of the disassembly. Take care that the parts
provided with packings ar not damaged during the assembly.
Do not use grease containing MoS2 (molybdenum disulphide additives) for spherical
piain bearings but only pressure-proof lithium-saponified greases to DIN 51825-K2k.
After the assembly, ensure that the service pressures comply with those indicated on
the data sheet.
)
ATTENTION!
For major repair works, call the after-sales service technician!
13.09.1999
Salzgitter ftAaschinenbau
4.3.5
MOTOR GRABS
PErNER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0904-1 E
10-6
Control block NG 20 - Standard and quick-motion design
The adjusting screws are only to be adjusted if the grab chatters when being opened or
closed. If an adjustment is necessary, proceed as follows:
Completely unscrew the adjusting screws and then screw them in until the chattering
stops. The accumulated pressure must not exceed 30 bar, othenwise the oil is
overheated unintentionally and a perfect opening and closing of the grab cannot be
guaranteed.
If soiled, the pressure relief valve must be cleaned.
13.09.1999
MOTOR G R A B S
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0904-2 E
10-6
2/2-way built-in valve unit
magnet
05.11.2008
OIL RECOMMENDATION
4.4
PEINER Greifer
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 05.1800-1 E
11-1

For normal Operation, a hydraulic fluid of ISO-viscosity VG 46 shall be used. For
summer or winter Operation, a hydraulic fluid of ISO-viscosity VG 68 or FB 32 is to be
used according to the ambient temperature.
Some suitable fluid types are listed below, others may be chosen according to the a. m.
criteria:
^
Winter
Summer.
:
ISO viscosity
VG 32
VG 46
VG68
HVLP 32
HLP 46
HLP 68
acc. to DIN51524/2
acc. to DIN51524/2
Range of oil temperature
-20C to +80C
-5C to +80C
0C to +80C
Ambient temperature
< -5C to -20C
-5C to +30C
> +30C
Vitam HF 32
Vitam GF 46
Vitam GF 68
ENERGOL SHF 32
ENERGOL HLP 46
ENERGOL HLP 68
HYSPIN AWH 32
HYSPIN AWS 46
HYSPIN AWS 68
ESSO
UNIVIS J 32
NUTO H 46
NUTO H 68
MOBIL
DTE 13
DTE 25
DTE 26
SHELL
Tellus Oel T 32
Tellus Oel 46
Tellus Oel 68
Rando Oil HD AZ-32
Rando Oil HD B-46
Rando Oil HD C-68
Standard
ARAL
BP
CASTROL
TEXACO
In case these fluids are not obtainable, ATF oils (Automatic Transmission Fluid) can be
used as an alternative.
ATFoils according to
specification
D E X R O N quality
type A, Suffix A
ARAL
Getriebel SGF 84 (gear oil)
Getriebel ATF 22 (gear oil)
BP
Autran ATF
Autran DX II
CASTROL
Castrol TQ
Castrol TQ-Dexron II, Fluid 9226
ESSO
ATF-Type A Suffix A
ATF Dexron
MOBIL
ATF 200
ATF 220
SHELL
Donax TM
Donax TA
DEA
Deafluid 1585
Deafluid 4011
05.11.2008
OIL RECOIVIIVIENDATION
i )
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 05.1800-2 E
11-2
Adhesive grease
Lithium saponified grease

lubricant
DIN 51513 B C
DIN 51825/2 KTA-L2k
AGIP
FIN 332/F
Longlime Grease 2
ARAL
Sinit FZL 3
Aralub HL 2
AVIA
Avilub BB 21
Avilub special grease WL
BP
Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS 2
Calypsoi
Eculit ST
Calypsoi H 442
Castrol
Spheerol SX2
Spheerol AP 2 LZV-EP
Spheerol E PL 2
DEA
Trixolit 2X
Glissando 20
DEFROL
Defrol BC
Defrol Fett KTA-L2k
ESSO
Surett Fluid 4K
Beacon 2
FINA
Cabline 1060
Marson LU
Fuchs
Duotac F 310 L
Renolit MP
Mobil Oil
Mobiltac D
Mobilux 2
Shell
Cardium Fluid C
Alvania R 2
Alvania G 2
SMAG
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer
Class-no.
A 01.0955-1 E
5.0
5.2
12-1
Failure
5.1
Page-no.
Grab not
functioning
Grab
malfunctioning
- Symptoms
Sources of failures
motor does not work

motor does not get
power (voltage)
fuses
contactors
hoses
connection terminal
sliprings and brushes in cable drum
plug-in connector
power available
motor defect
motor works
coupling defect
magnets M3, M4 (MI or M2) do not
work
pressure pipe between pump and
control block defect
spring in pressure relief valve
broken (see sheet no. 10-6)
opening / closing times

significantly slow
pressure relief valve maladjusted

(see 4.2.2)
pump worn out
soiled pressure relief valve dirty or
loss of spring pressure.
Readjustment required (see sheet
no. 10-6).
oil level in tank too low. If the pump
sucks air, this usually leads to
destruction of the pump,
connection between pump and
control block loose or damaged
cylinder gaskets leaking
scoops open / close

automatically
stop valve inside control block

(closing / opening side) damaged
o-ring for stop valve body damaged
cylinder glands
pipe connection leaking
scoops do not open or

close
motor has the wrong sense of

rotation, see also 5.1
scoops rattle upon

opening or closing
cross section at throttle valve not

propedy set (see sheet no. 10-6)
13.09.1999
IVIOTOR G R A B S
OSAAAG
^ B
5.0
Class-no.
Page-no.
A 01.0955-2 E
12-2
Failure
5.3
PEiNERGreifer
Failure of
hydraulic system
Symptoms
Sources of failures
oil temperature is too

high
after having finished the opening

resp. closing procedure, the
magnets remained actuated for too
long.
cross section at throttle valve not
properiy set (see sheet no. 10-6)
too little or unsuitable oil in tank
defective directional valve WV4,
pump is not regulated to 0-delivery.
07.02.2011
Kommission - Nr.
Commission - no.
Inhaltsverzeichnis
AB00001867
Contents
PEINER Greifer
Erzeugnis / Product:
Sach-Nr. / Subject no.
2291 / 2292
MZGL 10000-3-L
S1000052928
Benennung
Description
Bestell-Nr. /
Gruppe-Nr. /
Order-no.
Group-no.
Zusammenstellung
compilation
1000052928
1.0
Schale, kpl.
Shell, cpl.
0023153462
2.0
Grundgert
basic unit
0023150400
3.0
Anschlusskasten
connection box
0023153225
4.6
Haube, kpl.
hood, cpl.
0023153229
5.0
Lenkarm
steering arm
0023032651
6.0
Hubzylinder
lifting cylinder
0023151384
7.1
Hydrauiikaggregat
hydraulic unit
0023153206
10.0
Rcklauffilter
return filter
0000019384
11.0
Pumpe
pump
0000022940
12.0
Steuerblock
control block
0000041440
13.0
Bei Ersatzteiibestellung ist auer der Bestellnummer das Erzeugnis, die Werks-Nr. und Kommissions-Nr.
anzugeben.
requisition-no.
38259 Salzgltter / Germany
Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
pelner@)smaq.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de
Vorstand:
Jrgen Bialek
Ulrich Decker

Registergericht:
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389
07.04.2011
i ^ ^ M
Motor-Zweischalengreifer
Motor Dual-Scoop Grab
PEINER Greifer
MZGL-3
MZGL-3
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B1000052928
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
^
f\
1 aU
CM
O
CO
O
1/1
07.04.2011
OSMAG
^ H
r'EINER Greife
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Motor-Zweischalengreifer MZGL 10000-3-L

Motor Dual-Scoop Grab
MZGL 10000-3-L
Menge
Quantity
S"na
^mppe-Nr.
1000052928
^ Q
Benennung
Description
Pos.
Item
Besteli - Nr.
Order - no.
01
0023150400
Grundgert S6 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 3.0)

basic unit (see group-no. 3.0)
02
0023153462
Scliale, kpl. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 2.0)

Shell, cpl. (see group-no. 2.0)
03
0000022290
Schkel G-2150 1%"

shackle
04
0023142315
Ringkette
ring chain
06
0000014657
Lastbock LBS 51
Suspension ring
07
0000040887
Magnetspule 205 V DC
soienoid valve
05
1/1
B1000052928
07.04.2011
Schale, kpl.
Shell, cpl.
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023153462
Qruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
2.0
1/1
07.04.2011
OSMAG
M ^ W
F'EINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Schale, kpl.
Shell, cpl.
Pos.
Item
oSna
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
0023036574
0023153462
^
f\
^.U
Benennung
Description
01
12
Buchse 110,1/125x60
bush
1/1
B 0023151103
07.04.2011
Ersatzteilliste
WIIMH
Spare parts list
PEINER Greller
B 0023150400
Grundgert S6
basic unit
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
O.U
LOCO
o
CM
CD
N.
LO
CO
CO
V -
CD
OO 0)
CO a .
CD ><
lO
CM
Q.
1^
i s
/
/
'/
OJ
5
o
^1
^1
V
CJ)
O
CD
CM
"
''f
j E
o a5
a. .-
C
<U 0)
C3) "
S LO
wE
o a5
CL .-
1/2
07.04.2011
i ^ ^ W
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Salzgitter A/laschinenbau
B 0023150400
Grundgert S6
basic unit
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Q
0>U
120 Nm
44
49,50
2/2
07.04.2011
Ersatzteilliste
PEINER GreKer
Grundgert S6
basic unit
Pos.
Item
Spare parts list
S - n a - 0023150400
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
02
0023153210
Untere Traverse
lower traverse
03
0023032651
Lenkarm (s. Gruppe-Nr. 6.0)

steering arm (see group-no. 6.0)
04
0023153206
Hydraulikaggregat S6 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 10.0)

hydraulic unit (see group-no. 10.0)
05
0023153208
Obere Traverse
upper traverse
06
0023153229
Haube, kpl. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 5.0)

hood, cpl. (see group-no. 5.0)
07
0023153225
Anschlukasten (s. Gruppe-Nr. 4.6)

connection box (see group-no. 4.6)
08
0023151384
Hubzylinder 180/110x750 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 7.1)

lifting cylinder (see group-no. 7.1)
12
0023152823
Bolzen 90x236
pin
13
0027604259
Scheibe
disc
14
0063949920
Schnorr-Sicherungsscheibe S 20
locking washer
15
0065165403

hexagon screw
16
0023002654
16
Scheibe
disc
Q f\
0>U
Benennung
Description
01
1/5
B 0023150400
07.04.2011
OSMAG
^ B
F'EINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Grundgert S6
S-na
basic unit
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
0023150400
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
18
0023038711
Bolzen 100x473
pin
19
0002376077

disc
20
0000015958

hexagon screw
22
0023152927
Bolzen 110x191/206
pin
23
0027604339
Scheibe
disc
24
0000022845
Dichtring G 27x32x2,5 / CuFa / DIN 7603

sealing ring
25
0008022741
Verschlu-Shr. R %
screw plug
26
0023000753
lmestab
oil dipstick
27
0065169517

hexagon screw
28
0063949923
Schnorr-Sicherungsscheibe S 24
locking washer
Q
0>U
Benennung
Description
17
21
34
2551
Hydraulikl HLP 46 (s. lempfehlung)

hydraulic oil (look to oil recommendation)
2/5
B0023150400
07.04.2011
OSMAG
'EINER Greifer
^BWa Salzgitter Maschinenbau
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Grundgert S6
basic unit
Sr"na
0023150400
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Q
OiU
Benennung
Description
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
35
0001429472
Kappe 985/0101
cap
37
0023151091
Scheibe
disc
41
0069520310
12
Schmiernippel AlVIl 0x1 / 5.8Zn / DiN 71412

lubricating nipple
43
0000019384
Rcklauffilter E 223-58 Rl 14" (s. Gruppe-Nr. 11.0)

return filter (see group-no. 11.0)
44
0000022103
O-Ring 535x6 / 70 Shore

o-ring
45
0027991195
hose
46
0000022850
Dichtring C 48x55x2,5 / CuFa / DIN 7603

sealing ring
47
0023037227
Buchse 100,1/115x120
bush
48
0069359925
Verschraubung GE 25-PSR
bolted joint
49
0000022294
14
6kt.-Shr. M 12x100 / 10.9 / DIN EN 14399-4

hexagon screw
50
0023038496
14
Hlse
sieeve
36
42
3/5
B 0023150400
07.04.2011
^ ^ ^ H SalzgitterMaschinenbau
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
PEINER Greifer
Grundgert S6
S - n a 0023150400
basic unit
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
51
0065153607

hexagon screw
52
0063872402

disc
53
0069103160
Verschraubung BO-GEV 20-SR

bolted Joint
54
0027993982
hose
55
0023099007
hose
57
0069106716
Verschraubung EWSD 20-S/A3C

bolted joint
58
0069106717

bolted joint
59
0069360200
Verschraubung GE 35-PLR
bolted joint
60
0023038715
Scheibe
disc
61
0066828403

hexagon nut
62
0065150203

hexagon screw
63
0059007416
O-Ring 126x4 / 88NBR/156

O-ring
64
0065157409

hexagon screw
Menge
Quantity
Q f|
OaU
Benennung
Description
56
4/5
B 0023150400
07.04.2011
OSMAG
^ ^ ^ ^ SalzgitterMaschinenbau
F'EINER Greifer
Grundgert S6
basic unit
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
S"na
0023150400
Qruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
65
0065027900
6kt.-Shr. M 12x60 / 10.9 / DIN EN ISO 4014

hexagon screw
66
0063872803
Scheibe 12,0 / 200HV-A3P / DIN EN ISO 7090

disc
67
0069107086
Verschraubung ETSD 25-S

bolted joint
68
0069104978
Verschraubung BO-REDVD 25/20-S

bolted joint
69
0069106517
Verschraubung ELSD 25-S

bolted joint
70
0069371179
Reduzierstutzen Rl 1x114
reducer
71
0027993983
hose
Q rx
OaU
Benennung
Description
5/5
B 0023150400
09.11.2010
Anschlukasten
connection box
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023153225
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
M
TT.O
1/1
07.04.2011
OSMAG
I
f>EINER Grabs
Anschlukasten
connection box
Pos.
Item
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
S " n a 0023153225
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
M
T-.O
Benennung
Description
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
07
0023033092
Deckblech
cover plate
08
0065150409

hexagon screw
10
0023033091
Gummiplatte
rubber plate
13
0065157409

hexagon screw
14
0066828803

hexagon nut
15
0063872803

disc
01
09
1/1
B 0023153225
07.04.2011
Haube, kpl.
hood, cpl.
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023153229
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
j-
f\
O.U
1/1
07.04.2011
W W B
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
PEINER Greifer
Haube, kpl.
S-na
hood, cpl.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
0023153229
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
05
0065161102

hexagon screw
06
0001658888
Profilschnur-U, 920 mm
U-ring
08
0065157409

hexagon nut
09
0066828803

hexagon nut
10
0000023202
Kantenschutz - 1 7 8 5 mm
edge protector
jO.U
Benennung
Description
01
07
1/1
B0023153229
22.11.2010
BM^W Salzgitter Maschinenbau
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Lenkarm
B 0023032651
steering arm
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
|
OaU
\ZZZZZZ2
1/1
22.11.2010
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
^ ^ ^ H SalzgitterMaschinenbau
S - n a 0023032651
Lenkarm
steering arm
Pos.
Item
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
0023036278
O.U
Benennung
Description
01
02
03
Buchse 90/105x120
bush
1/1
B 0023032651
22.11.2010
rt^aW Salzgitter Maschinenbau
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Hubzylinder
B 0023151384
lifting cylinder
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no,
-m ^
/ . 1
1/1
22.11.2010
OSMAG
W i ^ M Salzgitter A/laschinenbau
FEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
oSna
Hubzylinder 180/110x750
lifting cylinder
0023151384
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Benennung
Description
01
0023037513
Zylinderrohr
cylinder tube
02
0023151385
Kolbenstange
piston rod
03
0023036661
Fhrungsbuchse
guide bush
04
0023036662
Kolben
piston
05
0023004023
Hutmutter
cap nut
06
0000021908
Gewindestift I\/I20x50 / A2 / DIN EN ISO 4029

stud bolt
07
0065036103
12
6kt.-Shr. M 20x70 / 10.9Zn / DIN EN ISO 4014

hexagon screw
08
0000021775
Kolbenfhrungsring
piston guide ring
09
0000028516
Glydring
sliding ring
10
0000021777
Stangenfhrungsring
rod guide ring
11
0000021778
Stepsealring
sealing ring
12
0000021779
Rimsealring
rim seal ring
13
0000021783
Abstreifer
scraper
14
0000021780
Kantsealring
Kant-seal ring
my ^
/ a 1
1/2
B0023151384
22.11.2010
OSMAG
F'EINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
0023151384
Hubzylinder 180/110x750
lifting cylinder
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
-m ^
/ . 1
Benennung
Description
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
15
0000021782
Kolbenfhrungsring
piston guide ring
16
0008014982
O-Ring 74x4
o-ring
17
0066829217
6kt.-Mu. M 20 / A2-70 / DIN EN ISO 4032

hexagon nut
18
0069520310

lubricating nipple
19
0000021781
Stangenfhrungsring
rod guide ring
20
0071002198
Stopfen 300 Fl 8
plug
21
0023037226
Buchse 110,1/115x90
bush
22
0000022080
Sprengring Bl 15
snap ring
23
0065646918
Gewindestift M 8x16 / 45H / DIN EN ISO 4029

threaded pin
00E3151384
Dichtsatz, kpl. best, aus Pos. 08-16,19

packing set, cpl. consisting of item 08-16,19
2/2
B0023151384
01.11.2007
Ersatzteilliste
Hydrauiikaggregat
hydraulic unit
PEINER Greifer
Spare parts list

B 0023153206
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
1 fl
fl
1 U>U
1/1
07.04.2011
1 i
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Hydrauiikaggregat
hydraulic unit
S-no.'^'
0023153206
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
- i n n
I UaU
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
01
0008111622
E-Motor 180L-4 (s. Maschinenkarte)

electric motor (see machine card)
02
0000022940
Pumpe V30D-075-RKN-LLS-2 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 12.0)

pump (see group-no. 12.0)
03
0000041440
Steuerblock AV 4298-OS, DN20-E (s. Gruppe-Nr. 13.0)

control block (see group-no. 13.0)
04
0023039052
Zwischenflansch
intermediate flange
05
0023033579
Kupplung M 65
coupling
06
0023033581
Behlterdeckel
Container cover
11
0069106700
Verschraubung EWSD 22-L

bolted joint
12
1000050161
Ro. 22x2 - 650 mm /1,0255-NBK/CZn /

DIN EN 10305-4
pipe
13
0069103138

bolted joint
14
0023039054
Scheibe
disc
15
0065157203

hexagon screw
16
0065157503

hexagon screw
17
0023039059
Dichtung
gasket
Menge
Quantity
Benennung
Description
1/3
B 0023153206
07.04.2011
Ersatzteilliste
^ ^ i
Spare parts list
Hydrauiikaggregat
hydraulic unit
S - n a 0023153206
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Hj A O
1 U.U
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
18
0023039060
Dichtung
gasket
19
0060001352

20
0069106717

bolted joint
0027993618
hose
24
0027993717
hose
25
0000024220
Verschraubung GE 12-PS/Ry4-ED
bolted joint
26
0069106713

bolted Joint
27
0069103162

bolted joint
29
1000050157
Ro. 8x1,5 - 650 mm / 1,0255-NBK/G / DIN EN 10305-4

pipe
30
0069103124
Verschraubung BO-GEV 10-LR

bolted joint
31
1000053382
Ro. 10x1,5 - 500 mm / 1,0255-NBK/G /

DIN EN 10305-4
pipe
Benennung
Description
21
22
23
28
2/3
B 0023153206
07.04.2011
^ S ^ S I Salzgitter Maschinenbau
lil^il
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Hydrauiikaggregat
Sina 0023153206
hydraulic unit
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Besteli - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
1 A fl
I U>U
Benennung
Description
32
33
0069372501
Schraubkupplung Minime
screw coupling Minime
34
0069372565
Minime-Stutzen
connecting piece
35
0000020108
Verschraubung 15/3-07/S6R
bolted joint
36
0069103148

bolted joint
37
0065161403

hexagon screw
38
0023039807
Pumpenflansch mit DBV - 300 bar (s. Gruppe-Nr. 12.1)

pump flange with pressure relief valve (see group-no.
12.1)
39
0065986360
40
0000014742
Zyl.-Shr. M 12x60 /10.9 / DIN EN ISO 4762

Ring-Shr. M 12 / G15A3P / DIN 580
eye screw
3/3
B0023153206
22.11.2010
Rcklauffilter E 223-58 RV"

return filter
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0000019384
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
11.0
1/1
22.11.2010
^ ^ ^ 1 SalzgitterMaschinenbau
PEiNERGreifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
S"na
Rcklauffilter E 223-58 RVA"

return filter
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
01
0059007519
Menge
Quantity
0000019384
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i -f f l
1 1 .U
Benennung
Description
Deckel, komplett (inkl. Pos. 04) ES 074.1212

cover, complete (incl. item 04)
02
Rohrniet A 8x0,75x25 / St / DIN 7340

tubulr rivet
03
0065874437
Zyl.-Shr. M 6x35 / 8.8A2P / DIN 912

04
0008014558
O-Ring 100x4
o-ring
N 007.1004
05
0008014882
O-Ring 90x4
o-ring
N 007.0904
06
E 210.1905
Ventil mit Federbgel

valve with spring holder
07
E211.1901
Rohr, kpl.
pipe, complete
08
0059007523
Exapor-Filterelement (mit Dichtungen)

Exaport - filter element (with gaskets)
09
ES 134.0104
Kopf teil
head part
1/1
B 0000019384
07.04.2011
OSMAG
S I -tterMaschinenbau
''"^
Ersatzteilliste
Spare pBrtS IlSt
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS
B 0000022852
pump
Gruppe-NGruppe-Nr.
Group-no,
- "12
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
PEINER Grabs
B 0000022852
pump
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
12.0
A-B
138
188
180.181 (-045)
^ X
10 Ass.strokel
[60 Ass. Splint snafti

183134'
ise^"'
70.Ass.camplaj:e bear.l fsOAss.contr^head} 40
C-D
73
32 , 43
35Ass.pistDn
44,45/
54
.170
171,196
60 Ass.key shaft
7
77x 78x 76 33 186
215x 198
120 Ass;f.inciicator shaft
50 Ass. cylinder barrel
Gezeichnet fr Rechtslauf / Drawirtg shows right-hahd-ratlon

X - Tarikdse bei Ausfhrung mit L-Regler / Tank nozzle for design with L-regulator
2/6
07.04.2011
M ^ ^ Salzgitter Maschinenbau
PEINER Grabs
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0000022852
pump
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
-1 O A
I iCmXj
X - SAE- und UN-Ausfhrung

SAE- and Un-design
V30D-045/-075
Standard
3/6
07.04.2011
Ersatzteilt iste
Spare parts list
PEINER Grabs
B 0000022852
pump
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
"i O H
I B U
Zsb. Regelventil L
Ass. regulator L
CM 00
O
O
00 CO
C M C M O C M O O O O
cocooocococococo
CD
CM
CO
00
00
CM
CO
4/6
Ersatzteilliste
pump
PEINER Grabs
Spare parts list

B 0000022852
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i O fl
I U
5/6
07.04.2011
i l M a SalzgitterMaschinenbau
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
PEiNERGrabs
B 0000022852
pump
106,107
203
206
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
108
204
101
i O A
1 d.KJ
104
102,103
6/6
07.04.2011
^3
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minSna 0000022940

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
bT
7952508.00
Pos.
Item
37/1
31
B 0000022852
V30D-075 RKN-1-0-01/LLS
V30D-075 RKN-1-0-01/LLS
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
7928166.00
V30D-075 RKN-1-O/f.L
1,00
7992906.00
Drossel 2,0 (M 8x8 DIN 913)

Throttle 2,0 (M 8x8 DIN 913)
1,00
7929810.00
Zsb.Regelventil L /075 - 250

(best, aus Pos. 301 - 348)
Ass.regulator L /075 - 250
(consisting of item 301 - 348)
1,00
7927275.00
Zsb.Vorsteuerv. LS V30D
Ass.regulator LS V30D
1,00
0023039614
Gehuse
Housing
1,00
0065986401
Zyl.Schr. M12x60
Screw MI 2x60
4,00
7991026.00
Sicherungsscheibe S 14
Locking washer S 14
8,00
0078454909
O- Ring 32,9x3,5
O- ring
1,00
0069372569
Verschl.-Shr. VSTI Ry4-ED

Plug screw
1,00
1/23
07.04.2011
PBNER Greiter
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/min Bestell-Nr.

Order-no.
0000022940
Qruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assembly
7928166.00
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
7927930.00
GrundausfiJhrung V30D-075
Basis design V30D-075
1,00
7927473.00
Deckel (Stellkolben) -075

Cover (con.hous.) -075
-1,00
7926270.00
Dichts.Perb. V30D- Stellk.

Seal-kit Nitr.V30D- contr.
-1,00
109
7992565.00
Zyl.Schr. M 6x 8 DIN 912-10.9

Screw M6x 8 DIN 912
-2,00
60
7928155.00
Zsb.Pafederwelle (1) -075

Ass.key shaft (1) -075
1,00
67
7991853.00
Pafeder A12x 8x 70 DIN 6885

KeyA12x 8x 70 DIN 6885
1,00
70
7927953.00
Zsl.Wiegenlager ISO -075

Ass.camplate bear.lSO -075
1,00
130
7928154.00
Gehuse (R/1-0)f.L -075

Housing (R/1-0)f.L -075
1,00
131
7928657.00
Steuerscheibe B V30D-075
Port Plate B VSO
1,00
137
7926424.00
Zsb.Fhrungsb.f.L -075,095,115
Ass.track-supp.f.L-075,095,115
1,00
160
7991703.00
Verschluschr. G 1/4 A DIN 908

Plug screw G 1/4 A DIN 908
1,00
171
7992051.00

1,00
Pos.
Item
101
B 0000022852
2/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/min S-na 0000022940

pump
iziT
12.0
bT
7928655.00
Pos.
Item
V30D-075 BKN-1-0/f.L,maxHu.So.
V30D-075 BKN-1-O/f.Lma.nm.sp.
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
0000022582
Dichts.Perb. V30D-075(1)
Seal-kit Nitr. V30D-075(1)
1,00
7990012.00
Schutzstopfen TL-4-248
Protecting cap TL-4-248
1,00
7992761.00
Kegelstopfen GPN 600 B 498

Tapered plug GPN 600 B 498
1,00
7992063.00
1,00
150
7928101.00
Zsl.Hubbegr.(max.) -075
Ass.stroke limi.(max)-075
1,00
110
7926715.00
Zsl.Ventil 30DAss.check valve V30D-
2,00
B 0000022852
3/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minS'na 0000022940

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assemb^
0000022582
Dichts.Perb. V30D-075(1) - 7928156.00

Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
182
7927807.00
Flachdichtung V30D-075
Sealing V30D-075
1,00
183
7992927.00
Simmerring 50-72-7-7,5 (Perb.)

Shaft seal 50-72-7-7,5 (Nitr.)
1,00
186
7992463.00
O- Ring ( 4,47x1,78)008- 8307

O- ring ( 4,47x1,78)008- 8307
1,00
187
7990025.00
0 - R i n g ( 7,65x1,78)011-8309
O- ring ( 7,65x1,78)011- 8309
6,00
188
7992501.00
O- Ring ( 66,34x2,62)146- 8307

O- ring ( 66,34x2,62)146- 8307
1,00
189
7990869.00
O- Ring ( 91,45x5,33)342- 8307

O- ring ( 91,45x5,33)342- 8307
1,00
190
7992052.00
Usit- Ring U 8,70x13x1

Bonded washer U 8,70x13x1
3,00
191
7991705.00

2,00
192
7992439.00
Usit- Ring U 13,70x22x1,5

Bonded washer U 13,70x22x1,5
4,00
195
7992595.00
O- Ring ( 44,05x3,53)224- 8307

O- ring ( 44,05x3,53)224- 8307
1,00
196
7992469.00

3,00
198
7991398.00
Usit-Ring U 6.70x10x1
Bonded washerU 6,70x10x1
4,00
215
7992962.00
Eolastic-Dichtg.ED R1/4 Viton

Eolastic-Seal ED R1/4 Viton
1,00
B 0000022852
4/23
07.04.2011
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
pump
12.0
Assem^
0000022582
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
225
7992862.00
O- Ring ( 11,00x2,00) 90 Shore

O- ring (11,00x2,00) 90 shore
1,00
7926270.00

1,00
B 0000022852
Dichts.Perb. V30D-075(1) - 7928156.00

5/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/min Order-no. 0000022940

Qruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
7927930.00
Grundausfhrung V30D-075
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
10
7926958.00
Zsl.Hubbegrenz.(min) -045,-075
Ass.stroke limi.(min)-045,-075
1,00
30
7927931.00
Zsb.Verstellkopf V30D-075
Ass.control head V30D-075
1,00
50
7927942.00
Zsb.Kolbentrommel V30D-075
Ass.cylinder barrel V30D-075
1,00
100
7927945.00
Zsb.Stellkolbengeh. -075
Ass.control housing -075
1,00
129
7927946.00
Deckel -075
Cover -075
1,00
132
7926919.00
Zapfenschraube -045,-075
Pin screw -045,-075
2,00
136
7926205.00
Stellkolben -075,-095
Control piston -075,-095
1,00
134
7927947.00
Deckel (Wiegenlager) V30D-075

Cover (camplate bea.) V30D-075
1,00
138
7926212.00
Federteller -075,-095
Spring disc -075,-095
1,00
140
7990674.00
Sicherungsring 90x3 DIN 472

Retaining ring 90x3 DIN 472
1,00
141
7926208.00
Druckfeder -045,-095,-140
Spring -045,-095,-140
1,00
142
7926207.00
Druckfeder -045,-095,-140
Spring -045,-095,-140
1,00
143
7927948.00
Scheibe V30D-075
Washer V30D-075
1,00
B 0000022852
6/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/min Order-no.
0000022940
Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assem^
7927930.00

Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
144
7925228.00
Druckfeder V30D-095
Spring V30D-095
1,00
145
7990023.00
Sttzring SS 40x50x2,5
Thrust ring SS 40x50x2,5
1,00
146
7991366.00

1,00
147
7991778.00
Zyl.Schr. MI0x70 DIN 912-10.9

Screw M10X70DIN912
8,00
148
7990027.00
Locking washer S 10
8,00
151
7993044.00
Typenschild (HAWE/INLINE)
Name plate (HAWE/INLINE)
1,00
152
7991946.00
Kerbnagel 2,6x6 N4 DIN 1476

Fludetspike 2,6x6 DIN 1476
6,00
157
7990226.00
Gewindestift M10x16 DIN 914

Pinscrew M10x16DIN914
2,00
158
7992597.00

1,00
159
7991848.00
Spiral-Spannstift 6x24 DIN7343

Roll pin 6x24 DIN 7343
1,00
160
7991703.00

3,00
161
7992842.00

Screw M 8x10 DIN 912
3,00
166
7992754.00
Drehrichtungsschild
Rotation indic.plate
1,00
B 0000022852
7/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Qruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
pump
7927930.00
12.0
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
170
7992575.00
Zylinderrollg. RNU F-201380

Roller bearing F 201 380 INA
1,00
171
7992051.00

1,00
172
7990005.00

Screw M 8x 40 DIN 912-10.9
4,00
173
7990008.00
Locking washer S 8
4,00
210
7991726.00
Dichtstopfen MB 800- 080

Plug MB 800- 080
1,00
B 0000022852
8/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minS?na 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 9 4 0

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
SbT
7927931.00
Pos.
Item
Zsb.Verstellkopf V30D-075
ss.control head V30D-075
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
7927932.00
Zsb.Wiege m.Lager V30D-075

Ass.camplate w.bear. V30D-075
1,00
33
7992564.00
Connex-Schwerspannstift
Connex- cocking pin SG 5x16
1,00
35
7927936.00
Zsb.Kolben V30D-075
Ass.piston V30D-075
9,00
40
7927939.00
Rckholplatte V30D-075
Return plate V30D-075
1,00
41
7927940.00
Spannsegment V30D-075
Tripping piece V30D-075
2,00
42
7927941.00
Gleitscheibe V30D-075
Sliding plate V30D-075
1,00
44
7992455.00
Sicherungsblech 6,4 DIN 463

Locking plate 6,4 DIN 463
4,00
45
7990531.00
Sechsk.Sch. M 6x 30 DIN931-8.8
Hex.head.s. M 9x 30 DIN931-8.8
4,00
B 0000022852
9/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minorder-no 0000022940

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assemb^
7927932.00
Zsb.Wiege m.Lager V30D-075

Ass.camplate w.bear. V30D-075
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
32
7927933.00
Wiege/Mitnehmer V30D-075
Camplate V30D-075
1,00
43
7927935.00
Laminum-Ausgleichs. V30D-075
Laminum shim V30D-075
2,00
92
7991929.00
Radial-Gelenklager GE 17 ES
Ball and jocket joint GE 17 ES
1,00
93
7990813.00
Sprengring SB 30
Snap ring SB 30
1,00
B 0000022852
10/23
07.04.2011
P
PEINEB Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/min S - n a 0000022940

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assembly
7927942.00
Zsb. Koibentrommel V30D-075

Ass.cylinder barrel V30D-075
Pos.
Item
Tell-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
51
7927943.00
Kolbentr.m.Buchse V30D-075
Cylinder barrel w.bus. V30D-075
1,00
54
7927944.00
Gleitscheibe (Kolbentr.) -075

Sliding plate (zyl.barr.) -075
1,00
55
7992609.00
Fhrungsstift/095- 160/03
Guide pin/095 - 160/03
2,00
B 0000022852
11/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minS'na
0000022940
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
pump
7927945.00
12.0
Zsb.Stellkolbengeh. -075
Ass.control housing -075
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
101
7927473.00
Deckel (Stellkolben) -075

Cover (con.hous.) -075
1,00
102
7990780.00
Zyl.Schr. MlOx 45 DIN 912-10.9

Screw M10X45 DIN 912
4,00
103
7990027.00
Locking washer S 10
4,00
109
7992565.00

Screw M6x 8 DIN 912
2,00
B 0000022852
12/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assenn^
7928155.00
Zsb.Pafederwelle (1) -075

Ass.keys!iaft(1) -075
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
61
7928153.00
Pafedenwelle (1) V30D-075

Key shaft (1) V30D-075
1,00
62
7992922.00
Zylinderrollg. NUP 2209 ECP

Roller bearing NUP 2210 ECP
1,00
65
7992923.00
Sprengring SW 45
Snap ring SW 45
1,00
66
7992924.00
Innenring IR 45x50x25,5 EGS

Inner race IR 45x50x25,5 EGS
1,00
B 0000022852
13/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minS'na 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 9 4 0

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
AssemS^
7927953.00
Zsl.Wiegenlager ISO -075
Ass.camplate bear.lSO -075

Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
71
7927954.00
Wiegenlager ISO -075

Camplate bearing ISO -075
1,00
72
7927955.00
Lagerschale VBK V30D-075

Bearing cup VBK V30D-075
2,00
73
7927864.00
Senkschr. M5 x 12 DIN 7991-8.8

Screw M 5x 12 DIN 7991-8.8
2,00
74
7992808.00
Zylinderstift 8m6x20 DIN 7

Cylind. pin 8m6x20 DIN 7
2,00
76
7992565.00

Screw M6x 8 DIN 912
2,00
77
7992998.00

Throttle 2,0 (M 6x6 DIN 913
1,00
160
7991703.00

1,00
B 0000022852
14/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
T
7928101.00
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
101
7926985.00
Gehuse (max) -075/-095Z

Housing (max limi.) -095
1,00
104
7992441.00
Seal-Lock-Mutter M16
Seal-Iock nut MI6
1,00
203
7928102.00
Distanzstck -075/-095Z
Spacer -075/-095
1,00
204
7993017.00
Sechsk.Sch. M16x 80 DIN933-8.8

Hex.heacl s. MI6x80 DIN933-8.8
1,00
206
7991661.00

1,00
7926270.00

1,00
B 0000022852
Zsl.Hubbegr.(max.) -075
Ass.stroke limi.(max.) -075
15/23
07.04.2011
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assembly
7926270.00

Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
106
7992709.00
Turc.GI.Ring GS55045-0340-10 N
Turc.gl.ring GS55045-0340-10 N
1,00
107
7992710.00
O- Ring ( 36,17x2,62)127- 8307

O- ring ( 36,17x2,62)127- 8307
1,00
108
7992595.00
O- Ring ( 44,05x3,53)224- 8307

O- ring ( 44,05x3,53)224- 8307
1,00
B 0000022852
16/23
07.04.2011
P.
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12,0
AssemWy
7929810.00

Ass.regulator L /075 - 250
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
301
7929808.00
Gehuse
Housing
1,00
302
7927235.00
Ventilbuchse
Valve bush
1,00
303
7924721.00
Ventilkolben
Valve piston
1,00
304
7924757.00
Federteller
Spring plate
2,00
305
7924754.00
Druckfeder
Pressure spring
1,00
308
7927224.00
Verschluschraube R%"
Screw plug
1,00
309
7921673.00
Kolben
Piston
1,00
311
7926762.00
Winkelhebel
Angle lever
1,00
312
7921596.00
Welle
Shaft
1,00
313
7991924.00
INA-Sttzrolle RSTO 5 TN
Supporting roller
1,00
315
7921018.00
Gleitschuh
Sliding block
1,00
316
7927676.00
Kolben
Piston
1,00
317
7990157.00
Verschlu-Shr. M 18x1,5 / DIN 908

Screw plug
1,00
B 0000022852
17/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
a r
7929810.00
Zsb.Regelventil L 7075 - 250

Ass.regulator L 7075 - 250
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
319
7990047.00
Zyl.Schr. M 6x25 DIN 912-10.9

Screw M 6x25 DIN 912-10.9
2,00
323
7991703.00
Verschlu-Shr. Gy4A / DIN 908

Screw plug
2,00
325
7927671.00
Einstellschraube M 8
Adjusting screw
1,00
326
7992035.00
Seal-Lock-Mutter M 8
Seal-Lock nut
1,00
329
7991875.00
DU-Buchse PAP1215 PIO

Bush DU
2,00
332
7990267.00
Zyl.-Shr. M 8x80/DIN 912-10.9

Screw
2,00
333
7990008.00
Locking washer
4,00
334
7990002.00
Zyl.-Shr. M 8x30/DIN 912-10.9

Screw
2,00
336 "U"
7992603.00
Drossel (M6x6 bei Bedarf)

Throttle (if necessary)
1,00
340
7991727.00
Dichtstopfen MB700-060
Plug
2,00
341
7992075.00
Verschlu-Shr. G 1/8A DIN 908

Screw plug
1,00
344
7926317.00
Druckfeder
Pressure spring
1,00
B 0000022852
18/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
pump
Assembly
7929810.00
12.0

Ass.regulator L 7075 - 250
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
346
7993269.00
Sieb 9x6x3
Sieve
1,00
347
7992565.00
Zyl.-Shr. M 6x8/DIN 912-10.9

Screw
1,00
348
7927815.00
Verschlu-Shr. M 10x1 DIN 910

Screw plug
1,00
0000021900
Dichts.Perb. V30D-L
(best, aus Pos. 320,324,327,328,342)
Seal-kit Nitr. V30D-L
(consisting of item 320,324,327,328,342)
B 0000022852
1,00
19/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Baugruppe
Assemby
Dichts.Perb. V30D-L
Seal-kit Nitr. V30D-L
Pos.
Itenn
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
320
7991398.00
Usit-Ring 6.07x10x1
Sealing ring 6,07x10x1
3,00
324
7992439.00
Usit- Ring 13,7x22x1,5

Sealing ring 13,7x22x1,5
2,00
327
7992469.00
Usit- Ring 27,2x36x2

1,00
328
7991488.00
Usit- Ring 18,7x26x1,5

Sealing ring 18,7x26x1,5
1,00
342
7991705.00
Usit- Ring 10,35x16x2

1,00
B 0000022852
20/23
07.04.2011
P
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minSta 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 9 4 0

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
T
7927275.00
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
7927281.00
Zsb.Geh.u.Kolben cliv.Reg.V30D
Ass.hous.a.spool cliv.con.V30D
1,00
7921129.00
Druckfecier L-Regl. V30BSpring L-contr. V30B-
1,00
7927267.00
Einstellschr. div.- Regl.VSODAdj.screw div.-cont.V30D
1,00
7927268.00
Federteller div.Regl. V30DSpring disc div.cont. V30D-
2,00
7925659.00
Verschluschr. div.Regl. V30DPlug screw div.contr.V30D-
1,00
10
7922449.00
Deckel N,P1,Q-Regler V30BCover N,P1,Q-control V30B-
1,00
11
7923782.00
Drosselnadel (div.Regl.) V30BThrottle needle V30B-
1,00
12
7991336.00
Zyl.Schr.M 5x12 DIN 912-10.9

3,00
13
7990208.00
Locking washer S 5
3,00
15
7992035.00
Seal-Lock-Mutter M 8
Seal-lock-nut M 8
1,00
18
7992174.00
Seal-Lock-Mutter M 6 phos.
Seal-lock-nut M 6 phos.
1,00
20
7927815.00
Verschluschr. MIOxl DIN910

Plug screw MIOxl DIN910
1,00
22
7991703.00

1,00
B 0000022852
21 /23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/minS": 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 9 4 0

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assembly
7927275.00
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
IVIenge
Quant.
24
7991727.00
Dichtstopfen MB 700-060
Plug MB 700- 060
1,00
25
7990257.00

4,00
26
7990048.00
Locking washer S 6
4,00
29
7992872.00

Screw M5x 6 DIN 912
1,00
30
7992893.00

Throttle 1,0 (M 5x5 DIN 913)
1,00
32
7990013.00
1,00
33
7992496.00
Gewindestift M 6x 6 DIN 913

Pin screw M 6x6 DIN 913
1,00
0000022117
Dichts.Perb. V30D- div.Reg

Seal-kit Nitr.VSOD- div.con
1,00
B 0000022852
22/23
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpe V30D-75-RKN-L-LS, 28 kW, 1450 U/min S - n a 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 9 4 0

Gruppe-Nr.
pump
Group-no.
12.0
Assim
0000022117
Pos.
Item
Teil-Nummer
Part- No.
Bezeichnung
Designation
Menge
Quant.
16
7991538.00

1,00
19
7991475.00
Q- Ring (17,17x1,78)017-19457
O- ring ( 17,17x1,78)017-19457
1,00
21
7991705.00

1,00
23
7992439.00
Usit- Ring U 13,70x22x1,5

Bonded washer U 13,70x22x1,5
1,00
27
7990025.00
Q- Ring( 7,65x1,78)011-8309
0 - r i n g ( 7,65x1,78)011-8309
4,00
28
7991991.00
Sttzring S 11 109-017
Thrust ring S 11 109-017
1,00
36
7991963.00
Usit- Ring U 5,70x 9x1

Bonded washer U 5,70x 9x1
1,00
B 0000022852
Dichts.Perb. V30D- div. Reg - 7927280.00

Seal-kit Nitr. V30D- div.con
23/23
07.04.2011
Ersatzteilliste
I M B
PEiNERGrabs
Spare partS St
Pumpenflansch mit Druckbegrenzungsventil

pump flange with pressure relief valve
B 0023039807
IZI^T
12.1
1/1
07.04.2011
OSMAG
B ^ S
FEINER Grabs
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Pumpenflansch mit Druckbegrenzungsventil S ' n a 0023039807

pump flange with pressure relief valve
ZZllo''
12.1
Benennung
Description
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
01
0023039614
Gehuse
housing
02
0069372569
Verschlu-Shr. VSTI Ry4-ED

screw plug
03
0000022793
Druckbegrenzungsventil NG 10
04
0078454909
O-Ring 32,9x3,5 / 90NBR/A

o-ring
1/1
B 0023039807
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Steuerblock
control block
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0000041440
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i Q A
1 O.U
05,06,07
23 03,04 02 20,21,22
16,17,18 14,15 23
1/3
07.04.2011
Salzqitter ftAaschinenbau
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0000041440
Steuerblock
control block
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
"fin
1O.U
05,06,07
11,12,13
08,09,10
20,21,22
02 03,04
2/3
07.04.2011
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0000041440
Steuerblock
control block
Pos.20 / item 20
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i O fl
1 0>U
Pos. 14 / item 14
3/3
07.04.2011
PEINER
Greiter
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Steuerblock AV-4298-OS, DN 20-E-DC

control block
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Sina 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 4 4 0
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
-i O f l
1 O.U
Benennung
Description
01
02
0000020484
Grundblock, kpl.
basic block, cpl.
OF-761-0-4-1
03
0000020477
Steuerplatte, kpl. (ohne Magnetspule)

control plate, cpl. (without trip coil) OF-759-0-4-1
04
0000020473
Dichtungssatz, kpl. fr Pos. 03

OF-759-0-4-4
packing set, cpl. for item 03
(best, aus Pos. 25 - 31 / consisting of item 25-31)
05
0000020463
OF-755-0-4-1
06
0000020461
Druckfeder
pressure spring
OF-755-0-4-2
07
0000020470

OF-755-0-4-3
(best, aus Pos. 32 - 35 / consisting of item 32 - 35)
08
0000020464
nonreturn valve, cpl
OF-754-0-4-1
09
0000021485
Druckfeder
pressure spring
OF-754-0-4-2
10
0000021484

OF-754-0-5-3
11
0000020485
Steuerkopf, kpl.
control head, cpl.
OF-753-0-4-1
12
0000020462
Druckfeder
pressure spring
OF-753-0-4-2
13
0000020467
OF-753-0-4-3
1 /4
B 0000041440
07.04.2011
PEiNERGreifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

control block
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
-i O
f\
1 m\J
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
14
0000020479
Wechselventil, kpl.
Shuttle valve, cpl.
15
0000021486
OF-603-0-4-2
(best, aus Pos. 43 -f 44 / consisting of item 43 + 44)
16
0008061695
berdruckventil, kpl
pop valve, cpl.
OF-337-0-4-2.1
17
0008061135
Druckfeder
pressure spring
OF-337-0-4-2.3
18
0008061139
OF-337-0-4-2.2
19
0000020481
Stopfen, kpl.
plug, cpl.
OF-761-0-4-8
20
0000020483
2/2-Wegeventil, kpl.
2/2-directional control valve, cpl,
OF-758-0-4-1
21
0000020459
Druckfeder
pressure spring
OF-758-0-4-2
22
0000020472
OF-758-0-4-3
23
1000050697
4/2-Wegeventil (mit Magnetspule - siehe Gr.-Nr. 1.0)

4/2-directional control valve (with trip coil - see groupno. 1.0)
23a
0000027131
Zyl-Shr. M 5x45 / 10.9 / DIN EN ISO 4762

25
Menge
Quantity
Sna 0000041440
Benennung
Description
OF-603-0-4-1
O-Ring 8x2
o-ring
2/4
B0000041440
07.04.2011
1 i
F' E I N E R Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

control block
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
S"na
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
0000041440
i Q A
10>U
Benennung
Description
26
O-Ring 20x2
o-ring
27
O-Ring 24x2
o-ring
28
O-Ring 25x2,5
o-ring
29
O-Ring 31,42x2,62
o-ring
30
O-Ring 34x3
o-ring
31
USIT-Ring 14x18,7x1,5
sealing ring
32
O-Ring 10x2
o-ring
33
O-Ring 25x2,5
o-ring
34
-Ring 31,42x2,62
o-ring
35
O-Ring 34x3
o-ring
36
O-Ring 25x2,5
o-ring
37
O-Ring 31,42x2,62
o-ring
38
O-Ring 34x3
o-ring
39
O-Ring 10x2
o-ring
3/4
B 0000041440
07.04.2011
^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^5
^^^^^^^
i ^ ^ M SalzgitterMaschinenbau
PEiNERGreifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
steuerblock V-4298-OS, DN 20-E-DC

control block
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
0000041440
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i Q A
1 0>U
Benennung
Description
40
O-Ring 16x2
o-ring
41
O-Ring 44x2,5
o-ring
42
Glydring
sliding ring
43
O-Ring 9x2
o-ring
44
O-Ring 13x2
o-ring
45
O-Ring 6x2
o-ring
46
O-Ring 17,12x2,62
o-ring
47
U-Seal 10,7x16x1,5
U-seal ring
48
O-Ring 25x2
o-ring
49
O-Ring 31,42x2,62
o-ring
50
O-Ring 34x3
o-ring
0000020476
S-na
Dichtungssatz, l<pl. fr Steuerblock

packing set, cpl. for control block
OF-763-0-4-4
4/4
B 0000041440
07.02.2011
2-
Kommission - Nr.
Commission - no.
Inhaltsverzeichnis
AB00001867
Contents
PEINER Greiter
Erzeugnis / Product:
Sacli-Nr. / Subject no.
2291 / 2292
MZGL 10000-3-L
S1000052928
Gerteausrstung Elektrik
electric equipment
Benennung
Schaltplan
wiring diagram
2307.9520/1 -2 D / E
Description
Bestell-Nr. /
Gruppe-Nr. /
Order-no.
Group-no.
Zugentlastung
tension relief
0023003000
15.0
Verlngerung
extension
0023079578
15.1
Kabelten, Stifte
male part, pins
0023079579
16.0
Kabelteil, Buchsen
female part, bushes
0023079550
16.0
Gerteteil, Stifte
male part, pins
0023079903
16.1
Installation Durchlauf
installation continuous duty
0023079520
40.0
Bei Ersatzteiibestellung ist auer der Bestellnummer das Erzeugnis, die Werks-Nr. und Kommissions-Nr.
anzugeben.
requisition-no.
Saizgitter Maschinenbau AG
WindmhlenbergstraBe 20-22
Telefon:
-1-49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax;
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424
E-mail:
pelner@lsmaQ.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de
Vorstand:
Jrgen Biaiek
Ulrich Deci<er

Registergericht:
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389
j nderung
PIN 36
-X4
Gepr.
EREIFER
-m
0^0-0
35
-X04
PE
400V WS
IPE
36
^jjSl
JZJ
-Y2
C3-
Urheberrecht nach DIN 3 t
QSMAG
GREIFER FFNEN Y2
GREIFER SCHLIESSEN Y l
Ersafz f r :
Peiner
Greifer
r^
S3 I 0 + ^
-Kl
230V WS
0^
-Kil
25
.25
E-
-S2
SCHALTPLAN
MOTOR-GREIFER
-KOli
E-?
-S,
-KOI
Hl
Kl
KOI
MI
Q1
S1,S2
S3
V1,V2
X1,X4
X04
Y1,Y2
14
MELDELEUCHTE
SCHTZ
HILFSSCHTZ
MOTOR-GREIFER
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER
DRUCKTASTEN
STEUERSCHALTER
GLEICHRICHTER
KLEMMEN
STECKVORRICHTUNG
MAGNETVENTILE
23079520 D
NUR ZUR INFORMATION
-Hl
-Kl
31. 1
Fbl.z
PIN 36
-X04
>-
>-
Gepr.
Peiner
Greifer
15 16 17 18 19 31 34 5 20 21 22 23 24 32 35
-H07V-K 2.5
Saligitter Haschinanbau
SMAG
7 25
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 _22_23_Z4_25^26^27 a^29_30_31 _32_33_34_35_36
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
2 36 3 10 11 12 13 14 30 33 4
^ a az
>- z
LU
UJ
>-
PE 1
-X4
Ml
KLEMMENPLAN
MOTOR-GREIFER
W PE
vT)
UjV
ID LD
-H07RN-F
co
H07RN-F
'3x1,5
Ln
H07RN-F
'3x1,5
23079520 D
NUR ZUR INFORMATION
PE
PE
Bl. z
Fbl.-
j nderung
PiN 36
Gepr.
400V AC
Ersatz durch:
-Y1,
I 04^
Ersatz f r :
Peiner
Greifer
-VI
S3
-Kl
K-^
QSMAC
-V2
OPEN GRAB Y2
CLOSE GRAB Y1
230V AC
-Kl,
25
25
E-\
-S2
WIRING DIAQRAM
MOTOR GRAB
-KOli
E-^
-Sl
-KOI
S1,S2
S3
V1,V2
X1,X4
X04
Y1,Y2
Hl
K1
KOI
MI
01
SIGNALLING LAMP
CONTACTOR
RELAY
MOTOR-GRAB
MOTOR-PROTECTION
CIRCUIT-BREAKER
PUSHBUTTONS
OPERATION SWITCH
RECTIFIERS
TERMINALS
PLUG CONNECTOR
SOLENOID VALVES
23079520 E
-Hl
-Kl
1
Fbl.z
Bl.
21.07.08
Datum
PiN 36
nderung
Name
Abh
Bearb.
l.v.G.
25.06.2002
31 34
Ersatz durch:
15 16 17 18 19
| Ersatz fr:
Peiner
Greifer
20 21 22 23 24 32 35
- H 0 7 V - K 2.5
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
25
1 Urheberrecht nach DIN 34
Salzgltter ttasctiinentjau
QSMAG
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
10 11 12 13 14 30 33
Datum
>-
z
13
36
>-
>- z
Z O
2
UJ
PE ,
^04
-X4
-m
TERMINAL PLAN
MOTOR-GRAB
IPE
>- i
m ISS
'H07RN-F
'3x1,5
^H07RN-F
23079520 E
H07RN-F
'3x1,5
Fbl.-
BL 2
09.11.2010
Salzgitter A/laschinenbau
Zugentlastung
tension relief
PBNER Grabs
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023003000
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i C
fl
1 OBU
1/1
08.04.2011
H H
PEINER Grabs
Zugentlastung
tension relief
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Sina 0 0 2 3 0 0 3 0 0 0
Gruppe-Nr.
ICA
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
01
0002304905
Schkel A 0,25 / StTZn / DIN 82101

shackle
02
0002304743
Schkel A 0,4 / StTZn / DIN 82101

shackle
03
00P0000676
Kette 3-6x18,5 - 1 0 0 0 mm
chain
04
0008012058
Kabelziehstrumpf RP 225/1000 N
cable grip
05
0001296886
Schlauchbinder WSN 9 - 470 mm

hose clamp
O.U
Benennung
Description
1/1
B 0023003000
09.12.2010
^ ^ ^ 3 Salzgitter Maschinenbau
Verlngerung
extension
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023079910
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
"i C "t
1 O 1
CO
o
CM
O
1/1
09.12.2010
^ H W ttmr^B B
m ^"^^^J
[ ^ H SalzgitterMaschinenbau
F' E I N E R
Greifer
Verlngerung 36x2,5-3,09-LW-MS
extension
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Sina
0023079578
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
"1 K -f
1 O 1
Benennung
Description
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
01
0023079579
Kabelteil BRON mit Stiften (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.0)

male part with pins (see group-no. 16.0)
02
0023079550
Kabelteil UW-SEE mit Buchsen (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.0)

female part with bushes (see group-no. 16.0)
03
0000023137
Leitung (N)SHTU(SMK)-J 44x2,5 mm^ - 7 m

electric cable
04
0023003000
Zugentlastung (s. Gruppe-Nr. 15.0)

tension relief (see group-no. 15.0)
1/1
B0023079910
09.12.2010
f ^ H f
Kabelteil
plug connection, cable part
PEiNERGreifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023002673
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
^ ti
f\
1 D.U
1/1
09.12.2010
PEINER
creiier
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Kabelteil Bron., 37pol., D26-36, Stifte

male part, pins
Sna
0023079579
Qruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
01
0006172310
Stecker 309 020 000 554

plug
02
0000022868
Stifteinsatz 37pol. / 309 803 160 037 151

male insert
03
0000023644
37
04
0006171808
Schutzring 309 001 151 721

protective ring
05
0091044000
Reduktion H PG42-PG36
reduction
06
0006194799
Verschraubung-Zugentiastung PG 36
tension relief for gland
07
-i
fl
I
O.U
Benennung
Description
Schrumpfschlauch CPX50 5x25

shrink hose
entfllt
omitted
08
0006171802
threaded ring
09
0006171809
Zwischenscheibe 802-0106
intermediate washer
14
0006165984
Schlssel 309 098 000 719

key
15
0006172313
Deckel 309 097 001 554

cover
1/1
B 0023002673
09.12.2010
Kabelteil UW-SEE
plug connection, cable part
PEINER Grabs
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 0023079995
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
i fl
1 O.U
1/1
09.12.2010
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Kabelteil UW-SEE, 37pol., 27A, D 32-40, Buchsen

female part, bushes
0023079550
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
01
0000022939
Kabelteilgehuse 309 223 000 554

female part housing
02
0000022867
Buchseneinsatz 309 703 160 037 000, 37polig

female insert
03
0000023644
04
0006172249
Menge
Quantity
37
16.0
Benennung
Description
Schrumpfschlauch CPX50 5x25

shrink hose
Isolierrohr 021 326 114 911
insulating tube
05
entfllt
omitted
08
0006194727
Dichtring PG 42, 8042000

sealing ring
09
0091133042
Mutter PG 42
nut
10
0006194848
Halbverschraubung-Zugentlastung PG 36
cable gland
11
0006172264
Deckel 309 097 004 926

cover
12
0006165984
Schlssel 309 098 000 719

key
14
0023000502
Scheibe
disc
14.0
0023039739
Scheibe
disc
13
1/2
B 0023079995
09.12.2010
MAG
PEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Kabelteil UW-SEE, 37poi., 27A, D 32-40, Buchsen

female part, bushes
Pos,
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
15
0023000503
23
0006172248
Schraubensatz
set of screw
24
0006172247
Sprengring
snap ring
25
0006172273
Kette 802-6602
chain
26
0006172246
Ring 802-6102
ring
27
0008014726
O.Ring 80x6
o-ring
28
0006171802
threaded ring
S"na
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
0023079550
16.0
Benennung
Description
Reduktion PG 42-36
reduction
2/2
B 0023079995
09.12.2010
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gerteteil UW-SEE
B 0023079944
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
-4 C 'i
I
O.l
12
1/1
09.12.2010
^ ^ ^ M SalzgitterMaschinenbau
FEINER Greifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

male part, pins
Pos.
Item
oSna 0 0 2 3 0 7 9 9 0 3
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
Hl C (
1 O.l
Benennung
Description
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
03
0000023644
37
12
0006165984
Scliissel 309 098 000 719

mounting l<ey
16
0006172240
Gerteteiigeliuse 309 013 000 554

male part
17
0000022868
Stifteinsatz 309 803 160 037 151, 37polig

male insert
19
0006171808
Schutzring 309 001 151 721

protective ring
20
0006171801
intermediate ring
21
0074731980
O-Ring 80x3 / 70 NBR/769

o-ring
22
0006172265
Deckel 309 097 005 926

cover
23
0006172248
Schraubensatz 100 000 000 12

set of screw
01
02
Schrumpfschlaucil CPX 50 5x25
shrinl< liose
18
1/2
B 0023079944
09.12.2010
^ ^ ^ M SalzgitterMaschinenbau
PEiNERGreifer
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

male part, pins
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
oSna 0023079903
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
"i
1 Oil
Benennung
Description
24
0006172273
Kette 021 338 020 902

chain
27
0008014726
O-Ring 80x6 / 70 NBR/769

o-ring
28
0006171802
threaded ring
25
26
2/2
B 0023079944
09.12.2010
OSMAG
FEINER Greifer
Installation Durchlauf LH 8 2V
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
S?na
0023079520
Group-no.
40.0
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
Menge
Quantity
Benennung
Description
01
0023079903
05
0000019172
Montageplatte F CP300 53/A42 / 9823007000

mounting plate
06
0006222179
Tragschiene 220 mm /1201280

mounting rail
08
0000019854
Klemme UK35/3008012
terminal
09
0091321200
Schutzleiterklemme 9700 / 12E Z2 303 5421

protective conductor terminal
10
0000019853
Klemme UK5N / 3004362

terminal
11
0060000551
Schutzleiterklemme USLKG5 / 0441504

protective conductor terminal
12
0060000552
Endplatte D-UK 4/10 / 3003020

terminal cover
13
0099058005
Endklemme E/UK/1201442
end terminal
16
0000030133
Gertesteckdose mit Gleichrichter und 2 m Leitung

socket with rectifier and 2 m electric cable
17
0090017100
Leitung H07V-K 1X2,5 - 1 5 m

electric cable
Gerteteil UW-SEE 37pol., 27A, Stifte

(s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.1)
male part (see group-no. 16.1)
07
1/2
B
09.12.2010
PEiNERGreifer
Sfna- 0023079520
Installation Durchlauf LH 8 2V
Pos.
Item
Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.
IVIenge
Quantity
18
0090017108
Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
/IA
HXJ.XJ
Benennung
Description
Leitung H07V-K 1 G 2 , 5 - 1 m
electric cable
2/2
B

Owner Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

No.

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Hartmann & Knig

Telefon: 07255 / 7120-0

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Assembly of the Drum.......................................................................................................3

Drum Body Dimensions ....................................................................................................3

Observance at Spiral Type Drum Body ............................................................................3

Connection of the Main Power Cable ...............................................................................4

Connection of the Payout Cable.......................................................................................4

Checks before Commissioning ........................................................................................4

b.) Hydraulic Motor .................................................................................................................5

Liability for Faults..............................................................................................................6

Spare Parts List .................................................................................................................6

Spare Parts Drawing..........................................................................................................9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Assembly of the Drum

Drum Body Dimensions

Observance at Spiral Type Drum Body

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Connection of the Main Power Cable

Connection of the Payout Cable

Checks before Commissioning

check cable glands for proper sealing

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

b.) Hydraulic Motor

See maintenance instruction B+E 00 051.

c.) Bevel Gearbox

See maintenance instruction B+E 00 060.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Liability for Faults

10.0 Spare Parts List

drum body 1470 x 2600 x 33

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

Item Drawing-/article-no. Description

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List

11.0 Spare Parts Drawing

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

General Security Advices

all work is to be accomplished carefully and under the aspect of "security".

Hartmann & Knig

maximum tightening torque per screw (with =0.1)

Table 6.1: Maximum tightening torque of the clamping screws

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf